HK1232961B - Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, device manufacturing method, laser light source device, beam scanning device, and beam scanning method - Google Patents
Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, device manufacturing method, laser light source device, beam scanning device, and beam scanning method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- HK1232961B HK1232961B HK17106654.5A HK17106654A HK1232961B HK 1232961 B HK1232961 B HK 1232961B HK 17106654 A HK17106654 A HK 17106654A HK 1232961 B HK1232961 B HK 1232961B
- Authority
- HK
- Hong Kong
- Prior art keywords
- light
- scanning
- light beam
- optical element
- type
- Prior art date
Links
Description
技术领域Technical Field
本发明涉及使照射在被照射体上的光束的点光进行扫描的光束扫描装置及光束扫描方法、使点光进行扫描而在被照射体上描绘出规定图案的图案描绘装置及图案描绘方法、使用了该图案描绘方法的器件制造方法、和图案描绘装置及光束扫描装置中使用的激光光源装置。The present invention relates to a beam scanning device and a beam scanning method for scanning a point light of a light beam irradiated on an irradiated object, a pattern drawing device and a pattern drawing method for scanning a point light to draw a predetermined pattern on the irradiated object, a device manufacturing method using the pattern drawing method, and a laser light source device used in the pattern drawing device and the beam scanning device.
背景技术Background Art
如日本特开昭61-134724号公报及日本特开2001-133710号公报公开那样,已知有如下激光照射装置、激光描绘装置:通过半反射镜将来自一个激光振荡器(激光束光源)的激光束分割为二,使分割得到的激光束各自向两个多面镜(polygon mirror)(旋转多面镜)入射,由此使两束激光束在被描绘体上进行扫描。另外,在日本特开2001-133710号公报中也公开了通过使向两个多面镜入射的分割得到的两束激光束各自通过AOM(声光调制元件)而被调制,其中该AOM响应描绘数据而接通/断开(On/Off)。As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 61-134724 and 2001-133710, there are known laser irradiation devices and laser drawing devices that split a laser beam from a single laser oscillator (laser beam source) into two by a half-mirror, and then cause each of the split laser beams to enter two polygon mirrors (rotating polygon mirrors), thereby causing the two laser beams to scan the drawing object. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-133710 also discloses a method in which the two split laser beams incident on the two polygon mirrors are modulated by passing each of the split laser beams through an AOM (acousto-optic modulator), where the AOM is turned on/off in response to drawing data.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
但是,在基于多面镜进行的光束扫描中,根据多面镜的反射面数、多面镜之后的光学系统(fθ透镜等)的入射条件等,而具有在多面镜的旋转中存在无法将入射的激光束朝向被描绘体有效地反射的期间的情况。因此,即使如以往那样通过半反射镜将激光束分割为二并使其入射到两个多面镜,有时也存在无法将激光束有效地照射于被描绘体的期间、即非描绘期间,从而无法有效地利用来自光源的激光束。However, in beam scanning using a polygon mirror, there are periods during the polygon mirror's rotation during which the incident laser beam cannot be effectively reflected toward the object being drawn, depending on the number of reflective surfaces of the polygon mirror, the incident conditions of the optical system (e.g., the fθ lens) after the polygon mirror, and other factors. Therefore, even if the laser beam is split into two by a half-mirror and incident on two polygon mirrors as is conventionally done, there are periods during which the laser beam cannot be effectively irradiated onto the object being drawn, i.e., non-drawing periods, and the laser beam from the light source cannot be effectively utilized.
本发明的第1方案为一种图案描绘装置,通过激光的扫描点在被照射体上描绘出规定的图案,具备:光源装置,其射出上述激光;多个描绘单元,其用于入射上述激光来生成上述扫描点,包含用上述激光进行扫描的光扫描部件和光学透镜系统,并设置成使上述扫描点在上述被照射体上的不同区域进行扫描;和多个选择用光学元件,其为了对是否使来自上述光源装置的上述激光向上述多个描绘单元中的被选择的上述描绘单元入射进行切换,而沿着来自上述光源装置的上述激光的行进方向直列地配置。The first embodiment of the present invention is a pattern drawing device that draws a specified pattern on an irradiated object by scanning points of a laser, and comprises: a light source device that emits the above-mentioned laser; a plurality of drawing units that are used to generate the above-mentioned scanning points by incidenting the above-mentioned laser, and include a light scanning component and an optical lens system for scanning with the above-mentioned laser, and are configured to scan the above-mentioned scanning points on different areas on the above-mentioned irradiated object; and a plurality of selection optical elements that are arranged in series along the direction of travel of the above-mentioned laser from the above-mentioned light source device in order to switch whether the above-mentioned laser from the above-mentioned light source device is incident on the selected above-mentioned drawing unit among the above-mentioned multiple drawing units.
本发明的第2方案为一种图案描绘装置,通过激光的扫描点在被照射体上描绘出规定的图案,具备:光源装置,其射出上述激光;多个描绘单元,其为了入射上述激光来生成上述扫描点,而包含用上述激光进行扫描的光扫描部件和光学透镜系统,并设置成上述扫描点在上述被照射体上的不同区域进行扫描;多个选择用光学元件,其为了使来自上述光源装置的上述激光选择性地向上述多个描绘单元入射,而沿着来自上述光源装置的上述激光的行进方向直列地配置;和描绘用光调制器,其基于对要由上述扫描点在上述被照射体上描绘的图案进行规定的上述多个描绘单元各自的描绘数据,来调制向上述多个选择用光学元件入射的上述激光的强度。The second embodiment of the present invention is a pattern drawing device that draws a prescribed pattern on an irradiated object by means of scanning points of a laser, and comprises: a light source device that emits the laser; a plurality of drawing units that include a light scanning component and an optical lens system for scanning with the laser in order to generate the scanning points by incident on the laser, and are arranged so that the scanning points scan different areas on the irradiated object; a plurality of selection optical elements that are arranged in series along the direction of travel of the laser from the light source device in order to selectively allow the laser from the light source device to be incident on the plurality of drawing units; and a drawing light modulator that modulates the intensity of the laser incident on the plurality of selection optical elements based on the drawing data of each of the plurality of drawing units that specify the pattern to be drawn on the irradiated object by the scanning points.
本发明的第3方案具备:脉冲光源装置,其产生能够调整振荡周期的脉冲状的光束;第1描绘单元,其将来自上述脉冲光源装置的光束作为点光投射到被照射体上,并且以使该点光向上述被照射体的投射期间和非投射期间按规定的周期反复的方式使上述光束偏转,在上述投射期间内使上述点光沿着上述被照射体上的第1描绘线进行扫描;第2描绘单元,其将来自上述脉冲光源装置的光束作为点光投射到上述被照射体上,并且以使上述投射期间和上述非投射期间按规定的周期反复的方式使上述光束偏转,在上述投射期间内使上述点光沿着与上述第1描绘线不同的上述被照射体上的第2 描绘线进行扫描;第1控制系统,其同步控制上述第1描绘单元和上述第2描绘单元,使得上述第1描绘单元的上述投射期间与上述第2描绘单元的上述非投射期间对应,上述第2描绘单元的上述投射期间与上述第1描绘单元的上述非投射期间对应;和第2控制系统,其控制上述脉冲光源装置,使得在上述第1描绘单元中的上述投射期间内,基于要由上述第1描绘线描绘的图案的第1描绘信息来控制上述光束的振荡,在上述第2描绘单元的上述投射期间内,基于要由上述第2描绘线描绘的图案的第2描绘信息来控制上述光束的振荡。The third scheme of the present invention comprises: a pulse light source device, which generates a pulsed light beam with an adjustable oscillation period; a first drawing unit, which projects the light beam from the above-mentioned pulse light source device as a point light onto the irradiated object, and deflects the above-mentioned light beam in a manner that repeats a prescribed period during the projection period and the non-projection period of the point light onto the above-mentioned irradiated object, and scans the above-mentioned point light along a first drawing line on the above-mentioned irradiated object during the above-mentioned projection period; and a second drawing unit, which projects the light beam from the above-mentioned pulse light source device as a point light onto the above-mentioned irradiated object, and deflects the above-mentioned light beam in a manner that repeats a prescribed period during the projection period and the non-projection period, and scans the above-mentioned point light along a second drawing line on the above-mentioned irradiated object different from the above-mentioned first drawing line during the above-mentioned projection period. The drawing line is scanned; a first control system, which synchronously controls the first drawing unit and the second drawing unit so that the projection period of the first drawing unit corresponds to the non-projection period of the second drawing unit, and the projection period of the second drawing unit corresponds to the non-projection period of the first drawing unit; and a second control system, which controls the pulse light source device so that during the projection period in the first drawing unit, the oscillation of the light beam is controlled based on the first drawing information of the pattern to be drawn by the first drawing line, and during the projection period in the second drawing unit, the oscillation of the light beam is controlled based on the second drawing information of the pattern to be drawn by the second drawing line.
本发明的第4方案为一种图案描绘装置,一边根据描绘数据对会聚在被照射体上的紫外激光的点光进行强度调制,一边使上述点光和上述被照射体进行相对扫描,由此在上述被照射体上描绘出图案,具备:激光光源装置,其包含产生作为上述紫外激光的来源的种光的光源部、入射上述种光并将其放大的光放大器、和从放大后的上述种光生成上述紫外激光的波长转换光学元件;和描绘用调制装置,其为了对上述点光进行强度调制,而根据上述描绘数据来调制从上述光源部产生的上述种光的强度。The fourth scheme of the present invention is a pattern drawing device, which modulates the intensity of the point light of the ultraviolet laser converged on the irradiated object according to the drawing data, and scans the above-mentioned point light and the above-mentioned irradiated object relative to each other, thereby drawing a pattern on the above-mentioned irradiated object, comprising: a laser light source device, which includes a light source unit that generates seed light as the source of the above-mentioned ultraviolet laser, an optical amplifier that receives the above-mentioned seed light and amplifies it, and a wavelength conversion optical element that generates the above-mentioned ultraviolet laser from the amplified above-mentioned seed light; and a drawing modulation device, which modulates the intensity of the above-mentioned seed light generated from the above-mentioned light source unit according to the above-mentioned drawing data in order to modulate the intensity of the above-mentioned point light.
本发明的第5方案为一种图案描绘方法,一边根据描绘数据对会聚在被照射体上的紫外激光的点光进行强度调制,一边使上述点光和上述被照射体进行相对扫描,由此在上述被照射体上描绘出图案,包含:转换工序,通过光放大器将作为上述紫外激光的来源的种光放大,并通过波长转换光学元件将放大后的上述种光转换成上述紫外激光;和调制工序,为了对上述点光进行强度调制,而根据上述描绘数据来调制向上述光放大器入射的上述种光的强度。The fifth scheme of the present invention is a pattern drawing method, which modulates the intensity of the point light of the ultraviolet laser converged on the irradiated object according to the drawing data, and scans the above-mentioned point light and the above-mentioned irradiated object relative to each other, thereby drawing a pattern on the above-mentioned irradiated object, including: a conversion step, amplifying the seed light serving as the source of the above-mentioned ultraviolet laser by an optical amplifier, and converting the amplified above-mentioned seed light into the above-mentioned ultraviolet laser by a wavelength conversion optical element; and a modulation step, in order to modulate the intensity of the above-mentioned point light, modulating the intensity of the above-mentioned seed light incident to the above-mentioned optical amplifier according to the above-mentioned drawing data.
本发明的第6方案为一种器件制造方法,包含:一边使作为上述被照射体而准备的光感应性的基板沿第1方向移动,一边通过上述第5方案的图案描绘方法在上述基板的光感应层上描绘器件用图案;和根据上述光感应层的上述点光的照射部分与非照射部分的不同,选择性地形成规定的图案材料。The sixth embodiment of the present invention is a device manufacturing method, comprising: while moving a photosensitive substrate prepared as the above-mentioned irradiated body along the first direction, drawing a device pattern on the photosensitive layer of the above-mentioned substrate by the pattern drawing method of the above-mentioned fifth embodiment; and selectively forming a specified pattern material according to the difference between the irradiated part and the non-irradiated part of the above-mentioned point light of the above-mentioned photosensitive layer.
本发明的第7方案为一种激光光源装置,与通过会聚在被照射体上的点光来描绘出图案的装置连接,且射出成为上述点光的光束,具备:第1半导体光源,其响应于规定周期的时钟脉冲,产生发光时间相对于上述规定周期短且峰值强度高的急剧升降的第1脉冲光;第2半导体光源,其响应于上述时钟脉冲,产生发光时间比上述规定周期短且比上述第1脉冲光的发光时间长、峰值强度低的宽广的第2脉冲光;光纤光放大器,其入射上述第1脉冲光或上述第2脉冲光;和切换部件,其基于要描绘的图案信息的输入,进行光学切换,以在上述点光向上述被照射体上投射时,使上述第1脉冲光向上述光纤光放大器入射,在上述点光不向上述被照射体上投射时,使上述第2脉冲光向上述光纤光放大器入射。The seventh scheme of the present invention is a laser light source device, which is connected to a device that draws a pattern by converging point light on an irradiated object, and emits a light beam that becomes the above-mentioned point light, comprising: a first semiconductor light source, which responds to a clock pulse of a specified period to generate a first pulse light with a luminous time that is short relative to the above-mentioned specified period and a high peak intensity, which rises and falls sharply; a second semiconductor light source, which responds to the above-mentioned clock pulse to generate a wide second pulse light with a luminous time that is shorter than the above-mentioned specified period and longer than the luminous time of the above-mentioned first pulse light and a low peak intensity; an optical fiber amplifier, which is incident with the above-mentioned first pulse light or the above-mentioned second pulse light; and a switching component, which performs optical switching based on the input of pattern information to be drawn, so that the above-mentioned first pulse light is incident on the above-mentioned optical fiber amplifier when the above-mentioned point light is projected onto the above-mentioned irradiated object, and the above-mentioned second pulse light is incident on the above-mentioned optical fiber amplifier when the above-mentioned point light is not projected onto the above-mentioned irradiated object.
本发明的第8方案为一种光束扫描装置,以规定的位置关系配置有多个扫描单元,该扫描单元具备使来自光源装置的光束反复偏转的旋转多面镜、和入射偏转了的上述光束并使其会聚成在被照射体上进行一维扫描的点光的投射光学系统,所述光束扫描装置具备:光束切换部件,其以使来自上述光源装置的上述光束向多个上述扫描单元中的进行上述点光的一维扫描的一个上述扫描单元入射的方式,切换上述光束的光路;和光束切换控制部,其控制上述光束切换部件,使得基于上述扫描单元的上述旋转多面镜实现的上述光束的偏转按上述旋转多面镜的每隔至少一个的反射面反复进行,使多个上述扫描单元各自按顺序进行上述点光的一维扫描。The eighth scheme of the present invention is a light beam scanning device, which is provided with a plurality of scanning units in a prescribed positional relationship, the scanning unit comprising a rotating polygonal mirror for repeatedly deflecting a light beam from a light source device, and a projection optical system for incidenting the deflected light beam and converging the light beam into a point light for performing one-dimensional scanning on an irradiated object, the light beam scanning device comprising: a light beam switching component for switching the optical path of the light beam in such a manner that the light beam from the light source device is incident on one of the plurality of scanning units that performs one-dimensional scanning of the point light; and a light beam switching control unit for controlling the light beam switching component so that the deflection of the light beam achieved by the rotating polygonal mirror of the scanning unit is repeated at every at least one reflecting surface of the rotating polygonal mirror, so that each of the plurality of scanning units performs one-dimensional scanning of the point light in sequence.
本发明的第9方案为一种光束扫描装置,具有多个以规定的位置关系配置有多个扫描单元的扫描模块,该扫描单元具有为了使来自光源装置的光束反复偏转而以一定的旋转速度旋转的旋转多面镜、和入射偏转了的上述光束并将其会聚成在被照射体上进行一维扫描的点光的投射光学系统,所述光束扫描装置具备:光束切换部件,其以使来自上述光源装置的上述光束向多个上述扫描单元中的进行上述点光的一维扫描的上述扫描单元入射的方式,切换上述光束的光路;和光束切换控制部,其控制上述光束切换部件,使得基于各上述扫描单元的上述旋转多面镜实现的上述光束的偏转切换成按上述旋转多面镜的连续的每个反射面反复进行的第1状态和按上述旋转多面镜的每隔至少一个的反射面反复进行的第2状态中的某一方,使多个上述扫描单元各自按顺序进行上述点光的一维扫描。The ninth scheme of the present invention is a light beam scanning device, comprising a plurality of scanning modules each having a plurality of scanning units arranged in a prescribed positional relationship, the scanning unit comprising a rotating polygonal mirror that rotates at a certain rotational speed in order to repeatedly deflect a light beam from a light source device, and a projection optical system that incidents the deflected light beam and converges the incident deflected light beam into a point light for one-dimensional scanning on an irradiated object, the light beam scanning device comprising: a light beam switching component that switches the optical path of the light beam in such a manner that the light beam from the light source device is incident on the scanning unit among the plurality of scanning units that performs one-dimensional scanning of the point light; and a light beam switching control unit that controls the light beam switching component so that the deflection of the light beam achieved by the rotating polygonal mirror of each of the scanning units is switched to either a first state that is repeated on each continuous reflection surface of the rotating polygonal mirror or a second state that is repeated on at least one reflection surface of the rotating polygonal mirror, so that each of the plurality of scanning units performs one-dimensional scanning of the point light in sequence.
本发明的第10方案为一种光束扫描方法,以规定的位置关系配置有多个扫描单元,对被照射体进行光束扫描,该扫描单元具备供由旋转多面镜反复偏转的光束入射且将其会聚成在被照射体上进行一维扫描的点光的投射光学系统,所述光束扫描方法包含:以使上述多个扫描单元各自的上述旋转多面镜的旋转角度位置彼此成为规定的相位关系的方式使多个上述旋转多面镜同步旋转;和为了使基于多个上述扫描单元各自进行的上述点光的一维扫描按顺序进行,而以使基于上述旋转多面镜实现的上述光束的偏转按上述旋转多面镜的每隔至少一个的反射面反复进行的方式,切换上述光束入射的上述扫描单元。The tenth scheme of the present invention is a light beam scanning method, in which a plurality of scanning units are arranged in a prescribed positional relationship to perform light beam scanning on an irradiated object, the scanning unit having a projection optical system for incident light beams repeatedly deflected by a rotating polygonal mirror and converging the light beams into point light for one-dimensional scanning on the irradiated object, the light beam scanning method comprising: synchronously rotating the plurality of rotating polygonal mirrors in such a manner that the rotation angle positions of the respective rotating polygonal mirrors of the plurality of scanning units are in a prescribed phase relationship with each other; and switching the scanning unit on which the light beam is incident in such a manner that the one-dimensional scanning of the point light performed by each of the plurality of scanning units is performed sequentially and the deflection of the light beam realized by the rotating polygonal mirror is repeatedly performed for at least one reflecting surface of the rotating polygonal mirror.
本发明的第11方案为一种光束扫描方法,通过以规定的位置关系配置有多个扫描单元的光束扫描装置对被照射体进行光束扫描,该多个扫描单元具备供通过以一定的旋转速度旋转的旋转多面镜而反复偏转的光束入射并使其会聚成在被照射体上进行一维扫描的点光的投射光学系统,所述光束扫描方法包含:以使上述多个扫描单元各自的上述旋转多面镜的旋转角度位置彼此成为规定的相位关系的方式使多个上述旋转多面镜同步旋转;第1扫描工序,以使基于上述旋转多面镜实现的上述光束的偏转按上述旋转多面镜的连续的每个反射面反复进行的方式,切换上述光束入射的上述扫描单元,由此多个上述扫描单元各自按顺序进行上述点光的一维扫描;第2 扫描工序,以使基于上述旋转多面镜实现的上述光束的偏转按上述旋转多面镜的每隔至少一个的反射面反复进行的方式,切换上述光束入射的上述扫描单元,由此多个上述扫描单元各自按顺序进行上述点光的一维扫描;切换工序,切换上述第1扫描工序和上述第2 扫描工序。The eleventh embodiment of the present invention is a light beam scanning method, in which a light beam is scanned on an irradiated object by a light beam scanning device having a plurality of scanning units arranged in a predetermined positional relationship, the plurality of scanning units having a projection optical system for incident light beams repeatedly deflected by a rotating polygonal mirror rotating at a certain rotational speed and converging the light beams into point lights for one-dimensional scanning on the irradiated object, the light beam scanning method comprising: synchronously rotating the plurality of rotating polygonal mirrors in such a manner that the rotational angle positions of the respective rotating polygonal mirrors of the plurality of scanning units are in a predetermined phase relationship with each other; a first scanning step, switching the scanning units on which the light beams are incident in such a manner that the deflection of the light beams achieved by the rotating polygonal mirrors is repeatedly performed on each successive reflecting surface of the rotating polygonal mirror, whereby the plurality of scanning units each perform one-dimensional scanning of the point lights in sequence; a second scanning step A scanning process is to switch the scanning unit on which the light beam is incident so that the deflection of the light beam achieved by the rotating polygonal mirror is repeated at every at least one reflecting surface of the rotating polygonal mirror, thereby each of the plurality of scanning units sequentially performs one-dimensional scanning of the point light; a switching process is to switch the first scanning process and the second scanning process.
本发明的第12方案为一种图案描绘方法,使用了描绘装置,该描绘装置将使来自光源装置的光束的点光沿着描绘线进行主扫描的多个扫描单元配置成根据各描绘线描绘的图案在基板上沿上述描绘线的主扫描方向接合,使上述多个扫描单元和上述基板在与上述主扫描方向交叉的副扫描方向上相对移动,所述图案描绘方法包含:在上述多个扫描单元中,选定与上述基板在上述主扫描方向上的宽度、或者上述基板上的要描绘图案的曝光区域的在上述主扫描方向上的宽度或位置对应的特定的扫描单元;和基于要由上述特定的扫描单元各自描绘的图案数据对上述光束进行强度调制后,经由发送来自上述光源装置的上述光束的光束配送单元,择一地向上述特定的扫描单元各自依次供给。The twelfth scheme of the present invention is a pattern drawing method, which uses a drawing device, which arranges a plurality of scanning units that cause the point light of the light beam from the light source device to perform main scanning along the drawing line to be joined on the substrate along the main scanning direction of the above-mentioned drawing line according to the pattern drawn by each drawing line, so that the above-mentioned plurality of scanning units and the above-mentioned substrate are relatively moved in a sub-scanning direction intersecting with the above-mentioned main scanning direction. The pattern drawing method includes: selecting a specific scanning unit among the above-mentioned plurality of scanning units corresponding to the width of the above-mentioned substrate in the above-mentioned main scanning direction, or the width or position of the exposure area of the above-mentioned substrate to be drawn in the above-mentioned main scanning direction; and after modulating the intensity of the above-mentioned light beam based on the pattern data to be drawn by each of the above-mentioned specific scanning units, selectively supplying it to each of the above-mentioned specific scanning units in sequence via a beam distribution unit that sends the above-mentioned light beam from the above-mentioned light source device.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1是表示第1实施方式的包含对基板实施曝光处理的曝光装置的器件制造系统的概略结构的图。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a device manufacturing system including an exposure apparatus for performing an exposure process on a substrate according to a first embodiment.
图2是表示支承图1所示的描绘头及旋转筒的支承架的图。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a support frame that supports the drawing head and the rotating drum shown in FIG. 1 .
图3是表示图1的描绘头的结构的图。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the structure of the drawing head of FIG. 1 .
图4是图3所示的光导入光学系统的详细结构图。FIG. 4 is a detailed structural diagram of the light introducing optical system shown in FIG. 3 .
图5是表示通过图3所示的各扫描单元扫描点光得到的描绘线的图。FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a drawing line obtained by scanning a spot light by each scanning unit shown in FIG. 3 .
图6是表示图3所示的各扫描单元的多面镜与描绘线的扫描方向之间的关系的图。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the polygon mirrors of the scanning units shown in FIG. 3 and the scanning direction of the drawing line.
图7是用于说明图3所示的多面镜的反射面能够使激光偏转(反射)以使其入射到f-θ透镜的多面镜的旋转角度的图。FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the rotation angle of the polygon mirror shown in FIG. 3 so that the reflecting surface of the polygon mirror can deflect (reflect) the laser light so as to be incident on the f-θ lens.
图8是将图3所示的光导入光学系统与多个扫描单元之间的光路示意化得到的图。FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically illustrating an optical path between the light introducing optical system and a plurality of scanning units shown in FIG. 3 .
图9是表示上述第1实施方式的变形例中的描绘头的结构的图。FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of an image drawing head in a modified example of the first embodiment.
图10是图9所示的光导入光学系统的详细结构图。FIG10 is a detailed structural diagram of the light introducing optical system shown in FIG9.
图11是表示第2实施方式的描绘头的结构的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the structure of an image drawing head according to a second embodiment.
图12是表示图11所示的光导入光学系统的图。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the light introducing optical system shown in FIG. 11 .
图13是将图12所示的光导入光学系统与多个扫描单元之间的光路示意化得到的图。FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically illustrating an optical path between the light introducing optical system shown in FIG. 12 and a plurality of scanning units.
图14是表示图13所示的多个扫描单元的各多面镜的旋转驱动用的控制电路例的框图。FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit for rotationally driving each polygon mirror of the plurality of scanning units shown in FIG. 13 .
图15是表示图14所示的控制电路的动作例的时序图。FIG15 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the control circuit shown in FIG14 .
图16是表示生成向图11~图13所示的描绘用光学元件供给的描绘位(bit)串数据的电路例的框图。FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit for generating drawing bit string data to be supplied to the drawing optical element shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 13 .
图17是表示第2实施方式的变形例中的光源装置的结构的图。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of a light source device according to a modified example of the second embodiment.
图18是表示第3实施方式的描绘控制用的控制单元的结构的框图。FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control unit for drawing control according to the third embodiment.
图19是表示图18的控制单元在描绘图案时的各部分的信号状态和激光的振荡状态的时间图。FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing signal states of various parts of the control unit of FIG. 18 and an oscillation state of laser light when the control unit draws a pattern.
图20是表示由图17的光源装置的控制电路生成的脉冲光振荡用的时钟信号的时间图。FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing a clock signal for pulse light oscillation generated by the control circuit of the light source device of FIG. 17 .
图21是说明为了修正描绘倍率而对图20的时钟信号进行修正的情形的时间图。FIG. 21 is a timing chart illustrating how the clock signal in FIG. 20 is corrected in order to correct the drawing magnification.
图22是说明一条描绘线(扫描线)中的描绘倍率的修正法的图。FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a method of correcting the drawing magnification in one drawing line (scanning line).
图23是表示第4实施方式的包含对基板实施曝光处理的曝光装置的器件制造系统的概略结构的图。FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a device manufacturing system including an exposure apparatus for performing an exposure process on a substrate according to a fourth embodiment.
图24是卷绕有基板的图23的旋转筒的详细图。FIG. 24 is a detailed view of the rotating drum of FIG. 23 on which the substrate is wound.
图25是表示点光的描绘线及形成在基板上的对准标记的图。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a drawing line of spot light and an alignment mark formed on a substrate.
图26是光束切换部件的结构图。FIG26 is a structural diagram of a beam switching component.
图27A是从+Z方向侧观察基于选择用光学元件进行的光束的光路切换的图,图27B是从-Y方向侧观察基于选择用光学元件进行的光束的光路切换的图。27A is a diagram showing the switching of the optical paths of light beams by the selection optical element as viewed from the +Z direction side, and FIG. 27B is a diagram showing the switching of the optical paths of light beams by the selection optical element as viewed from the −Y direction side.
图28是表示扫描单元的光学结构的图。FIG28 is a diagram showing the optical structure of the scanning unit.
图29是表示设在图28的多面镜周边的原点传感器的结构的图。FIG29 is a diagram showing the structure of an origin sensor provided around the polygon mirror of FIG28.
图30是表示原点信号的产生定时与描绘开始定时的关系的时间图。FIG30 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the generation timing of the origin signal and the drawing start timing.
图31是用于生成将原点信号间除而使其产生定时延迟了规定时间的副原点信号的副原点生成电路的结构图。FIG31 is a block diagram of a sub-origin generating circuit for generating a sub-origin signal whose generation timing is delayed by a predetermined time by thinning out the origin signal.
图32是表示由图31的副原点生成电路生成的副原点信号的时间图。FIG32 is a timing chart showing a sub-origin signal generated by the sub-origin generating circuit of FIG31 .
图33是表示曝光装置的电气结构的框图。FIG33 is a block diagram showing the electrical structure of the exposure device.
图34是表示输出原点信号、副原点信号及串行数据的定时的时间图。FIG34 is a timing chart showing the timing of outputting the origin signal, the sub-origin signal, and the serial data.
图35是表示图33所示的描绘数据输出控制部的结构的图。FIG35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the drawing data output control unit shown in FIG33 .
图36是第5实施方式的光束切换部件的结构图。FIG36 is a structural diagram of a light beam switching component according to the fifth embodiment.
图37是表示图36的配置切换部件的位置为第1位置时的光路的图。FIG37 is a diagram showing an optical path when the position of the configuration switching member in FIG36 is the first position.
图38是表示第5实施方式中的光束切换控制部的结构的图。FIG38 is a diagram showing the configuration of a light beam switching control unit in the fifth embodiment.
图39是表示图38的逻辑电路的结构的图。FIG39 is a diagram showing the structure of the logic circuit of FIG38.
图40是说明图39的逻辑电路的动作的时序图。FIG40 is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the logic circuit of FIG39.
图41是第6实施方式的光束切换部件的结构图。FIG41 is a structural diagram of a light beam switching component according to the sixth embodiment.
图42是表示使第6实施方式中的选择用光学元件(声光调制元件)的配置旋转90度的情况下的结构的图。FIG42 is a diagram showing a configuration in which the arrangement of the optical element for selection (acousto-optic modulation element) in the sixth embodiment is rotated by 90 degrees.
图43是表示变形例3的基板的搬送形态与描绘线的配置关系的图。FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the relationship between the conveyance form of the substrate and the arrangement of the drawing lines according to Modification 3. FIG.
图44是表示变形例5的选择用光学元件(声光调制元件)的驱动器电路的结构的图。FIG44 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit for a selection optical element (acousto-optic modulation element) according to Modification 5.
图45是表示图44中的驱动器电路的变形例的图。FIG45 is a diagram showing a modified example of the driver circuit in FIG44.
具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION
以下,针对本发明方式的图案描绘装置、图案描绘方法、光束扫描装置、光束扫描方法、器件制造方法及激光光源装置,举出优选的实施方式,参照附图详细进行说明。此外,本发明的方式不限定于这些实施方式,也包含施加各种变更或改进得到的实施方式。也就是说,在以下记载的结构要素中,包含本领域技术人员能够容易设想到的要素及实质相同的要素,以下记载的结构要素能够适当组合。另外,在不脱离本发明要旨的范围内能够进行结构要素的各种省略、置换或变更。Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, beam scanning device, beam scanning method, device manufacturing method and laser light source device according to the present invention will be given and described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, but also includes embodiments obtained by applying various changes or improvements. That is, the structural elements described below include elements that can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art and substantially the same elements, and the structural elements described below can be appropriately combined. In addition, various omissions, replacements or changes of structural elements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.
[第1实施方式][First embodiment]
图1是表示第1实施方式的包含对基板(被照射体)FS实施曝光处理的曝光装置EX的器件制造系统10的概略结构的图。此外,在以下的说明中,只要没有特别限定,设定以重力方向为Z方向的 XYZ正交坐标系,并遵照图中所示的箭头来说明X方向、Y方向及 Z方向。FIG1 is a diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of a device manufacturing system 10 including an exposure apparatus EX for performing an exposure process on a substrate (irradiated object) FS according to a first embodiment. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, an XYZ orthogonal coordinate system is assumed, with the direction of gravity being the Z direction, and the X, Y, and Z directions are described according to the arrows shown in the figures.
器件制造系统10是例如构筑有制造作为电子器件的柔性显示器、柔性布线、柔性传感器等的生产线的制造系统。以下,作为电子器件以柔性显示器为前提来进行说明。作为柔性显示器,具有例如有机EL显示器、液晶显示器等。器件制造系统10具有所谓卷对卷(Roll To Roll)方式的构造,即从呈卷状卷绕有挠性片状的基板 (片状基板)FS的未图示的供给辊送出基板FS,在对送出的基板 FS连续地实施了各种处理后,通过未图示的回收辊卷收各种处理后的基板FS。基板FS具有基板FS的移动方向为长边方向(长边)、宽度方向为短边方向(短边)的带状形状。从上述供给辊送出的基板FS依次通过处理装置PR1、曝光装置(图案描绘装置、光束扫描装置)EX及处理装置PR2进行各种处理后,由上述回收辊卷收。The device manufacturing system 10 is a manufacturing system that is constructed with a production line for manufacturing flexible displays, flexible wiring, flexible sensors, etc. as electronic devices. The following description is based on the premise that the electronic device is a flexible display. As flexible displays, there are, for example, organic EL displays, liquid crystal displays, etc. The device manufacturing system 10 has a so-called roll-to-roll structure, that is, a substrate FS is fed out from an unillustrated supply roller on which a flexible sheet-like substrate (sheet substrate) FS is rolled up, and after various processes are continuously performed on the fed substrate FS, the substrate FS after various processes is taken up by an unillustrated recovery roller. The substrate FS has a strip shape with the moving direction of the substrate FS being the long side direction (long side) and the width direction being the short side direction (short side). The substrate FS fed out from the above-mentioned supply roller passes through the processing device PR1, the exposure device (pattern drawing device, light beam scanning device) EX and the processing device PR2 in sequence and undergoes various processes, and is then taken up by the above-mentioned recovery roller.
此外,X方向是在水平面内从处理装置PR1经由曝光装置EX 而朝向处理装置PR2的方向(搬送方向)。Y方向是在水平面内与 X方向正交的方向,是基板FS的宽度方向(短边方向)。Z方向是与X方向和Y方向正交的方向(上方向),与重力作用的方向平行。The X direction is the direction (conveying direction) from the processing unit PR1 to the processing unit PR2 via the exposure unit EX in the horizontal plane. The Y direction is the direction perpendicular to the X direction in the horizontal plane and is the width direction (short side direction) of the substrate FS. The Z direction is the direction perpendicular to the X and Y directions (upward direction) and is parallel to the direction of gravity.
基板FS使用例如树脂膜、或者由不锈钢等金属或合金构成的箔 (foil)等。作为树脂膜的材质,可以使用包含例如聚乙烯树脂、聚丙烯树脂、聚酯树脂、乙烯-乙烯醇共聚树脂、聚氯乙烯树脂、纤维素树脂、聚酰胺树脂、聚酰亚胺树脂、聚碳酸酯树脂、聚苯乙烯树脂及醋酸乙烯酯树脂中的至少一种以上的材料。另外,基板FS的厚度和刚性(杨氏模量)只要为在通过曝光装置EX的搬送路径时不会在基板FS上产生基于弯曲导致的折痕或不可逆褶皱这样的范围即可。作为基板FS的母材,厚度为25μm~200μm程度的PET(聚对苯二甲酸乙二醇酯)和PEN(聚萘二甲酸乙二醇酯)等的膜是优选的片状基板的典型。The substrate FS uses, for example, a resin film, or a foil made of a metal or alloy such as stainless steel. As the material of the resin film, materials including at least one of polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyester resin, ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, cellulose resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin and vinyl acetate resin can be used. In addition, the thickness and rigidity (Young's modulus) of the substrate FS only need to be within a range that does not produce creases or irreversible wrinkles due to bending on the substrate FS when passing through the conveying path of the exposure device EX. As the base material of the substrate FS, films such as PET (polyethylene terephthalate) and PEN (polyethylene naphthalate) with a thickness of about 25μm to 200μm are typical of preferred sheet substrates.
基板FS具有在由处理装置PR1、曝光装置EX及处理装置PR2 实施的各处理中受热的情况,因此,优选选定热膨胀系数不显著大的材质的基板FS。例如,通过将无机填料混合于树脂膜中而能够抑制热膨胀系数。无机填料可以是例如氧化钛、氧化锌、氧化铝或氧化硅等。另外,基板FS可以是通过浮式法等制造的厚度为100μm 左右的极薄玻璃的单层体,也可以是在该极薄玻璃上贴合上述树脂膜、箔等而成的层积体。Since the substrate FS is subject to heat during the various processes performed by the processing unit PR1, the exposure unit EX, and the processing unit PR2, it is preferable to select a material for the substrate FS that does not have a significantly high thermal expansion coefficient. For example, the thermal expansion coefficient can be suppressed by mixing an inorganic filler into the resin film. The inorganic filler may be, for example, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, aluminum oxide, or silicon oxide. Alternatively, the substrate FS may be a single layer of ultra-thin glass having a thickness of approximately 100 μm, manufactured by a float process or the like, or a laminate formed by laminating the aforementioned resin film, foil, etc. to the ultra-thin glass.
另外,基板FS的挠性(flexibility)是指即使对基板FS施加自重程度的力也不会剪断或断裂而使该基板FS能够挠曲的性质。另外,通过自重程度的力而弯曲的性质也包含于挠性。此外,根据基板FS的材质、大小、厚度、成膜于基板FS上的层构造、温度、湿度等环境等,挠性的程度会发生变化。无论哪种情况,只要在将基板FS正确地卷绕于本第1实施方式的器件制造系统10内的设在搬送路径上的各种搬送用辊、旋转筒等搬送方向转换用部件时不会压曲而产生折痕或产生破损(产生破裂、裂纹)地顺畅地搬送基板FS,就能称之为在挠性范围内。In addition, the flexibility of the substrate FS refers to the property of the substrate FS that it can bend without being sheared or broken even if a force of the degree of its own weight is applied to the substrate FS. In addition, the property of bending due to the force of the degree of its own weight is also included in flexibility. In addition, the degree of flexibility will change depending on the material, size, thickness, layer structure formed on the substrate FS, temperature, humidity and other environmental factors of the substrate FS. In either case, as long as the substrate FS is smoothly conveyed without being buckled and causing creases or damage (breaking or cracking) when the substrate FS is correctly wound on the various conveying rollers, rotating drums and other conveying direction conversion components provided on the conveying path within the device manufacturing system 10 of the first embodiment, it can be said to be within the flexibility range.
处理装置PR1对将由曝光装置EX曝光处理的基板FS进行前工序的处理。处理装置PR1将进行了前工序的处理的基板FS向曝光装置EX输送。通过该前工序的处理,向曝光装置EX输送的基板FS 成为在其表面上形成有感光性功能层(光感应层、感光层)的基板 (感光基板)。The processing unit PR1 performs pre-processing on the substrate FS to be exposed by the exposure unit EX. The processing unit PR1 transports the pre-processed substrate FS to the exposure unit EX. Through this pre-processing, the substrate FS transported to the exposure unit EX becomes a substrate (photosensitive substrate) with a photosensitive functional layer (photosensitive layer, photosensitive layer) formed on its surface.
该感光性功能层是作为溶液涂布于基板FS上并通过干燥而成为层(膜)。感光性功能层典型为光致抗蚀剂(液状或干膜状),但作为不需要显影处理的材料,存在受到紫外线照射的部分的亲疏液性被改性的感光性硅烷耦合剂(SAM)、或在受到紫外线照射的部分上显现出镀敷还原基的感光性还原剂等。在作为感光性功能层而使用感光性硅烷耦合剂的情况下,基板FS上的被紫外线曝光后的图案部分从疏液性改性为亲液性。因此,通过在成为亲液性的部分上选择性地涂布导电性油墨(含有银、铜等的导电性纳米粒子的油墨) 或含有半导体材料的液体等,而能够形成构成薄膜晶体管(TFT)等的电极、半导体、绝缘、或者成为连接用的布线或电极的图案层。在作为感光性功能层而使用感光性还原剂的情况下,在基板上的被紫外线曝光后的图案部分上显现出镀敷还原基。因此,曝光后,通过立即将基板FS浸渍到含有钯离子等的镀敷液中一定时间,而形成 (析出)基于钯的图案层。这样的镀敷处理为添加(additive)工艺,但除此以外,在以作为减去(subtractive)工艺的蚀刻处理为前提的情况下,也可以使向曝光装置EX输送的基板FS的母材为PET或 PEN,并在其表面上整面地或选择性地蒸镀铝(Al)或铜(Cu)等的金属性薄膜,进而在其上层积光致抗蚀剂层。The photosensitive functional layer is applied as a solution on the substrate FS and becomes a layer (film) by drying. The photosensitive functional layer is typically a photoresist (liquid or dry film), but as a material that does not require development treatment, there are photosensitive silane coupling agents (SAM) whose lyophilicity of the part exposed to ultraviolet light is modified, or photosensitive reducing agents that show plating reducing groups on the part exposed to ultraviolet light. In the case of using a photosensitive silane coupling agent as the photosensitive functional layer, the pattern part on the substrate FS that is exposed to ultraviolet light is modified from lyophobic to lyophilic. Therefore, by selectively applying a conductive ink (ink containing conductive nanoparticles of silver, copper, etc.) or a liquid containing a semiconductor material on the part that becomes lyophilic, it is possible to form a pattern layer that constitutes an electrode, a semiconductor, an insulation, or a wiring or electrode for connection of a thin film transistor (TFT). In the case of using a photosensitive reducing agent as the photosensitive functional layer, a plating reducing group is shown on the pattern part on the substrate that is exposed to ultraviolet light. Therefore, after exposure, the substrate FS is immediately immersed in a plating solution containing palladium ions for a certain period of time to form (precipitate) a pattern layer based on palladium. This plating process is an additive process. However, in addition to this, when etching is a subtractive process, the substrate FS fed to the exposure apparatus EX can be made of a base material of PET or PEN, and a metallic thin film such as aluminum (Al) or copper (Cu) can be vapor-deposited entirely or selectively on its surface, and a photoresist layer can be stacked thereon.
在本第1实施方式中,曝光装置EX是不使用光罩的直接描绘方式的曝光装置、即所谓光栅扫描(raster scan)方式的曝光装置。曝光装置EX对从处理装置PR1供给的基板FS的被照射面(感光面) 照射与显示器用的电子器件、电路或布线等用的规定图案相应的光图案。虽然以后详将细说明,但曝光装置EX一边将基板FS向+X 方向(副扫描方向)搬送,一边使曝光用的光束(激光、照射光) LB的点光SP在基板FS上(基板FS的被照射面上)沿规定的扫描方向(Y方向)进行一维扫描,同时根据图案数据(描绘数据、描绘信息)高速地调制(On/Off)点光SP的强度。由此,在基板FS 的作为被照射面的表面(感光面)上描绘曝光出与电子器件、电路或布线等的规定图案相应的光图案。也就是说,通过基板FS的副扫描和点光SP的主扫描,使得点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上相对地进行二维扫描,从而在基板FS上描绘曝光出规定图案。另外,基板 FS由于沿着搬送方向(+X方向)被搬送,所以通过曝光装置EX被曝光出图案的曝光区域W沿着基板FS的长边方向隔开规定间隔地设有多个(参照图5)。由于在该曝光区域W中形成电子器件,所以曝光区域W也是电子器件形成区域。此外,电子器件是通过将多个图案层(形成有图案的层)重合而构成的,因此也可以通过曝光装置EX曝光出与各层对应的图案。In this first embodiment, the exposure device EX is an exposure device of a direct drawing method that does not use a mask, that is, an exposure device of a so-called raster scan method. The exposure device EX irradiates the irradiated surface (photosensitive surface) of the substrate FS supplied from the processing device PR1 with a light pattern corresponding to a prescribed pattern for electronic devices, circuits, or wiring for a display. Although it will be described in detail later, the exposure device EX transports the substrate FS in the +X direction (sub-scanning direction) while causing the point light SP of the exposure light beam (laser, irradiation light) LB to scan one dimensionally on the substrate FS (the irradiated surface of the substrate FS) along a prescribed scanning direction (Y direction), while modulating (on/off) the intensity of the point light SP at high speed according to the pattern data (drawing data, drawing information). As a result, a light pattern corresponding to a prescribed pattern of electronic devices, circuits, or wiring is drawn and exposed on the surface (photosensitive surface) of the substrate FS that is the irradiated surface. That is, through the sub-scanning of the substrate FS and the main scanning of the point light SP, the point light SP is relatively scanned two-dimensionally on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS, thereby drawing and exposing a prescribed pattern on the substrate FS. In addition, since the substrate FS is transported along the transport direction (+X direction), a plurality of exposure areas W to which the pattern is exposed by the exposure device EX are provided at prescribed intervals along the long side direction of the substrate FS (refer to Figure 5). Since electronic devices are formed in this exposure area W, the exposure area W is also the electronic device formation area. In addition, the electronic device is formed by overlapping a plurality of pattern layers (layers on which patterns are formed), so the pattern corresponding to each layer can also be exposed by the exposure device EX.
处理装置PR2对由曝光装置EX进行了曝光处理的基板FS进行后续工序的处理(例如镀敷处理或显影/蚀刻处理等)。通过该后续工序的处理,在基板FS上形成有器件的图案层。The processing device PR2 performs subsequent process processing (such as plating processing or development/etching processing) on the substrate FS subjected to the exposure process by the exposure device EX. Through the subsequent process processing, a pattern layer of the device is formed on the substrate FS.
如上所述,电子器件由于是通过将多个图案层重合而构成的,所以经由器件制造系统10的至少各处理而生成一个图案层。因此,为了生成电子器件,必须使图1所示那样的器件制造系统10的各处理至少进行两次。为此,通过将卷绕有基板FS的回收辊作为供给辊而安装到其他器件制造系统10,能够层积图案层。通过反复进行这样的动作而形成电子器件。因此,处理后的基板FS成为多个电子器件(曝光区域W)隔开规定间隔地沿着基板FS的长边方向相连的状态。也就是说,基板FS为多件同时处理用基板。As described above, since electronic devices are constructed by overlapping multiple pattern layers, a pattern layer is generated through at least each process of the device manufacturing system 10. Therefore, in order to generate electronic devices, each process of the device manufacturing system 10 as shown in Figure 1 must be performed at least twice. To this end, by installing a recovery roller wound with the substrate FS as a supply roller to other device manufacturing systems 10, pattern layers can be stacked. Electronic devices are formed by repeating such actions. Therefore, the processed substrate FS becomes a state in which multiple electronic devices (exposure areas W) are connected at specified intervals along the long side direction of the substrate FS. In other words, the substrate FS is a substrate for simultaneous processing of multiple pieces.
回收了以电子器件相连的状态形成的基板FS的回收辊也可以安装在未图示的切割装置上。安装有回收辊的切割装置按每个电子器件(电子器件形成区域W)对处理后的基板FS进行分割(切断),由此使其成为多个电子器件。关于基板FS的尺寸,例如,宽度方向(成为短边的方向)的尺寸为10cm~2m程度,长度方向(成为长边的方向)的尺寸为10m以上。此外,基板FS的尺寸不限定于上述的尺寸。The recovery roller that recovers the substrate FS formed in a state where the electronic components are connected can also be installed on a cutting device not shown. The cutting device equipped with the recovery roller divides (cuts) the processed substrate FS according to each electronic component (electronic component formation area W), thereby making it into multiple electronic components. Regarding the size of the substrate FS, for example, the size in the width direction (the direction of the short side) is about 10 cm to 2 m, and the size in the length direction (the direction of the long side) is more than 10 m. In addition, the size of the substrate FS is not limited to the above-mentioned size.
接下来,详细说明曝光装置EX。曝光装置EX收纳在调温腔室ECV内。该调温腔室ECV通过将内部保持为规定温度,而抑制在内部被搬送的基板FS因温度导致的形状变化。调温腔室ECV经由被动或主动的防振单元SU1、SU2而配置在生产工厂的设置面E上。防振单元SU1、SU2降低来自设置面E的振动。该设置面E可以是工厂的地面本身,也可以是为了形成水平面而设置在地面上的设置台(基座:pedestal)上的面。曝光装置EX具备基板搬送机构12、光源装置(脉冲光源装置、激光光源装置)14、描绘头16和控制装置18。Next, the exposure device EX will be described in detail. The exposure device EX is housed in a temperature control chamber ECV. The temperature control chamber ECV suppresses temperature-induced shape changes of the substrate FS being transported inside by maintaining the interior at a specified temperature. The temperature control chamber ECV is arranged on the setting surface E of the production plant via passive or active vibration isolation units SU1 and SU2. The vibration isolation units SU1 and SU2 reduce vibrations from the setting surface E. The setting surface E can be the floor of the factory itself or a surface on a setting table (pedestal) set on the ground to form a horizontal surface. The exposure device EX includes a substrate transport mechanism 12, a light source device (pulse light source device, laser light source device) 14, a drawing head 16, and a control device 18.
基板搬送机构12在曝光装置EX内以规定速度搬送从处理装置 PR1搬送来的基板FS,然后,以规定速度向处理装置PR2送出。通过该基板搬送机构12,规定了在曝光装置EX内搬送的基板FS的搬送路径。基板搬送机构12从基板FS的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)依次具有边缘位置控制器EPC、驱动辊R1、张力调整辊RT1、旋转筒(圆筒滚筒)DR、张力调整辊RT2、驱动辊R2及驱动辊R3。The substrate transport mechanism 12 transports the substrate FS, transferred from the processing unit PR1, within the exposure unit EX at a predetermined speed and then delivers it to the processing unit PR2 at a predetermined speed. The substrate transport mechanism 12 defines the transport path of the substrate FS within the exposure unit EX. The substrate transport mechanism 12 comprises, in order from the upstream side (-X direction) in the transport direction of the substrate FS, an edge position controller EPC, a drive roller R1, a tension adjustment roller RT1, a rotating drum (cylindrical roller) DR, a tension adjustment roller RT2, a drive roller R2, and a drive roller R3.
边缘位置控制器EPC调整从处理装置PR1搬送的基板FS的宽度方向(Y方向、基板FS的短边方向)上的位置。也就是说,边缘位置控制器EPC以使在施加有规定张力的状态下搬送的基板FS的宽度方向的端部(边缘)处的位置相对于目标位置收敛于±十几μm~几十μm程度的范围(容许范围)内的方式,使基板FS沿宽度方向移动,来调整基板FS的宽度方向上的位置。边缘位置控制器EPC 具有供基板FS搭挂的辊、和对基板FS的宽度方向的端部(边缘) 的位置进行检测的未图示的边缘传感器(端部检测部),基于边缘传感器检测出的检测信号,使边缘位置控制器EPC的上述辊沿Y方向移动,来调整基板FS的宽度方向上的位置。驱动辊R1一边保持从边缘位置控制器EPC搬送的基板FS的表背两面一边旋转,将基板FS朝向旋转筒DR搬送。此外,边缘位置控制器EPC也可以以使卷绕于旋转筒DR的基板FS的长边方向相对于旋转筒DR的中心轴 (旋转轴)AXo始终正交的方式,适当调整基板FS的宽度方向上的位置,并且,以对基板FS的行进方向上的倾斜误差进行修正的方式,适当调整边缘位置控制器EPC的上述辊的旋转轴与Y轴的平行度。The edge position controller EPC adjusts the position of the substrate FS conveyed from the processing device PR1 in the width direction (Y direction, short side direction of the substrate FS). That is, the edge position controller EPC moves the substrate FS in the width direction so that the position of the end (edge) in the width direction of the substrate FS conveyed under a specified tension converges within a range of ±10 μm to several tens of μm relative to the target position (allowable range). The edge position controller EPC has a roller for the substrate FS to hang on, and an edge sensor (end detection unit) (not shown) for detecting the position of the end (edge) in the width direction of the substrate FS. Based on the detection signal detected by the edge sensor, the above-mentioned roller of the edge position controller EPC is moved in the Y direction to adjust the position of the substrate FS in the width direction. The drive roller R1 rotates while holding the front and back surfaces of the substrate FS conveyed from the edge position controller EPC, conveying the substrate FS toward the rotating drum DR. In addition, the edge position controller EPC can also appropriately adjust the position of the substrate FS in the width direction so that the long side direction of the substrate FS wound on the rotating drum DR is always orthogonal to the center axis (rotation axis) AXo of the rotating drum DR, and appropriately adjust the parallelism of the rotation axis of the above-mentioned roller of the edge position controller EPC and the Y axis so as to correct the tilt error in the moving direction of the substrate FS.
旋转筒DR具有沿Y方向延伸且沿与重力的作用方向交叉的方向延伸的中心轴AXo、和距中心轴AXo一定半径的圆筒状的外周面,旋转筒DR仿照外周面(圆周面)沿长边方向支承基板FS的一部分,同时以中心轴AXo为中心旋转而向+X方向搬送基板FS。旋转筒DR 以其圆周面支承供来自描绘头16的光束LB(点光SP)投射的基板 FS上的曝光区域(部分)。在旋转筒DR的Y方向的两侧,设有以使旋转筒DR绕中心轴AXo旋转的方式由环状的轴承支承的轴Sft。该轴Sft通过被赋予来自由控制装置18控制的未图示的旋转驱动源 (例如,由马达和减速机构等构成)的转矩而绕中心轴AXo旋转。此外,为了便于说明,将包含中心轴AXo且与YZ平面平行的平面称为中心面Poc。The rotating drum DR has a central axis AXo extending in the Y direction and in a direction intersecting the direction of gravity, and a cylindrical outer peripheral surface with a certain radius from the central axis AXo. The rotating drum DR supports a portion of the substrate FS in the longitudinal direction in accordance with the outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface), and at the same time rotates around the central axis AXo to transport the substrate FS in the +X direction. The rotating drum DR supports the exposure area (portion) on the substrate FS for the light beam LB (point light SP) from the drawing head 16 with its circumferential surface. On both sides of the rotating drum DR in the Y direction, there is a shaft Sft supported by annular bearings in a manner that allows the rotating drum DR to rotate around the central axis AXo. The shaft Sft rotates around the central axis AXo by being given a torque from a rotational drive source (for example, composed of a motor and a reduction mechanism) not shown in the figure and controlled by the control device 18. In addition, for the sake of convenience, the plane containing the central axis AXo and parallel to the YZ plane is referred to as the central plane Poc.
驱动辊R2、R3沿着基板FS的搬送方向(+X方向)隔开规定间隔地配置,对曝光后的基板FS赋予规定的松弛(游隙)。驱动辊 R2、R3与驱动辊R1同样地,一边保持基板FS的表背两面一边旋转,来朝向处理装置PR2搬送基板FS。驱动辊R2、R3相对于旋转筒DR 而设在搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧),该驱动辊R2相对于驱动辊R3而设在搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)。张力调整辊RT1、 RT2被向-Z方向施力,对卷绕并支承于旋转筒DR的基板FS沿长边方向赋予规定张力。由此,能够使对挂在旋转筒DR上的基板FS赋予的长边方向的张力在规定范围内稳定化。此外,控制装置18通过控制未图示的旋转驱动源(例如,由马达和减速机等构成)来使驱动辊R1~R3旋转。The drive rollers R2 and R3 are arranged at predetermined intervals along the conveying direction (+X direction) of the substrate FS, and impart predetermined slack (play) to the exposed substrate FS. Like the drive roller R1, the drive rollers R2 and R3 rotate while holding the front and back surfaces of the substrate FS to convey the substrate FS toward the processing device PR2. The drive rollers R2 and R3 are arranged on the downstream side (+X direction side) of the conveying direction relative to the rotating drum DR, and the drive roller R2 is arranged on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction relative to the drive roller R3. The tension adjustment rollers RT1 and RT2 are applied in the -Z direction to impart predetermined tension in the longitudinal direction to the substrate FS wound and supported on the rotating drum DR. In this way, the tension in the longitudinal direction imparted to the substrate FS hung on the rotating drum DR can be stabilized within a predetermined range. In addition, the control device 18 rotates the drive rollers R1 to R3 by controlling a rotation drive source (for example, composed of a motor and a reducer) not shown in the figure.
光源装置14具有光源(脉冲光源),射出脉冲状的光束(脉冲光、激光)LB。该光束LB是在370nm以下的波段中具有峰值波长的紫外线光,使光束LB的振荡频率(发光频率)为Fs。光源装置 14射出的光束LB向描绘头16入射。光源装置14遵照控制装置18 的控制,以发光频率Fs发出光束LB并射出。该光源装置14的结构将在后详细说明,但由产生红外波段的脉冲光的半导体激光元件、光纤放大器、将放大后的红外波段的脉冲光转换成紫外波段的脉冲光的波长转换元件(高次谐波产生元件)等构成,也可以使用得到振荡频率Fs为数百MHz、一个脉冲光的发光时间为皮秒程度的高亮度紫外线的脉冲光的光纤放大器激光光源。The light source device 14 has a light source (pulse light source) and emits a pulsed light beam (pulse light, laser) LB. The light beam LB is ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength in a band below 370nm, and the oscillation frequency (luminous frequency) of the light beam LB is Fs. The light beam LB emitted by the light source device 14 is incident on the drawing head 16. The light source device 14 emits and emits the light beam LB at a luminous frequency Fs in accordance with the control of the control device 18. The structure of the light source device 14 will be described in detail later, but it is composed of a semiconductor laser element that generates pulse light in the infrared band, an optical fiber amplifier, a wavelength conversion element (higher harmonic generation element) that converts the amplified pulse light in the infrared band into pulse light in the ultraviolet band, etc., and a fiber amplifier laser light source that obtains high-brightness ultraviolet pulse light with an oscillation frequency Fs of hundreds of MHz and a luminous time of one pulse of light of picoseconds can also be used.
描绘头16具备供光束LB分别入射的多个扫描单元Un (U1~U6)。描绘头16通过多个扫描单元(描绘单元)U1~U6来在由基板搬送机构12的旋转筒DR的圆周面支承的基板FS的一部分上描绘规定图案。描绘头16为排列有结构相同的多个扫描单元 U1~U6的所谓多光束型的描绘头16。描绘头16对基板FS反复进行电子器件用的图案曝光,因此被曝光图案的曝光区域(电子器件形成区域)W沿着基板FS的长边方向隔开规定间隔地设有多个(参照图5)。控制装置18控制曝光装置EX的各部分,使各部分执行处理。该控制装置18包含计算机和存储有程序的存储介质,该计算机通过执行存储于存储介质的程序,而作为本第1实施方式的控制装置18发挥功能。The drawing head 16 has a plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) for the light beam LB to be incident on respectively. The drawing head 16 draws a predetermined pattern on a portion of the substrate FS supported by the circumferential surface of the rotating drum DR of the substrate conveying mechanism 12 through the plurality of scanning units (drawing units) U1 to U6. The drawing head 16 is a so-called multi-beam type drawing head 16 in which a plurality of scanning units U1 to U6 having the same structure are arranged. The drawing head 16 repeatedly performs pattern exposure for electronic devices on the substrate FS, so that a plurality of exposure areas (electronic device formation areas) W of the exposed pattern are provided at predetermined intervals along the long side direction of the substrate FS (refer to FIG5 ). The control device 18 controls each part of the exposure device EX so that each part performs processing. The control device 18 includes a computer and a storage medium storing a program, and the computer functions as the control device 18 of the first embodiment by executing the program stored in the storage medium.
图2是表示支承描绘头16的多个扫描单元(描绘单元)Un及旋转筒DR的支承架(装置柱)30的图。支承架30具有主体架32、三点支承部34和描绘头支承部36。支承架30收纳在调温腔室ECV 内。主体架32经由环状轴承以能够旋转的方式支承旋转筒DR、张力调整辊RT1(未图示)、RT2。三点支承部34设在主体架32的上端,以三点支承设于旋转筒DR上方的描绘头支承部36。FIG2 illustrates a support frame (device column) 30 that supports the multiple scanning units (drawing units) Un and the rotating drum DR of the drawing head 16. The support frame 30 includes a main frame 32, a three-point support portion 34, and a drawing head support portion 36. The support frame 30 is housed within a temperature control chamber ECV. The main frame 32 rotatably supports the rotating drum DR and tension adjustment rollers RT1 (not shown) and RT2 via annular bearings. The three-point support portion 34 is provided at the upper end of the main frame 32 and supports the drawing head support portion 36, which is located above the rotating drum DR, at three points.
描绘头支承部36用于支承描绘头16的扫描单元Un(U1~U6)。描绘头支承部36相对于旋转筒DR的中心轴AXo而在搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧)、且沿着基板FS的宽度方向排列地支承扫描单元U1、U3、U5(参照图1)。另外,描绘头支承部36相对于中心轴AXo而在搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)、且沿着基板FS的宽度方向(Y方向)排列地支承扫描单元U2、U4、U6(参照图1)。此外,在此,若基于一个扫描单元Un实现的Y方向上的扫描宽度 (点光SP的扫描范围、描绘线SLn)作为一例为20~50mm程度,则通过将奇数号的三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5和偶数号的三个扫描单元U2、U4、U6这共计六个扫描单元Un沿Y方向配置,而能够将可描绘的Y方向的宽度扩大为120~300mm程度。The drawing head support portion 36 is used to support the scanning units Un (U1 to U6) of the drawing head 16. The drawing head support portion 36 supports the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 on the downstream side (+X direction side) in the conveying direction relative to the central axis AXo of the rotating drum DR and arranged along the width direction of the substrate FS (refer to Figure 1). In addition, the drawing head support portion 36 supports the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 on the upstream side (-X direction side) in the conveying direction relative to the central axis AXo and arranged along the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate FS (refer to Figure 1). In addition, here, if the scanning width in the Y direction (scanning range of the spot light SP, drawing line SLn) achieved by one scanning unit Un is about 20 to 50 mm as an example, then by arranging a total of six scanning units Un, namely three odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, and U5 and three even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, and U6, along the Y direction, the width of the drawable Y direction can be expanded to about 120 to 300 mm.
图3是表示描绘头16的结构的图。在本第1实施方式中,曝光装置EX具备两个光源装置14(14a、14b)。描绘头16具有多个扫描单元U1~U6、将来自光源装置14a的光束LB向多个扫描单元U1、 U3、U5引导的光导入光学系统(光束切换部件)40a、和将来自光源装置14b的光束LB向多个扫描单元U2、U4、U6引导的光导入光学系统(光束切换部件)40b。FIG3 illustrates the configuration of the drawing head 16. In the first embodiment, the exposure apparatus EX includes two light source devices 14 (14a, 14b). The drawing head 16 includes a plurality of scanning units U1 to U6, a light guide optical system (light beam switching component) 40a that guides the light beam LB from the light source device 14a to the plurality of scanning units U1, U3, and U5, and a light guide optical system (light beam switching component) 40b that guides the light beam LB from the light source device 14b to the plurality of scanning units U2, U4, and U6.
首先,使用图4来说明光导入光学系统(光束切换部件)40a。此外,光导入光学系统40a、40b具有相同结构,因此,在此对光导入光学系统40a进行说明并省略光导入光学系统40b的说明。First, the light introducing optical system (light beam switching member) 40a will be described using Fig. 4. Since the light introducing optical systems 40a and 40b have the same structure, the light introducing optical system 40a will be described here and the description of the light introducing optical system 40b will be omitted.
光导入光学系统40a从光源装置14(14a)侧起,具有聚光透镜 42、准直透镜44、反射镜46、聚光透镜48、选择用光学元件50、反射镜52、准直透镜54、聚光透镜56、选择用光学元件58、反射镜60、准直透镜62、聚光透镜64、选择用光学元件66、反射镜68 及吸收体70。The light-introducing optical system 40a includes, from the light source device 14 (14a) side, a focusing lens 42, a collimating lens 44, a reflector 46, a focusing lens 48, a selection optical element 50, a reflector 52, a collimating lens 54, a focusing lens 56, a selection optical element 58, a reflector 60, a collimating lens 62, a focusing lens 64, a selection optical element 66, a reflector 68 and an absorber 70.
聚光透镜42及准直透镜44用于将从光源装置14a射出的光束 LB放大。详细地说,首先,聚光透镜42将光束LB收敛于聚光透镜42的后侧的焦点位置,准直透镜44使由聚光透镜42收敛后发散的光束LB成为规定光束径(例如,数mm)的平行光。The condenser lens 42 and the collimator lens 44 are used to amplify the light beam LB emitted from the light source device 14a. Specifically, the condenser lens 42 first converges the light beam LB to a focal position on the rear side of the condenser lens 42, and the collimator lens 44 converts the light beam LB, which is converged and then diverged by the condenser lens 42, into parallel light with a predetermined beam diameter (e.g., several mm).
反射镜46使通过准直透镜44而成为平行光的光束LB反射并向选择用光学元件50照射。聚光透镜48使向选择用光学元件50入射的光束LB以在选择用光学元件50内成为光束腰的方式会聚(收敛)。选择用光学元件50相对于光束LB而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM:Acousto-Optic Modulator)。AOM若被施加超声波信号(高频信号),则产生使入射的光束LB(零次光)以与高频频率相应的衍射角衍射的一次衍射光来作为射出光束(光束LBn)。此外,在本第1实施方式中,将从多个选择用光学元件50、58、66 各自作为一次衍射光射出且向对应的扫描单元U1、U3、U5入射的光束LBn以LB1、LB3、LB5表示,将各选择用光学元件50、58、 66作为起到使来自光源装置14(14a)的光束LB的光路偏转的功能的元件来处理。各选择用光学元件50、58、66的结构、功能、作用等可以彼此相同。选择用光学元件50、58、66遵照来自控制装置18 的驱动信号(高频信号)的On/Off,而将使入射的光束LB衍射的衍射光的产生On/Off。The reflector 46 reflects the light beam LB, which has been parallelized by the collimating lens 44, and directs it toward the selection optical element 50. The condenser lens 48 converges the light beam LB incident on the selection optical element 50 so that it forms a beam waist within the selection optical element 50. The selection optical element 50 is transmissive to the light beam LB and, for example, employs an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). When an ultrasonic signal (high-frequency signal) is applied to the AOM, the incident light beam LB (zero-order light) is diffracted at a diffraction angle corresponding to the high-frequency frequency to generate first-order diffracted light as an outgoing light beam (light beam LBn). In the first embodiment, the light beams LBn emitted from the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 as primary diffracted light and incident on the corresponding scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are represented by LB1, LB3, and LB5, respectively. Each selection optical element 50, 58, and 66 is treated as an element that functions to deflect the optical path of the light beam LB from the light source device 14 (14a). The structure, function, and effects of each selection optical element 50, 58, and 66 can be identical. The selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 turn on and off the generation of diffracted light that diffracts the incident light beam LB in accordance with the on/off switching of a drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18.
详细进行说明,选择用光学元件50在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为Off的情况下,将入射的光束LB向下一级的选择用光学元件58照射。另一方面,在来自控制装置18的驱动信号 (高频信号)为On的情况下,选择用光学元件50使入射的光束LB 衍射,将作为其一次衍射光的光束LB1向反射镜52照射。反射镜 52使入射的光束LB1反射,而向扫描单元U1的准直透镜100照射。即,通过由控制装置18将选择用光学元件50切换(驱动)成On/Off,选择用光学元件50对是否使光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射进行切换。To explain in detail, when the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 50 directs the incident light beam LB toward the next-stage selection optical element 58. On the other hand, when the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is on, the selection optical element 50 diffracts the incident light beam LB and directs the light beam LB1, which is the primary diffracted light, toward the reflector 52. The reflector 52 reflects the incident light beam LB1 and directs it toward the collimating lens 100 of the scanning unit U1. Specifically, by switching (driving) the selection optical element 50 on/off by the control device 18, the selection optical element 50 switches whether the light beam LB1 is incident on the scanning unit U1.
在选择用光学元件50与选择用光学元件58之间,按以下顺序设有将向选择用光学元件58照射的光束LB恢复为平行光的准直透镜54、和使通过准直透镜54而成为平行光的光束LB再次以在选择用光学元件58内成为光束腰的方式会聚(收敛)的聚光透镜56。Between the selection optical element 50 and the selection optical element 58, there are provided in the following order: a collimating lens 54 for restoring the light beam LB irradiated to the selection optical element 58 into parallel light, and a focusing lens 56 for converging (shrinking) the light beam LB that has become parallel light after passing through the collimating lens 54 again in a manner that forms a beam waist within the selection optical element 58.
选择用光学元件58与选择用光学元件50同样地,相对于光束 LB而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM)。选择用光学元件58在从控制装置18发送来的驱动信号(高频信号)为Off的情况下,使入射的光束LB直接透射而向选择用光学元件66照射,在从控制装置18发送来的驱动信号(高频信号)为On的情况下,使入射的光束LB衍射,并将作为其一次衍射光的光束LB3向反射镜60照射。反射镜60使入射的光束LB3反射,而向扫描单元U3 的准直透镜100照射。即,通过由控制装置18将选择用光学元件58 切换成On/Off,选择用光学元件58对是否使光束LB3向扫描单元 U3入射进行切换。The selection optical element 58, like the selection optical element 50, is transmissive to the light beam LB and, for example, employs an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) sent from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 58 transmits the incident light beam LB as it is, irradiating the selection optical element 66. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) sent from the control device 18 is on, the selection optical element 58 diffracts the incident light beam LB and irradiates the light beam LB3, which is the primary diffracted light, toward the reflector 60. The reflector 60 reflects the incident light beam LB3 and irradiates it toward the collimating lens 100 of the scanning unit U3. Specifically, by switching the selection optical element 58 on and off by the control device 18, the selection optical element 58 switches whether the light beam LB3 is incident on the scanning unit U3.
在选择用光学元件58与选择用光学元件66之间,按以下顺序设有将向选择用光学元件66照射的光束LB恢复为平行光的准直透镜62、和使通过准直透镜62而成为平行光的光束LB再次以在选择用光学元件66内成为光束腰的方式会聚(收敛)的聚光透镜64。Between the selection optical element 58 and the selection optical element 66, there are provided in the following order: a collimating lens 62 for restoring the light beam LB irradiated to the selection optical element 66 into parallel light, and a focusing lens 64 for converging (shrinking) the light beam LB that has become parallel light after passing through the collimating lens 62 again in a manner that forms a beam waist within the selection optical element 66.
选择用光学元件66与选择用光学元件50同样地,相对于光束 LB而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM)。选择用光学元件66在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为Off状态的情况下,将入射的光束LB朝向吸收体70照射,在来自控制装置18 的驱动信号(高频信号)为On状态的情况下,使入射的光束LB衍射,并将作为其一次衍射光的光束LB5朝向反射镜68照射。反射镜 68使入射的光束LB5反射,而向扫描单元U5的准直透镜100照射。即,通过由控制装置18将选择用光学元件66切换成On/Off,选择用光学元件66对是否使光束LB5向扫描单元U5入射进行切换。吸收体70是用于抑制光束LB泄漏到外部的吸收光束LB的光吸收体 (light trap)。Like the selection optical element 50, the selection optical element 66 is transmissive to the light beam LB and, for example, employs an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 66 directs the incident light beam LB toward the absorber 70. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is on, the selection optical element 66 diffracts the incident light beam LB and directs the light beam LB5, which is the primary diffracted light, toward the reflector 68. The reflector 68 reflects the incident light beam LB5 and directs it toward the collimating lens 100 of the scanning unit U5. Specifically, by switching the selection optical element 66 on and off by the control device 18, the selection optical element 66 switches whether the light beam LB5 is incident on the scanning unit U5. The absorber 70 is a light trap that absorbs the light beam LB and prevents it from leaking to the outside.
针对光导入光学系统40b简单地进行说明,光导入光学系统40b 的选择用光学元件50、58、66对是否使光束LB向扫描单元U2、 U4、U6入射进行切换。该情况下,光导入光学系统40b的反射镜 52、60、68将从选择用光学元件50、58、66射出的光束LB2、LB4、 LB6反射而向扫描单元U2、U4、U6的准直透镜100照射。The light introduction optical system 40b will be briefly described. The selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 of the light introduction optical system 40b switch whether the light beam LB is incident on the scanning units U2, U4, and U6. In this case, the reflectors 52, 60, and 68 of the light introduction optical system 40b reflect the light beams LB2, LB4, and LB6 emitted from the selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 and direct them toward the collimating lenses 100 of the scanning units U2, U4, and U6.
此外,实际中的声光调制元件(AOM)的一次衍射光的产生效率为零次光的80%左右,因此,选择用光学元件50、58、66各自所偏转的光束LB1(LB2)、LB3(LB4)、LB5(LB6)与原来的光束 LB的强度相比降低。另外,在选择用光学元件50、58、66中的某一个为On状态时,不衍射而直进的零次光残留20%左右,但其最终会被吸收体70吸收。Furthermore, the efficiency of generating first-order diffracted light by an actual acousto-optic modulator (AOM) is approximately 80% of that of zero-order light. Therefore, the intensity of the light beams LB1 (LB2), LB3 (LB4), and LB5 (LB6) deflected by the selective optical elements 50, 58, and 66, respectively, is reduced compared to the original light beam LB. Furthermore, when any of the selective optical elements 50, 58, and 66 is in the on state, approximately 20% of the zero-order light remains, remaining undiffracted and traveling straight ahead. However, this light is ultimately absorbed by the absorber 70.
接下来,针对图3所示的多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)进行说明。扫描单元Un将来自光源装置14(14a、14b)的光束LBn以在基板 FS的被照射面上收敛成点光SP的方式进行投射,同时通过旋转的多面镜PM使该点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上沿着规定的直线状的描绘线(扫描线)SLn进行一维扫描。此外,将扫描单元U1的描绘线SLn用SL1表示,同样地,将扫描单元U2~U6的描绘线SLn 用SL2~SL6表示。Next, the multiple scanning units Un (U1-U6) shown in Figure 3 will be described. Each scanning unit Un projects a light beam LBn from a light source device 14 (14a, 14b) onto the illuminated surface of the substrate FS, converging into a point light SP. Simultaneously, a rotating polygonal mirror PM causes this point light SP to be one-dimensionally scanned along a predetermined linear drawing line (scanning line) SLn on the illuminated surface of the substrate FS. The drawing line SLn of scanning unit U1 is denoted by SL1, and similarly, the drawing lines SLn of scanning units U2-U6 are denoted by SL2-SL6.
图5是表示通过各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)而使点光SP扫描的描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)的图。如图5所示,以通过多个扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)的全部扫描单元覆盖曝光区域W的整个宽度方向的方式,由各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)分担扫描区域。由此,各扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)能够按沿基板FS的宽度方向分割而成的多个区域的每个区域描绘图案。各描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)的长度原则上相同。也就是说,沿着描绘线SL1~SL6各自扫描的光束LBn的点光SP的扫描距离原则上相同。此外,在想要增大曝光区域W的宽度的情况下,能够通过增大描绘线SLn自身的长度、或增加在Y方向上设置的扫描单元Un的数量来进行应对。FIG5 is a diagram showing the drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6) that are scanned by the spot light SP through the scanning units Un (U1 to U6). As shown in FIG5 , the scanning area is shared by the scanning units Un (U1 to U6) in such a manner that all the scanning units of the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) cover the entire width direction of the exposure area W. Thus, each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) can draw a pattern in each of the plurality of areas divided along the width direction of the substrate FS. The lengths of the drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6) are the same in principle. That is, the scanning distances of the spot light SP of the light beam LBn scanned along the drawing lines SL1 to SL6 are the same in principle. In addition, when it is desired to increase the width of the exposure area W, this can be addressed by increasing the length of the drawing line SLn itself or by increasing the number of scanning units Un provided in the Y direction.
此外,实际上的各描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)被设定成与点光SP 能够在被照射面上实际扫描的最大长度相比稍短。例如,若假设在主扫描方向(Y方向)的描绘倍率为初始值(无倍率修正)的情况下可描绘图案的描绘线SLn的最大长度为30mm,则使描绘线SLn 在扫描开始点侧和扫描结束点侧分别具有0.5mm左右的余裕而使得点光SP在被照射面上的最大扫描长度被设定为31mm左右。通过像这样进行设定,能够在点光SP的最大扫描长度31mm的范围内,在主扫描方向上对30mm的描绘线SLn的位置进行微调,或对描绘倍率进行微调。点光SP的最大扫描长度并不限定于31mm,主要根据扫描单元Un内的设在多面镜(旋转多面镜)PM之后的fθ透镜FT (参照图3)的孔径来确定,也可以为31mm以上。Furthermore, each actual drawing line SLn (SL1 to SL6) is set to be slightly shorter than the maximum length that the spot light SP can actually scan on the irradiated surface. For example, assuming that the maximum length of the drawing line SLn that can draw a pattern is 30 mm when the drawing magnification in the main scanning direction (Y direction) is the initial value (without magnification correction), the drawing line SLn is provided with a margin of approximately 0.5 mm on both the scanning start point side and the scanning end point side, so that the maximum scanning length of the spot light SP on the irradiated surface is set to approximately 31 mm. By setting it in this way, the position of the 30 mm drawing line SLn in the main scanning direction or the drawing magnification can be fine-tuned within the maximum scanning length of 31 mm of the spot light SP. The maximum scanning length of the spot light SP is not limited to 31 mm and is mainly determined by the aperture of the fθ lens FT (see FIG. 3 ) located after the polygon mirror (rotating polygon mirror) PM in the scanning unit Un, and can also be greater than 31 mm.
多条描绘线(扫描线)SL1~SL6隔着中心面Poc在旋转筒DR 的周向上配置成两列。描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5相对于中心面Poc位于搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧)的基板FS上。描绘线SL2、SL4、 SL6相对于中心面Poc位于搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)的基板 FS上。各描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)沿着基板FS的宽度方向、即旋转筒DR的中心轴AXo而大致平行,比基板FS的宽度方向的长度短。Multiple drawing lines (scanning lines) SL1-SL6 are arranged in two rows in the circumferential direction of the rotating drum DR, sandwiching a center plane Poc. Drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are located on the substrate FS downstream (+X direction) in the conveyance direction relative to the center plane Poc. Drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 are located on the substrate FS upstream (-X direction) in the conveyance direction relative to the center plane Poc. Each drawing line SLn (SL1-SL6) is approximately parallel to the width of the substrate FS, i.e., the central axis AXo of the rotating drum DR, and is shorter than the width of the substrate FS.
描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5沿着基板FS的宽度方向(扫描方向,Y 方向)隔开规定间隔地配置,描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6也同样地,沿着基板FS的宽度方向(扫描方向,Y方向)隔开规定间隔地配置。此时,描绘线SL2在基板FS的宽度方向上配置于描绘线SL1与描绘线SL3之间。同样地,描绘线SL3在基板FS的宽度方向上配置于描绘线SL2与描绘线SL4之间。描绘线SL4在基板FS的宽度方向上配置于描绘线SL3与描绘线SL5之间。描绘线SL5在基板FS 的宽度方向上配置于描绘线SL4与描绘线SL6之间。即,描绘线 SL1~SL6配置成将在基板FS上进行描绘的曝光区域W的整个宽度方向覆盖。Drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are arranged at predetermined intervals along the width direction (scanning direction, Y direction) of the substrate FS. Drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 are also arranged at predetermined intervals along the width direction (scanning direction, Y direction) of the substrate FS. At this time, drawing line SL2 is arranged between drawing line SL1 and drawing line SL3 in the width direction of the substrate FS. Similarly, drawing line SL3 is arranged between drawing line SL2 and drawing line SL4 in the width direction of the substrate FS. Drawing line SL4 is arranged between drawing line SL3 and drawing line SL5 in the width direction of the substrate FS. Drawing line SL5 is arranged between drawing line SL4 and drawing line SL6 in the width direction of the substrate FS. That is, drawing lines SL1 to SL6 are arranged to cover the entire width direction of the exposure area W to be drawn on the substrate FS.
沿着奇数号的描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5各自而进行扫描的光束LBn (LB1、LB3、LB5)的点光SP的扫描方向为一维方向,且为相同方向。沿着偶数号的描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6各自而进行扫描的光束 LBn(LB2、LB4、LB6)的点光SP的扫描方向为一维方向,且为相同方向。该沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5进行扫描的光束LBn(点光 SP)的扫描方向与沿着描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6进行扫描的光束LBn (点光SP)的扫描方向互为相反方向。详细地说,该沿着描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6进行扫描的光束LBn(点光SP)的扫描方向为+Y方向,沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5进行扫描的光束LBn(点光SP)的扫描方向为-Y方向。其因使用向同一方向旋转的多面镜PM来作为扫描单元U1~U6的多面镜PM所致。由此,描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5的描绘开始位置(描绘开始点(扫描开始点)的位置)与描绘线SL2、 SL4、SL6的描绘开始位置在Y方向上邻接(或一部分重复)。另外,描绘线SL3、SL5的描绘结束位置(描绘结束点(扫描结束点)的位置)与描绘线SL2、SL4的描绘结束位置在Y方向上邻接(或一部分重复)。在以使沿Y方向相邻的描绘线SLn的端部彼此的一部分重复的方式配置各描绘线SLn的情况下,例如,只要相对于各描绘线SLn的长度,包含描绘开始位置或描绘结束位置在内而在Y方向上以几%以下的范围重复即可。The scanning direction of the spot light SP of the light beam LBn (LB1, LB3, LB5) scanning along the odd-numbered drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 is one-dimensional and in the same direction. The scanning direction of the spot light SP of the light beam LBn (LB2, LB4, LB6) scanning along the even-numbered drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 is one-dimensional and in the same direction. The scanning direction of the light beam LBn (spot light SP) scanning along the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 is opposite to the scanning direction of the light beam LBn (spot light SP) scanning along the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6. Specifically, the scanning direction of the light beam LBn (spot light SP) scanning along the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 is the +Y direction, while the scanning direction of the light beam LBn (spot light SP) scanning along the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 is the -Y direction. This is due to the use of a polygonal mirror PM rotating in the same direction as the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning units U1 to U6. As a result, the drawing start position (the position of the drawing start point (scanning start point)) of the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 is adjacent to (or partially overlaps with) the drawing start position of the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 in the Y direction. In addition, the drawing end position (the position of the drawing end point (scanning end point)) of the drawing lines SL3 and SL5 is adjacent to (or partially overlaps with) the drawing end position of the drawing lines SL2 and SL4 in the Y direction. When each drawing line SLn is arranged so that the ends of the adjacent drawing lines SLn in the Y direction partially overlap, for example, it is sufficient as long as the length of each drawing line SLn, including the drawing start position or the drawing end position, overlaps in the Y direction by less than a few percent.
此外,描绘线SLn的副扫描方向的宽度为与点光SP的尺寸(直径)相应的大小。例如,在点光SP的尺寸为3μm的情况下,描绘线SLn的副扫描方向的宽度也为3μm。点光SP也可以以重叠(over lap)规定长度(例如,点光SP的尺寸的一半)的方式,沿着描绘线SLn投射。另外,在使沿Y方向相邻的描绘线SLn(例如,描绘线SL1和描绘线SL2)彼此邻接的情况(相接的情况)下,也只要重叠规定长度(例如,点光SP的尺寸的一半)即可。Furthermore, the width of the drawing line SLn in the sub-scanning direction is sized to correspond to the size (diameter) of the spotlight SP. For example, if the spotlight SP is 3 μm in size, the width of the drawing line SLn in the sub-scanning direction is also 3 μm. The spotlight SP can also be projected along the drawing line SLn so that it overlaps by a predetermined length (e.g., half the size of the spotlight SP). Furthermore, when adjacent drawing lines SLn in the Y direction (e.g., drawing lines SL1 and SL2) are adjacent to each other (contacting each other), the overlap only needs to be by a predetermined length (e.g., half the size of the spotlight SP).
在本第1实施方式的情况下,由于来自光源装置14的光束LB 为脉冲光,所以在主扫描期间投射于描绘线SLn上的点光SP与光束 LB的振荡频率Fs相应地呈离散。因此,需要使由光束LB的一个脉冲光投射的点光SP和由下一个脉冲光投射的点光SP在主扫描方向上重叠。其重叠量是根据点光SP的尺寸点光SP的扫描速度Vs、光束LB的振荡频率Fs而设定的,但在点光SP的强度分布近似高斯分布的情况下,只要相对于由点光SP的峰值强度的1/e2(或1/2) 确定的实效的直径尺寸而重叠左右即可。因此,在副扫描方向(与描绘线SLn正交的方向)上,也期望设定成在沿着描绘线SLn 的点光SP的一次扫描与下一次扫描之间,基板FS移动点光SP的实效的尺寸的大致1/2以下的距离。另外,关于对基板FS上的感光性功能层的曝光量的设定,虽然能够用对光束LB(脉冲光)的峰值的调整来实现,但在不提高光束LB的强度的状况下想要增大曝光量时,只要通过点光SP的主扫描方向上的扫描速度Vs的降低、光束 LB的振荡频率Fs的增大、和基板FS的副扫描方向上的搬送速度的降低等中的某一方,使点光SP在主扫描方向或副扫描方向上的重叠量增加到实效的尺寸的1/2以上即可。In the case of the first embodiment, since the light beam LB from the light source device 14 is a pulsed light, the point light SP projected on the drawing line SLn during the main scanning period is discrete in accordance with the oscillation frequency Fs of the light beam LB. Therefore, it is necessary to make the point light SP projected by one pulse of the light beam LB and the point light SP projected by the next pulse overlap in the main scanning direction. The amount of overlap is set according to the size of the point light SP, the scanning speed Vs of the point light SP, and the oscillation frequency Fs of the light beam LB. However, when the intensity distribution of the point light SP is approximately Gaussian, it is sufficient to overlap by about 1/e 2 (or 1/2) relative to the effective diameter size determined by 1/e 2 (or 1/2) of the peak intensity of the point light SP. Therefore, in the sub-scanning direction (the direction orthogonal to the drawing line SLn), it is also desirable to set the substrate FS to move a distance of approximately 1/2 of the effective size of the point light SP between one scan and the next scan along the drawing line SLn. In addition, regarding the setting of the exposure amount of the photosensitive functional layer on the substrate FS, although it can be achieved by adjusting the peak value of the light beam LB (pulsed light), when the exposure amount wants to be increased without increasing the intensity of the light beam LB, it is only necessary to increase the overlap amount of the point light SP in the main scanning direction or the sub-scanning direction to more than 1/2 of the effective size by reducing the scanning speed Vs of the point light SP in the main scanning direction, increasing the oscillation frequency Fs of the light beam LB, and reducing the transport speed in the sub-scanning direction of the substrate FS.
接下来,针对图3所示的扫描单元Un的结构进行说明。此外,各扫描单元U1~U6具有相同结构,因此,在此仅对扫描单元U1进行说明。扫描单元U1具有图4所示的反射镜52之后的准直透镜100、反射镜102、聚光透镜104、描绘用光学元件106、准直透镜108、反射镜110、柱面透镜CYa、反射镜114、多面镜(光扫描部件,偏转部件)PM、fθ透镜FT、柱面透镜CYb及反射镜122。准直透镜 100、108、反射镜102、110、114、122、聚光透镜104、柱面透镜 CYa、CYb及fθ透镜FT构成光学透镜系统。Next, the structure of the scanning unit Un shown in Figure 3 will be described. Since each scanning unit U1 to U6 has the same structure, only the scanning unit U1 will be described here. Scanning unit U1 includes, following the reflector 52 shown in Figure 4, a collimating lens 100, a reflector 102, a focusing lens 104, an image drawing optical element 106, a collimating lens 108, a reflector 110, a cylindrical lens CYa, a reflector 114, a polygonal mirror (light scanning unit, deflection unit) PM, an fθ lens FT, a cylindrical lens CYb, and a reflector 122. The collimating lenses 100, 108, the reflectors 102, 110, 114, 122, the focusing lens 104, the cylindrical lenses CYa, CYb, and the fθ lens FT constitute an optical lens system.
在图3中反射镜102将从准直透镜100入射的光束LB1向-Z方向反射,而向作为描绘用光调制器的描绘用光学元件106入射。聚光透镜104使向描绘用光学元件106入射的光束LB1(平行光束) 以在描绘用光学元件106内成为光束腰的方式会聚(收敛)。描绘用光学元件106相对于光束LB1而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM)。描绘用光学元件106在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为Off状态时,将入射的光束LB1向未图示的屏蔽板或吸收体照射,在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为 On状态时,使入射的光束LB1衍射,并将其一次衍射光(描绘光束,即,根据图案数据进行强度调制后的光束LB1)向反射镜110照射。上述屏蔽板及上述吸收体用于抑制光束LB1向外部泄漏。In Figure 3, the reflector 102 reflects the incident light beam LB1 from the collimating lens 100 in the -Z direction, causing it to enter the image drawing optical element 106, which serves as an image drawing light modulator. The condenser lens 104 converges the incident light beam LB1 (a parallel light beam) entering the image drawing optical element 106, forming a beam waist within the image drawing optical element 106. The image drawing optical element 106 is transmissive to the light beam LB1 and, for example, employs an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is off, the image drawing optical element 106 directs the incident light beam LB1 toward a shielding plate or absorber (not shown). When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is on, the incident light beam LB1 is diffracted and the primary diffracted light (the image drawing light beam, i.e., the light beam LB1 intensity-modulated according to the pattern data) is directed toward the reflector 110. The shielding plate and absorber are used to prevent the light beam LB1 from leaking to the outside.
在反射镜110与描绘用光学元件106之间,设有使向反射镜110 入射的光束LB1成为平行光的准直透镜108。反射镜110将入射的光束LB1朝向反射镜114沿-X方向反射,反射镜114将入射的光束 LB1朝向多面镜PM反射。多面镜(旋转多面镜)PM将入射的光束 LB1朝向具有与X轴平行的光轴的fθ透镜FT沿-X方向侧反射。多面镜PM为了使光束LB1的点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上进行扫描,而使入射的光束LB1在与XY平面平行的面内偏转(反射)。具体地说,多面镜PM具有沿Z方向延伸的旋转轴AXp、和绕旋转轴AXp形成的多个反射面RP(在本第1实施方式中为八个反射面 RP)。通过以旋转轴AXp为中心使该多面镜PM向规定的旋转方向旋转,而能够使照射到反射面RP上的脉冲状的光束LB1的反射角连续地变化。由此,通过一个反射面RP使光束LB1的反射方向偏转,能够使照射在基板FS的被照射面上的光束LB1的点光SP在扫描方向(基板FS的宽度方向,Y方向)上进行扫描。也就是说,多面镜PM使入射的光束LB1偏转,使点光SP沿着图5所示的描绘线 (扫描线)SL1进行扫描。此外,多面镜PM通过未图示的旋转驱动源(例如,由马达和减速机构等构成)而以一定速度旋转。该旋转驱动源由控制装置18控制。Between the reflector 110 and the optical element 106 for drawing, there is a collimating lens 108 that converts the incident light beam LB1 into parallel light. The reflector 110 reflects the incident light beam LB1 toward the reflector 114 in the -X direction, and the reflector 114 reflects the incident light beam LB1 toward the polygon mirror PM. The polygon mirror (rotating polygon mirror) PM reflects the incident light beam LB1 in the -X direction toward the fθ lens FT having an optical axis parallel to the X axis. The polygon mirror PM deflects (reflects) the incident light beam LB1 within a plane parallel to the XY plane in order to scan the point light SP of the light beam LB1 on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS. Specifically, the polygon mirror PM has a rotation axis AXp extending in the Z direction and a plurality of reflection surfaces RP (eight reflection surfaces RP in the first embodiment) formed around the rotation axis AXp. By rotating the polygonal mirror PM in a predetermined direction of rotation with the rotation axis AXp as the center, the reflection angle of the pulsed light beam LB1 irradiated on the reflection surface RP can be continuously changed. Thus, by deflecting the reflection direction of the light beam LB1 through a reflection surface RP, the point light SP of the light beam LB1 irradiated on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS can be scanned in the scanning direction (the width direction of the substrate FS, the Y direction). In other words, the polygonal mirror PM deflects the incident light beam LB1 so that the point light SP is scanned along the drawing line (scanning line) SL1 shown in Figure 5. In addition, the polygonal mirror PM is rotated at a certain speed by a rotation drive source (for example, composed of a motor and a reduction mechanism, etc.) not shown in the figure. The rotation drive source is controlled by the control device 18.
由于能够通过多面镜PM的一个反射面RP使光束LB1的点光 SP沿着描绘线SL1进行扫描,所以在多面镜PM的一周旋转下,由点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上扫描出的描绘线SL1的数量最大为与反射面RP相同的数量即八条。如上所述,描绘线SL1的实效长度(例如,30mm)被设定成能够通过该多面镜PM使点光SP进行扫描的最大扫描长度(例如,31mm)以下的长度,在初始设定(设计上)中,在最大扫描长度的中央设定有描绘线SL1的中心点。Because the point light SP of the light beam LB1 can be scanned along the drawing line SL1 by one reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, the maximum number of drawing lines SL1 scanned by the point light SP on the illuminated surface of the substrate FS during one rotation of the polygon mirror PM is eight, the same number as the reflection surfaces RP. As described above, the effective length of the drawing line SL1 (e.g., 30 mm) is set to a length less than the maximum scanning length (e.g., 31 mm) that the point light SP can scan by the polygon mirror PM. In the initial setting (design), the center point of the drawing line SL1 is set at the center of the maximum scanning length.
此外,作为一例,在将描绘线SL1的实效长度设为30mm,且一边使实效的尺寸为3μm的点光SP每次1.5μm重叠、一边使点光 SP沿着描绘线SL1照射于基板FS的被照射面上的情况下,在一次扫描中照射的点光SP的数量(来自光源装置14的光束LB的脉冲数)为20000(30mm/1.5μm)。另外,若将沿着描绘线SL1的点光 SP的扫描时间设为200μsec,则必须在该期间照射20000次的脉冲状的点光SP,因此光源装置14的发光频率Fs成为Fs≥20000次 /200μsec=100MHz。Furthermore, as an example, if the effective length of the drawing line SL1 is set to 30 mm, and the spot lights SP having an effective size of 3 μm are irradiated onto the irradiated surface of the substrate FS along the drawing line SL1 while overlapping each other by 1.5 μm, the number of spot lights SP irradiated in one scan (the number of pulses of the light beam LB from the light source device 14) is 20,000 (30 mm/1.5 μm). Furthermore, if the scanning time of the spot lights SP along the drawing line SL1 is set to 200 μsec, the pulsed spot lights SP must be irradiated 20,000 times during this period. Therefore, the light emission frequency Fs of the light source device 14 becomes Fs ≥ 20,000 times/200 μsec = 100 MHz.
返回到扫描单元U1的结构的说明,设在反射镜110与反射镜114 之间的柱面透镜CYa,在与扫描方向正交的Z方向(非扫描方向) 上使光束LB1在多面镜PM的反射面RP上会聚(收敛)成沿与XY 面平行的方向延伸的长椭圆状(狭缝状)。通过该柱面透镜CYa,即使在反射面RP相对于Z方向(Z轴)倾斜的情况(存在面倾倒误差的情况)下,也能够抑制其影响,抑制基于照射到基板FS上的光束LB1的点光的照射位置在基板FS的搬送方向(X方向)上错开。Returning to the description of the structure of the scanning unit U1, the cylindrical lens CYa disposed between the reflector 110 and the reflector 114 converges (converges) the light beam LB1 on the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM in the Z direction (non-scanning direction) perpendicular to the scanning direction into an elongated elliptical shape (slit shape) extending in a direction parallel to the XY plane. This cylindrical lens CYa suppresses the influence of tilting the reflection surface RP relative to the Z direction (Z axis) (in the presence of a surface tilt error), thereby preventing the irradiation position of the point light beam LB1 irradiating the substrate FS from being shifted in the conveying direction (X direction) of the substrate FS.
由多面镜PM反射的光束LB1向包含聚光透镜的fθ透镜FT照射。具有沿X轴方向延伸的光轴的fθ透镜FT是使由多面镜PM反射的光束LB1在与XY平面平行的平面中以与X轴平行的方式向反射镜122投射的远心类的扫描透镜。光束LB1的向fθ透镜FT的入射角θ根据多面镜PM的旋转角(θ/2)而变化。fθ透镜FT将光束 LB1投射到与该入射角θ成正比例的基板FS的被照射面上的像高位置。若将焦点距离设为fo,将像高位置设为y,则fθ透镜FT具有 y=fo·θ的关系。因此,能够通过该fθ透镜FT使光束LB1(点光 SP)在Y方向上准确且等速地进行扫描。在向fθ透镜FT的入射角为0度时,入射到fθ透镜FT的光束LB1沿着fθ透镜FT的光轴上行进。The light beam LB1 reflected by the polygon mirror PM is irradiated onto the fθ lens FT including the focusing lens. The fθ lens FT having an optical axis extending in the X-axis direction is a telecentric scanning lens that projects the light beam LB1 reflected by the polygon mirror PM onto the reflector 122 in a plane parallel to the XY plane in a manner parallel to the X-axis. The incident angle θ of the light beam LB1 onto the fθ lens FT changes according to the rotation angle (θ/2) of the polygon mirror PM. The fθ lens FT projects the light beam LB1 onto the image height position on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS that is proportional to the incident angle θ. If the focal length is fo and the image height position is y, the fθ lens FT has the relationship y=fo·θ. Therefore, the light beam LB1 (point light SP) can be scanned accurately and uniformly in the Y direction by the fθ lens FT. When the incident angle onto the fθ lens FT is 0 degrees, the light beam LB1 incident on the fθ lens FT travels along the optical axis of the fθ lens FT.
从fθ透镜FT照射的光束LB1经由反射镜122而在基板FS上成为点光SP地被照射。设在fθ透镜FT与反射镜122之间的柱面透镜 CYb使会聚在基板FS上的光束LB1的点光SP成为直径为数μm程度(例如,3μm)的微小圆形,其母线与Y方向平行。由此,在基板FS上规定了基于点光(扫描点)SP的沿Y方向延伸的描绘线SL1 (参照图5)。在没有柱面透镜CYb的情况下,通过多面镜PM的近前的柱面透镜CYa的作用,会聚在基板FS上的点光SP会成为沿与扫描方向(Y方向)正交的方向(X方向)延伸的长椭圆形。The light beam LB1 irradiated from the fθ lens FT is irradiated on the substrate FS as a point light SP via the reflector 122. The cylindrical lens CYb provided between the fθ lens FT and the reflector 122 makes the point light SP of the light beam LB1 converged on the substrate FS into a tiny circle with a diameter of several μm (for example, 3 μm), whose generatrix is parallel to the Y direction. Thus, a drawing line SL1 extending in the Y direction based on the point light (scanning point) SP is defined on the substrate FS (refer to FIG5 ). In the absence of the cylindrical lens CYb, the point light SP converged on the substrate FS becomes an elongated ellipse extending in a direction (X direction) orthogonal to the scanning direction (Y direction) due to the action of the cylindrical lens CYa in front of the polygonal mirror PM.
像这样,在基板FS被沿X方向搬送的状态下,通过各扫描单元 U1~U6而使光束LB的点光SP在扫描方向(Y方向)上进行扫描,由此在基板FS上描绘出规定的图案。该各扫描单元U1~U6以在基板FS上的不同区域进行扫描的方式配置于描绘头支承部36。此外,在将基板FS上的点光SP的扫描方向的尺寸(描绘线的长度)设为 Ds、将点光SP在基板FS上的扫描速度(相对扫描的速度)设为Vs 时,光束LB的振荡频率Fs需要满足Fs≥Vs/Ds的关系。这是因为,光束LB为脉冲光,所以若振荡频率Fs不满足Fs≥Vs/Ds的关系,则光束LB的点光SP会隔开规定间隔(间隙)地照射到基板FS上。若振荡频率Fs满足Fs≥Vs/Ds的关系,则点光SP能够以在扫描方向上相互重叠的方式照射到基板FS上,因此即使为脉冲振荡的光束 LB,也能够在基板FS上良好地描绘出沿扫描方向实质连续的直线图案。此外,多面镜PM的旋转速度变得越快则点光SP的扫描速度 Vs变得越快。In this way, when the substrate FS is transported along the X direction, the point light SP of the light beam LB is scanned in the scanning direction (Y direction) by each scanning unit U1 to U6, thereby drawing a predetermined pattern on the substrate FS. The scanning units U1 to U6 are arranged on the drawing head support part 36 in a manner that scans different areas on the substrate FS. In addition, when the size of the point light SP on the substrate FS in the scanning direction (the length of the drawing line) is set to Ds and the scanning speed of the point light SP on the substrate FS (the relative scanning speed) is set to Vs, the oscillation frequency Fs of the light beam LB needs to satisfy the relationship Fs≥Vs/Ds. This is because the light beam LB is a pulsed light, so if the oscillation frequency Fs does not satisfy the relationship Fs≥Vs/Ds, the point light SP of the light beam LB will be irradiated onto the substrate FS at predetermined intervals (gaps). If the oscillation frequency Fs satisfies the relationship Fs ≥ Vs / Ds, the point light SP can be irradiated onto the substrate FS in a manner that overlaps with each other in the scanning direction. Therefore, even with a pulsed oscillating light beam LB, a substantially continuous straight line pattern along the scanning direction can be well drawn on the substrate FS. In addition, the faster the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM becomes, the faster the scanning speed Vs of the point light SP becomes.
图6是表示各扫描单元U1~U6的多面镜PM与多条描绘线SLn (SL1~SL6)的扫描方向之间的关系的图。多个扫描单元U1、U3、 U5和多个扫描单元U2、U4、U6中的反射镜114、多面镜PM及fθ透镜FT为关于中心面Poc对称的结构。因此,通过使各扫描单元 U1~U6的多面镜PM向相同方向(向左)旋转,各扫描单元U1、U3、U5使光束LB的点光SP从描绘开始位置朝向描绘结束位置沿-Y方向进行扫描,各扫描单元U2、U4、U6使光束LB的点光SP从描绘开始位置朝向描绘结束位置沿+Y方向进行扫描。此外,也可以通过使各扫描单元U2、U4、U6的多面镜PM的旋转方向与各扫描单元 U1、U3、U5的多面镜PM的旋转方向为相反方向,而使各扫描单元 U1~U6的光束LB的点光SP的扫描方向调合为相同方向(+Y方向或-Y方向)。Figure 6 shows the relationship between the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit U1 to U6 and the scanning direction of the multiple drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6). The reflector 114, polygon mirror PM, and fθ lens FT in the multiple scanning units U1, U3, and U5 and the multiple scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are symmetrical about the center plane Poc. Therefore, by rotating the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit U1 to U6 in the same direction (to the left), each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 causes the point light SP of the light beam LB to scan in the -Y direction from the drawing start position to the drawing end position, while each scanning unit U2, U4, and U6 causes the point light SP of the light beam LB to scan in the +Y direction from the drawing start position to the drawing end position. In addition, the scanning directions of the point light SP of the light beam LB of each scanning unit U1 to U6 can be adjusted to the same direction (+Y direction or -Y direction) by making the rotation direction of the polygonal mirror PM of each scanning unit U2, U4, and U6 opposite to the rotation direction of the polygonal mirror PM of each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5.
在此,由于多面镜PM旋转,所以反射面RP的角度也随着时间经过而变化。因此,能够使入射到多面镜PM的特定反射面RP的光束LB入射到fθ透镜FT的多面镜PM的旋转角度α存在限制。Here, since the polygon mirror PM rotates, the angle of the reflection surface RP also changes over time. Therefore, there is a limit to the rotation angle α of the polygon mirror PM at which the light beam LB incident on a specific reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM can be incident on the fθ lens FT.
图7是用于说明扫描单元Un的多面镜PM的反射面RP能够使光束LBn偏转(反射)以使其入射到fθ透镜FT的多面镜PM的旋转角度α的图。该旋转角度α是扫描单元Un的多面镜PM能够通过一个反射面RP使点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上进行扫描的多面镜PM的最大扫描旋转角度范围。以下,将旋转角度α称为最大扫描旋转角度范围。多面镜PM以最大扫描旋转角度范围α旋转的期间为点光SP的有效扫描期间(最大扫描时间)。该最大扫描旋转角度范围α与上述的描绘线SLn的最大扫描长度对应,最大扫描旋转角度范围α变得越大则最大扫描长度变得越长。旋转角度β表示从光束LB向特定的一个反射面RP开始入射时的多面镜PM的角度至向上述特定的反射面RP的入射结束时的多面镜PM的角度为止的旋转角度。也就是说,旋转角度β是多面镜PM以反射面RP的一个面的量旋转的角度。旋转角度β由多面镜PM的反射面RP的数量Np 规定,能够以β≈360/Np表示。因此,扫描单元Un的多面镜PM的上述特定的反射面RP无法使点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上进行扫描的、即由多面镜PM的上述特定的反射面RP反射的反射光无法入射到fθ透镜FT的、多面镜PM的非扫描旋转角度范围γ以γ=β-α的关系式表示。该多面镜PM以非扫描旋转角度范围γ旋转的期间成为点光SP的无效扫描期间。在该非扫描旋转角度范围γ中,扫描单元Un无法将光束LBn照射到基板FS上。该旋转角度α与非扫描旋转角度范围γ具有算式(1)的关系。Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining the rotation angle α of the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit Un, which is capable of deflecting (reflecting) the light beam LBn so that it is incident on the fθ lens FT. The rotation angle α is the maximum scanning rotation angle range of the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit Un, which is capable of scanning the point light SP on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS through one reflection surface RP. Hereinafter, the rotation angle α will be referred to as the maximum scanning rotation angle range. The period during which the polygonal mirror PM rotates within the maximum scanning rotation angle range α is the effective scanning period (maximum scanning time) of the point light SP. The maximum scanning rotation angle range α corresponds to the maximum scanning length of the above-mentioned drawing line SLn, and the larger the maximum scanning rotation angle range α becomes, the longer the maximum scanning length becomes. The rotation angle β represents the rotation angle from the angle of the polygonal mirror PM when the light beam LB starts to be incident on a specific reflection surface RP to the angle of the polygonal mirror PM when the incidence on the above-mentioned specific reflection surface RP ends. That is, the rotation angle β is the angle at which the polygonal mirror PM rotates by the amount of one surface of the reflection surface RP. The rotation angle β is determined by the number Np of the reflection surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM and can be expressed as β≈360/Np. Therefore, the above-mentioned specific reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit Un cannot cause the point light SP to scan the irradiated surface of the substrate FS, that is, the reflected light reflected by the above-mentioned specific reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM cannot be incident on the fθ lens FT, and the non-scanning rotation angle range γ of the polygonal mirror PM is expressed by the relationship γ=β-α. The period during which the polygonal mirror PM rotates within the non-scanning rotation angle range γ becomes an invalid scanning period of the point light SP. In this non-scanning rotation angle range γ, the scanning unit Un cannot irradiate the light beam LBn onto the substrate FS. The rotation angle α and the non-scanning rotation angle range γ have a relationship as shown in formula (1).
γ=(360度/Np)-α…(1)γ=(360 degrees/Np)-α…(1)
(其中,N为多面镜PM所具有的反射面RP的数量)(where N is the number of reflecting surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM)
在本第1实施方式中,由于多面镜PM具有八个反射面RP,所以N=8。因此,算式(1)能够用算式(2)表示。In the first embodiment, since the polygon mirror PM has eight reflecting surfaces RP, N = 8. Therefore, equation (1) can be expressed by equation (2).
γ=45度-α…(2)γ=45 degrees-α…(2)
最大扫描旋转角度范围α根据多面镜PM与fθ透镜FT的距离等条件而变化。例如,若将最大扫描旋转角度范围α设为15度,则非扫描旋转角度范围γ为30度,多面镜PM的扫描效率在图7中为α/β=1/3。也就是说,在扫描单元Un的多面镜PM以非扫描旋转角度范围γ(30度)的量旋转的期间,入射到多面镜PM的光束LBn无用。The maximum scanning rotation angle range α varies depending on conditions such as the distance between the polygon mirror PM and the fθ lens FT. For example, if the maximum scanning rotation angle range α is set to 15 degrees, the non-scanning rotation angle range γ is 30 degrees, and the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is α/β = 1/3 in Figure 7. In other words, while the polygon mirror PM of the scanning unit Un rotates within the non-scanning rotation angle range γ (30 degrees), the light beam LBn incident on the polygon mirror PM is useless.
因此,在本第1实施方式中,切换供来自一个光源装置14的光束LB入射的扫描单元Un,而将光束LB周期性地分配给三个扫描单元Un,由此谋求扫描效率的提高。也就是说,通过使三个扫描单元Un的描绘期间(使点光SP进行扫描的扫描期间)相互错开,而使来自光源装置14的光束LB不会变得无用,从而谋求扫描效率的提高。Therefore, in the first embodiment, the scanning unit Un into which the light beam LB from one light source device 14 is incident is switched, and the light beam LB is periodically distributed to the three scanning units Un, thereby improving scanning efficiency. In other words, by staggering the drawing periods (scanning periods during which the spot light SP is scanned) of the three scanning units Un, the light beam LB from the light source device 14 is not wasted, thereby improving scanning efficiency.
此外,虽然有效扫描期间(有效描绘期间)即最大扫描旋转角度范围α是能够使光束LBn向fθ透镜FT入射而使点光SP在描绘线 SLn上有效进行扫描的范围,但最大扫描旋转角度范围α也根据fθ透镜FT的前侧的焦点距离等而变化。在与上述相同的八面的多面镜 PM中最大扫描旋转角度范围α为10度的情况下,根据算式(2),非描绘期间即非扫描旋转角度范围γ成为35度,此时的描绘的扫描效率为大约1/4(10/45)。相反地,在最大扫描旋转角度范围α为 20度的情况下,根据算式(2),非描绘期间即非扫描旋转角度范围γ成为25度,此时的描绘的扫描效率为大约1/2(20/45)。此外,在扫描效率为1/2以上的情况下,分配光束LB的扫描单元Un的数量也可以是两个。也就是说,能够分配光束LB的扫描单元Un的数量受扫描效率所限制。Furthermore, while the effective scanning period (effective drawing period), i.e., the maximum scanning rotation angle range α, is the range within which the light beam LBn can be incident on the fθ lens FT and the spot light SP can be effectively scanned on the drawing line SLn, the maximum scanning rotation angle range α also varies depending on, for example, the focal length of the front side of the fθ lens FT. In the case of the same eight-faceted polygonal mirror PM as described above, when the maximum scanning rotation angle range α is 10 degrees, according to equation (2), the non-drawing period, i.e., the non-scanning rotation angle range γ, becomes 35 degrees. In this case, the drawing scanning efficiency is approximately 1/4 (10/45). Conversely, when the maximum scanning rotation angle range α is 20 degrees, according to equation (2), the non-drawing period, i.e., the non-scanning rotation angle range γ, becomes 25 degrees. In this case, the drawing scanning efficiency is approximately 1/2 (20/45). Furthermore, when the scanning efficiency is 1/2 or greater, the number of scanning units Un that distribute the light beam LB may be two. In other words, the number of scanning units Un that can distribute the light beam LB is limited by the scanning efficiency.
图8是将光导入光学系统40a与多个扫描单元U1、U3、U5之间的光路示意化得到的图。在从控制装置18向选择用光学元件 (AOM)50施加的驱动信号(高频信号)为On、向选择用光学元件58、66施加的驱动信号为Off的情况下,选择用光学元件50使入射的光束LB衍射。由此,由选择用光学元件50衍射的一次衍射光即光束LB1经由反射镜52而向扫描单元U1入射,光束LB不会入射到扫描单元U3、U5。同样地,在从控制装置18向选择用光学元件(AOM)58施加的驱动信号为On、向选择用光学元件50、66 施加的驱动信号为Off的情况下,从Off状态的选择用光学元件50 透射过的光束LB向选择用光学元件58入射,选择用光学元件58使入射的光束LB衍射。由此,由选择用光学元件58衍射的一次衍射光即光束LB3经由反射镜60而向扫描单元U3入射,光束LB不会入射到扫描单元U1、U5。另外,在从控制装置18向选择用光学元件(AOM)66施加的驱动信号为On、向选择用光学元件50、58 施加的驱动信号为Off的情况下,从Off状态的选择用光学元件50、 58透射过的光束LB向选择用光学元件66入射,选择用光学元件66 使入射的光束LB衍射。由此,由选择用光学元件66衍射的一次衍射光即光束LB5通过反射镜68而向扫描单元U5入射,光束LB不会入射到扫描单元U1、U3。FIG8 is a diagram schematically illustrating the optical path between the light-introducing optical system 40a and the plurality of scanning units U1, U3, and U5. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) applied from the control device 18 to the selection optical element (AOM) 50 is on and the drive signal applied to the selection optical elements 58 and 66 is off, the selection optical element 50 diffracts the incident light beam LB. Consequently, the primary diffracted light diffracted by the selection optical element 50, i.e., the light beam LB1, is incident on the scanning unit U1 via the reflector 52, and the light beam LB does not enter the scanning units U3 and U5. Similarly, when the drive signal applied from the control device 18 to the selection optical element (AOM) 58 is on and the drive signal applied to the selection optical elements 50 and 66 is off, the light beam LB that has passed through the off-state selection optical element 50 enters the selection optical element 58, and the selection optical element 58 diffracts the incident light beam LB. As a result, the first-order diffracted light beam LB3 diffracted by the selection optical element 58 enters the scanning unit U3 via the reflector 60, and the light beam LB does not enter the scanning units U1 and U5. Furthermore, when the drive signal applied from the control device 18 to the selection optical element (AOM) 66 is on and the drive signal applied to the selection optical elements 50 and 58 is off, the light beam LB that has passed through the off-state selection optical elements 50 and 58 enters the selection optical element 66, which diffracts the incident light beam LB. As a result, the first-order diffracted light beam LB5 diffracted by the selection optical element 66 enters the scanning unit U5 via the reflector 68, and the light beam LB does not enter the scanning units U1 and U3.
像这样,通过将光导入光学系统40a的多个选择用光学元件50、 58、66沿着来自光源装置14a的光束LB的行进方向直列地配置,而多个选择用光学元件50、58、66能够切换地选择是否使光束LBn (LB1、LB3、LB5)向多个扫描单元U1、U3、U5中的某一个扫描单元Un入射。控制装置18以光束LB入射的扫描单元Un按照例如扫描单元U1→扫描单元U3→扫描单元U5→扫描单元U1这样的顺序周期性地切换的方式,控制多个选择用光学元件50、58、66。即,以光束LBn(LB1、LB3、LB5)按顺序分别对多个扫描单元U1、 U3、U5入射规定的扫描时间的方式进行切换。By arranging the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 for guiding the light into the optical system 40a in series along the direction of travel of the light beam LB from the light source device 14a in this manner, the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 can switchably select whether or not the light beam LBn (LB1, LB3, and LB5) is incident on a particular scanning unit Un among the plurality of scanning units U1, U3, and U5. The control device 18 controls the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 so that the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LB is incident is periodically switched, for example, in the order of scanning unit U1, scanning unit U3, scanning unit U5, and scanning unit U1. In other words, the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 are switched so that the light beam LBn (LB1, LB3, and LB5) is incident on each of the plurality of scanning units U1, U3, and U5 in sequence for a predetermined scanning period.
扫描单元U1的多面镜PM在光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射的期间,其旋转受到控制装置18控制,使得能够将入射的光束LB1朝向 fθ透镜FT反射。即,光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射的期间与基于扫描单元U1实现的光束LB1的点光SP的扫描期间(图7中的最大扫描旋转角度范围α)是同步的。换言之,扫描单元U1的多面镜PM 与光束LB1入射的期间同步地使光束LB1偏转,以使入射到扫描单元U1的光束LB1的点光SP沿着描绘线SL1进行扫描。扫描单元 U3、U5的多面镜PM也是同样地,在光束LB3、LB5向扫描单元 U3、U5入射的期间,其旋转受到控制装置18控制,使得能够将入射的光束LB3、LB5向fθ透镜FT反射。即,光束LB3、LB5向扫描单元U3、U5入射的期间与基于扫描单元U3、U5实现的光束LB3、 LB5的点光SP的扫描期间是同步的。换言之,扫描单元U3、U5的多面镜PM与光束LB3、LB5入射的期间同步地使光束LB3、LB5偏转,以使入射到扫描单元U3、U5的光束LB的点光SP沿着描绘线SL3、SL5进行扫描。During the period when the light beam LB1 is incident on the scanning unit U1, the rotation of the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit U1 is controlled by the control device 18 so that the incident light beam LB1 can be reflected toward the fθ lens FT. That is, the period during which the light beam LB1 is incident on the scanning unit U1 is synchronized with the period during which the point light SP of the light beam LB1 is scanned by the scanning unit U1 (the maximum scanning rotation angle range α in FIG7 ). In other words, the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit U1 deflects the light beam LB1 in synchronization with the period during which the light beam LB1 is incident so that the point light SP of the light beam LB1 incident on the scanning unit U1 is scanned along the drawing line SL1. Similarly, the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning units U3 and U5 is also controlled by the control device 18 so that the incident light beams LB3 and LB5 can be reflected toward the fθ lens FT during the period during which the light beams LB1 are incident on the scanning units U3 and U5. That is, the period during which the light beams LB3 and LB5 are incident on the scanning units U3 and U5 is synchronized with the period during which the point light SP of the light beams LB3 and LB5 is scanned by the scanning units U3 and U5. In other words, the polygon mirror PM of the scanning units U3 and U5 deflects the light beams LB3 and LB5 in synchronization with the period during which the light beams LB3 and LB5 are incident, so that the point light SP of the light beam LB incident on the scanning units U3 and U5 is scanned along the drawing lines SL3 and SL5.
像这样,来自一个光源装置14a的光束LB分时地向三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5中的某一个扫描单元Un供给,因此,扫描单元U1、 U3、U5各自的多面镜PM被控制旋转驱动,以使多面镜PM的旋转速度一致、且其旋转角度位置保持一定角度差(保持相位差)。关于其控制的具体例将在后叙述。In this manner, the light beam LB from one light source device 14a is supplied to one scanning unit Un among the three scanning units U1, U3, and U5 in a time-sharing manner. Therefore, the polygon mirrors PM of each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 are controlled and driven to rotate so that the rotation speeds of the polygon mirrors PM are consistent and their rotational angular positions maintain a certain angular difference (maintain a phase difference). A specific example of this control will be described later.
另外,控制装置18基于图案数据(描绘数据),来控制向各扫描单元U1、U3、U5的描绘用光学元件106供给的驱动信号(高频信号)的On/Off,该图案数据对通过从各扫描单元U1、U3、U5照射的光束LB1、LB3、LB5的点光SP在基板FS上描绘的图案进行规定。由此,各扫描单元U1、U3、U5的描绘用光学元件106能够基于该On/Off的驱动信号,使入射的光束LB1、LB3、LB5衍射,来调制点光SP的强度。关于该图案数据,是例如将描绘图案的一个点(像素)设为3×3μm,按每个点使驱动信号为On(描绘)的情况下为“1”、使驱动信号为Off(非描绘)的情况下为“0”的2值数据作为位图(bit map)数据而生成的,并按各扫描单元Un暂时存储在存储器(RAM)内。Furthermore, the control device 18 controls the on/off switching of the drive signal (high-frequency signal) supplied to the drawing optical element 106 of each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 based on pattern data (drawing data). This pattern data specifies the pattern drawn on the substrate FS by the point light SP of the light beam LB1, LB3, and LB5 emitted from each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5. Consequently, the drawing optical element 106 of each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 can diffract the incident light beam LB1, LB3, and LB5 based on the on/off drive signal, thereby modulating the intensity of the point light SP. This pattern data is generated as bitmap data, for example, by setting one dot (pixel) of the drawing pattern to 3×3 μm. For each dot, the binary data is set to "1" when the drive signal is on (drawing) and "0" when the drive signal is off (not drawing). This data is temporarily stored in the memory (RAM) for each scanning unit Un.
进一步详细说明按每一个扫描单元Un设置的图案数据,图案数据(描绘数据)是以沿着点光SP的扫描方向(主扫描方向,Y方向) 的方向为行方向、以沿着基板FS的搬送方向(副扫描方向,X方向) 的方向为列方向地被二维分解的多个像素的数据(以下,称为像素数据)所构成的位图数据。该像素数据是“0”或“1”的1位的数据。“0”的像素数据表示向基板FS照射的点光SP的强度为低水平(low level),“1”的像素数据表示向基板FS上照射的点光SP的强度为高水平(high level)。图案数据的一列的量的像素数据与一条的量的描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)对应,沿着一条描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)而投射于基板FS的点光SP的强度根据一列的量的像素数据而被调制。将该一列的量的像素数据称为串行数据(serial data)(描绘信息) DLn。也就是说,图案数据是串行数据DLn沿列方向排列而成的位图数据。存在将扫描单元U1的图案数据的串行数据DLn用DL1表示,同样地,将扫描单元U2~U6的图案数据的串行数据DLn用 DL2~DL6表示的情况。The pattern data set for each scanning unit Un is further described in detail. The pattern data (drawing data) is bitmap data composed of data of a plurality of pixels (hereinafter referred to as pixel data) that are two-dimensionally decomposed with the direction along the scanning direction of the point light SP (main scanning direction, Y direction) as the row direction and the direction along the conveying direction of the substrate FS (sub-scanning direction, X direction) as the column direction. The pixel data is 1-bit data of "0" or "1". The pixel data of "0" indicates that the intensity of the point light SP irradiated onto the substrate FS is at a low level (low level), and the pixel data of "1" indicates that the intensity of the point light SP irradiated onto the substrate FS is at a high level (high level). One column of the pattern data corresponds to one drawing line SLn (SL1 to SL6), and the intensity of the point light SP projected onto the substrate FS along one drawing line SLn (SL1 to SL6) is modulated according to one column of the pixel data. The pixel data of this column is called serial data (serial data) (drawing information) DLn. In other words, the pattern data is bitmap data in which serial data DLn are arranged in the column direction. Serial data DLn of the pattern data of scanning unit U1 is sometimes represented by DL1, and similarly, serial data DLn of the pattern data of scanning units U2 to U6 are sometimes represented by DL2 to DL6.
控制装置18基于光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un的图案数据(由“0”、“1”构成的串行数据DLn),向光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un 的描绘用光学元件(AOM)106输入On/Off的驱动信号。描绘用光学元件106若被输入On的驱动信号则使入射的光束LBn衍射而向反射镜110照射,若被输入Off的驱动信号则将入射的光束LBn向未图示的上述屏蔽板或上述吸收体照射。其结果为,关于光束LBn 入射的扫描单元Un,若描绘用光学元件106中输入On的驱动信号,则将光束LBn的点光SP照射到基板FS上(点光SP的强度变高),若描绘用光学元件106中输入Off的驱动信号,则不将光束LBn的点光照射到基板FS上(点光SP的强度变为0)。因此,光束LBn 入射的扫描单元Un能够沿着描绘线SLn在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案。Based on the pattern data (serial data DLn consisting of "0" and "1") of the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident, the control device 18 inputs an On/Off drive signal to the drawing optical element (AOM) 106 of the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident. If the driving signal "On" is input to the drawing optical element 106, the incident light beam LBn is diffracted and irradiated toward the reflector 110. If the driving signal "Off" is input to the drawing optical element 106, the incident light beam LBn is irradiated toward the above-mentioned shielding plate or the above-mentioned absorber (not shown). As a result, with respect to the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident, if the driving signal "On" is input to the drawing optical element 106, the point light SP of the light beam LBn is irradiated onto the substrate FS (the intensity of the point light SP becomes high). If the driving signal "Off" is input to the drawing optical element 106, the point light of the light beam LBn is not irradiated onto the substrate FS (the intensity of the point light SP becomes 0). Therefore, the scanning unit Un to which the light beam LBn is incident can draw a pattern based on the pattern data on the substrate FS along the drawing line SLn.
例如,控制装置18在光束LB3向扫描单元U3入射的情况下,基于扫描单元U3的图案数据,将扫描单元U3的描绘用光学元件106 切换(驱动)成On/Off。由此,扫描单元U3能够沿着描绘线SL3 在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案。像这样,各扫描单元U1、 U3、U5能够沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5来调制点光(扫描点)SP 的强度,并在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案。For example, when light beam LB3 is incident on scanning unit U3, control device 18 switches (drives) scanning unit U3's drawing optical element 106 on and off based on the pattern data of scanning unit U3. This enables scanning unit U3 to draw a pattern based on the pattern data along drawing line SL3 on substrate FS. In this manner, each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 can modulate the intensity of spot light (scanning point) SP along drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5, thereby drawing a pattern based on the pattern data on substrate FS.
此外,虽然使用图8说明了光导入光学系统40a和多个扫描单元 U1、U3、U5的动作,但对于光导入光学系统40b和多个扫描单元 U2、U4、U6也是同样的。简单地进行说明,控制装置18以来自光源装置14b的光束LBn入射的偶数号的扫描单元Un按照例如扫描单元U2→扫描单元U4→扫描单元U6→扫描单元U2这样的顺序切换的方式,控制多个选择用光学元件50、58、66。即,以使光束LB 按顺序分别对多个扫描单元U2、U4、U6入射规定的扫描时间的方式进行切换。各扫描单元U2、U4、U6的多面镜PM在基于控制装置18的控制下,与光束LBn入射的期间同步地使光束LBn偏转,以使入射的光束LBn的点光SP沿着描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6进行扫描。另外,控制装置18以各扫描单元U2、U4、U6能够沿着描绘线 SL2、SL4、SL6在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案的方式,基于光束LBn(LB2、LB4、LB6)入射的扫描单元Un(U2、U4、U6) 的图案数据(由“0”、“1”构成的串行数据DLn(DL2、DL4、DL6)) 来控制该扫描单元Un(U2、U4、U6)的描绘用光学元件(AOM) 106。While FIG8 is used to illustrate the operation of the light introduction optical system 40a and the plurality of scanning units U1, U3, and U5, the same applies to the light introduction optical system 40b and the plurality of scanning units U2, U4, and U6. To briefly explain, the control device 18 controls the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 so that the even-numbered scanning units Un, on which the light beam LBn from the light source device 14b is incident, are switched in the order, for example, scanning unit U2 → scanning unit U4 → scanning unit U6 → scanning unit U2. In other words, the switching is performed so that the light beam LBn is sequentially incident on the plurality of scanning units U2, U4, and U6 for a predetermined scanning period. Under the control of the control device 18, the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit U2, U4, and U6 deflects the light beam LBn in synchronization with the incident period, so that the spot light SP of the incident light beam LBn scans along the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6. In addition, the control device 18 controls the drawing optical element (AOM) 106 of the scanning unit Un (U2, U4, U6) based on the pattern data (serial data DLn (DL2, DL4, DL6) composed of "0" and "1") of the scanning unit Un (U2, U4, U6) on which the light beam LBn (LB2, LB4, LB6) is incident, so that each scanning unit U2, U4, U6 can draw a pattern based on the pattern data along the drawing lines SL2, SL4, SL6 on the substrate FS.
如以上那样,在上述第1实施方式中,由于沿着来自光源装置 14a(14b)的光束LB的行进方向直列地配置有多个选择用光学元件 50、58、66,所以能够通过该多个选择用光学元件50、58、66将光束LBn分时地选择性地向多个扫描单元U1、U3、U5(扫描单元U2、 U4、U6)中的某一个扫描单元Un入射,不会使光束LB变得无用,能够谋求光束LB的利用效率的提高。As described above, in the first embodiment, since a plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 are arranged in series along the traveling direction of the light beam LB from the light source device 14a (14b), the light beam LBn can be selectively incident on one of the scanning units Un among the plurality of scanning units U1, U3, and U5 (scanning units U2, U4, and U6) in a time-sharing manner through the plurality of selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66, and the light beam LB will not become useless, thereby improving the utilization efficiency of the light beam LB.
另外,使多个(在此为三个)扫描单元Un各自的多面镜PM的旋转速度和旋转相位彼此同步,并且,与通过多个选择用光学元件 50、58、66将光束LBn向各扫描单元Un入射的期间同步地,多面镜PM以使点光SP在基板FS上进行扫描的方式使光束LBn偏转,因此,不会使光束LB变得无用,能够谋求扫描效率的提高。In addition, the rotation speed and rotation phase of the polygonal mirror PM of each of the multiple (here three) scanning units Un are synchronized with each other, and, in synchronization with the period during which the light beam LBn is incident on each scanning unit Un through the multiple selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66, the polygonal mirror PM deflects the light beam LBn in such a manner that the point light SP is scanned on the substrate FS. Therefore, the light beam LB will not become useless, and the scanning efficiency can be improved.
此外,选择用光学元件(AOM)50、58、66只要仅在基于扫描单元Un各自的多面镜PM实现的点光SP的一次扫描期间为On状态即可。例如,若将多面镜PM的反射面数设为Np,将多面镜PM 的旋转速度Vp设为(rpm)制,则与多面镜PM的反射面RP的一面的量的旋转角度β对应的时间Tss成为Tss=60/(Np·Vp)(秒)。例如,在反射面数Np为8、旋转速度Vp为3万的情况下,多面镜 PM的一次旋转为2毫秒,时间Tss为0.25毫秒。将其换算成频率则为4kHz,这表示若与用于响应于图案数据而以几十MHz程度高速地调制紫外区域波长的光束LB的声光调制元件(描绘用光学元件 106)相比,则可以是相当低的响应频率的声光调制元件。因此,选择用光学元件(AOM)50、58、66能够使用相对于入射的光束LB (零次光)而偏转的一次衍射光即LBn(LB1~LB6)的衍射角大的选择用光学元件。因此,将相对于从选择用光学元件50、58、66直线地透射过的光束LB的行进路线而偏转了的光束LBn(LB1~LB6) 向扫描单元Un引导的反射镜52、60、68(参照图3、图4)的配置变得容易。Furthermore, the optical elements (AOM) 50, 58, and 66 can be turned on only during a single scan of the point light SP by the respective polygonal mirrors PM of the scanning units Un. For example, if the number of reflection surfaces of the polygonal mirror PM is Np and the rotational speed Vp of the polygonal mirror PM is rpm, the time Tss corresponding to the rotation angle β of one side of the reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM is Tss = 60/(Np·Vp) (seconds). For example, when the number of reflection surfaces Np is 8 and the rotational speed Vp is 30,000, one rotation of the polygonal mirror PM takes 2 milliseconds, and the time Tss is 0.25 milliseconds. Converting this to a frequency of 4 kHz, this means that compared to the acousto-optic modulator (optical element 106 for drawing) used to modulate the ultraviolet wavelength light beam LB at a high speed of several tens of MHz in response to pattern data, it can have a significantly lower response frequency. Therefore, the selection optical elements (AOMs) 50, 58, and 66 can use those with a large diffraction angle for the first-order diffracted light beams LBn (LB1 to LB6) deflected from the incident light beam LB (zero-order light). This facilitates the arrangement of the reflective mirrors 52, 60, and 68 (see Figures 3 and 4) that guide the light beams LBn (LB1 to LB6), which have been deflected from the path of the light beam LB that has linearly passed through the selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66, toward the scanning unit Un.
[上述第1实施方式的变形例][Modification of the First Embodiment]
上述第1实施方式可以如以下那样变形。在上述第1实施方式中,将光束LB分配给三个扫描单元Un,但在本变形例中,将来自一个光源装置14的光束LB分配给五个扫描单元Un。The first embodiment described above can be modified as follows: In the first embodiment described above, the light beam LB is distributed to three scanning units Un, but in this modification, the light beam LB from one light source device 14 is distributed to five scanning units Un.
图9是表示上述第1实施方式的变形例中的描绘头16的结构的图。在本变形例中,光源装置14为一个,描绘头16具有五个扫描单元Un(U1~U5)。此外,对与上述第1实施方式相同的结构标注相同的附图标记或省略图示,仅说明不同部分。此外,在图9中,省略了图3中所示的柱面透镜CYb的图示。FIG9 illustrates the structure of the drawing head 16 in a modified example of the first embodiment. In this modified example, a single light source device 14 is used, and the drawing head 16 includes five scanning units Un (U1 to U5). Components identical to those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from illustration, and only the differences are described. FIG9 also omits the cylindrical lens CYb shown in FIG3 .
在本变形例中,取代光导入光学系统40a、40b而使用光导入光学系统(光束切换部件)130。如图10所示,光导入光学系统130 除了先前的图4所示的聚光透镜42、准直透镜44、反射镜46、聚光透镜48、选择用光学元件50、反射镜52、准直透镜54、聚光透镜 56、选择用光学元件58、反射镜60、准直透镜62、聚光透镜64、选择用光学元件66、反射镜68及吸收体70以外,还具备选择用光学元件132、反射镜134、准直透镜136、聚光透镜138、选择用光学元件140、反射镜142、准直透镜144及聚光透镜146。In this modified example, instead of the light introducing optical systems 40a and 40b, a light introducing optical system (light beam switching component) 130 is used. As shown in FIG10 , the light introducing optical system 130 includes, in addition to the condensing lens 42, collimating lens 44, reflecting mirror 46, condensing lens 48, selection optical element 50, reflecting mirror 52, collimating lens 54, condensing lens 56, selection optical element 58, reflecting mirror 60, collimating lens 62, condensing lens 64, selection optical element 66, reflecting mirror 68, and absorber 70 shown in FIG4 , a selection optical element 132, reflecting mirror 134, collimating lens 136, condensing lens 138, selection optical element 140, reflecting mirror 142, collimating lens 144, and condensing lens 146.
选择用光学元件132、准直透镜136及聚光透镜138按该顺序设在聚光透镜56与选择用光学元件58之间。因此,在本变形例中,选择用光学元件50在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为 Off的情况下,将入射的光束LB直接透射后向选择用光学元件132 照射,聚光透镜56使向选择用光学元件132入射的光束LB以在选择用光学元件132内成为光束腰的方式会聚。The selection optical element 132, the collimating lens 136, and the condensing lens 138 are provided in this order between the condensing lens 56 and the selection optical element 58. Therefore, in this modified example, when the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 50 transmits the incident light beam LB as it is and irradiates the light beam toward the selection optical element 132. The condensing lens 56 condenses the light beam LB incident on the selection optical element 132 so that it forms a beam waist within the selection optical element 132.
选择用光学元件132相对于光束LB而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM)。选择用光学元件132在来自控制装置18 的驱动信号为Off的情况下,将入射的光束LB直接透射后向选择用光学元件58照射,当来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为 On时,将使入射的光束LB衍射的一次衍射光即光束LB2向反射镜 134照射。反射镜134使入射的光束LB2反射,而向扫描单元U2的准直透镜100入射。即,通过由控制装置18将选择用光学元件132 切换成On/Off,而使选择用光学元件132对是否使光束LB2向扫描单元U2入射进行切换。准直透镜136使向选择用光学元件58照射的光束LB成为平行光,聚光透镜138使通过准直透镜136而成为平行光的光束LB以在选择用光学元件58内成为光束腰的方式会聚。The selection optical element 132 is transmissive to the light beam LB and, for example, is an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). When the drive signal from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 132 transmits the incident light beam LB directly and irradiates the light beam LB toward the selection optical element 58. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is on, the selection optical element 132 irradiates the light beam LB2, a primary diffracted light beam from the incident light beam LB, toward the reflector 134. The reflector 134 reflects the incident light beam LB2, causing it to enter the collimating lens 100 of the scanning unit U2. In other words, by switching the selection optical element 132 on and off by the control device 18, the selection optical element 132 switches whether the light beam LB2 is incident on the scanning unit U2. The collimator lens 136 collimates the light beam LB directed toward the selection optical element 58 , and the condenser lens 138 converges the light beam LB collimated by the collimator lens 136 to form a beam waist within the selection optical element 58 .
选择用光学元件140、准直透镜144及聚光透镜146按该顺序设在聚光透镜64与选择用光学元件66之间。因此,在本变形例中,选择用光学元件58在来自控制装置18的驱动信号为Off的情况下,将入射的光束LB直接透射后向选择用光学元件140照射,聚光透镜 64使向选择用光学元件140入射的光束LB以在选择用光学元件140 内成为光束腰的方式会聚。The selection optical element 140, the collimating lens 144, and the condensing lens 146 are provided in this order between the condensing lens 64 and the selection optical element 66. Therefore, in this modified example, when the drive signal from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 58 transmits the incident light beam LB as it is and irradiates the light beam toward the selection optical element 140. The condensing lens 64 condenses the light beam LB incident on the selection optical element 140 so that it forms a beam waist within the selection optical element 140.
选择用光学元件140相对于光束LB而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM)。选择用光学元件140在来自控制装置18 的驱动信号为Off的情况下,将入射的光束LB向选择用光学元件 66照射,当来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为On时,将使入射的光束LB衍射的一次衍射光即光束LB4向反射镜142照射。反射镜142使入射的光束LB4反射,而向扫描单元U4的准直透镜 100照射。即,通过由控制装置18将选择用光学元件140切换成 On/Off,而使选择用光学元件140对是否使光束LB4向扫描单元U4 入射进行切换。准直透镜144使向选择用光学元件66照射的光束LB 成为平行光,聚光透镜146使通过准直透镜144而成为平行光的光束LB以在选择用光学元件66内成为光束腰的方式会聚。The selection optical element 140 is transmissive to the light beam LB and is, for example, an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). When the drive signal from the control device 18 is off, the selection optical element 140 directs the incident light beam LB toward the selection optical element 66. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is on, the selection optical element 140 directs the light beam LB4, a primary diffracted light beam from the incident light beam LB, toward the reflector 142. The reflector 142 reflects the incident light beam LB4 and directs it toward the collimating lens 100 of the scanning unit U4. Specifically, by switching the selection optical element 140 on and off by the control device 18, the selection optical element 140 switches whether the light beam LB4 is incident on the scanning unit U4. The collimator lens 144 collimates the light beam LB directed toward the selection optical element 66 , and the condenser lens 146 converges the light beam LB collimated by the collimator lens 144 to form a beam waist within the selection optical element 66 .
通过将该多个选择用光学元件(AOM)50、58、66、132、140 串联(直列)地配置,能够使光束LBn向多个扫描单元U1~U5中的某一个扫描单元Un入射。控制装置18以光束LBn入射的扫描单元 Un按照例如扫描单元U1→扫描单元U2→扫描单元U3→扫描单元 U4→扫描单元U5→扫描单元U1这样的顺序周期性地切换的方式,控制多个选择用光学元件50、132、58、140、66。即,以光束LBn 按顺序分别对多个扫描单元U1~U5入射规定的扫描时间的方式切换。另外,各扫描单元U1~U5的多面镜PM在基于控制装置18的控制下,与光束LBn入射的期间同步地使光束LBn偏转,以使入射的光束LBn的点光SP沿着描绘线SL1~SL5进行扫描。另外,控制装置18以各扫描单元Un能够沿着描绘线SLn在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案的方式,基于光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un的图案数据(由“0”、“1”构成的串行数据DLn)来控制该扫描单元Un 的描绘用光学元件(AOM)106。By arranging these multiple selection optical elements (AOMs) 50, 58, 66, 132, and 140 in series (inline), the light beam LBn can be directed toward any one scanning unit Un among the multiple scanning units U1 to U5. The control device 18 controls the multiple selection optical elements 50, 132, 58, 140, and 66 so that the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident is periodically switched, for example, in the order of scanning unit U1 → scanning unit U2 → scanning unit U3 → scanning unit U4 → scanning unit U5 → scanning unit U1. In other words, the light beam LBn is sequentially directed toward each of the multiple scanning units U1 to U5 for a predetermined scanning period. Furthermore, under the control of the control device 18, the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit U1 to U5 deflects the light beam LBn in synchronization with the incident period, so that the spot light SP of the incident light beam LBn scans along the trace lines SL1 to SL5. In addition, the control device 18 controls the drawing optical element (AOM) 106 of the scanning unit Un based on the pattern data (serial data DLn composed of "0" and "1") of the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident, so that each scanning unit Un can draw a pattern based on the pattern data along the drawing line SLn on the substrate FS.
即,在本变形例的情况下,五个扫描单元U1~U5的各多面镜PM 以旋转角度位置每次相位错开一定角度量的方式同步旋转。另外,在本变形例的情况下,将光束(激光)LB分时地分配给五个扫描单元U1~U5,因此,以光束LBn能够照射到多面镜PM的一个反射面 RP的角度范围(图7中的旋转角度β)与由反射面RP反射的光束 LBn向fθ透镜FT入射的最大的偏转角(图7中的角度2α)满足β≥5α的方式,来设定fθ透镜FT的前侧焦点距离和/或多面镜PM的反射面数Np。That is, in the case of this modification, each polygon mirror PM of the five scanning units U1 to U5 rotates synchronously in such a manner that the rotation angle position is phase-shifted by a certain angle each time. In addition, in the case of this modification, the light beam (laser) LB is allocated to the five scanning units U1 to U5 in a time-sharing manner. Therefore, the front focal length of the fθ lens FT and/or the number of reflection surfaces Np of the polygon mirror PM are set so that the angle range (rotation angle β in Figure 7) within which the light beam LBn can illuminate one reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM and the maximum deflection angle (angle 2α in Figure 7) of the light beam LBn reflected by the reflection surface RP and incident on the fθ lens FT satisfy β≥5α.
像这样,在本变形例中,也不会使光束LB变得无用,能够提高来自光源装置14的光束LB的利用效率,而谋求扫描效率的提高。此外,在本变形例中,将来自一个光源装置14的光束LB分配给五个扫描单元Un,但也可以将来自一个光源装置14的光束LB分配给两个扫描单元Un,还可以将其分配给四个或六个以上的扫描单元 Un。该情况下,若将所分配的扫描单元Un的数量设为n个,则以光束LBn能够照射到多面镜PM的一个反射面RP的角度范围(图7中的旋转角度β)与由反射面RP反射的光束LB向fθ透镜FT入射的最大的偏转角(图7中的角度2α)满足β≥n×α的方式,来设定fθ透镜FT的前侧焦点距离和/或多面镜PM的反射面数Np。另外,如在上述第1实施方式中说明那样,在将来自两个光源装置14(14a、 14b)的光束LB分配给多个扫描单元Un的情况下,也不限于分配给三个扫描单元Un,可以分配给任意数量的扫描单元Un。例如,可以将来自光源装置14a的光束LB分配给五个扫描单元Un,将来自光源装置14b的光束LB分配给四个扫描单元Un。As described above, in this modification, the light beam LB will not be rendered useless, and the utilization efficiency of the light beam LB from the light source device 14 can be improved, thereby achieving an improvement in scanning efficiency. In addition, in this modification, the light beam LB from one light source device 14 is distributed to five scanning units Un, but the light beam LB from one light source device 14 can also be distributed to two scanning units Un, or it can be distributed to four or six or more scanning units Un. In this case, if the number of distributed scanning units Un is set to n, the front focal length of the fθ lens FT and/or the number Np of reflecting surfaces of the polygonal mirror PM are set in such a way that the angle range (rotation angle β in FIG. 7 ) in which the light beam LBn can illuminate one reflecting surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM and the maximum deflection angle (angle 2α in FIG. 7 ) of the light beam LB reflected by the reflecting surface RP and incident on the fθ lens FT satisfy β ≥ n × α. Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, when the light beams LB from the two light source devices 14 (14a, 14b) are distributed to a plurality of scanning units Un, the distribution is not limited to three scanning units Un, and the light beams LB can be distributed to any number of scanning units Un. For example, the light beam LB from the light source device 14a can be distributed to five scanning units Un, and the light beam LB from the light source device 14b can be distributed to four scanning units Un.
[第2实施方式][Second embodiment]
在上述第1实施方式中,由于在各扫描单元Un内的多面镜PM 的近前设置描绘用光学元件(AOM)106,所以使用的描绘用光学元件106的数量变多,而成本变高。于是,在本第2实施方式中,在来自一个光源装置14的光束LB的光路上设置一个描绘用光调制器 (AOM),使用该一个描绘用光调制器来调制从多个扫描单元Un 向基板FS照射的光束LBn的强度并使其描绘出图案。即,在第2 实施方式中,在多个扫描单元Un的近前仅配置一个要求高响应性的描绘用光调制器(AOM),在各扫描单元Un侧配置响应性可以低的选择用光学元件(AOM)。In the first embodiment described above, since a drawing optical element (AOM) 106 is provided in front of the polygonal mirror PM in each scanning unit Un, the number of drawing optical elements 106 used increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, in this second embodiment, a drawing light modulator (AOM) is provided on the optical path of the light beam LB from a light source device 14, and this single drawing light modulator is used to modulate the intensity of the light beam LBn irradiated from the multiple scanning units Un to the substrate FS to draw a pattern. That is, in the second embodiment, only one drawing light modulator (AOM) requiring high responsiveness is arranged in front of the multiple scanning units Un, and a selection optical element (AOM) whose responsiveness can be low is arranged on the side of each scanning unit Un.
图11是表示第2实施方式的描绘头16的结构的图,图12是表示图11所示的光导入光学系统40a的图。对与上述第1实施方式相同的结构标注相同的附图标记,并仅说明不同部分。此外,在图11 中,省略了图3中所示的柱面透镜CYb的图示,光导入光学系统40a、 40b具有相同结构,因此,在此对光导入光学系统40a进行说明,并省略光导入光学系统40b的说明。如图12所示,光导入光学系统40a 除了先前的图4所示的聚光透镜42、准直透镜44、反射镜46、聚光透镜48、选择用光学元件50、反射镜52、准直透镜54、聚光透镜 56、选择用光学元件58、反射镜60、准直透镜62、聚光透镜64、选择用光学元件66、反射镜68及吸收体70以外,还具备作为描绘用光调制器的的描绘用光学元件(AOM)150、准直透镜152、聚光透镜154及吸收体156。在本第2实施方式中,如图11所示,在各扫描单元U1~U6内不具有第1实施方式那样的描绘用光学元件106。FIG11 illustrates the structure of the drawing head 16 according to the second embodiment, and FIG12 illustrates the light introduction optical system 40a shown in FIG11 . Components identical to those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and only the differences will be described. FIG11 omits the cylindrical lens CYb shown in FIG3 . Since the light introduction optical systems 40a and 40b have the same structure, the light introduction optical system 40a will be described here, while the description of the light introduction optical system 40b will be omitted. As shown in FIG12 , the light introduction optical system 40a includes, in addition to the condenser lens 42, collimator lens 44, reflector 46, condenser lens 48, selection optical element 50, reflector 52, collimator lens 54, condenser lens 56, selection optical element 58, reflector 60, collimator lens 62, condenser lens 64, selection optical element 66, reflector 68, and absorber 70 shown in FIG4 , an image drawing optical element (AOM) 150 serving as an image drawing light modulator, a collimator lens 152, condenser lens 154, and an absorber 156. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG11 , each of the scanning units U1 to U6 does not include the image drawing optical element 106 as in the first embodiment.
描绘用光学元件150、准直透镜152及聚光透镜154按该顺序设在聚光透镜48与选择用光学元件50之间。因此,在本第2实施方式中,反射镜46使通过准直透镜44而成为平行光的光束LB反射而朝向描绘用光学元件150。聚光透镜48使向描绘用光学元件150入射的光束LB以在描绘用光学元件150内成为光束腰的方式会聚(收敛)。The image drawing optical element 150, the collimating lens 152, and the condensing lens 154 are provided in this order between the condensing lens 48 and the selection optical element 50. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the reflector 46 reflects the light beam LB, which has been parallelized by the collimating lens 44, toward the image drawing optical element 150. The condensing lens 48 converges the light beam LB incident on the image drawing optical element 150 so that it forms a beam waist within the image drawing optical element 150.
描绘用光学元件150相对于光束LB而具有透射性,例如,使用声光调制元件(AOM)。描绘用光学元件150与选择用光学元件50、 58、66中的位于最靠光源装置14(14a)侧的初级的选择用光学元件50相比设在光源装置14(14a)侧。描绘用光学元件150在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为Off的情况下,将入射的光束LB向吸收体156照射,当来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为On时,将使入射的光束LB衍射的作为一次衍射光的光束(描绘光束)LB向初级的选择用光学元件50照射。准直透镜152使向选择用光学元件50照射的光束LB成为平行光,聚光透镜154使通过准直透镜152而成为平行光的光束LB以在选择用光学元件50内成为光束腰的方式会聚(收敛)。The drawing optical element 150 is transmissive to the light beam LB and, for example, is an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). The drawing optical element 150 is located closer to the light source device 14 (14a) than the primary selection optical element 50, which is located closest to the light source device 14 (14a) among the selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is off, the drawing optical element 150 directs the incident light beam LB toward the absorber 156. When the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is on, the drawing optical element 150 directs the light beam LB diffracted from the incident light beam LB as primary diffracted light (drawing light beam) LB toward the primary selection optical element 50. The collimating lens 152 parallelizes the light beam LB directed to the selection optical element 50, and the focusing lens 154 converges the light beam LB, which has been parallelized by the collimating lens 152, to form a beam waist within the selection optical element 50.
如图11所示,扫描单元U1~U6具有准直透镜100、反射镜102、反射镜110、柱面透镜CYa、反射镜114、多面镜PM、fθ透镜FT、柱面透镜CYb(在图11中省略图示)及反射镜122,而且,还具有作为光束成形透镜的第1成形透镜158a及第2成形透镜158b。也就是说,在本第2实施方式中,取代第1实施方式的聚光透镜104及准直透镜108,而在扫描单元U1~U6中设有第1成形透镜158a及第 2成形透镜158b。As shown in FIG11 , the scanning units U1 to U6 include a collimating lens 100, a reflecting mirror 102, a reflecting mirror 110, a cylindrical lens CYa, a reflecting mirror 114, a polygon mirror PM, an fθ lens FT, a cylindrical lens CYb (not shown in FIG11 ), and a reflecting mirror 122. Furthermore, the scanning units U1 to U6 include a first shaping lens 158a and a second shaping lens 158b as beam shaping lenses. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the first shaping lens 158a and the second shaping lens 158b are provided in place of the condenser lens 104 and the collimating lens 108 of the first embodiment.
图13是将图12的光导入光学系统40a与多个扫描单元U1、U3、 U5之间的光路示意化得到的图。控制装置18基于图案数据(由“0”、“1”构成的串行数据DL1、DL3、DL6),向光导入光学系统40a的描绘用光学元件150输出On/Off的驱动信号(高频信号),该图案数据对通过从各扫描单元U1、U3、U5照射的光束LB1、LB3、LB5 的点光SP而在基板FS上描绘的图案进行规定。由此,光导入光学系统40a的描绘用光学元件150能够基于该On/Off的驱动信号使入射的光束LB衍射来调制点光SP的强度(使其On/Off)。Figure 13 is a diagram schematically illustrating the optical path between the light-introducing optical system 40a and the multiple scanning units U1, U3, and U5 in Figure 12 . The control device 18 outputs an on/off drive signal (a high-frequency signal) to the image drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40a based on pattern data (serial data DL1, DL3, and DL6 consisting of "0" and "1"). This pattern data specifies the pattern drawn on the substrate FS by the spot light SP of the light beams LB1, LB3, and LB5 emitted from the scanning units U1, U3, and U5. Consequently, the image drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40a can diffract the incident light beam LB based on the on/off drive signal to modulate the intensity of the spot light SP (turning it on and off).
详细地进行说明,控制装置18基于光束LBn入射的扫描单元 Un的图案数据,向描绘用光学元件150输入On/Off的驱动信号。描绘用光学元件150若被输入有On的驱动信号(高频信号)则使入射的光束LB衍射,而向选择用光学元件50照射(向选择用光学元件 50入射的光束LB的强度变高)。另一方面,描绘用光学元件150 若被输入有Off的驱动信号(高频信号),则将入射的光束LB向吸收体156(图12)照射(向选择用光学元件50入射的光束LB的强度变为0)。因此,光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un能够沿着描绘线 SLn将经强度调制的光束LB向基板FS照射,能够在基板FS上描绘基于图案数据的图案。To explain in detail, the control device 18 inputs an On/Off drive signal to the drawing optical element 150 based on the pattern data of the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident. If the drawing optical element 150 is input with an On drive signal (high-frequency signal), the incident light beam LB is diffracted and irradiated toward the selection optical element 50 (the intensity of the light beam LB incident on the selection optical element 50 becomes higher). On the other hand, if the drawing optical element 150 is input with an Off drive signal (high-frequency signal), the incident light beam LB is irradiated toward the absorber 156 (Figure 12) (the intensity of the light beam LB incident on the selection optical element 50 becomes 0). Therefore, the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident can irradiate the intensity-modulated light beam LB toward the substrate FS along the drawing line SLn, and can draw a pattern based on the pattern data on the substrate FS.
例如,在光束LB3向扫描单元U3入射的情况下,控制装置18 基于扫描单元U3的图案数据,将光导入光学系统40a的描绘用光学元件150切换成On/Off。由此,扫描单元U3能够沿着描绘线SL3 向基板FS照射经强度调制的光束LB,能够在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案。光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un以例如扫描单元U1→扫描单元U3→扫描单元U5→扫描单元U1的方式依次进行切换。因此,控制装置18同样地,以扫描单元U1的图案数据→扫描单元U3 的图案数据→扫描单元U5的图案数据→扫描单元U1的图案数据的方式,对决定向光导入光学系统40a的描绘用光学元件150发送的 On/Off信号的图案数据依次进行切换。然后,控制装置18基于依次切换得到的图案数据来控制光导入光学系统40a的描绘用光学元件 150。由此,各扫描单元U1、U3、U5能够通过沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、 SL5向基板FS照射经强度调制的光束LB,来在基板FS上描绘出与图案数据相应的图案。For example, when the light beam LB3 is incident on the scanning unit U3, the control device 18 switches the drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40a on/off based on the pattern data of the scanning unit U3. As a result, the scanning unit U3 can irradiate the substrate FS with the intensity-modulated light beam LB along the drawing line SL3, and can draw a pattern based on the pattern data on the substrate FS. The scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident is switched sequentially, for example, in the order of scanning unit U1 → scanning unit U3 → scanning unit U5 → scanning unit U1. Therefore, the control device 18 similarly switches the pattern data that determines the on/off signal sent to the drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40a in the order of pattern data of scanning unit U1 → pattern data of scanning unit U3 → pattern data of scanning unit U5 → pattern data of scanning unit U1. Then, the control device 18 controls the drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40a based on the pattern data obtained by sequential switching. Thus, each scanning unit U1 , U3 , U5 can draw a pattern corresponding to the pattern data on the substrate FS by irradiating the substrate FS with the intensity-modulated light beam LB along the drawing lines SL1 , SL3 , SL5 .
以上,参照图14~图16详细说明适用于第2实施方式的控制系统的一部分结构及其动作。此外,以下说明的结构及动作也能够适用于第1实施方式。图14是作为一例的设在图11、图13中的三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自内的多面镜PM的旋转控制系统的框图,由于扫描单元U1、U3、U5的结构相同,所以对相同部件标注了相同的附图标记。在扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自中设有对通过多面镜 PM而生成在基板FS上的描绘线(扫描线)SL1、SL3、SL5的扫描开始定时进行光电检测的原点传感器OP1、OP3、OP5。原点传感器 OP1、OP3、OP5是向多面镜PM的反射面RP投射光并接收其反射光的光电检测器,每当点光SP来到描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5的扫描开始点的紧前位置时,分别输出脉冲状的原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5。The above describes in detail a portion of the structure and operation of a control system applicable to the second embodiment with reference to Figures 14 to 16 . Furthermore, the structure and operation described below are also applicable to the first embodiment. Figure 14 is a block diagram of an example rotation control system for the polygon mirror PM provided within each of the three scanning units U1, U3, and U5 shown in Figures 11 and 13 . Since the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 have identical structures, identical components are designated by the same reference numerals. Each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 is equipped with an origin sensor OP1, OP3, or OP5 that photoelectrically detects the start timing of scanning the drawing lines (scanning lines) SL1, SL3, and SL5 generated on the substrate FS by the polygon mirror PM. The origin sensors OP1, OP3, and OP5 are photodetectors that project light onto the reflective surface RP of the polygon mirror PM and receive the reflected light. Whenever the spot light SP reaches a position immediately before the scanning start point of the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5, they output pulsed origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5, respectively.
定时计测部180输入原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5,对原点信号SZ1、 SZ3、SZ5各自的产生定时是否在规定的容许范围(时间间隔)内进行计测,若产生从该容许范围偏离的误差,则将与之相应的偏差信息输出至伺服控制装置182。伺服控制装置182向马达Mp(马达 Mp对各扫描单元U1、U3、U5内的多面镜PM进行旋转驱动)的各伺服驱动电路部输出基于偏差信息的指令值。马达Mp的各伺服驱动电路部由反馈电路部FBC和伺服驱动电路(放大器)SCC构成,其中,该反馈电路部FBC输入来自安装在马达Mp的旋转轴上的编码器EN的升降脉冲信号(以下,称为编码器信号),并输出与多面镜PM的旋转速度相应的速度信号,该伺服驱动电路(放大器)SCC 输入来自伺服控制装置182的指令值和来自反馈电路部FBC的速度信号,并驱动马达Mp以成为与指令值相应的旋转速度。此外,伺服驱动电路部(反馈电路部FBC、伺服驱动电路SCC)、定时计测部180及伺服控制装置182构成控制装置18的一部分。The timing measurement unit 180 receives the origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 as input, and measures whether the generation timing of each of the origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 is within a predetermined tolerance range (time interval). If an error deviates from the tolerance range, the timing measurement unit 180 outputs corresponding deviation information to the servo control unit 182. The servo control unit 182 outputs a command value based on the deviation information to each servo drive circuit unit of the motor Mp (the motor Mp rotationally drives the polygon mirror PM in each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5). Each servo drive circuit section of the motor Mp consists of a feedback circuit section FBC and a servo drive circuit (amplifier) SCC. The feedback circuit section FBC receives an up/down pulse signal (hereinafter referred to as an encoder signal) from an encoder EN mounted on the rotating shaft of the motor Mp and outputs a speed signal corresponding to the rotational speed of the polygon mirror PM. The servo drive circuit (amplifier) SCC receives a command value from the servo control device 182 and the speed signal from the feedback circuit section FBC and drives the motor Mp to a rotational speed corresponding to the command value. The servo drive circuit section (feedback circuit section FBC, servo drive circuit SCC), the timing measurement section 180, and the servo control device 182 form part of the control device 18.
在本第2实施方式中,三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5内的各多面镜PM需要在其旋转角度位置中保持一定相位差且以相同速度旋转,为了实现该目的,定时计测部180输入原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5,例如,进行图15的时序图所示那样的计测。In this second embodiment, each polygon mirror PM in the three scanning units U1, U3, and U5 needs to maintain a certain phase difference in its rotation angle position and rotate at the same speed. In order to achieve this goal, the timing measurement unit 180 inputs the origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5, for example, and performs measurements as shown in the timing diagram of Figure 15.
图15示意地示出在三个多面镜PM关于旋转角度以规定的容许范围内的相位差旋转的情况下生成的各种信号波形。在刚使各多面镜PM旋转之后,原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5的相对的相位差各自不同,但定时计测部180例如以原点信号SZ1为基准,以与原点信号 SZ1相同的频率(周期)产生其他原点信号SZ3、SZ5,且以三个原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5间的时间间隔Ts1、Ts2、Ts3均相等的状态为基准值,计测与相对于该值的误差所对应的修正信息。定时计测部180将该修正信息向伺服控制装置182输出,由此扫描单元U3、 U5的各马达Mp进行伺服控制,三个原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5的产生定时如图15那样被控制成以Ts1=Ts2=Ts3稳定。Figure 15 schematically illustrates various signal waveforms generated when the three polygon mirrors PM rotate with phase differences within a predetermined tolerance range with respect to the rotation angle. Immediately after each polygon mirror PM rotates, the relative phase differences of the origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 differ. However, the timing measurement unit 180 generates the other origin signals SZ3 and SZ5 at the same frequency (period) as origin signal SZ1, using origin signal SZ1 as a reference. The timing measurement unit 180 uses the equal time intervals Ts1, Ts2, and Ts3 between the three origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 as a reference value and measures correction information corresponding to the error relative to this value. The timing measurement unit 180 outputs this correction information to the servo control unit 182, thereby performing servo control on the motors Mp of the scanning units U3 and U5. As shown in Figure 15, the generation timing of the three origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 is controlled to stabilize at Ts1 = Ts2 = Ts3.
当原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5的产生定时稳定后,定时计测部180 向先前的图11~图13中所示的选择用光学元件50、58、66各自输出描绘使能(On)信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5。描绘使能(On)信号SPP1、 SPP3、SPP5在此仅在H电平的期间中使对应的选择用光学元件50、 58、66进行调制动作(光的偏转切换动作)。由于在三个原点信号 SZ1、SZ3、SZ5稳定后会维持一定的相位差(在此为原点信号SZ1 的周期的1/3),所以描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5的各上升 (L→H)也具有一定的相位差。该描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5 对应于用于切换选择用光学元件50、58、66的驱动信号(高频信号)。After the generation timing of origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 stabilizes, the timing measurement unit 180 outputs drawing enable (On) signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 to the selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 shown in Figures 11 to 13 , respectively. Drawing enable (On) signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 only modulate the corresponding selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 (switching the light deflection) during their H-level periods. Since the three origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 maintain a certain phase difference (here, one-third of the period of origin signal SZ1) after stabilization, the rising (L→H) phases of the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 also have a certain phase difference. These drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 correspond to the drive signals (high-frequency signals) used to switch the selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66.
描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5的下降(H→L)的定时是通过以定时计测部180内的计数器对用于在各描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5 内将点光On/Off的时钟信号CLK进行计测而设定的。该时钟信号 CLK掌管描绘用光学元件150(或图3中的描绘用光学元件106)的 On/Off的定时,是由描绘线SLn(SL1、SL3、SL5)的长度、点光 SP在基板FS上的尺寸、点光SP的扫描速度Vs等确定的。例如,在描绘线的长度为30mm、点光SP的尺寸(直径)为6μm、使点光 SP在扫描方向上每次重叠3μm地On/Off的情况下,只要在定时计测部180内的计数器将时钟信号CLK计数到10000(30mm/3μm)次后,使描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5下降(H→L)即可。The timing of the falling (H to L) phase of drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 is set by measuring the clock signal CLK used to turn the spotlight on and off within each drawing line SL1, SL3, and SL5 using a counter within the timing measurement unit 180. This clock signal CLK controls the on/off timing of the drawing optical element 150 (or the drawing optical element 106 in FIG3 ) and is determined by factors such as the length of the drawing line SLn (SL1, SL3, and SL5), the size of the spotlight SP on the substrate FS, and the scanning speed Vs of the spotlight SP. For example, if the drawing line length is 30 mm, the size (diameter) of the spotlight SP is 6 μm, and the spotlight SP is turned on and off with each spotlight SP overlapping by 3 μm in the scanning direction, the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 can be set to the falling (H to L) phase after the counter within the timing measurement unit 180 has counted the clock signal CLK to 10,000 (30 mm/3 μm) times.
另外,若将多面镜PM的反射面设为十个面、将其旋转速度设为 Vp(rpm),则各原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5的频率为10Vp/60(Hz)。因此,在时间间隔稳定于Ts1=Ts2=Ts3的情况下,时间间隔Ts1成为60/(30Vp)秒。作为一例,若将多面镜PM的基准的旋转速度 Vp设为8000rpm,则时间间隔Ts1成为60/(30·8000)秒=250μS。Furthermore, if the polygon mirror PM has ten reflective surfaces and its rotational speed is Vp (rpm), the frequency of each origin signal SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 is 10 Vp/60 (Hz). Therefore, when the time intervals are stabilized at Ts1 = Ts2 = Ts3, the time interval Ts1 is 60/(30 Vp) seconds. As an example, if the reference rotational speed Vp of the polygon mirror PM is 8000 rpm, the time interval Ts1 is 60/(30·8000) seconds = 250 μs.
如图15那样,描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5的On时间(H 电平的持续时间)Toa为来自多面镜PM的光束(激光)LB作为点光投射到基板FS上的期间(投射期间),但需要设定得比时间间隔 Ts1短。于是,例如,若将On时间Toa设定为200μS,则用于在此期间计数10000次的时钟信号CLK的频率成为10000/200=50 (MHz)。与这样的时钟信号CLK同步地,从图案数据(位图上的“0”或“1”)生成的描绘线SLn所对应的描绘位串数据Sdw或串行数据DLn(例如,10000位的量)被输出到描绘用光学元件150。此外,如图3那样,在扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自中设有描绘用光学元件 106的结构中,与描绘线SL1对应的描绘位串数据Sdw或串行数据 DL1被发送到扫描单元U1的描绘用光学元件106,与描绘线SL3对应的描绘位串数据Sdw或串行数据DL3被发送到扫描单元U3的描绘用光学元件106,与描绘线SL5对应的描绘位串数据Sdw或串行数据DL5被发送到扫描单元U5的描绘用光学元件106。As shown in Figure 15 , the on-time (H-level duration) Toa of the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 is the period (projection period) during which the light beam (laser) LB from the polygon mirror PM is projected onto the substrate FS as a point light. However, it must be set shorter than the time interval Ts1. For example, if the on-time Toa is set to 200 μs, the frequency of the clock signal CLK used to count 10,000 times during this period becomes 10,000/200 = 50 MHz. Synchronously with this clock signal CLK, the drawing bit string data Sdw or serial data DLn (e.g., 10,000 bits) corresponding to the drawing line SLn generated from the pattern data ("0" or "1" on the bitmap) is output to the drawing optical element 150. In addition, as shown in Figure 3, in a structure in which a drawing optical element 106 is provided in each of the scanning units U1, U3, and U5, the drawing bit string data Sdw or serial data DL1 corresponding to the drawing line SL1 is sent to the drawing optical element 106 of the scanning unit U1, the drawing bit string data Sdw or serial data DL3 corresponding to the drawing line SL3 is sent to the drawing optical element 106 of the scanning unit U3, and the drawing bit string data Sdw or serial data DL5 corresponding to the drawing line SL5 is sent to the drawing optical element 106 of the scanning unit U5.
在本第2实施方式中,从三条描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5各自所对应的图案数据生成的描绘位串数据Sdw或串行数据DLn与描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5(或原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5)同步地依次被供给用于描绘用光学元件150的On/Off。In this second embodiment, the drawing bit string data Sdw or serial data DLn generated from the pattern data corresponding to each of the three drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are supplied in sequence to the On/Off of the drawing optical element 150 in synchronization with the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 (or the origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5).
图16示出生成这样的描绘位串数据Sdw的电路的一例,该电路具有生成电路(图案数据生成电路)301、303、305和OR电路GT8。生成电路301具备存储器部BM1、计数器部CN1及闸部GT1,生成电路303具备存储器部BM3、计数器部CN3及闸部GT3,生成电路 305具备存储器部BM5、计数器部CN5及闸部GT5。该生成电路301、 303、305及OR电路GT8构成控制装置18的一部分。FIG16 shows an example of a circuit for generating such drawing bit string data Sdw. This circuit includes generation circuits (pattern data generation circuits) 301, 303, and 305, and an OR circuit GT8. Generation circuit 301 includes a memory section BM1, a counter section CN1, and a gate section GT1. Generation circuit 303 includes a memory section BM3, a counter section CN3, and a gate section GT3. Generation circuit 305 includes a memory section BM5, a counter section CN5, and a gate section GT5. These generation circuits 301, 303, 305, and OR circuit GT8 constitute part of the control device 18.
存储器部BM1、BM3、BM5是用于暂时存储与各扫描单元U1、 U3、U5要描绘曝光的图案对应的位图数据(图案数据)的存储器。计数器部CN1、CN3、CN5是用于使各存储器部BM1、BM3、BM5 内的位图数据(图案数据)中的接着要描绘的一条描绘线的量的位串(例如,10000位)逐位地作为与时钟信号CLK同步的串行数据 DL1、DL3、DL5而在描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5为On的期间中输出的计数器。The memory units BM1, BM3, and BM5 are memories for temporarily storing bitmap data (pattern data) corresponding to the pattern to be drawn and exposed by each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5. The counter units CN1, CN3, and CN5 are counters for outputting a bit string (e.g., 10,000 bits) corresponding to the next drawing line to be drawn, from the bitmap data (pattern data) stored in each memory unit BM1, BM3, and BM5, bit by bit as serial data DL1, DL3, and DL5 synchronized with the clock signal CLK, while the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 are on.
各存储器部BM1、BM3、BM5内的位图数据通过未图示的地址计数器等按一条描绘线的量的数据而偏移。该偏移例如,若为存储器部BM1,则在一条描绘线的量的串行数据DL1输出结束后,接着成为主动的扫描单元U3的原点信号SZ3产生的定时进行。同样地,存储器部BM3内的位图数据的偏移在串行数据DL3输出结束后,接着成为主动的扫描单元U5的原点信号SZ5产生的定时进行,存储器部BM5内的位图数据的偏移在串行数据DL5输出结束后,接着成为主动的扫描单元U1的原点信号SZ1产生的定时进行。The bitmap data within each memory unit BM1, BM3, and BM5 is shifted by the amount of data corresponding to one drawing line using an address counter (not shown). For example, in the case of memory unit BM1, this shifting occurs at the timing of the generation of the origin signal SZ3 by the scanning unit U3, which becomes the next active scan unit, after the output of the serial data DL1 corresponding to one drawing line is completed. Similarly, the bitmap data within memory unit BM3 is shifted at the timing of the generation of the origin signal SZ5 by the scanning unit U5, which becomes the next active scan unit, after the output of the serial data DL3 is completed. The bitmap data within memory unit BM5 is shifted at the timing of the generation of the origin signal SZ1 by the scanning unit U1, which becomes the next active scan unit, after the output of the serial data DL5 is completed.
这样依次生成的各串行数据DL1、DL3、DL5从在描绘使能信号 SPP1、SPP3、SPP5为On的期间中打开的闸部GT1、GT3、GT5通过,而施加到三输入的OR电路GT8。OR电路GT8将按串行数据 DL1→DL3→DL5→DL1···的顺序反复合成的位数据列作为描绘位串数据Sdw输出以用于描绘用光学元件150的On/Off。此外,如图3那样,在扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自中设有描绘用光学元件106 的结构中,只要将从闸部GT1输出的串行数据DL1向扫描单元U1 内的描绘用光学元件106发送、将从闸部GT3输出的串行数据DL3 向扫描单元U3内的描绘用光学元件106发送、将从闸部GT5输出的串行数据DL5向扫描单元U5内的描绘用光学元件106发送即可。The serial data DL1, DL3, and DL5 generated in this manner pass through gates GT1, GT3, and GT5, which are open while the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 are on, and are applied to a three-input OR circuit GT8. OR circuit GT8 outputs the bit data sequence, synthesized repeatedly in the order of serial data DL1 → DL3 → DL5 → DL1, etc., as drawing bit string data Sdw, which is used to turn on/off the drawing optical element 150. Furthermore, as shown in FIG3 , in a configuration where each of the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 includes an drawing optical element 106, the serial data DL1 output from gate GT1 is transmitted to the drawing optical element 106 within scanning unit U1, the serial data DL3 output from gate GT3 is transmitted to the drawing optical element 106 within scanning unit U3, and the serial data DL5 output from gate GT5 is transmitted to the drawing optical element 106 within scanning unit U5.
如以上那样,描绘用光学元件150(或106)的On/Off需要响应于高速的时钟信号CLK(例如50MHz),但选择用光学元件50、58、 66只要与描绘使能信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5(或原点信号SZ1、SZ3、 SZ5)同步地进行On/Off即可,其响应频率在先前的数值例的情况下,时间间隔Toa(或Ts1)为200μS,因此可以为10KHz左右,能够利用透射率高且便宜的元件。此外,若将定时计测部180内的计数器所计数的、或图16中的计数器部CN1、CN3、CN5所计数的时钟信号CLK的频率设为Fcc、将来自光源装置14的光束LB的脉冲振荡的基本频率设为Fs,则将n设为1以上(优选为n≥2)的整数,且设定成满足n·Fcc=Fs的关系即可。As described above, the on/off switching of the drawing optical element 150 (or 106) needs to respond to a high-speed clock signal CLK (e.g., 50 MHz). However, the selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66 only need to be turned on and off in synchronization with the drawing enable signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 (or origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5). In the previous numerical example, the response frequency can be approximately 10 kHz, since the time interval Toa (or Ts1) is 200 μs, allowing the use of inexpensive elements with high transmittance. Furthermore, if the frequency of the clock signal CLK counted by the counter in the timing measurement unit 180 or by the counter units CN1, CN3, and CN5 in FIG. 16 is denoted as Fcc, and the fundamental frequency of the pulse oscillation of the light beam LB from the light source device 14 is denoted as Fs, then n can be set to an integer greater than 1 (preferably n ≥ 2) and set so as to satisfy the relationship n·Fcc = Fs.
以上,说明了使用图13的光导入光学系统40a和多个扫描单元 U1、U3、U5的动作、及使用图14~图16的各扫描单元U1、U3、 U5的描绘定时等,但对于光导入光学系统40b和多个扫描单元U2、 U4、U6也是同样的。简单地进行说明,光束LB入射的扫描单元 Un以例如扫描单元U2→扫描单元U4→扫描单元U6→扫描单元U2 的方式依次进行切换。因此,控制装置18同样地,以扫描单元U2 的图案数据→扫描单元U4的图案数据→扫描单元U6的图案数据→扫描单元U2的图案数据的方式,对决定向光导入光学系统40b的描绘用光学元件150发送的On/Off信号的图案数据依次进行切换。而且,控制装置18基于依次切换得到的图案数据来控制光导入光学系统40b的描绘用光学元件150。或者,通过图16所示那样的电路结构生成将三条描绘线的量的图案数据合成的描绘位串数据Sdw并向描绘用光学元件150供给。由此,各扫描单元U2、U4、U6通过沿着描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6向基板FS照射经强度调制的光束LB,而能够在基板FS上描绘出基于图案数据的图案。While the above descriptions use the operation of the light-introducing optical system 40a and the multiple scanning units U1, U3, and U5 in Figure 13, as well as the drawing timing of each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 in Figures 14 to 16, the same applies to the light-introducing optical system 40b and the multiple scanning units U2, U4, and U6. Simply put, the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LB is incident is sequentially switched, for example, in the order of scanning unit U2, scanning unit U4, scanning unit U6, and scanning unit U2. Therefore, the control device 18 similarly switches the pattern data that determines the on/off signal sent to the drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40b in the order of pattern data for scanning unit U2, pattern data for scanning unit U4, pattern data for scanning unit U6, and pattern data for scanning unit U2. Furthermore, the control device 18 controls the drawing optical element 150 of the light-introducing optical system 40b based on the pattern data obtained through the sequential switching. Alternatively, a circuit configuration such as that shown in FIG16 is used to generate drawing bit string data Sdw synthesized from pattern data corresponding to three drawing lines and supply the data to the drawing optical element 150. Thus, each scanning unit U2, U4, and U6 can draw a pattern based on the pattern data on the substrate FS by irradiating the substrate FS with an intensity-modulated light beam LB along the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6.
在以上的上述第2实施方式中,除了上述第1实施方式的效果以外,还能得到以下的效果。即,在光导入光学系统40a内设置一个描绘用光学元件150,将该描绘用光学元件150与初级的选择用光学元件50相比靠光源装置14a侧配置,并用一个描绘用光学元件150根据图案来调制从多个扫描单元U1、U3、U5向基板FS照射的光束 LB1、LB3、LB5的强度。同样地,在光导入光学系统40b内设置一个描绘用光学元件150,将该描绘用光学元件150与初级的选择用光学元件50相比靠光源装置14b侧配置,用一个描绘用光学元件150 根据图案来调制从多个扫描单元U2、U4、U6向基板FS照射的光束 LB2、LB4、LB6的强度。由此,能够减少声光调制元件的数量,成本降低。In addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the second embodiment described above also provides the following advantages. Specifically, a single image drawing optical element 150 is provided within the light introduction optical system 40a, positioned closer to the light source device 14a than the primary selection optical element 50. This single image drawing optical element 150 modulates the intensity of the light beams LB1, LB3, and LB5 emitted from the multiple scanning units U1, U3, and U5 onto the substrate FS according to a pattern. Similarly, a single image drawing optical element 150 is provided within the light introduction optical system 40b, positioned closer to the light source device 14b than the primary selection optical element 50. This single image drawing optical element 150 modulates the intensity of the light beams LB2, LB4, and LB6 emitted from the multiple scanning units U2, U4, and U6 onto the substrate FS according to a pattern. This reduces the number of acousto-optic modulation elements and reduces costs.
此外,在上述第2实施方式中,以将光束LB分配成三条的描绘头16进行了说明,但也可以如在上述第1实施方式的变形例中说明那样是将光束LB分配成五条的描绘头16(参照图9及图10)。另外,在图9及图10的情况下,光源装置14为一个,因此描绘用光学元件150也为一个。Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the drawing head 16 is described as one that divides the light beam LB into three beams. However, as described in the modified example of the first embodiment described above, a drawing head 16 that divides the light beam LB into five beams may also be used (see Figures 9 and 10). In the embodiments of Figures 9 and 10, there is only one light source device 14, and therefore, there is also only one drawing optical element 150.
[第2实施方式的变形例][Modification of the Second Embodiment]
上述第2实施方式可以如以下那样变形。在上述第2实施方式中,作为描绘用光调制器而将描绘用光学元件150设于光导入光学系统40a、40b,但在本变形例中,取代描绘用光学元件150而在光源装置14(14a、14b)内分别设置描绘用光调制器。此外,对与上述第2实施方式相同的结构标注相同的附图标记或省略图示,仅对不同部分进行说明。另外,将在光源装置14a、14b中设有描绘用光调制器的光源装置分别称作光源装置14A、14B,由于光源装置14A 与光源装置14B具有相同结构,所以仅对光源装置14A进行说明。The second embodiment described above can be modified as follows. In the second embodiment described above, the optical element 150 for drawing is provided in the light introduction optical system 40a, 40b as a light modulator for drawing. However, in this modification, the optical element 150 for drawing is replaced with a light modulator for drawing in the light source device 14 (14a, 14b). In addition, the same figure marks are marked on the same structures as the second embodiment described above or the figures are omitted, and only the different parts are described. In addition, the light source devices provided with the light modulator for drawing in the light source devices 14a, 14b are respectively referred to as light source devices 14A and 14B. Since the light source device 14A and the light source device 14B have the same structure, only the light source device 14A will be described.
图17是表示本变形例的光源装置(脉冲光源装置、激光光源装置)14A的结构的图。作为光纤激光装置的光源装置14A具备DFB 半导体激光元件200、DFB半导体激光元件202、偏振光分束器204、作为描绘用光调制器的电光学元件206、该电光学元件206的驱动电路206a、偏振光分束器208、吸收体210、激发光源212、组合器214、光纤光放大器216、波长转换光学元件218、波长转换光学元件220、多个透镜元件GL、及包含时钟产生器222a的控制电路222。FIG17 is a diagram showing the structure of a light source device (pulse light source device, laser light source device) 14A according to this modification. Light source device 14A, which is a fiber laser device, includes a DFB semiconductor laser element 200, a DFB semiconductor laser element 202, a polarization beam splitter 204, an electro-optical element 206 serving as an image forming light modulator, a drive circuit 206a for electro-optical element 206, a polarization beam splitter 208, an absorber 210, an excitation light source 212, a combiner 214, a fiber optical amplifier 216, a wavelength conversion optical element 218, a wavelength conversion optical element 220, a plurality of lens elements GL, and a control circuit 222 including a clock generator 222a.
DFB半导体激光元件(第1固体激光元件、第1半导体激光光源)200以规定频率(振荡频率、基本频率)Fs产生急剧升降(steep) 或尖锐(sharp)的脉冲状的种光(激光)S1,DFB半导体激光元件 (第2固体激光元件、第2半导体激光光源)202以规定频率Fs产生平缓(时间上宽广)的脉冲状的种光(激光)S2。DFB半导体激光元件200产生的种光S1的一个脉冲与DFB半导体激光元件202 产生的种光S2的一个脉冲的能量大致相同,但偏振状态相互不同,峰值强度为种光S1较强。在本变形例中,以DFB半导体激光元件 200产生的种光S1的偏振状态为S偏振、DFB半导体激光元件202 产生的种光S2的偏振状态为P偏振进行说明。该DFB半导体激光元件200、202响应于由时钟产生器222a生成的时钟信号LTC(规定频率Fs),并通过控制电路222的电气控制,而被控制成以振荡频率Fs发出种光S1、S2。该控制电路222由控制装置18控制。The DFB semiconductor laser element (first solid-state laser element, first semiconductor laser light source) 200 generates steep or sharp pulsed seed light (laser light) S1 at a predetermined frequency (oscillation frequency, fundamental frequency) Fs. The DFB semiconductor laser element (second solid-state laser element, second semiconductor laser light source) 202 generates gentle (temporally wide) pulsed seed light (laser light) S2 at the predetermined frequency Fs. The energy of a single pulse of seed light S1 generated by the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 and a single pulse of seed light S2 generated by the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 are approximately the same, but their polarization states differ, with the peak intensity of seed light S1 being higher. In this modified example, the polarization state of seed light S1 generated by the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 is S-polarization, while the polarization state of seed light S2 generated by the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 is P-polarization. The DFB semiconductor laser elements 200 and 202 are controlled to emit seed light S1 and S2 at an oscillation frequency Fs in response to a clock signal LTC (predetermined frequency Fs) generated by a clock generator 222a and electrically controlled by a control circuit 222. The control circuit 222 is controlled by the control device 18.
此外,该时钟信号LTC成为向图16所示的计数器部CN1、CN3、 CN5各自供给的时钟信号CLK的基频,将时钟信号LTC进行n分频(优选n为2以上的整数)而成为时钟信号CLK。另外,时钟产生器222a也具有将时钟信号LTC的基本频率Fs以±ΔF进行调整的功能、即对光束LB的脉冲振荡的时间间隔进行微调的功能。由此,例如,即使点光SP的扫描速度Vs稍微变动,也能通过对基本频率 Fs进行微调来精密地确保在描绘线范围内描绘的图案的尺寸(描绘倍率)。Furthermore, this clock signal LTC serves as the fundamental frequency of the clock signal CLK supplied to each of the counter units CN1, CN3, and CN5 shown in FIG16 . Clock signal LTC is divided by n (preferably, n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) to generate clock signal CLK. Furthermore, clock generator 222a also has the function of adjusting the fundamental frequency Fs of clock signal LTC by ±ΔF, that is, fine-tuning the time interval of the pulse oscillations of light beam LB. Thus, for example, even if the scanning speed Vs of spot light SP fluctuates slightly, the size of the pattern drawn within the drawing line range (drawing magnification) can be precisely maintained by fine-tuning fundamental frequency Fs.
偏振光分束器204使S偏振的光透射、使P偏振的光反射,将 DFB半导体激光元件200产生的种光S1和DFB半导体激光元件202 产生的种光S2向电光学元件206引导。详细地说,偏振光分束器204 通过使DFB半导体激光元件200产生的S偏振的种光S1透射而将种光S1向电光学元件206引导,通过使DFB半导体激光元件202 产生的P偏振的种光S2反射而将种光S2向电光学元件206引导。 DFB半导体激光元件200、202及偏振光分束器204构成生成种光 S1、S2的激光光源部(光源部)205。Polarization beam splitter 204 transmits S-polarized light and reflects P-polarized light, guiding seed light S1 generated by DFB semiconductor laser element 200 and seed light S2 generated by DFB semiconductor laser element 202 toward electro-optical element 206. Specifically, polarization beam splitter 204 transmits S-polarized seed light S1 generated by DFB semiconductor laser element 200 to guide seed light S1 toward electro-optical element 206, and reflects P-polarized seed light S2 generated by DFB semiconductor laser element 202 to guide seed light S2 toward electro-optical element 206. DFB semiconductor laser elements 200 and 202 and polarization beam splitter 204 constitute a laser light source unit (light source unit) 205 that generates seed light S1 and S2.
电光学元件206相对于种光S1、S2而具有透射性,例如,使用电光学调制器(EOM:Electro-Optic Modulator)。EOM响应于先前的图16所示的描绘位串数据Sdw(或串行数据DLn)的On/Off状态(高/低),来通过驱动电路206a切换从偏振光分束器204通过而来的种光S1、S2的偏振状态。来自DFB半导体激光元件200、DFB 半导体激光元件202各自的种光S1、S2的波段为800nm以上,较长,因此作为电光学元件206,能够使用偏振状态的切换响应性为GHz程度的电光学元件。The electro-optical element 206 is transmissive to the seed lights S1 and S2 and, for example, utilizes an electro-optical modulator (EOM). The EOM switches the polarization state of the seed lights S1 and S2 passing through the polarization beam splitter 204 via a driver circuit 206a in response to the on/off state (high/low) of the depicted bit string data Sdw (or serial data DLn) shown in FIG. 16 . The seed lights S1 and S2 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 and the DFB semiconductor laser element 202, respectively, have long wavelengths exceeding 800 nm. Therefore, an electro-optical element with a polarization state switching response of approximately GHz can be used as the electro-optical element 206.
在输入到驱动电路206a的描绘位串数据Sdw(或串行数据DLn) 的一位的像素数据为Off状态(低、“0”)时,电光学元件206不改变入射的种光S1或S2的偏振状态而直接将其向偏振光分束器208 引导。另一方面,在输入到驱动电路206a的描绘位串数据Sdw(或串行数据DLn)为On状态(高、“1”)时,电光学元件206改变入射的种光S1或S2的偏振状态(将偏振方向改变90度)后向偏振光分束器208引导。像这样,通过使电光学元件206驱动,电光学元件206在描绘位串数据Sdw(或串行数据DLn)的像素数据为On 状态(高)时,将S偏振的种光S1转换成P偏振的种光S1,将P 偏振的种光S2转换成S偏振的种光S2。When the pixel data of one bit of the drawing bit string data Sdw (or serial data DLn) input to the driver circuit 206a is in the off state (low, "0"), the electro-optical element 206 does not change the polarization state of the incident seed light S1 or S2 and directly guides it to the polarization beam splitter 208. On the other hand, when the drawing bit string data Sdw (or serial data DLn) input to the driver circuit 206a is in the on state (high, "1"), the electro-optical element 206 changes the polarization state of the incident seed light S1 or S2 (changes the polarization direction by 90 degrees) and then guides it to the polarization beam splitter 208. In this way, by driving the electro-optical element 206, when the pixel data of the drawing bit string data Sdw (or serial data DLn) is in the on state (high), the electro-optical element 206 converts the S-polarized seed light S1 into the P-polarized seed light S1 and converts the P-polarized seed light S2 into the S-polarized seed light S2.
偏振光分束器208使P偏振的光透射并经由透镜元件GL向组合器214引导,使S偏振的光反射并向吸收体210引导。激发光源212 产生激发光,该产生的激发光经由光纤212a被向组合器214引导。组合器214将从偏振光分束器208照射的种光与激发光合成,并向光纤光放大器(光放大器)216输出。光纤光放大器216掺杂有能够由激发光激发的激光介质。因此,在合成的种光及激发光所传输的光纤光放大器216内,通过由激发光激发激光介质而使种光放大。作为在光纤光放大器216内掺杂的激光介质,使用铒(Er)、镱(Yb)、铥(Tm)等稀土类元素。该放大后的种光从光纤光放大器216的射出端216a以规定的发散角放射,由透镜元件GL收敛或准直化后向波长转换光学元件218入射。The polarization beam splitter 208 transmits P-polarized light and guides it to the combiner 214 via the lens element GL, while reflecting S-polarized light and guiding it to the absorber 210. The excitation light source 212 generates excitation light, which is guided to the combiner 214 via the optical fiber 212a. The combiner 214 combines the seed light irradiated from the polarization beam splitter 208 with the excitation light and outputs it to the fiber optical amplifier (optical amplifier) 216. The fiber optical amplifier 216 is doped with a laser medium that can be excited by the excitation light. Therefore, in the fiber optical amplifier 216, through which the synthesized seed light and excitation light are transmitted, the seed light is amplified by exciting the laser medium with the excitation light. Rare earth elements such as erbium (Er), ytterbium (Yb), and thulium (Tm) are used as the laser medium doped in the fiber optical amplifier 216. The amplified seed light is emitted from the emission end 216 a of the optical fiber amplifier 216 at a predetermined divergence angle, converged or collimated by the lens element GL, and then enters the wavelength conversion optical element 218 .
波长转换光学元件(第1波长转换光学元件)218通过二次谐波产生(SecondHarmonic Generation:SHG),将入射的种光(波长λ) 转换成波长为λ/2的二次谐波。作为波长转换光学元件218,适合使用作为准相位匹配(Quasi Phase Matching:QPM)晶体的PPLN(Periodically Poled LiNbO3:周期性极化铌酸锂)晶体。此外,也能够使用PPLT(Periodically Poled LiTaO3:周期极化钽酸锂)晶体等。The wavelength conversion optical element (first wavelength conversion optical element) 218 converts the incident seed light (wavelength λ) into a second harmonic with a wavelength of λ/2 through second harmonic generation (SHG). A PPLN (Periodically Poled LiNbO 3 : Periodically Poled Lithium Niobate) crystal, which is a quasi-phase matching (QPM) crystal, is suitable for use as the wavelength conversion optical element 218. Alternatively, a PPLT (Periodically Poled LiTaO 3 : Periodically Poled Lithium Tantalate) crystal can also be used.
波长转换光学元件(第2波长转换光学元件)220通过波长转换光学元件218所转换的二次谐波(波长为λ/2)与没有被波长转换光学元件218转换而残留的种光(波长为λ)的和频产生(Sum Frequency Generation:SFG),而产生波长为λ/3的三次谐波。该三次谐波成为在370nm以下的波段中具有峰值波长的紫外线光(光束LB)。The wavelength conversion optical element (second wavelength conversion optical element) 220 generates a third harmonic with a wavelength of λ/3 by sum frequency generation (SFG) of the second harmonic (wavelength λ/2) converted by the wavelength conversion optical element 218 and the seed light (wavelength λ) that remains without conversion by the wavelength conversion optical element 218. This third harmonic becomes ultraviolet light (light beam LB) with a peak wavelength in the wavelength range below 370 nm.
如以上那样,在为将从图16所示的图案数据生成电路送出的描绘位串数据Sdw(或DLn)向图17的电光学元件206施加的结构的情况下,在描绘位串数据Sdw(或DLn)的一位的像素数据为Off 状态(低、“0”)时,电光学元件206不改变入射的种光S1或S2的偏振状态而直接向偏振光分束器208引导。因此,从偏振光分束器 208透射过的种光成为来自DFB半导体激光元件202的种光S2。因此,从光源装置14A最终输出的光束LB具有与来自DFB半导体激光元件202的种光S2相同的振荡曲线(时间特性)。即,该情况下,光束LB为脉冲的峰值强度低、且时间上宽广的弛缓特性。光纤光放大器216对像这样峰值强度低的种光S2的放大效率低,因此从光源装置14A输出的光束LB成为没有被放大到曝光所需能量的光。因此,该情况下,从曝光的观点来看,实质上结果与光源装置14A不射出光束LB的情况相同。也就是说,向基板FS照射的点光SP的强度成为低水平。然而,在不沿着各描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)进行图案描绘的期间(非投射期间、非曝光期间),即使来自种光S2的紫外区域的光束LB为微小强度也会持续放射,因此,在产生描绘线 SLn(SL1~SL6)长时间持续处于基板FS上的相同位置的状态(例如,因搬送系统的故障导致的基板FS的紧急停止等)的情况下,只要在光源装置14A的光束LB的射出窗上设置可动光闸并关闭射出窗即可。As described above, in a configuration where the drawing bit string data Sdw (or DLn) sent from the pattern data generation circuit shown in FIG16 is applied to the electro-optical element 206 in FIG17 , when the pixel data for one bit of the drawing bit string data Sdw (or DLn) is in the Off state (Low, "0"), the electro-optical element 206 does not change the polarization state of the incident seed light S1 or S2 but instead directly guides it to the polarization beam splitter 208. Therefore, the seed light that passes through the polarization beam splitter 208 becomes the seed light S2 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202. Consequently, the light beam LB ultimately outputted from the light source device 14A has the same oscillation curve (temporal characteristics) as the seed light S2 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202. Specifically, in this case, the light beam LB exhibits a low pulse peak intensity and a temporally broad relaxation characteristic. The fiber optical amplifier 216 has low amplification efficiency for the seed light S2 with such a low peak intensity, so the light beam LB outputted from the light source device 14A is not amplified to the energy required for exposure. Therefore, in this case, from the perspective of exposure, the result is essentially the same as when the light source device 14A does not emit the light beam LB. That is, the intensity of the point light SP irradiated onto the substrate FS becomes low. However, during the period when the pattern is not drawn along each drawing line SLn (SL1 to SL6) (non-projection period, non-exposure period), even if the light beam LB from the ultraviolet region of the seed light S2 is of a small intensity, it will continue to be radiated. Therefore, in the case where the drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6) are continuously in the same position on the substrate FS for a long time (for example, an emergency stop of the substrate FS due to a failure of the conveying system), it is sufficient to set a movable shutter on the emission window of the light beam LB of the light source device 14A and close the emission window.
另一方面,在向图17的电光学元件206施加的描绘位串数据Sdw (或DLn)的一位的像素数据为On状态(高、“1”)时,电光学元件206改变入射的种光S1或S2的偏振状态后向偏振光分束器208 引导。因此,从偏振光分束器208透射过的种光成为来自DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1。因此,从光源装置14A输出的光束LB 由来自DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1生成。来自DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1由于峰值强度强,所以被光纤光放大器216高效地放大,从光源装置14A输出的光束LB具有基板FS的曝光所需的能量。也就是说,向基板FS照射的点光SP的强度成为高水平。On the other hand, when the pixel data representing one bit of the bit string data Sdw (or DLn) applied to the electro-optical element 206 of FIG. 17 is in the On state (High, "1"), the electro-optical element 206 changes the polarization state of the incident seed light S1 or S2 and guides it toward the polarization beam splitter 208. Therefore, the seed light transmitted through the polarization beam splitter 208 becomes the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200. Therefore, the light beam LB output from the light source device 14A is generated by the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200. Since the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 has a high peak intensity, it is efficiently amplified by the fiber optical amplifier 216, and the light beam LB output from the light source device 14A has the energy required for exposing the substrate FS. In other words, the intensity of the point light SP irradiated onto the substrate FS becomes high.
像这样,由于在光源装置14A内设有作为描绘用光调制器的电光学元件206,所以与在上述第2实施方式中控制描绘用光学元件 150的情况同样地,通过控制电光学元件206,能够得到与上述第2 实施方式相同的效果。也就是说,基于光束LB入射的扫描单元Un的图案数据(或图15、图16中的描绘位串数据Sdw),将电光学元件206切换(驱动)成On/Off,由此,能够根据要描绘的图案来调制向初级的选择用光学元件50入射的光束LB的强度、即通过各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)照射到基板FS上的光束LB的点光SP的强度。Since the electro-optical element 206 serving as a drawing light modulator is provided within the light source device 14A, the same effects as those of the second embodiment can be achieved by controlling the electro-optical element 206, as in the case of controlling the drawing optical element 150 in the second embodiment. Specifically, by switching (driving) the electro-optical element 206 on and off based on the pattern data of the scanning unit Un (or the drawing bit string data Sdw in Figures 15 and 16 ) on which the light beam LB is incident, the intensity of the light beam LB incident on the primary selection optical element 50, i.e., the intensity of the spot light SP of the light beam LB irradiated onto the substrate FS by each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6), can be modulated according to the pattern to be drawn.
此外,在图17的结构中,也考虑到省略DFB半导体激光元件 202及偏振光分束器204,在基于图案数据(描绘数据)进行的电光学元件206的切换下仅将来自DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1 脉冲串(Burst)波状地向光纤光放大器216引导。但是,若采用该结构,则种光S1向光纤光放大器216的入射周期性根据要描绘的图案而大幅紊乱。即,在来自DFB半导体激光元件202的种光S1不向光纤光放大器216入射的状态持续后,若种光S1向光纤光放大器 216入射,则刚入射之后的种光S1与通常时相比以大放大率被放大,存在从光纤光放大器216产生具有规定以上的大强度的光束的问题。于是,在本变形例中,作为优选的方式,通过在种光S1不向光纤光放大器216入射的期间使来自DFB半导体激光元件202的种光S2(峰值强度低的宽广的脉冲光)向光纤光放大器216入射,而解决了这种问题。Furthermore, in the configuration of FIG17 , it is also conceivable to omit the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 and polarization beam splitter 204, and instead guide only the seed light S1 pulse train (burst) from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 to the fiber optical amplifier 216 in a wave-like manner, by switching the electro-optical element 206 based on pattern data (drawing data). However, with this configuration, the incidence periodicity of the seed light S1 into the fiber optical amplifier 216 is significantly disrupted depending on the pattern being drawn. Specifically, if the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 continues to be incident on the fiber optical amplifier 216 and then enters the fiber optical amplifier 216, the seed light S1 immediately after entry is amplified at a higher amplification factor than normal, resulting in a problem in which the fiber optical amplifier 216 generates a beam having an intensity exceeding a predetermined level. Therefore, in this modification, as a preferred method, this problem is solved by allowing seed light S2 (broad pulse light with low peak intensity) from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 to be incident on the optical fiber amplifier 216 during the period when the seed light S1 is not incident on the optical fiber amplifier 216.
另外,虽然对电光学元件206进行切换,但也可以基于图案数据(描绘位串数据Sdw或串行数据DLn)来驱动DFB半导体激光元件200、202。也就是说,控制电路222基于图案数据(描绘位串数据Sdw或DLn),控制DFB半导体激光元件200、202,选择性(择一)地产生以规定频率Fs脉冲状地振荡的种光S1、S2。该情况下,不需要偏振光分束器204、208、电光学元件206及吸收体210,从 DFB半导体激光元件200、202中的某一方选择性地脉冲振荡的种光S1、S2的一方直接向组合器214入射。此时,控制电路222以来自 DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1和来自DFB半导体激光元件202 的种光S2不会同时向光纤光放大器216入射的方式,控制各DFB 半导体激光元件200、202的驱动。即,在对基板FS照射各光束LBn 的点光SP的情况下,以仅种光S1向光纤光放大器216入射的方式控制DFB半导体激光元件200。另外,在不对基板FS照射光束LBn 的点光SP(点光SP的强度极低)的情况下,以仅种光S2向光纤光放大器216入射的方式控制DFB半导体激光元件202。像这样,基于图案数据(描绘位串数据Sdw的H或L)的像素数据(高/低)来决定是否对基板FS照射光束LBn。另外,该情况下的种光S1、S2的偏振状态也可以均为P偏振。Furthermore, while switching the electro-optical element 206, the DFB semiconductor laser elements 200 and 202 can also be driven based on pattern data (depicting bit string data Sdw or serial data DLn). Specifically, the control circuit 222 controls the DFB semiconductor laser elements 200 and 202 based on the pattern data (depicting bit string data Sdw or DLn) to selectively generate seed light S1 or S2, which oscillates in a pulsed manner at a predetermined frequency Fs. In this case, the polarization beam splitters 204 and 208, the electro-optical element 206, and the absorber 210 are not required. Either of the seed light S1 or S2, which is selectively pulsed from one of the DFB semiconductor laser elements 200 and 202, is directly incident on the combiner 214. At this time, the control circuit 222 controls the driving of each DFB semiconductor laser element 200, 202 so that the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 and the seed light S2 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 do not simultaneously enter the optical fiber amplifier 216. Specifically, when the substrate FS is irradiated with the spot light SP of each light beam LBn, the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 is controlled so that only the seed light S1 enters the optical fiber amplifier 216. Furthermore, when the substrate FS is not irradiated with the spot light SP of the light beam LBn (the intensity of the spot light SP is extremely low), the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 is controlled so that only the seed light S2 enters the optical fiber amplifier 216. In this manner, whether or not the substrate FS is irradiated with the light beam LBn is determined based on the pixel data (high/low) of the pattern data (depicting H or L of the bit string data Sdw). In this case, the polarization states of both the seed lights S1 and S2 may be P-polarized.
像这样,在本变形例中,也能够减少声光调制元件的数量,成本变低。As described above, also in this modification, the number of acousto-optic modulation elements can be reduced, thereby reducing the cost.
此外,也可以将本变形例的光源装置14A、14B用于上述第1 实施方式的光源装置14a、14b。该情况下,可以根据图案数据(描绘位串数据Sdw)来控制从光源装置14A、14B输出的来自DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1的输出定时和各扫描单元U1~U6的描绘用光学元件106的切换。Furthermore, the light source devices 14A and 14B of this modification can also be used in place of the light source devices 14a and 14b of the first embodiment. In this case, the output timing of the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 outputted from the light source devices 14A and 14B and the switching of the drawing optical elements 106 of the scanning units U1 to U6 can be controlled based on the pattern data (drawing bit string data Sdw).
[第3实施方式][Third embodiment]
接下来,参照图18对第3实施方式进行说明,在第3实施方式中,以使用在第2实施方式的变形例中说明的光源装置14A(参照图17)、14B为前提。然而,为了适于第3实施方式,图17的光源装置14A的控制电路222内的时钟产生器222a具备根据来自图18 所示的描绘控制用的控制单元(控制电路500)的倍率修正信息CMg 将时钟信号LTC的时间间隔局部地(离散地)伸缩的功能。同样地,光源装置14B的控制电路222内的时钟产生器222a也具有根据倍率修正信息CMg将时钟信号LTC的时间间隔局部地(离散地)伸缩的功能。此外,光源装置14B、光导入光学系统40b及扫描单元U2、 U4、U6的动作与光源装置14A、光导入光学系统40a及扫描单元 U1、U3、U5的动作相同,因此对于光源装置14B、光导入光学系统 40b及扫描单元U2、U4、U6的动作省略说明。另外,对与上述第2 实施方式的变形例相同的结构标注相同的附图标记或省略图示,仅对不同部分进行说明。Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG18 . This embodiment presupposes the use of the light source devices 14A (see FIG17 ) and 14B described in the modified example of the second embodiment. However, to adapt to the third embodiment, the clock generator 222a within the control circuit 222 of the light source device 14A in FIG17 has the function of locally (discretely) expanding or contracting the time interval of the clock signal LTC based on the magnification correction information CMg from the control unit (control circuit 500) for rendering control shown in FIG18 . Similarly, the clock generator 222a within the control circuit 222 of the light source device 14B also has the function of locally (discretely) expanding or contracting the time interval of the clock signal LTC based on the magnification correction information CMg. The operations of the light source device 14B, the light introduction optical system 40b, and the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are identical to those of the light source device 14A, the light introduction optical system 40a, and the scanning units U1, U3, and U5. Therefore, descriptions of the operations of the light source device 14B, the light introduction optical system 40b, and the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 will be omitted. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same components as those in the modified example of the second embodiment, or illustration is omitted, and only the differences will be described.
在图18中,来自一个光源装置14A的光束(激光)LB与先前的图12、图13的结构同样地,经由选择用光学元件50、58、66分别向三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5供给。选择用光学元件50、58、66 各自响应于在图14、图15中说明的描绘使能(On)信号SPP1、SPP3、 SPP5而择一地使光束LB偏转(切换),将光束LB向扫描单元U1、 U3、U5中的某一个引导。此外,如先前说明那样,在不沿着各描绘线进行图案描绘的期间(非投射期间),即使来自种光S2的紫外区域的光束LB为微小强度也会持续放射,考虑到会产生各描绘线在长时间内照射于基板FS上的相同位置这样的状况的情况,而在光源装置14A的光束LB的射出窗上设有可动光闸SST。In FIG18 , a light beam (laser) LB from a single light source device 14A is supplied to three scanning units U1, U3, and U5, respectively, via selection optical elements 50, 58, and 66, similar to the configurations of FIG12 and FIG13 . Selective optical elements 50, 58, and 66 selectively deflect (switches) light beam LB in response to the drawing enable (On) signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 described in FIG14 and FIG15 , directing light beam LB to one of scanning units U1, U3, and U5. Furthermore, as previously described, during periods when pattern drawing along each drawing line is not being performed (non-projection periods), light beam LB from seed light S2 in the ultraviolet region continues to be emitted, even at a low intensity. To prevent situations in which each drawing line may illuminate the same position on substrate FS for an extended period, a movable shutter SST is provided on the light beam LB emission window of light source device 14A.
如图14所示,来自各扫描单元U1、U3、U5的原点传感器OP1、 OP3、OP5的原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5向生成每个扫描单元U1、 U3、U5的图案数据的生成电路(图案数据生成电路)301、303、305 供给。生成电路301包含图16中的闸部GT1、存储器部BM1、计数器部CN1等,计数器部CN1构成为对以从光源装置14A的控制电路222(时钟产生器222a)输出的时钟信号LTC为基频生成的时钟信号CLK1进行计数。As shown in FIG14 , origin signals SZ1, SZ3, and SZ5 from origin sensors OP1, OP3, and OP5 of the respective scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are supplied to generation circuits (pattern data generation circuits) 301, 303, and 305, which generate pattern data for each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5. Generation circuit 301 includes gate unit GT1, memory unit BM1, and counter unit CN1, as shown in FIG16 . Counter unit CN1 is configured to count clock signal CLK1 generated using clock signal LTC output from control circuit 222 (clock generator 222a) of light source device 14A as its base frequency.
同样地,生成电路303包含图16中的闸部GT3、存储器部BM3、计数器部CN3等,计数器部CN3构成为对以时钟信号LTC为基频生成的时钟信号CLK3进行计数,生成电路305包含图16中的闸部 GT5、存储器部BM5、计数器部CN5等,计数器部CN5构成为对以时钟信号LTC为基频生成的时钟信号CLK5进行计数。Similarly, the generating circuit 303 includes the gate part GT3, the memory part BM3, the counter part CN3, etc. in Figure 16, and the counter part CN3 is configured to count the clock signal CLK3 generated with the clock signal LTC as the base frequency. The generating circuit 305 includes the gate part GT5, the memory part BM5, the counter part CN5, etc. in Figure 16, and the counter part CN5 is configured to count the clock signal CLK5 generated with the clock signal LTC as the base frequency.
这些时钟信号CLK1、CLK3、CLK5是通过作为各生成电路301、 303、305与光源装置14A之间的接口发挥功能的控制电路500,将时钟信号LTC分频成1/n(n为2以上的整数)而生成的。该时钟信号CLK1、CLK3、CLK5向各计数器部CN1、CN3、CN5的供给响应于描绘使能(On)信号SPP1、SPP3、SPP5(参照图15),而限制为某一个。即,在描绘使能信号SPP1为On(高)时,仅将时钟信号LTC分频成1/n得到的时钟信号CLK1向计数器部CN1供给,在描绘使能信号SPP3为On(高)时,仅将时钟信号LTC分频成1/n 得到的时钟信号CLK3向计数器部CN3供给,在描绘使能信号SPP5 为On(高)时,仅将时钟信号LTC分频成1/n得到的时钟信号CLK5 向计数器部CN5供给。These clock signals CLK1, CLK3, and CLK5 are generated by the control circuit 500, which functions as an interface between the generation circuits 301, 303, and 305 and the light source device 14A, by dividing the clock signal LTC by 1/n (n being an integer greater than or equal to 2). The supply of these clock signals CLK1, CLK3, and CLK5 to the counter units CN1, CN3, and CN5 is limited to one of the clock signals in response to the drawing enable (On) signals SPP1, SPP3, and SPP5 (see FIG. 15 ). That is, when the drawing enable signal SPP1 is on (high), only the clock signal CLK1 obtained by dividing the clock signal LTC into 1/n is supplied to the counter section CN1. When the drawing enable signal SPP3 is on (high), only the clock signal CLK3 obtained by dividing the clock signal LTC into 1/n is supplied to the counter section CN3. When the drawing enable signal SPP5 is on (high), only the clock signal CLK5 obtained by dividing the clock signal LTC into 1/n is supplied to the counter section CN5.
由此,从各生成电路301、303、305各自依次输出的串行数据 DL1、DL3、DL5分别经由闸部GT1、GT3、GT5而被设于控制电路 500内的三输入的OR电路GT8(参照图16)相加,成为描绘位串数据Sdw而向光源装置14A内的电光学元件206供给。此外,生成电路301、303、305及控制电路500构成控制装置18的一部分。Thus, the serial data DL1, DL3, and DL5 sequentially output from the respective generation circuits 301, 303, and 305 are added together via the gates GT1, GT3, and GT5, respectively, by a three-input OR circuit GT8 (see FIG. 16 ) provided within the control circuit 500, resulting in the drawing bit string data Sdw, which is then supplied to the electro-optical element 206 within the light source device 14A. The generation circuits 301, 303, and 305 and the control circuit 500 constitute a portion of the control device 18.
以上结构基本上与使用图17说明的光源装置14A的利用方法相同,但在本实施方式中,设置将三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自的描绘线(扫描线)SL1、SL3、SL5所描绘的图案的点扫描方向(Y 方向)的描绘倍率单独地微调的功能。为了实现该功能,在本实施方式中,按扫描单元U1、U3、U5而设有暂时存储与描绘倍率的修正量有关的信息mg1、mg3、mg5的存储器部BM1a、BM3a、BM5a。该存储器部BM1a、BM3a、BM5a在图18中作为独立部分而图示,但也可以为设于生成电路301、303、305各自中的存储器部BM1、 BM3、BM5的一部分。该与修正量有关的信息mg1、mg3、mg5也构成描绘信息的一部分。The above configuration is essentially the same as the method for utilizing the light source device 14A described using FIG17 . However, in this embodiment, a function is provided for individually fine-tuning the drawing magnification in the dot scanning direction (Y direction) of the pattern drawn by the drawing lines (scanning lines) SL1, SL3, and SL5 of each of the three scanning units U1, U3, and U5. To implement this function, in this embodiment, memory units BM1a, BM3a, and BM5a are provided for each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 to temporarily store information mg1, mg3, and mg5 related to the correction amount of the drawing magnification. While these memory units BM1a, BM3a, and BM5a are illustrated as independent components in FIG18 , they may also be part of the memory units BM1, BM3, and BM5 provided in the generation circuits 301, 303, and 305, respectively. This correction amount information mg1, mg3, and mg5 also constitutes part of the drawing information.
与修正量有关的信息mg1、mg3、mg5例如对应于由各描绘线 SL1、SL3、SL5描绘的图案的Y方向上的尺寸以多少比率伸缩的比率(ppm)。作为一例,在将能够由各描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5描绘的Y方向的区域的长度设为30mm的情况下,在要使其伸缩±200ppm (相当于±6μm)时,在信息mg1、mg3、mg5中设定有±200这一数值。此外,信息mg1、mg3、mg5也可以不通过比率而通过直接的伸缩量(±ρμm)设定。另外,信息mg1、mg3、mg5可以按沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5各自的一条线的量的图案数据(串行数据DLn) 来依次重新设定,也可以按多条线的量的图案数据(串行数据DLn) 的送出来重新设定。像这样,在本实施方式中,在一边将基板FS沿 X方向(长边方向)输送一边沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5各自进行图案描绘的期间,能够动态地改变Y方向的描绘倍率,在得知基板 FS的变形和面内歪斜的情况下,能够抑制由此引起的描绘位置精度的劣化。而且在重合曝光时,能够应对既已形成的底层图案的变形而大幅提高重合精度。The information mg1, mg3, and mg5 related to the correction amount corresponds to, for example, the ratio (ppm) by which the Y-direction dimension of the pattern drawn by each drawing line SL1, SL3, and SL5 is expanded or contracted. For example, if the length of the Y-direction area that can be drawn by each drawing line SL1, SL3, and SL5 is set to 30 mm, and a ±200 ppm (equivalent to ±6 μm) expansion or contraction is desired, the information mg1, mg3, and mg5 are set to a value of ±200. Alternatively, the information mg1, mg3, and mg5 can be set directly by the expansion or contraction amount (±ρμm) rather than by a ratio. Furthermore, the information mg1, mg3, and mg5 can be reset sequentially based on the pattern data (serial data DLn) for a single line along each of the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5, or can be reset based on the pattern data (serial data DLn) for multiple lines. As described above, in this embodiment, while the substrate FS is being transported in the X direction (longitudinal direction) while pattern drawing is being performed along each of the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5, the drawing magnification in the Y direction can be dynamically changed. This allows for the suppression of degradation in drawing position accuracy caused by the deformation and in-plane skew of the substrate FS. Furthermore, during overlay exposure, deformation of the already formed underlying pattern can be accounted for, significantly improving overlay accuracy.
图19是表示图18所示的描绘装置中的、代表性地在基于扫描单元U1进行标准的图案描绘时的、各部分的信号状态与光束LB的振荡状态的时间图。在图19中,二维矩阵Gm示出要描绘的图案数据的位图案PP,基板FS上的一个格子(1像素(pixel)单位)设定成例如Y方向上的尺寸Py为3μm,X方向上的尺寸Px为3μm。另外,在图19中,箭头所示的SL1-1、SL1-2、SL1-3、···SL1-6 示出随着基板FS在X方向上的移动(长边方向的副扫描)而由描绘线SL1依次描绘的描绘线,以各描绘线SL1-1、SL1-2、SL1-3、···、 SL1-6的X方向上的间隔成为例如1像素单位的尺寸Px(3μm)的 1/2的方式,设定基板FS的搬送速度。FIG19 is a timing diagram showing the signal states of each part and the oscillation state of the light beam LB in the drawing device shown in FIG18 , representatively when a standard pattern drawing is performed based on the scanning unit U1. In FIG19 , the two-dimensional matrix Gm shows the bit pattern PP of the pattern data to be drawn, and one grid (1 pixel unit) on the substrate FS is set to, for example, a size Py of 3 μm in the Y direction and a size Px of 3 μm in the X direction. In addition, in FIG19 , SL1-1, SL1-2, SL1-3, ... SL1-6 indicated by arrows show drawing lines drawn in sequence by the drawing line SL1 as the substrate FS moves in the X direction (sub-scanning in the long side direction), and the conveying speed of the substrate FS is set so that the interval in the X direction of each drawing line SL1-1, SL1-2, SL1-3, ... SL1-6 becomes, for example, 1/2 of the size Px (3 μm) of 1 pixel unit.
而且,将投射到基板FS上的点光SP的XY方向上的尺寸(点尺寸)设为与1像素单位相同的程度或比其稍大。由此,点光SP 的尺寸作为实效的直径(高斯分布的1/e2的宽度,或峰值强度的半值全宽度)而被设定为3~4μm左右,在沿着描绘线SL1连续投射点光SP时,以例如以点光SP的实效的直径的1/2重叠的方式,设定光束LB的振荡频率Fs(脉冲时间间隔)和基于多面镜PM实现的点光SP的扫描速度Vs。即,若将从图17所示的光源装置14A内的偏振光分束器208射出的种光设为光束Lse(图18),则该种光束Lse响应于从控制电路222(时钟产生器222a)输出的时钟信号 LTC的各时钟脉冲而如图19那样射出。Moreover, the size (spot size) of the point light SP projected onto the substrate FS in the XY direction is set to the same degree as or slightly larger than a pixel unit. Thus, the size of the point light SP is set to about 3 to 4 μm as an effective diameter (the width of 1/e 2 of the Gaussian distribution, or the half-value full width of the peak intensity). When the point light SP is continuously projected along the drawing line SL1, the oscillation frequency Fs (pulse time interval) of the light beam LB and the scanning speed Vs of the point light SP achieved by the polygonal mirror PM are set in a manner such that they overlap by, for example, 1/2 of the effective diameter of the point light SP. That is, if the seed light emitted from the polarization beam splitter 208 in the light source device 14A shown in FIG17 is set to a light beam Lse ( FIG18 ), then the seed light beam Lse is emitted as shown in FIG19 in response to each clock pulse of the clock signal LTC output from the control circuit 222 (clock generator 222a).
该时钟信号LTC和向图18中的生成电路301内的计数器部CN1 供给的时钟信号CLK1被设定成1:2的频率比,在时钟信号LTC 为100MHz的情况下,通过图18中的控制电路500的1/2分频器将时钟信号CLK1设定为50MHz。此外,时钟信号LTC与时钟信号 CLK1的频率比只要为整数倍即可,也可以设定成例如将时钟信号 CLK1的设定频率降到1/4为25MHz,并且将点光SP的扫描速度Vs 也降到一半。The clock signal LTC and the clock signal CLK1 supplied to the counter unit CN1 in the generator circuit 301 in FIG18 are set to a frequency ratio of 1:2. When the clock signal LTC is 100 MHz, the clock signal CLK1 is set to 50 MHz by the 1/2 frequency divider of the control circuit 500 in FIG18. The frequency ratio of the clock signal LTC to the clock signal CLK1 can be any integer multiple. For example, the set frequency of the clock signal CLK1 can be reduced to 1/4, that is, to 25 MHz, and the scanning speed Vs of the spot light SP can also be reduced to half.
图19所示的描绘位串数据Sdw相当于从生成电路301输出的串行数据DL1,在此,例如对应于图案PP的描绘线SL1-2上的图案。光源装置14A内的电光学元件206响应于描绘位串数据Sdw来切换偏振状态,因此,种光束Lse在描绘位串数据Sdw为On状态(高、“1”)的期间,由来自图17中的DFB半导体激光元件200的种光S1 生成,在描绘位串数据Sdw为Off状态(低、“0”)的期间,由来自图17中的DFB半导体激光元件202的种光S2生成。以上的图19 所示的扫描单元U1的描绘曝光的动作在其他扫描单元U2~U6中也是相同的。The drawing bit string data Sdw shown in FIG19 corresponds to the serial data DL1 output from the generating circuit 301. Here, for example, it corresponds to the pattern on the drawing line SL1-2 of the pattern PP. The electro-optical element 206 within the light source device 14A switches its polarization state in response to the drawing bit string data Sdw. Therefore, the seed light beam Lse is generated by the seed light S1 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 in FIG17 during the period when the drawing bit string data Sdw is in the on state (high, "1"). It is generated by the seed light S2 from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 in FIG17 during the period when the drawing bit string data Sdw is in the off state (low, "0"). The drawing exposure operation of the scanning unit U1 shown in FIG19 is similar to that of the other scanning units U2 to U6.
此外,在光源装置14A的控制电路222内设有驱动电路(该驱动电路在描绘位串数据Sdw为On状态(高、“1”)的期间,响应于时钟信号LTC而从DFB半导体激光元件200产生种光S1(急剧升降的脉冲光),在描绘位串数据Sdw为Off状态(低、“0”)的期间,响应于时钟信号LTC而从DFB半导体激光元件202产生种光S2(宽广的脉冲光))的情况下,能够省略图17、图18中所示的电光学元件206、图17中所示的偏振光分束器208、吸收体210。In addition, when a driving circuit is provided in the control circuit 222 of the light source device 14A (the driving circuit generates seed light S1 (rapidly rising and falling pulse light) from the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 in response to the clock signal LTC during the period when the bit string data Sdw is depicted in the On state (high, "1"), and generates seed light S2 (broad pulse light) from the DFB semiconductor laser element 202 in response to the clock signal LTC during the period when the bit string data Sdw is depicted in the Off state (low, "0")), the electro-optical element 206 shown in Figures 17 and 18, the polarization beam splitter 208 shown in Figure 17, and the absorber 210 can be omitted.
像这样,种光束Lse的各脉冲光响应于图17所示的时钟产生器 222a所生成的时钟信号LTC的各时钟脉冲而输出,因此在本实施方式中,在时钟产生器222a内设置用于将时钟信号LTC的脉冲间的时间(周期)局部地增减的电路结构。在该电路结构中,设有作为时钟信号LTC的来源的基准(标准)时钟产生器、分频计数器电路和可变延迟电路等。As described above, each pulse of the seed light beam Lse is output in response to each clock pulse of the clock signal LTC generated by the clock generator 222a shown in FIG17 . Therefore, in this embodiment, a circuit structure for locally increasing or decreasing the time (period) between pulses of the clock signal LTC is provided within the clock generator 222a. This circuit structure includes a reference (standard) clock generator, which serves as the source of the clock signal LTC, a frequency division counter circuit, and a variable delay circuit.
图20是表示来自时钟产生器222a内的基准时钟产生器的基准时钟信号TC0与时钟信号LTC之间的关系的时间图,示出未进行基于图17、图18中所示的倍率修正信息CMg的修正的状态。时钟产生器222a内的可变延迟电路始终使以固定频率Fs(固定的时间Td0) 生成的基准时钟信号TC0延迟与预设值相应的延迟时间DT0,并作为时钟信号LTC输出。因此,例如,若基准时钟信号TC0为100MHz (Td0=10nS),则只要预设值(延迟时间DT0)不发生变化,时钟信号LTC也以100MHz(Td0=10nS)持续生成。FIG20 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the reference clock signal TC0 and the clock signal LTC from the reference clock generator within clock generator 222a. This chart illustrates a state where no correction based on the magnification correction information CMg shown in FIG17 and FIG18 is being performed. The variable delay circuit within clock generator 222a constantly delays the reference clock signal TC0, generated at a fixed frequency Fs (fixed time Td0), by a delay time DT0 corresponding to a preset value and outputs it as the clock signal LTC. Therefore, for example, if the reference clock signal TC0 is 100 MHz (Td0 = 10 nS), the clock signal LTC continues to be generated at 100 MHz (Td0 = 10 nS) as long as the preset value (delay time DT0) remains unchanged.
因此,设为如下结构:通过时钟产生器222a内的分频计数器电路对基准时钟信号TC0进行计数,在其计数值达到规定值Nv后,使对可变延迟电路设定的预设值以固定量变化。通过图21的时间图说明该情形。在图21中,在基准时钟信号TC0通过分频计数器电路计数到Nv之前,对可变延迟电路设定的预设值为延迟时间DT0。之后,若通过基准时钟信号TC0的一个时钟脉冲Kn而分频计数器电路计数到Nv,则对可变延迟电路设定的预设值立刻变更为延迟时间 DT1。因此,基于基准时钟信号TC0的时钟脉冲Kn的接下来产生的时钟脉冲Kn+1以后的时钟脉冲而生成的时钟信号LTC的各时钟脉冲(K’n+1以后)一律以延迟时间DT1生成。Therefore, the following configuration is employed: the frequency division counter circuit within clock generator 222a counts the reference clock signal TC0. When the count reaches a predetermined value Nv, the preset value set for the variable delay circuit is changed by a fixed amount. This is illustrated by the time chart of Figure 21. In Figure 21, before the reference clock signal TC0 reaches Nv by the frequency division counter circuit, the preset value set for the variable delay circuit is the delay time DT0. Thereafter, when the frequency division counter circuit reaches Nv due to a single clock pulse Kn of the reference clock signal TC0, the preset value set for the variable delay circuit is immediately changed to the delay time DT1. Therefore, each clock pulse (K'n+1 and later) of the clock signal LTC generated based on the clock pulse Kn+1 following the clock pulse Kn of the reference clock signal TC0 is uniformly generated with a delay time DT1.
由此,仅在使对可变延迟电路设定的预设值变化了一定量时,即,仅在时钟信号LTC的时钟脉冲K’n与时钟脉冲K’n+1之间,变化时间间隔Td1,其以后的时钟信号LTC的时钟脉冲的时间间隔成为Td0。在图21中,使延迟时间DT1与延迟时间DT0相比增加,使时钟信号LTC的两个时钟脉冲间的时间与Td0相比增加,但同样地也能够减少。此外,分频计数器电路在对基准时钟信号TC0计数到Nv后归零,再次开始至Nv为止的计数。Thus, only when the preset value set for the variable delay circuit is changed by a certain amount—that is, only when the time interval Td1 is changed between clock pulses K'n and K'n+1 of the clock signal LTC—does the time interval between the clock pulses of the clock signal LTC thereafter become Td0. In Figure 21 , the delay time DT1 is increased compared to the delay time DT0, and the time between the two clock pulses of the clock signal LTC is increased compared to Td0, but it can also be reduced. Furthermore, after the frequency division counter circuit counts the reference clock signal TC0 to Nv, it returns to zero and begins counting again to Nv.
若将对可变延迟电路设定的预设值的初始值设为延迟时间DT0,将延迟时间的变化量设为±ΔDh,将分频计数器电路被归零的次数设为Nz,将分频计数器电路每当计数到Nv(每当归零)时对可变延迟电路依次设定的预设值的延迟时间设为DTm,则延迟时间DTm设定成DTm=DT0+Nz·(±ΔDh)的关系。因此,如图21那样,在归零的次数Nz为1(m=1)的期间设定的延迟时间DT1成为 DTm=DT1=DT0±ΔDh,在下一归零(Nz=2,m=2)产生后设定的延迟时间DT2成为DTm=DT2=DT0+2·(±ΔDh)。因此,延迟时间的变化量±ΔDh对应于时钟信号LTC的时钟脉冲K’n与时钟脉冲K’n+1 之间的时间Td1相对于基准时间Td0的差分。If the initial value of the preset value set for the variable delay circuit is set to delay time DT0, the amount of delay time change is set to ±ΔDh, the number of times the frequency division counter circuit is reset to zero is set to Nz, and the delay time that is sequentially set to the preset value for the variable delay circuit each time the frequency division counter circuit counts to Nv (each time it is reset to zero) is set to DTm, then the delay time DTm is set to the relationship DTm = DT0 + Nz (±ΔDh). Therefore, as shown in Figure 21, the delay time DT1 set during the period when the number of resets to zero is 1 (m=1) is DTm = DT1 = DT0 ±ΔDh. The delay time DT2 set after the next reset to zero (Nz=2, m=2) is DTm = DT2 = DT0 + 2 (±ΔDh). Therefore, the amount of delay time change ±ΔDh corresponds to the difference in time Td1 between clock pulses K'n and K'n+1 of the clock signal LTC relative to the reference time Td0.
如以上那样,在时钟信号LTC的特定的两个时钟脉冲间使时间间隔变化的动作,根据对分频计数器电路设定的规定值Nv,在一条描绘线(SL1~SL6)的全长中的多个部位离散地实施。图22示出该情形。图22在描绘线SL1的全长范围内,将每当分频计数器电路的计数值达到规定值Nv时归零的多个位置表示为修正点CPP。在该修正点CPP各自下,仅时钟信号LTC的特定的两个时钟脉冲间相对于时间Td0伸缩时间±ΔDh。As described above, the operation of varying the time interval between specific two clock pulses of the clock signal LTC is discretely performed at multiple locations along the entire length of a plotted line (SL1-SL6) based on the predetermined value Nv set for the frequency division counter circuit. Figure 22 illustrates this. Figure 22 shows multiple locations along the entire length of plotted line SL1 where the count value of the frequency division counter circuit returns to zero each time it reaches the predetermined value Nv, as correction points CPP. At each of these correction points CPP, only the time interval between specific two clock pulses of the clock signal LTC is stretched or shortened by ±ΔDh relative to time Td0.
因此,若将基准时钟信号TC0设为100MHz(Td0=10nS),将点光SP的主扫描方向的实效的尺寸设为3μm,将描绘线SL1 (SL2~SL6也同样)的长度设为30mm,设由光束LB的两个连续的脉冲光投射到基板FS上的点光SP在主扫描方向上重叠一半左右 (1.5μm)进行描绘,则在描绘线SL1的长度范围内生成的基准时钟信号TC0的时钟数成为20000个。另外,延迟时间的变化量ΔDh相对于基准的时间间隔Td0十分小,例如被设定成2%左右。在该条件下,在使沿着描绘线SL1描绘的图案在主扫描方向(Y方向)上伸缩150ppm的情况下,描绘线SL1的长度30mm的150ppm相当于 4.5μm。关于这些描绘倍率的比率150ppm或实际尺寸4.5μm的信息作为信息mg1保存在图18中的存储器部BM1a中。Therefore, if the reference clock signal TC0 is set to 100 MHz (Td0 = 10 nS), the effective size of the spot light SP in the main scanning direction is set to 3 μm, and the length of the drawing line SL1 (the same applies to SL2 to SL6) is set to 30 mm, and two consecutive pulses of light from the light beam LB projected onto the substrate FS overlap the spot light SP by approximately half (1.5 μm) in the main scanning direction, the number of reference clock signal TC0 clocks generated within the length of the drawing line SL1 is 20,000. Furthermore, the change in delay time ΔDh relative to the reference time interval Td0 is very small, for example, set to approximately 2%. Under these conditions, if the pattern drawn along the drawing line SL1 is expanded or contracted by 150 ppm in the main scanning direction (Y direction), 150 ppm of the 30 mm length of the drawing line SL1 is equivalent to 4.5 μm. Information regarding the ratio of the drawing magnification (150 ppm) or the effective size (4.5 μm) is stored as information mg1 in the memory unit BM1a in FIG18.
因此,时钟信号LTC的20000个的时钟脉冲列中的相对于时间 Td0伸缩时间ΔDh的修正点CPP(图22)的个数成为4.5μm/ (1.5μm×2%)=150,对图22所示的分频计数器电路设定的最大的规定值Nv由20000/150而为约133。Therefore, the number of correction points CPP (Figure 22) at which the time ΔDh is expanded or contracted relative to the time Td0 in the 20,000 clock pulse train of the clock signal LTC becomes 4.5 μm/(1.5 μm × 2%) = 150. The maximum specified value Nv set for the frequency division counter circuit shown in Figure 22 is approximately 133, which is 20,000/150.
另外,在将延迟时间的变化量ΔDh设为5%的情况下,修正点 CPP的个数成为4.5μm/(1.5μm×5%)=60,对分频计数器电路设定的最大的规定值Nv由20000/60而为约333。像这样,延迟时间的变化量ΔDh不足10%,较小,因此,即使在该修正点CPP处存在要描绘的图案,由于该图案的尺寸大于点光SP的尺寸,所以能够无视因修正点CPP处的点光SP在主扫描方向上的稍许错位而导致的描绘误差。Furthermore, when the delay time variation ΔDh is set to 5%, the number of correction points CPP becomes 4.5 μm/(1.5 μm × 5%) = 60, and the maximum predetermined value Nv set for the frequency division counter circuit is approximately 333, which is 20,000/60. Since the delay time variation ΔDh is small, less than 10%, even if a pattern to be drawn exists at the correction point CPP, the size of the pattern is larger than the size of the spot light SP. Therefore, a drawing error caused by a slight misalignment of the spot light SP in the main scanning direction at the correction point CPP can be ignored.
以上那样的延迟时间的变化量ΔDh、修正点CPP的个数、对分频计数器电路的规定值Nv的设定等,根据从图18的控制电路500 输出的倍率修正信息CMg(ppm),在图17所示的控制电路222内进行运算,而对时钟产生器222a内的分频计数器电路、可变延迟电路等进行设定。The above-mentioned change in delay time ΔDh, the number of correction points CPP, the setting of the specified value Nv for the frequency division counter circuit, etc. are calculated in the control circuit 222 shown in Figure 17 based on the multiplication correction information CMg (ppm) output from the control circuit 500 of Figure 18, and the frequency division counter circuit, variable delay circuit, etc. in the clock generator 222a are set.
根据以上实施方式,来自光源装置14A的光束LB能够分时地依次向例如三个扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自供给,能够按序单独地进行各扫描单元U1、U3、U5的沿着描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5的描绘动作,因此,如图18所示,能够按扫描单元U1、U3、U5设定与描绘倍率的修正量有关的信息mg1、mg3、mg5。由此,即使基板FS的Y方向的伸缩不同、沿Y方向分割而成的若干区域各自的伸缩率不同,也能够以与其对应的方式对各扫描单元Un设定最佳的描绘倍率的修正量,可获得也能够应对基板FS的非线形变形的优点。According to the above embodiment, the light beam LB from the light source device 14A can be supplied sequentially to, for example, the three scanning units U1, U3, and U5 in a time-division manner, allowing each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5 to perform drawing operations along the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 in sequence. Therefore, as shown in FIG18 , information mg1, mg3, and mg5 related to the correction amount of the drawing magnification can be set for each scanning unit U1, U3, and U5. Thus, even if the Y-direction expansion and contraction of the substrate FS differ, or the expansion and contraction rates of the several regions divided along the Y-direction differ, the optimal correction amount of the drawing magnification can be set for each scanning unit Un in a manner corresponding to the respective expansion and contraction rates, thereby achieving the advantage of being able to cope with nonlinear deformation of the substrate FS.
以上,在与使会聚于被照射体(基板FS)上的点光SP进行扫描来描绘图案的装置连接、且将成为点光SP的光束(激光)LB射出的光源装置14A中,如图17、图18所示,设有:第1半导体激光光源(200),其响应于规定周期(Td0)的时钟脉冲(时钟信号 LTC),产生发光时间相对于规定周期短且峰值强度高的急剧升降的第1脉冲光(种光S1);第2半导体激光光源(202),其响应于时钟脉冲,生成发光时间比规定周期短且比第1脉冲光(种光S1)的发光时间长、峰值强度低的宽广的第2脉冲光(种光S2);光纤光放大器(216),其供第1脉冲光(种光S1)或第2脉冲光(种光 S2)入射;和切换装置,其基于要描绘的图案的信息(描绘位串数据Sdw),以在向被照射体上投射点光SP的描绘时使第1脉冲光(种光S1)向光纤光放大器入射、在不向被照射体上投射点光SP的非描绘时使第2脉冲光(种光S2)向光纤光放大器(216)入射的方式进行切换。该切换装置由基于要描绘的图案信息来选择第1脉冲光 (种光S1)和第2脉冲光(种光S2)中的某一方的电光学元件(206)、或者以产生第1脉冲光(种光S1)和第2脉冲光(种光S2)中的某一方的方式基于要描绘的图案信息来控制第1半导体激光光源(200)和第2半导体激光光源(202)的驱动的电路构成。As described above, in a light source device 14A connected to a device for scanning a point light SP converged on an irradiated object (substrate FS) to draw a pattern and emitting a light beam (laser) LB that will become the point light SP, as shown in Figures 17 and 18, there are provided: a first semiconductor laser light source (200), which responds to a clock pulse (clock signal LTC) of a specified period (Td0) to generate a first pulse light (seed light S1) with a short luminous time relative to the specified period and a high peak intensity that rises and falls sharply; a second semiconductor laser light source (202), which responds to the clock pulse to generate a second pulse light (seed light S2) with a shorter luminous time than the specified period and a longer luminous time than the first pulse light (seed light S1) and a low peak intensity that is broad; and an optical fiber amplifier (216) for supplying the first pulse light (seed light S1) or the second pulse light (seed light The invention relates to a method for producing a first pulsed light (seed light S1) incident on an optical fiber amplifier (216) based on information of a pattern to be produced (drawing bit string data Sdw), and a switching device for switching the method so that a first pulsed light (seed light S1) is incident on an optical fiber amplifier when a point light SP is projected onto an irradiated object, and a second pulsed light (seed light S2) is incident on an optical fiber amplifier (216) when a point light SP is not projected onto the irradiated object. The switching device is composed of an electro-optical element (206) for selecting one of the first pulsed light (seed light S1) and the second pulsed light (seed light S2) based on information of a pattern to be produced, or a circuit for controlling the driving of a first semiconductor laser light source (200) and a second semiconductor laser light source (202) based on information of a pattern to be produced so that one of the first pulsed light (seed light S1) and the second pulsed light (seed light S2) is produced.
本第3实施方式也能够适用于上述第1实施方式或其变形例、上述第2实施方式。也就是说,能够将第3实施方式中说明的、光源装置14A的控制电路222内的时钟产生器222a根据来自图18所示的描绘控制用的控制单元(控制电路500)的倍率修正信息CMg 使时钟信号LTC的时间间隔局部地(离散地)伸缩的功能适用于上述第1实施方式或其变形例的光源装置14、上述第2实施方式的光源装置14。该情况下,光源装置14也可以不具有DFB半导体激光元件202、偏振光分束器204、电光学元件206、偏振光分束器208 及吸收体210,也就是说,光源装置14也可以通过光纤光放大器216 使DFB半导体激光元件200发出的脉冲状的种光S1放大,并作为光束LB而射出。该情况下,由于光源装置14不具有电光学元件206,所以生成电路301、303、305生成的串行数据DL1、DL3、DL5被发送到扫描单元Un的描绘用光学元件106或描绘用光学元件150。This third embodiment can also be applied to the aforementioned first embodiment or its variations, and the aforementioned second embodiment. Specifically, the function described in the third embodiment of the clock generator 222a within the control circuit 222 of the light source device 14A, which locally (discretely) expands or contracts the time interval of the clock signal LTC based on the magnification correction information CMg from the control unit (control circuit 500) for rendering control shown in FIG18 , can be applied to the light source device 14 of the aforementioned first embodiment or its variations, and the light source device 14 of the aforementioned second embodiment. In this case, the light source device 14 need not include the DFB semiconductor laser element 202, the polarization beam splitter 204, the electro-optical element 206, the polarization beam splitter 208, and the absorber 210. In other words, the light source device 14 may amplify the pulsed seed light S1 emitted by the DFB semiconductor laser element 200 using the fiber optical amplifier 216 and emit it as the light beam LB. In this case, since the light source device 14 does not include the electro-optical element 206 , the serial data DL1 , DL3 , and DL5 generated by the generation circuits 301 , 303 , and 305 are sent to the image drawing optical element 106 or the image drawing optical element 150 of the scanning unit Un.
[第4实施方式][Fourth embodiment]
图23是表示第4实施方式的包含对基板(被照射体)FS实施曝光处理的曝光装置EX的器件制造系统10的概略结构的图。此外,在未特别限定下,对与上述第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)相同的结构标注相同的附图标记或省略图示,仅对其不同部分进行说明。FIG23 is a diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of a device manufacturing system 10 according to a fourth embodiment, including an exposure apparatus EX for performing an exposure process on a substrate (irradiated object) FS. Unless otherwise specified, components identical to those of the first to third embodiments (including modifications) described above are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from illustration, and only the differences are described.
在本第4实施方式中,与上述第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)同样地,作为光束扫描装置的曝光装置EX是不使用光罩的直接描绘方式的曝光装置、即所谓光栅扫描方式的曝光装置。曝光装置 EX取代上述第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)中说明的描绘头 16而具备光束切换部件20及曝光头22。另外,曝光装置EX还具备多个对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)。虽然在第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)中没有特别说明,但上述第1~第3实施方式的曝光装置EX也具备多个对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)。此外,在第4 实施方式的曝光装置EX中,当然也具备基板搬送机构12、光源装置14’及控制装置18。此外,本第4实施方式的光源装置14’以与上述第2实施方式的变形例中说明的光源装置14(光源装置14A、14B) 相同的结构(参照图17)为前提。该光源装置14’射出的光束LB经由光束切换部件20向曝光头22入射。In this fourth embodiment, similar to the first to third embodiments (including modified examples), the exposure apparatus EX, serving as a beam scanning device, is a direct-drawing exposure apparatus that does not use a mask, i.e., a so-called raster scanning exposure apparatus. The exposure apparatus EX replaces the drawing head 16 described in the first to third embodiments (including modified examples) with a beam switching unit 20 and an exposure head 22. Furthermore, the exposure apparatus EX includes multiple alignment microscopes AMm (AM1 to AM4). Although not specifically described in the first to third embodiments (including modified examples), the exposure apparatus EX of the first to third embodiments also includes multiple alignment microscopes AMm (AM1 to AM4). Furthermore, the exposure apparatus EX of the fourth embodiment also includes a substrate transport mechanism 12, a light source device 14', and a control device 18. Furthermore, the light source device 14' of the fourth embodiment is based on the same structure as the light source device 14 (light source devices 14A and 14B) described in the modified example of the second embodiment (see FIG. 17 ). The light beam LB emitted from the light source device 14' passes through the light beam switching component 20 and enters the exposure head 22.
光束切换部件20以向构成曝光头22的多个扫描单元Un (U1~U6)中的、进行点光SP的一维扫描的一个扫描单元Un射入来自光源装置14’的光束LB的方式,对光束LB的光路进行切换。关于该光束切换部件20将在后详细说明。The light beam switching unit 20 switches the optical path of the light beam LB from the light source device 14' so that the light beam LB is incident on one of the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) constituting the exposure head 22, which performs one-dimensional scanning of the spot light SP. The light beam switching unit 20 will be described in detail later.
曝光头22具备供光束LB分别入射的多个扫描单元Un (U1~U6)。曝光头22通过多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)在旋转筒 DR的圆周面所支承的基板FS的一部分上描绘出图案。曝光头22为排列有相同结构的多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的所谓多光束型的曝光头。如图23所示,奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5相对于中心面 Poc而配置在基板FS的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧),并且沿着 Y方向配置。偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6相对于中心面Poc而配置在基板FS的搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧),并且沿着Y方向配置。奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5与偶数号的扫描单元U2、 U4、U6关于中心面Poc对称地设置。也就是说,在第4实施方式中,奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5与偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6 的配置与上述第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)中说明的情况相反。The exposure head 22 includes a plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) into which the light beams LB are incident. The exposure head 22 draws a pattern on a portion of the substrate FS supported by the circumferential surface of the rotating drum DR through the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6). The exposure head 22 is a so-called multi-beam type exposure head in which a plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) of the same structure are arranged. As shown in FIG23 , the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are arranged on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate FS relative to the center plane Poc and are arranged along the Y direction. The even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are arranged on the downstream side (+X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate FS relative to the center plane Poc and are arranged along the Y direction. The odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are symmetrically arranged with respect to the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, and U6 with respect to the center plane Poc. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the arrangement of the odd-numbered scanning units U1 , U3 , and U5 and the even-numbered scanning units U2 , U4 , and U6 is opposite to that described in the first to third embodiments (including modifications).
扫描单元Un以使来自光源装置14’的光束LB在基板FS的被照射面上收敛成点光SP的方式投射,同时通过旋转的多面镜PM(参照图28)使该点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上沿着规定的直线的描绘线(扫描线)SLn进行一维扫描。The scanning unit Un projects the light beam LB from the light source device 14' in a manner that converges into a point light SP on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS, and at the same time uses a rotating polygonal mirror PM (refer to Figure 28) to cause the point light SP to be scanned in one dimension along a prescribed straight line drawing line (scanning line) SLn on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS.
多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)以规定的配置关系配置。在本第4 实施方式中,多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)配置成多个扫描单元Un (U1~U6)的描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)如图24、图25所示在Y方向 (基板FS的宽度方向、主扫描方向)不相互分离地接合。此外,如第1~第3实施方式(变形例)中所述,存在将向各扫描单元Un (U1~U6)入射的光束LB分别表示为LB1~LB6的情况。该向扫描单元Un入射的光束LB是在规定的方向上偏振的直线偏振(P偏振或S偏振)的光束,在本第4实施方式中,为P偏振的光束。另外,也存在将向六个扫描单元U1~U6各自入射的光束LB1~LB6表示成光束LBn的情况。A plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) are arranged in a prescribed configuration relationship. In the present fourth embodiment, the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) are arranged so that the drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6) of the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) are joined together in the Y direction (the width direction of the substrate FS, the main scanning direction) without being separated from each other as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 . In addition, as described in the first to third embodiments (modifications), there is a case where the light beams LB incident on each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) are respectively represented as LB1 to LB6. The light beam LB incident on the scanning unit Un is a linearly polarized light beam (P polarization or S polarization) polarized in a prescribed direction, and in the present fourth embodiment, it is a P polarized light beam. In addition, there is also a case where the light beams LB1 to LB6 incident on each of the six scanning units U1 to U6 are represented as light beams LBn.
如图25所示,以通过多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)中的全部扫描单元覆盖曝光区域W的宽度方向的整个范围的方式,由各扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)分担扫描区域。由此,各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)能够按沿基板FS的宽度方向分割而成的多个区域的每个区域来描绘图案。例如,若将基于一个扫描单元Un实现的Y方向的扫描长度(描绘线SLn的长度)设为30~60mm左右,则通过将奇数号的扫描单元 U1、U3、U5这三个扫描单元和偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6这三个扫描单元、共计六个扫描单元Un沿Y方向配置,而将能够描绘的Y方向的宽度扩展到180~360mm左右。各描绘线SL1~SL6的长度(扫描长度、主扫描方向的扫描宽度)原则上是相同的。As shown in FIG25 , the scanning area is shared by each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) in such a manner that all of the scanning units in the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) cover the entire range in the width direction of the exposure area W. Thus, each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) can draw a pattern in each of the plurality of areas divided along the width direction of the substrate FS. For example, if the scanning length in the Y direction (the length of the drawing line SLn) achieved by one scanning unit Un is set to approximately 30 to 60 mm, then by arranging three scanning units, namely odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, and U5, and three scanning units, namely even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, and U6, a total of six scanning units Un, along the Y direction, the width in the Y direction that can be drawn is expanded to approximately 180 to 360 mm. In principle, the lengths (scanning lengths, scanning widths in the main scanning direction) of the drawing lines SL1 to SL6 are the same.
此外,如上所述,实际上的各描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)被设定成与点光SP能够在被照射面上实际扫描的最大长度相比稍短。通过像这样设定,能够在点光SP的最大扫描长度(例如,31mm)的范围内,在主扫描方向上对描绘线SLn(例如,扫描长度为30mm)的位置进行微调、或对描绘倍率进行微调。点光SP的最大扫描长度主要由扫描单元Un内的设在多面镜(旋转多面镜)PM之后的fθ透镜 FT(参照图28)的孔径确定。As described above, each actual drawing line SLn (SL1-SL6) is set slightly shorter than the maximum length that the spot light SP can actually scan on the illuminated surface. This setting allows for fine adjustment of the position of the drawing line SLn (for example, a scanning length of 30 mm) in the main scanning direction and the drawing magnification within the maximum scanning length of the spot light SP (for example, 31 mm). The maximum scanning length of the spot light SP is primarily determined by the aperture of the fθ lens FT (see Figure 28), located after the polygon mirror (rotating polygon mirror) PM within the scanning unit Un.
多条描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)隔着中心面Poc而在旋转筒DR的周向上排列成两列。奇数号的描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5相对于中心面 Poc而位于基板FS的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)的基板FS的被照射面上。偶数号的描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6相对于中心面Poc而位于基板FS的搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧)的基板FS的被照射面上。描绘线SL1~SL6与基板FS的宽度方向、即旋转筒DR的中心轴AXo大致平行。Multiple drawing lines SLn (SL1-SL6) are arranged in two rows in the circumferential direction of the rotating drum DR, sandwiched between the center plane Poc. The odd-numbered drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are located on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS upstream (-X direction side) in the conveyance direction of the substrate FS relative to the center plane Poc. The even-numbered drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 are located on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS downstream (+X direction side) in the conveyance direction of the substrate FS relative to the center plane Poc. The drawing lines SL1-SL6 are approximately parallel to the width direction of the substrate FS, that is, the center axis AXo of the rotating drum DR.
描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5沿着基板FS的宽度方向(扫描方向) 隔开规定间隔地配置在直线上。描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6也同样地,沿着基板FS的宽度方向(扫描方向)隔开规定间隔地配置在直线上。沿着奇数号的描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5各自而进行扫描的光束LBn的点光SP的扫描方向为一维方向,为-Y方向。沿着偶数号的描绘线 SL2、SL4、SL6各自而进行扫描的光束LBn的点光SP的扫描方向为一维方向,为+Y方向。Drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are arranged on a straight line at predetermined intervals along the width direction (scanning direction) of the substrate FS. Drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 are similarly arranged on a straight line at predetermined intervals along the width direction (scanning direction) of the substrate FS. The scanning direction of the spot light SP of the light beam LBn scanning along each of the odd-numbered drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 is one-dimensional, namely, the -Y direction. The scanning direction of the spot light SP of the light beam LBn scanning along each of the even-numbered drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 is one-dimensional, namely, the +Y direction.
在第4实施方式中,多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)按照预先确定的顺序(规定顺序)反复进行光束LBn的点光SP的扫描。例如,在进行点光SP的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序为 U1→U2→U3→U4→U5→U6的情况下,首先,扫描单元U1进行一次点光SP的扫描。然后,当扫描单元U1的点光SP的扫描结束时,扫描单元U2进行一次点光SP的扫描,当该扫描结束时,扫描单元 U3进行一次点光SP的扫描,以该方式,多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6) 按规定顺序各自进行一次点光SP的扫描。而且,当扫描单元U6的点光SP的扫描结束时,返回到扫描单元U1的点光SP的扫描。像这样,多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)按规定顺序反复进行点光SP的扫描。In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) repeatedly scan the point light SP of the light beam LBn in a predetermined order (prescribed order). For example, when the order of the scanning units Un that scan the point light SP is U1 → U2 → U3 → U4 → U5 → U6, first, the scanning unit U1 scans the point light SP once. Then, when the scanning unit U1 finishes scanning the point light SP, the scanning unit U2 scans the point light SP once, and when the scanning finishes, the scanning unit U3 scans the point light SP once. In this way, the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) each scans the point light SP once in the prescribed order. Moreover, when the scanning unit U6 finishes scanning the point light SP, the scanning unit U1 returns to scanning the point light SP. In this way, the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) repeatedly scans the point light SP in the prescribed order.
各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)至少在XZ平面中,以各光束LBn朝向旋转筒DR的中心轴AXo行进的方式,将各光束LBn朝向基板FS 照射。由此,从各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)朝向基板FS行进的光束 LBn的光路(光束中心轴)在XZ平面中与基板FS的被照射面的法线同轴(平行)。另外,各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)以向描绘线SLn (SL1~SL6)照射的光束LBn在与YZ平面平行的面内相对于基板 FS的被照射面垂直的方式,将光束LBn朝向基板FS照射。即,关于点光SP在被照射面上的主扫描方向,投射到基板FS上的光束LBn (LB1~LB6)以远心状态进行扫描。在此,将从由各扫描单元Un (U1~U6)规定的描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)的各中点通过并与基板FS的被照射面垂直的线(或也称为光轴)称作照射中心轴Len (Le1~Le6)(参照图24)。Each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) irradiates each light beam LBn toward the substrate FS in such a manner that each light beam LBn travels toward the center axis AXo of the rotating cylinder DR, at least in the XZ plane. Thus, the optical path (the center axis of the light beam) of the light beam LBn traveling from each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) toward the substrate FS is coaxial (parallel) with the normal to the irradiated surface of the substrate FS in the XZ plane. In addition, each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) irradiates the light beam LBn toward the drawing line SLn (SL1 to SL6) toward the substrate FS in such a manner that the light beam LBn is perpendicular to the irradiated surface of the substrate FS within a plane parallel to the YZ plane. That is, with respect to the main scanning direction of the point light SP on the irradiated surface, the light beam LBn (LB1 to LB6) projected onto the substrate FS is scanned in a telecentric state. Here, a line (or also called an optical axis) passing through each midpoint of the drawing line SLn (SL1 to SL6) defined by each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) and perpendicular to the irradiated surface of the substrate FS is called the irradiation center axis Len (Le1 to Le6) (refer to Figure 24).
该各照射中心轴Len(Le1~Le6)在XZ平面中为将描绘线 SL1~SL6与中心轴AXo连结而成的线。奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、 U5各自的照射中心轴Le1、Le3、Le5在XZ平面中为相同方向,偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6各自的照射中心轴Le2、Le4、Le6在 XZ平面中为相同方向。另外,照射中心轴Le1、Le3、Le5和照射中心轴Le2、Le4、Le6被设定成在XZ平面中相对于中心面Poc的角度为±θ(参照图23)。Each irradiation center axis Len (Le1-Le6) is a line connecting the drawing lines SL1-SL6 and the center axis AXo in the XZ plane. The irradiation center axes Le1, Le3, and Le5 of the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are aligned in the same direction in the XZ plane, while the irradiation center axes Le2, Le4, and Le6 of the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are aligned in the same direction in the XZ plane. Furthermore, the irradiation center axes Le1, Le3, and Le5 and the irradiation center axes Le2, Le4, and Le6 are set at angles of ±θ relative to the center plane Poc in the XZ plane (see Figure 23).
图23所示的对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4),如图25所示,用于对形成于基板FS的对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4)进行检测,沿着Y方向设有多个(在本第4实施方式中为四个)。对准标记MKm (MK1~MK4)是用于将在基板FS的被照射面上的曝光区域W要描绘的规定图案与基板FS相对地对位(对准)的基准标记。对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)在旋转筒DR的圆周面所支承的基板FS上检测对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4)。对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4) 与基于来自曝光头22的光束LBn(LB1~LB6)的点光SP而形成在基板FS上的被照射区域(描绘线SL1~SL6所包围的区域)相比设在基板FS的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧)。The alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) shown in FIG23 is used to detect the alignment marks MKm (MK1 to MK4) formed on the substrate FS, as shown in FIG25 , and is provided with a plurality of them along the Y direction (four in the present fourth embodiment). The alignment marks MKm (MK1 to MK4) are reference marks for aligning (aligning) the prescribed pattern to be drawn in the exposure area W on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS relative to the substrate FS. The alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) detects the alignment marks MKm (MK1 to MK4) on the substrate FS supported by the circumferential surface of the rotating drum DR. The alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) is provided on the upstream side (-X direction side) of the conveying direction of the substrate FS compared to the irradiated area (the area surrounded by the drawing lines SL1 to SL6) formed on the substrate FS based on the point light SP of the light beam LBn (LB1 to LB6) from the exposure head 22.
对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)具有:将对准用的照明光向基板FS投射的光源、得到基板FS的表面的包含对准标记MKm (MK1~MK4)在内的局部区域(观察区域)的放大像的观察光学系统(包含物镜)、和在基板FS沿搬送方向移动的期间以高速快门拍摄该放大像的CCD、CMOS等摄像元件。对准显微镜AMm (AM1~AM4)拍摄得到的摄像信号(图像数据)ig(ig1~ig4)被发送到控制装置18。控制装置18基于摄像信号ig(ig1~ig4)的图像解析、和拍摄瞬间的旋转筒DR的旋转位置的信息(基于图24所示的读取标尺部SD的编码器EN1a、EN1b得到的计测值),来检测对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4)的位置,从而高精度地检测基板FS的位置。此外,对准用照明光是对基板FS上的感光性功能层几乎不具有灵敏度的波段的光,例如,为波长500~800nm左右的光。The alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) includes: a light source for projecting illumination light for alignment onto the substrate FS, an observation optical system (including an objective lens) for obtaining a magnified image of a local area (observation area) including the alignment marks MKm (MK1 to MK4) on the surface of the substrate FS, and an imaging element such as a CCD or CMOS for capturing the magnified image with a high-speed shutter while the substrate FS moves along the conveying direction. The imaging signal (image data) ig (ig1 to ig4) captured by the alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) is sent to the control device 18. The control device 18 detects the position of the alignment marks MKm (MK1 to MK4) based on image analysis of the imaging signal ig (ig1 to ig4) and information on the rotational position of the rotating drum DR at the moment of capturing the image (based on the measured values obtained by the encoders EN1a and EN1b of the reading scale section SD shown in FIG24), thereby detecting the position of the substrate FS with high precision. In addition, the alignment illumination light is light in a wavelength band to which the photosensitive functional layer on the substrate FS has almost no sensitivity, for example, light with a wavelength of about 500 to 800 nm.
对准标记MK1~MK4设在各曝光区域W周围。对准标记MK1、 MK4在曝光区域W的基板FS的宽度方向的两侧沿着基板FS的长边方向以一定的间隔DI形成有多个。对准标记MK1形成在基板FS 的宽度方向的-Y方向侧,对准标记MK4形成在基板FS的宽度方向的+Y方向侧。这种对准标记MK1、MK4配置成在基板FS没有受到大的张力或受热工艺而发生变形的状态下,在基板FS的长边方向(X 方向)上位于相同位置。而且,对准标记MK2、MK3在对准标记MK1与对准标记MK4之间,且在曝光区域W的+X方向侧与-X方向侧的余白部沿着基板FS的宽度方向(短边方向)而形成。对准标记MK2、MK3形成在曝光区域W与曝光区域W之间。对准标记MK2形成在基板FS的宽度方向的-Y方向侧,对准标记MK3形成在基板FS的+Y方向侧。Alignment marks MK1 to MK4 are arranged around each exposure area W. A plurality of alignment marks MK1 and MK4 are formed at a certain interval DI on both sides of the width direction of the substrate FS of the exposure area W along the long side direction of the substrate FS. Alignment mark MK1 is formed on the -Y direction side of the width direction of the substrate FS, and alignment mark MK4 is formed on the +Y direction side of the width direction of the substrate FS. Such alignment marks MK1 and MK4 are configured so as to be located at the same position in the long side direction (X direction) of the substrate FS when the substrate FS is not deformed by large tension or heat treatment. Moreover, alignment marks MK2 and MK3 are formed between alignment mark MK1 and alignment mark MK4, and in the blank portions on the +X direction side and -X direction side of the exposure area W along the width direction (short side direction) of the substrate FS. Alignment marks MK2 and MK3 are formed between exposure area W and exposure area W. Alignment mark MK2 is formed on the -Y direction side of the width direction of the substrate FS, and alignment mark MK3 is formed on the +Y direction side of the substrate FS.
而且,排列在基板FS的-Y方向的侧端部的对准标记MK1与余白部的对准标记MK2在Y方向上的间隔、余白部的对准标记MK2 与对准标记MK3在Y方向上的间隔、及排列在基板FS的+Y方向的侧端部的对准标记MK4与余白部的对准标记MK3在Y方向上的间隔均设定成相同距离。这些对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4)可以在第1层的图案层的形成时一起形成。例如,可以在对第1层的图案进行曝光时,在要曝光图案的曝光区域W的周围也一起曝光出对准标记用的图案。此外,对准标记MKm也可以形成在曝光区域W内。例如,可以在曝光区域W内沿着曝光区域W的轮廓形成。另外,在曝光区域W内形成对准标记MKm的情况下,也可以将形成于曝光区域W内的电子器件的图案中的特定位置的图案部分或特定形状的部分利用为对准标记MKm。Moreover, the interval in the Y direction between the alignment mark MK1 arranged at the side end of the -Y direction of the substrate FS and the alignment mark MK2 of the blank part, the interval in the Y direction between the alignment mark MK2 of the blank part and the alignment mark MK3, and the interval in the Y direction between the alignment mark MK4 arranged at the side end of the +Y direction of the substrate FS and the alignment mark MK3 of the blank part are all set to the same distance. These alignment marks MKm (MK1 to MK4) can be formed together when the pattern layer of the first layer is formed. For example, when the pattern of the first layer is exposed, the pattern for the alignment mark can also be exposed around the exposure area W where the pattern is to be exposed. In addition, the alignment mark MKm can also be formed in the exposure area W. For example, it can be formed in the exposure area W along the contour of the exposure area W. In addition, when the alignment mark MKm is formed in the exposure area W, the pattern portion at a specific position or a portion of a specific shape in the pattern of the electronic device formed in the exposure area W can also be used as the alignment mark MKm.
对准显微镜AM1配置成对存在于物镜的观察区域(检测区域) Vw1内的对准标记MK1进行拍摄。同样地,对准显微镜AM2~AM4 配置成对存在于物镜的观察区域Vw2~Vw4内的对准标记 MK2~MK4进行拍摄。因此,多个对准显微镜AM1~AM4与多个对准标记MK1~MK4的位置对应地,从基板FS的-Y方向侧按对准显微镜AM1~AM4的顺序设置。对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)设置成,曝光位置(描绘线SL1~SL6)与对准显微镜AMm的观察区域 Vw(Vw1~Vw4)在X方向上的距离比曝光区域W在X方向上的长度短。在Y方向上设置的对准显微镜AMm的数量能够根据形成在基板FS的宽度方向上的对准标记MKm的数量而变更。另外,观察区域Vw1~Vw4在基板FS的被照射面上的大小根据对准标记 MK1~MK4的大小和/或对准精度(位置计测精度)而设定,为 100~500μm见方左右的大小。此外,虽然在第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)中没有特别说明,但在上述第1~第3实施方式中使用的基板FS上也形成有多个对准标记MKm。The alignment microscope AM1 is configured to photograph the alignment mark MK1 present in the observation area (detection area) Vw1 of the objective lens. Similarly, the alignment microscopes AM2 to AM4 are configured to photograph the alignment marks MK2 to MK4 present in the observation area Vw2 to Vw4 of the objective lens. Therefore, a plurality of alignment microscopes AM1 to AM4 are arranged in the order of the alignment microscopes AM1 to AM4 from the -Y direction side of the substrate FS, corresponding to the positions of the plurality of alignment marks MK1 to MK4. The alignment microscopes AMm (AM1 to AM4) are arranged so that the distance between the exposure position (drawing lines SL1 to SL6) and the observation area Vw (Vw1 to Vw4) of the alignment microscope AMm in the X direction is shorter than the length of the exposure area W in the X direction. The number of alignment microscopes AMm arranged in the Y direction can be changed according to the number of alignment marks MKm formed in the width direction of the substrate FS. In addition, the size of the observation areas Vw1 to Vw4 on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS is set according to the size of the alignment marks MK1 to MK4 and/or the alignment accuracy (position measurement accuracy), and is about 100 to 500 μm square. In addition, although not specifically described in the first to third embodiments (including modified examples), a plurality of alignment marks MKm are also formed on the substrate FS used in the first to third embodiments.
如图24所示,在旋转筒DR的两端部,设有具有在旋转筒DR 的外周面的周向整体范围内形成为环状的刻度的标尺部SD(SDa、 SDb)。该标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)是在旋转筒DR的外周面的周向上以一定间距(例如,20μm)刻设有凹状或凸状的格子线的衍射光栅,构成为增量型的标尺。该标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)绕中心轴AXo 与旋转筒DR一体地旋转。另外,以与该标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)相对的方式设有多个编码器(标尺读取头)ENn。该编码器ENn对旋转筒DR的旋转位置进行光学检测。与设在旋转筒DR的-Y方向侧的端部的标尺部SDa相对地,设有三个编码器ENn(EN1a、EN2a、 EN3a)。同样地,与设在旋转筒DR的+Y方向侧的端部的标尺部SDb相对地,设有三个编码器ENn(EN1b、EN2b、EN3b)。此外,虽然在第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)中没有特别说明,但在上述第1~第3实施方式的旋转筒DR的两端部设有标尺部SD(SDa、 SDb),以与其相对的方式设有多个编码器En(EN1a~EN3a、 EN1b~EN3b)。As shown in Figure 24, at both ends of the rotating cylinder DR, there are provided scale portions SD (SDa, SDb) having scales formed in an annular shape over the entire circumferential range of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder DR. The scale portions SD (SDa, SDb) are diffraction gratings with concave or convex grid lines engraved at a certain interval (for example, 20 μm) in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder DR, constituting an incremental scale. The scale portions SD (SDa, SDb) rotate integrally with the rotating cylinder DR around the central axis AXo. In addition, a plurality of encoders (scale reading heads) ENn are provided in a manner opposite to the scale portions SD (SDa, SDb). The encoder ENn optically detects the rotational position of the rotating cylinder DR. Opposite to the scale portion SDa provided at the end portion on the -Y direction side of the rotating cylinder DR, three encoders ENn (EN1a, EN2a, EN3a) are provided. Similarly, three encoders ENn (EN1b, EN2b, EN3b) are provided opposite the scale portion SDb provided at the end portion of the rotating drum DR on the +Y direction side. Furthermore, although not specifically described in the first to third embodiments (including variations), scale portions SD (SDa, SDb) are provided at both ends of the rotating drum DR in the first to third embodiments, and a plurality of encoders En (EN1a to EN3a, EN1b to EN3b) are provided opposite thereto.
编码器ENn(EN1a~EN3a、EN1b~EN3b)朝向标尺部SD(SDa、 SDb)投射计测用的光束,通过对其反射光束(衍射光)进行光电检测,而向控制装置18输出作为脉冲信号的检测信号。控制装置18 通过计数器电路356a(参照图33)对其检测信号(脉冲信号)进行计数,由此能够以亚微米的分辨率来计测旋转筒DR的旋转角度位置及角度变化。计数器电路356a分别单独地对各编码器ENn (EN1a~EN3a、EN1b~EN3b)的检测信号进行计数。控制装置18也能够根据旋转筒DR的角度变化来计测基板FS的搬送速度。对各编码器ENn(EN1a~EN3a、EN1b~EN3b)各自的检测信号单独地进行计数的计数器电路356a在各编码器ENn(EN1a~EN3a、EN1b~EN3b) 检测到形成于标尺部SDa、SDb的周向一部分的原点标记(原点图案)ZZ时,将与该编码器ENn对应的计数值重置为0。The encoders ENn (EN1a-EN3a, EN1b-EN3b) project a measuring beam toward the scale unit SD (SDa, SDb) and photoelectrically detect the reflected beam (diffracted light), outputting a detection signal as a pulse signal to the control device 18. The control device 18 counts these detection signals (pulse signals) using a counter circuit 356a (see FIG. 33 ), thereby measuring the rotational angular position and angular change of the rotating drum DR with submicron resolution. The counter circuit 356a counts the detection signals from each encoder ENn (EN1a-EN3a, EN1b-EN3b) individually. The control device 18 can also measure the transport speed of the substrate FS based on the angular change of the rotating drum DR. The counter circuit 356a, which counts the detection signals of each encoder ENn (EN1a~EN3a, EN1b~EN3b) individually, resets the count value corresponding to the encoder ENn to 0 when each encoder ENn (EN1a~EN3a, EN1b~EN3b) detects the origin mark (origin pattern) ZZ formed on a circumferential part of the scale part SDa, SDb.
编码器EN1a、EN1b配置在设置方位线Lx1上。设置方位线Lx1 为在XZ平面中将编码器EN1a、EN1b的计测用的光束向标尺部SD (SDa、SDb)上的投射位置(读取位置)与中心轴AXo连结的线。另外,设置方位线Lx1为在XZ平面中将各对准显微镜AMm (AM1~AM4)的观察区域Vw(Vw1~Vw4)与中心轴AXo连结的线。Encoders EN1a and EN1b are arranged on an installation azimuth line Lx1. Installation azimuth line Lx1 is a line connecting the projection position (reading position) of the measurement beams of encoders EN1a and EN1b onto scale unit SD (SDa, SDb) with the central axis AXo in the XZ plane. Furthermore, installation azimuth line Lx1 is a line connecting the observation area Vw (Vw1 to Vw4) of each alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) with the central axis AXo in the XZ plane.
编码器EN2a、EN2b相对于中心面Poc而设在基板FS的搬送方向的上游侧(-X方向侧),并且,与编码器EN1a、EN1b相比设在基板FS的搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧)。编码器EN2a、EN2b 配置在设置方位线Lx2上。设置方位线Lx2为在XZ平面中将编码器EN2a、EN2b的计测用的光束向标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)上的投射位置与中心轴AXo连结的线。该设置方位线Lx2在XZ平面中与照射中心轴Le1、Le3、Le5为相同角度位置而重叠。Encoders EN2a and EN2b are located upstream (-X direction) of the substrate FS conveyance direction relative to the center plane Poc, and downstream (+X direction) of the substrate FS conveyance direction relative to encoders EN1a and EN1b. Encoders EN2a and EN2b are arranged on a setting azimuth line Lx2. Setting azimuth line Lx2 is a line connecting the projection position of the measurement light beams of encoders EN2a and EN2b onto the scale unit SD (SDa, SDb) with the center axis AXo in the XZ plane. Setting azimuth line Lx2 overlaps with the irradiation center axes Le1, Le3, and Le5 at the same angular position in the XZ plane.
编码器EN3a、EN3b相对于中心面Poc而设在基板FS的搬送方向的下游侧(+X方向侧)。编码器EN3a、EN3b配置在设置方位线 Lx3上。设置方位线Lx3为在XZ平面中将编码器EN3a、EN3b的计测用的光束向标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)上的投射位置与中心轴AXo 连结的线。该设置方位线Lx3在XZ平面中与照射中心轴Le2、Le4、 Le6为相同角度位置而重叠。Encoders EN3a and EN3b are located downstream (on the +X direction) of the substrate FS transport direction relative to the center plane Poc. Encoders EN3a and EN3b are arranged on a setting azimuth line Lx3. Setting azimuth line Lx3 is a line connecting the projection positions of the measurement beams of encoders EN3a and EN3b onto the scale unit SD (SDa, SDb) with the center axis AXo in the XZ plane. Setting azimuth line Lx3 overlaps with the irradiation center axes Le2, Le4, and Le6 at the same angular position in the XZ plane.
来自该编码器EN1a、EN1b的检测信号的计数值(旋转角度位置)、来自编码器EN2a、EN2b的检测信号的计数值(旋转角度位置)、和来自编码器EN3a、EN3b的检测信号的计数值(旋转角度位置),在各编码器ENn检测到附设在旋转筒DR的旋绕方向一处的原点标记ZZ的瞬间被重置为零。因此,在将基于编码器EN1a、 EN1b的计数值为第1值(例如,100)时的、卷绕在旋转筒DR上的基板FS在设置方位线Lx1上的位置(对准显微镜AM1~AM4的各观察区域Vw1~Vw4的位置)设为第1位置的情况下,当基板FS 上的第1位置被搬送至设置方位线Lx2上的位置(描绘线SL1、SL3、 SL5的位置)时,基于编码器EN2a、EN2b的计数值成为第1值(例如100)。同样地,当基板FS上的第1位置被搬送到设置方位线Lx3 上的位置(描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6的位置)时,基于编码器EN3a、 EN3b的检测信号的计数值成为第1值(例如,100)。The count values (rotational angle positions) of the detection signals from encoders EN1a and EN1b, the count values (rotational angle positions) of the detection signals from encoders EN2a and EN2b, and the count values (rotational angle positions) of the detection signals from encoders EN3a and EN3b are reset to zero at the moment each encoder ENn detects an origin mark ZZ located at a location in the rotation direction of the rotating drum DR. Therefore, when the count values based on encoders EN1a and EN1b are set to a first value (e.g., 100), and the position of the substrate FS wound around the rotating drum DR on the setting orientation line Lx1 (the positions of the observation areas Vw1 to Vw4 of the alignment microscopes AM1 to AM4) is set to the first position, when the first position on the substrate FS is conveyed to a position on the setting orientation line Lx2 (the positions of the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5), the count values based on encoders EN2a and EN2b become the first value (e.g., 100). Similarly, when the first position on the substrate FS is conveyed to the position on the setting orientation line Lx3 (the position of the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6), the count value based on the detection signal of the encoders EN3a and EN3b becomes the first value (for example, 100).
然而,基板FS与旋转筒DR的两端的标尺部SDa、SDb相比在内侧被卷绕。在图23中,将标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)的外周面的从中心轴AXo起的半径设定得比旋转筒DR的外周面的从中心轴AXo 起的半径小。但是,如图24所示,也可以设定成标尺部SD(SDa、 SDb)的外周面与卷绕在旋转筒DR上的基板FS的外周面成为共面。也就是说,也可以设定成标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)的外周面的从中心轴AXo起的半径(距离)与卷绕在旋转筒DR上的基板FS的外周面(被照射面)的从中心轴AXo起的半径(距离)相同。由此,编码器ENn(EN1a、EN1b、EN2a、EN2b、EN3a、EN3b)能够在与卷绕于旋转筒DR的基板FS的被照射面相同的径向位置检测标尺部 SD(SDa、SDb),能够减小因编码器ENn的计测位置与处理位置 (描绘线SL1~SL6)在旋转筒DR的径向上不同而产生的阿贝误差。However, the substrate FS is wound on the inner side compared to the scale parts SDa and SDb at both ends of the rotating drum DR. In Figure 23, the radius of the outer peripheral surface of the scale part SD (SDa, SDb) from the center axis AXo is set to be smaller than the radius of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum DR from the center axis AXo. However, as shown in Figure 24, it can also be set so that the outer peripheral surface of the scale part SD (SDa, SDb) and the outer peripheral surface of the substrate FS wound on the rotating drum DR become coplanar. That is, it can also be set so that the radius (distance) of the outer peripheral surface of the scale part SD (SDa, SDb) from the center axis AXo is the same as the radius (distance) of the outer peripheral surface (irradiated surface) of the substrate FS wound on the rotating drum DR from the center axis AXo. Therefore, the encoder ENn (EN1a, EN1b, EN2a, EN2b, EN3a, EN3b) can detect the scale part SD (SDa, SDb) at the same radial position as the irradiated surface of the substrate FS wound on the rotating drum DR, and can reduce the Abbe error caused by the difference between the measurement position of the encoder ENn and the processing position (drawing lines SL1~SL6) in the radial direction of the rotating drum DR.
根据以上内容,基于由对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)检测出的对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4)的位置(基于编码器EN1a、EN1b 得到的计数值),通过控制装置18确定基板FS的长边方向(X方向)上的曝光区域W的描绘曝光的开始位置,此时,将基于编码器 EN1a、EN1b的计数值设为第1值(例如,100)。该情况下,当基于编码器EN2a、EN2b的计数值成为第1值(例如,100)时,基板 FS的长边方向上的曝光区域W的描绘曝光的开始位置位于描绘线 SL1、SL3、SL5上。因此,扫描单元U1、U3、U5能够基于编码器 EN2a、EN2b的计数值来开始点光SP的扫描。另外,当基于编码器 EN3a、EN3b的计数值成为第1值(例如,100)时,基板FS的长度方向上的曝光区域W的描绘曝光的开始位置位于描绘线SL2、 SL4、SL6上。因此,扫描单元U2、U4、U6能够基于编码器EN3a、 EN3b的计数值来开始点光SP的扫描。此外,虽然在第1~第3实施方式(也包含变形例)中没有特别说明,但上述第1~第3实施方式的曝光装置EX也具备编码器ENn(EN1a~EN3a、EN1b~EN3b)及标尺部SD(SDa、SDb)。Based on the above, the control device 18 determines the start position of the drawing exposure of the exposure area W in the longitudinal direction (X direction) of the substrate FS based on the positions of the alignment marks MKm (MK1-MK4) detected by the alignment microscopes AMm (AM1-AM4) (based on the count values obtained by encoders EN1a and EN1b). At this time, the count values obtained by encoders EN1a and EN1b are set to a first value (e.g., 100). In this case, when the count values obtained by encoders EN2a and EN2b reach a first value (e.g., 100), the start position of the drawing exposure of the exposure area W in the longitudinal direction of the substrate FS is located on the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5. Therefore, the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 can start scanning with the spot light SP based on the count values obtained by encoders EN2a and EN2b. Furthermore, when the count values of encoders EN3a and EN3b reach a first value (e.g., 100), the start position of the drawing exposure of the exposure area W in the longitudinal direction of the substrate FS is located on the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6. Therefore, the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 can start scanning the spot light SP based on the count values of encoders EN3a and EN3b. Furthermore, although not specifically described in the first to third embodiments (including modifications), the exposure apparatus EX of the first to third embodiments also includes encoders ENn (EN1a to EN3a, EN1b to EN3b) and a scale unit SD (SDa and SDb).
图26是光束切换部件20的结构图。光束切换部件20具有多个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)、多个聚光透镜CD1~CD6、多个反射镜M1~M12、多个单元侧入射镜IM1~IM6、多个准直透镜 CL1~CL6、和吸收体TR。选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6) 相对于光束LB而具有透射性,是由超声波信号驱动的声光调制元件 (AOM:Acousto-Optic Modulator)。这些光学部件(选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6、聚光透镜CD1~CD6、反射镜M1~M12、单元侧入射镜IM1~IM6、准直透镜CL1~CL6及吸收体TR)由板状的支承部件IUB所支承。该支承部件IUB在多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的上方,从下方(-Z方向侧)支承这些光学部件。因此,支承部件IUB 也具备将成为发热源的选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)与多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)之间隔热的功能。Figure 26 is a structural diagram of the beam switching unit 20. The beam switching unit 20 includes multiple selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1-AOM6), multiple focusing lenses CD1-CD6, multiple reflectors M1-M12, multiple unit-side incident mirrors IM1-IM6, multiple collimating lenses CL1-CL6, and an absorber TR. The selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1-AOM6) are transmissive to the light beam LB and are acousto-optic modulators (AOMs) driven by ultrasonic signals. These optical components (the selection optical elements AOM1-AOM6, the focusing lenses CD1-CD6, the reflectors M1-M12, the unit-side incident mirrors IM1-IM6, the collimating lenses CL1-CL6, and the absorber TR) are supported by a plate-shaped support unit IUB. This support unit IUB supports these optical components from below (in the -Z direction) above the multiple scanning units Un (U1-U6). Therefore, the supporting member IUB also has a function of thermally insulating the selective optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) that serve as heat sources from the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6).
光束LB的光路从光源装置14’被反射镜M1~M12弯曲成锯齿状,光束LB被引导至吸收体TR。以下,在选择用光学元件AOMn (AOM1~AOM6)均为Off状态(没有被施加超声波信号的状态) 的情况下进行详述。来自光源装置14’的光束LB(平行光束)与Y 轴平行地向+Y方向行进,从聚光透镜CD1通过而向反射镜M1入射。在反射镜M1向-X方向侧反射的光束LB直线地从配置于聚光透镜 CD1的焦点位置(光束腰位置)的第1选择用光学元件AOM1透射,并通过准直透镜CL1再次成为平行光束而到达反射镜M2。由反射镜M2向+Y方向侧反射的光束LB从聚光透镜CD2通过后被反射镜 M3向+X方向侧反射。The optical path of the light beam LB is bent into a zigzag shape by the reflectors M1 to M12 from the light source device 14', and the light beam LB is guided to the absorber TR. The following is a detailed description of the case where the selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) are all in the Off state (a state where no ultrasonic signal is applied). The light beam LB (parallel light beam) from the light source device 14' travels in the +Y direction parallel to the Y axis, passes through the focusing lens CD1, and is incident on the reflector M1. The light beam LB reflected to the -X direction side by the reflector M1 is transmitted linearly from the first selection optical element AOM1 arranged at the focal position (beam waist position) of the focusing lens CD1, and becomes a parallel light beam again through the collimating lens CL1 and reaches the reflector M2. The light beam LB reflected to the +Y direction side by the reflector M2 passes through the focusing lens CD2 and is reflected to the +X direction side by the reflector M3.
由反射镜M3反射的光束LB直线地从配置于聚光透镜CD2的焦点位置(光束腰位置)的第2选择用光学元件AOM2透射,并通过准直透镜CL2再次成为平行光束而到达反射镜M4。由反射镜M4 向+Y方向侧反射的光束LB从聚光透镜CD3通过后被反射镜M5向 -X方向侧反射。由反射镜M5向-X方向侧反射的光束LB直线地从配置于聚光透镜CD3的焦点位置(光束腰位置)的第3选择用光学元件AOM3透射,并通过准直透镜CL3再次成为平行光束而到达反射镜M6。由反射镜M6向+Y方向侧反射的光束LB从聚光透镜CD4 通过后被反射镜M7向+X方向侧反射。The light beam LB reflected by the reflector M3 passes linearly through the second selective optical element AOM2, which is located at the focal position (beam waist position) of the condenser lens CD2. It then passes through the collimator lens CL2 and becomes a parallel beam again, reaching the reflector M4. The light beam LB reflected toward the +Y direction by the reflector M4 passes through the condenser lens CD3 and is then reflected toward the -X direction by the reflector M5. The light beam LB reflected toward the -X direction by the reflector M5 passes linearly through the third selective optical element AOM3, which is located at the focal position (beam waist position) of the condenser lens CD3. It then passes through the collimator lens CL3 and becomes a parallel beam again, reaching the reflector M6. The light beam LB reflected toward the +Y direction by the reflector M6 passes through the condenser lens CD4 and is then reflected toward the +X direction by the reflector M7.
由反射镜M7反射的光束LB直线地从配置于聚光透镜CD4的焦点位置(光束腰位置)的第4选择用光学元件AOM4透射,并通过准直透镜CL4再次成为平行光束而到达反射镜M8。由反射镜M8 向+Y方向侧反射的光束LB从聚光透镜CD5通过后被反射镜M9向 -X方向侧反射。由反射镜M9向-X方向侧反射的光束LB直线地从配置于聚光透镜CD5的焦点位置(光束腰位置)的第5选择用光学元件AOM5透射,并通过准直透镜CL5再次成为平行光束而到达反射镜M10。由反射镜M10向+Y方向侧反射的光束LB从聚光透镜 CD6通过后被反射镜M11向+X方向侧反射。由反射镜M11反射的光束LB直线地从配置于聚光透镜CD6的焦点位置(光束腰位置) 的第6选择用光学元件AOM6透射,并通过准直透镜CL6再次成为平行光束,在由反射镜M12向-Y方向侧反射后,到达吸收体TR。该吸收体TR是为了抑制光束LB向外部泄漏而吸收光束LB的光吸收体。The light beam LB reflected by the reflector M7 passes through the fourth selective optical element AOM4, which is located at the focal position (beam waist position) of the condenser lens CD4, in a straight line. It then passes through the collimator lens CL4 and becomes a parallel beam again, reaching the reflector M8. The light beam LB reflected toward the +Y direction by the reflector M8 passes through the condenser lens CD5 and is then reflected toward the -X direction by the reflector M9. The light beam LB reflected toward the -X direction by the reflector M9 passes through the fifth selective optical element AOM5, which is located at the focal position (beam waist position) of the condenser lens CD5, in a straight line. It then passes through the collimator lens CL5 and becomes a parallel beam again, reaching the reflector M10. The light beam LB reflected toward the +Y direction by the reflector M10 passes through the condenser lens CD6 and is then reflected toward the +X direction by the reflector M11. The light beam LB reflected by the reflector M11 passes linearly through the sixth selective optical element AOM6, which is located at the focal position (beam waist position) of the condenser lens CD6. It then passes through the collimator lens CL6 and becomes a parallel light beam again. After being reflected in the -Y direction by the reflector M12, it reaches the absorber TR. The absorber TR is a light absorber that absorbs the light beam LB to prevent it from leaking to the outside.
如以上那样,选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6以使来自光源装置 14’的光束LB依次透射的方式配置,并且以通过聚光透镜CD1~CD6 和准直透镜CL1~CL6而在各选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6的内部形成光束LB的光束腰的方式配置。由此,减小向选择用光学元件 AOM1~AOM6(声光调制元件)入射的光束LB的直径,提高衍射效率且提高响应性。As described above, the selective optical elements AOM1-AOM6 are arranged so that the light beam LB from the light source device 14' is sequentially transmitted therethrough. Furthermore, the beam waists of the light beams LB are formed within each of the selective optical elements AOM1-AOM6 by the condenser lenses CD1-CD6 and the collimator lenses CL1-CL6. This reduces the diameter of the light beams LB incident on the selective optical elements AOM1-AOM6 (acousto-optic modulators), improving diffraction efficiency and responsiveness.
各选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)在被施加超声波信号(高频信号)时,将使入射的光束LB(零次光)以与高频频率相应的衍射角衍射的一次衍射光作为射出光束(光束LBn)而产生。在本第4实施方式中,将从多个选择用光学元件AOMn (AOM1~AOM6)各自作为一次衍射光射出的光束LBn设为光束 LB1~LB6,设各选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)起到使来自光源装置14’的光束LB的光路偏转的功能来进行处理。然而,如上所述,实际上的声光调制元件的一次衍射光的产生效率为零次光的80%左右,因此,选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)各自所偏转的光束LB1~LB6与原来的光束LB的强度相比降低。另外,在选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)的某一个为On状态时,不衍射而直进的零次光残留20%左右,但其最终被吸收体TR吸收。When an ultrasonic signal (high-frequency signal) is applied to each selection optical element AOMn (AOM1-AOM6), the incident light beam LB (zero-order light) is diffracted at a diffraction angle corresponding to the high-frequency frequency, generating first-order diffracted light as an outgoing light beam (light beam LBn). In the fourth embodiment, the light beams LBn emitted as first-order diffracted light from each of the plurality of selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1-AOM6) are designated as light beams LB1-LB6, and each selection optical element AOMn (AOM1-AOM6) is configured to deflect the optical path of the light beam LB from the light source device 14'. However, as described above, the actual efficiency of generating first-order diffracted light by an acousto-optic modulation element is approximately 80% of that of zero-order light. Therefore, the intensity of the light beams LB1-LB6 deflected by each selection optical element AOMn (AOM1-AOM6) is reduced compared to the original light beam LB. When any one of the selective optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) is in the On state, approximately 20% of the zero-order light that travels straight without being diffracted remains, but is ultimately absorbed by the absorber TR.
另外,选择用光学元件AOMn是通过超声波在透射部件中的规定方向上产生折射率的周期性粗密变化的衍射光栅,因此在入射光束LB为直线偏振光(P偏振光或S偏振光)的情况下,其偏振方向与衍射光栅的周期方向被设定成一次衍射光的产生效率(衍射效率) 最高。在如图26那样选择用光学元件AOMn被设置成使入射的光束 LB向Z方向衍射偏转的情况下,在选择用光学元件AOMn内生成的衍射光栅的周期方向也为Z方向,因此,以与其匹配的方式设定 (调整)来自光源装置14’的光束LB的偏振方向。Furthermore, the selective optical element AOMn is a diffraction grating that generates a periodic, coarse variation in refractive index in a predetermined direction within the transmissive member using ultrasonic waves. Therefore, when the incident light beam LB is linearly polarized (P-polarized or S-polarized), its polarization direction and the periodic direction of the diffraction grating are set so that the efficiency (diffraction efficiency) of generating first-order diffracted light is maximized. When the selective optical element AOMn is configured to diffract and deflect the incident light beam LB in the Z direction, as shown in FIG. 26 , the periodic direction of the diffraction grating generated within the selective optical element AOMn is also in the Z direction. Therefore, the polarization direction of the light beam LB from the light source device 14′ is set (adjusted) to match this direction.
而且,如图26所示,多个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6) 各自设置成使偏转的光束LB1~LB6(一次衍射光)相对于入射的光束LB向-Z方向偏转。从选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6) 各自偏转而射出的光束LB1~LB6,向设在从选择用光学元件AOMn (AOM1~AOM6)各自离开规定距离的位置的单元侧入射镜 IM1~IM6投射,因此向-Z方向以与照射中心轴Le1~Le6平行(同轴) 的方式被反射。被单元侧入射镜IM1~IM6(以下也仅称为镜 IM1~IM6)反射的光束LB1~LB6从形成于支承部件IUB的开口部 TH1~TH6各自通过,以沿着照射中心轴Le1~Le6的方式向扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)各自入射。As shown in FIG26 , the plurality of selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) are each configured to deflect the deflected light beams LB1 to LB6 (first-order diffracted light) in the -Z direction relative to the incident light beam LB. The light beams LB1 to LB6 deflected and emitted from the selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) are projected toward the unit-side incident mirrors IM1 to IM6, located at a predetermined distance from the selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6), and are thereby reflected in the -Z direction parallel to (coaxial with) the irradiation center axes Le1 to Le6. The light beams LB1 to LB6 reflected by the unit-side incident mirrors IM1 to IM6 (hereinafter simply referred to as mirrors IM1 to IM6) pass through openings TH1 to TH6 formed in the support member IUB, respectively, and are incident on the scanning units Un (U1 to U6) along the irradiation center axes Le1 to Le6.
可以使各选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)的结构、功能、作用等彼此相同。多个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6) 根据来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)的On/Off,将使入射的光束LB衍射的衍射光的产生On/Off。例如,选择用光学元件 AOM1在没有被施加来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)而为 Off状态时,不使入射的光束LB衍射而使其透射。因此,从选择用光学元件AOM1透射过的光束LB从准直透镜CL1透射而向反射镜 M2入射。另一方面,选择用光学元件AOM1在被施加来自控制装置18的驱动信号而为On状态时,使入射的光束LB衍射而朝向镜 IM1。也就是说,通过该驱动信号对选择用光学元件AOM1进行切换。镜IM1将由选择用光学元件AOM1衍射的光束LB1向扫描单元 U1侧反射。由镜IM1反射的光束LB1从支承部件IUB的开口部TH1 通过而沿着照射中心轴Le1向扫描单元U1入射。因此,镜IM1以使反射的光束LB1的光轴与照射中心轴Le1成为同轴的方式将入射的光束LB1反射。另外,在选择用光学元件AOM1为On状态时,从选择用光学元件AOM1直线地透射过的光束LB的零次光(入射光束的20%左右的强度)从其后的准直透镜CL1~CL6、聚光透镜 CD2~CD6、反射镜M2~M12及选择用光学元件AOM2~AOM6透射而到达吸收体TR。The structures, functions, and effects of the various selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) can be made identical to one another. The plurality of selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) turns on/off the generation of diffracted light from the incident light beam LB, depending on the on/off state of the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18. For example, when the selection optical element AOM1 is not applied with the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 and is in the off state, it does not diffract the incident light beam LB but transmits it. Therefore, the light beam LB that has passed through the selection optical element AOM1 is transmitted through the collimating lens CL1 and is incident on the reflective mirror M2. On the other hand, when the selection optical element AOM1 is applied with the drive signal from the control device 18 and is in the on state, it diffracts the incident light beam LB and directs it toward the mirror IM1. In other words, the selection optical element AOM1 is switched by the drive signal. The mirror IM1 reflects the light beam LB diffracted by the selection optical element AOM1 toward the scanning unit U1 side. The light beam LB1 reflected by the mirror IM1 passes through the opening TH1 of the support member IUB and is incident on the scanning unit U1 along the irradiation center axis Le1. Therefore, the mirror IM1 reflects the incident light beam LB1 so that the optical axis of the reflected light beam LB1 is coaxial with the irradiation center axis Le1. Furthermore, when the selection optical element AOM1 is in the on state, the zero-order light of the light beam LB that linearly passes through the selection optical element AOM1 (approximately 20% of the intensity of the incident light beam) is transmitted through the subsequent collimating lenses CL1 to CL6, focusing lenses CD2 to CD6, reflectors M2 to M12, and the selection optical elements AOM2 to AOM6, reaching the absorber TR.
图27A是从+Z方向侧观察基于选择用光学元件AOM1进行的光束LB的光路切换的图,图27B是从-Y方向侧观察基于选择用光学元件AOM1进行的光束LB的光路切换的图。在驱动信号为Off状态时,选择用光学元件AOM1不使入射的光束LB衍射而直接将其朝向反射镜M2侧透射。另一方面,在驱动信号为On状态时,选择用光学元件AOM1产生使入射的光束LB向-Z方向侧衍射的光束 LB1,并使其朝向镜IM1。因此,在XY平面内,不改变从选择用光学元件AOM1射出的光束LB(零次光)及偏转的光束LB1(一次衍射光)的行进方向,在Z方向上改变光束LB1(一次衍射光)的行进方向。像这样,控制装置18通过使要向选择用光学元件AOM1施加的驱动信号(高频信号)成为On/Off(高/低),来切换选择用光学元件AOM1,从而对是光束LB朝向后续的选择用光学元件 AOM2、还是偏转的光束LB1朝向扫描单元U1进行切换。FIG27A is a diagram showing the optical path switching of the light beam LB based on the selection optical element AOM1 as viewed from the +Z direction side, and FIG27B is a diagram showing the optical path switching of the light beam LB based on the selection optical element AOM1 as viewed from the -Y direction side. When the drive signal is in the Off state, the selection optical element AOM1 does not diffract the incident light beam LB but directly transmits it toward the side of the reflector M2. On the other hand, when the drive signal is in the On state, the selection optical element AOM1 generates a light beam LB1 that diffracts the incident light beam LB toward the -Z direction side and directs it toward the mirror IM1. Therefore, in the XY plane, the traveling directions of the light beam LB (zero-order light) emitted from the selection optical element AOM1 and the deflected light beam LB1 (first-order diffracted light) are not changed, and the traveling direction of the light beam LB1 (first-order diffracted light) is changed in the Z direction. In this way, the control device 18 switches the selection optical element AOM1 by turning the driving signal (high-frequency signal) to be applied to the selection optical element AOM1 On/Off (high/low), thereby switching whether the light beam LB is directed toward the subsequent selection optical element AOM2 or the deflected light beam LB1 is directed toward the scanning unit U1.
同样地,选择用光学元件AOM2在来自控制装置18的驱动信号 (高频信号)为Off状态时,不使入射的光束LB(没有被选择用光学元件AOM1衍射而透射来的光束LB)衍射而使其向准直透镜CL2 侧(反射镜M4侧)透射,在来自控制装置18的驱动信号为On状态时,使入射的光束LB的衍射光即光束LB2朝向镜IM2。该镜IM2 将由选择用光学元件AOM2衍射的光束LB2向扫描单元U2侧反射。由镜IM2反射的光束LB2从支承部件IUB的开口部TH2通过,与照射中心轴Le2成为同轴地向扫描单元U2入射。而且,选择用光学元件AOM3~AOM6在来自控制装置18的驱动信号(高频信号)为 Off状态时,不使入射的光束LB衍射而使其向准直透镜CL3~CL6 侧(反射镜M6、M8、M10、M12侧)透射,在来自控制装置18的驱动信号为On状态时,使入射的光束LB的一次衍射光即光束 LB3~LB6朝向镜IM3~IM6。该镜IM3~IM6将由选择用光学元件 AOM3~AOM6衍射的光束LB3~LB6向扫描单元U3~U6侧反射。由镜IM3~IM6反射的光束LB3~LB6与照射中心轴Le3~Le6成为同轴地,从支承部件IUB的开口部TH3~TH6各自通过而向扫描单元 U3~U6入射。像这样,控制装置18通过使要向选择用光学元件 AOM2~AOM6各自施加的驱动信号(高频信号)成为On/Off(高/ 低),来切换选择用光学元件AOM2~AOM6中的某一个,从而对是光束LB朝向后续的选择用光学元件AOM3~AOM6或吸收体TR、还是偏转的光束LB2~LB6的一个朝向对应的扫描单元U2~U6进行切换。Similarly, when the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is in the off state, the selective optical element AOM2 does not diffract the incident light beam LB (the light beam LB that is transmitted without being diffracted by the selective optical element AOM1) but transmits it toward the collimating lens CL2 side (the reflective mirror M4 side). When the drive signal from the control device 18 is in the on state, the diffracted light of the incident light beam LB, i.e., the light beam LB2, is directed toward the mirror IM2. The mirror IM2 reflects the light beam LB2 diffracted by the selective optical element AOM2 toward the scanning unit U2 side. The light beam LB2 reflected by the mirror IM2 passes through the opening TH2 of the support member IUB and is incident on the scanning unit U2 coaxially with the irradiation center axis Le2. Furthermore, when the drive signal (high-frequency signal) from the control device 18 is off, the selective optical elements AOM3-AOM6 do not diffract the incident light beam LB, but transmit it toward the collimating lenses CL3-CL6 (the reflective mirrors M6, M8, M10, and M12). When the drive signal from the control device 18 is on, the selective optical elements AOM3-AOM6 direct the primary diffracted light beams LB3-LB6 of the incident light beam LB toward the mirrors IM3-IM6. The mirrors IM3-IM6 reflect the light beams LB3-LB6 diffracted by the selective optical elements AOM3-AOM6 toward the scanning units U3-U6. The light beams LB3-LB6 reflected by the mirrors IM3-IM6 are coaxial with the irradiation center axes Le3-Le6, pass through the openings TH3-TH6 of the support member IUB, and enter the scanning units U3-U6. In this way, the control device 18 switches one of the selection optical elements AOM2 to AOM6 by turning the driving signal (high-frequency signal) to be applied to each of the selection optical elements AOM2 to AOM6 On/Off (high/low), thereby switching whether the light beam LB is directed toward the subsequent selection optical element AOM3 to AOM6 or the absorber TR, or toward the corresponding scanning unit U2 to U6.
如以上那样,光束切换部件20具备沿着来自光源装置14’的光束LB的行进方向直列配置的多个选择用光学元件AOMn (AOM1~AOM6),由此,能够切换光束LB的光路来选择一个供光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un。例如,在要使光束LB1向扫描单元U1 入射的情况下,使选择用光学元件AOM1成为On状态即可,在要使光束LB3向扫描单元U3入射的情况下,使选择用光学元件AOM3 成为On状态即可。该多个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6) 与多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)对应地设置,对是否使光束LBn向对应的扫描单元Un入射进行切换。As described above, the light beam switching component 20 includes a plurality of selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) arranged in series along the direction of travel of the light beam LB from the light source device 14'. This allows the optical path of the light beam LB to be switched to select a scanning unit Un for the light beam LBn to be incident on. For example, to cause the light beam LB1 to be incident on the scanning unit U1, the selection optical element AOM1 can be turned on. To cause the light beam LB3 to be incident on the scanning unit U3, the selection optical element AOM3 can be turned on. The plurality of selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) are provided corresponding to the plurality of scanning units Un (U1 to U6) to switch whether the light beam LBn is incident on the corresponding scanning unit Un.
由于多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)按规定顺序反复进行实施点光 SP的扫描的动作,所以光束切换部件20也与其对应地,对供光束 LB1~LB6的某一个入射的扫描单元U1~U6进行切换。例如,在进行点光SP的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序为U1→U2→···→U6的情况下,光束切换部件20也与其对应地,按U1→U2→···→U6的顺序切换供光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un。Because multiple scanning units Un (U1-U6) repeatedly scan the spot light SP in a predetermined order, the beam switching component 20 switches the scanning unit U1-U6 on which one of the light beams LB1-LB6 is incident. For example, if the order of scanning units Un scanning the spot light SP is U1 → U2 → ... → U6, the beam switching component 20 switches the scanning unit Un on which the light beam LBn is incident in the order U1 → U2 → ... → U6.
根据以上内容,光束切换部件20的各选择用光学元件AOMn (AOM1~AOM6)只要仅在扫描单元Un(U1~U6)各自的基于多面镜PM进行的点光SP的一次扫描期间为On状态即可。详情将在后叙述,若将多面镜PM的反射面数设为Np,将多面镜PM的旋转速度设为Vp(rpm),则与多面镜PM的反射面RP的一面的量的旋转角度对应的时间Tss成为Tss=60/(Np·Vp)(秒)。例如,在反射面数Np为8、旋转速度Vp为3万的情况下,多面镜PM的一次旋转为2毫秒,时间Tss为0.25毫秒。将其换算成频率则为4kHz,这意味着若与用于将紫外区域的波长的光束LB响应于描绘数据而以几十MHz程度高速地进行调制的声光调制元件相比,则可以是相当低的响应频率的声光调制元件。因此,能够使用相对于入射的光束 LB(零次光)而偏转的光束LB1~LB6(一次衍射光)的衍射角大的声光调制元件,将相对于从选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6直线地通过的光束LB的行进路线而偏转的光束LB1~LB6加以分离的镜 IM1~IM6(图26、图27A、图27B)的配置变得容易。According to the above, each selection optical element AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) of the light beam switching component 20 only needs to be in the On state during one scan of the point light SP based on the polygon mirror PM of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6). The details will be described later. If the number of reflection surfaces of the polygon mirror PM is set to Np and the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM is set to Vp (rpm), the time Tss corresponding to the rotation angle of one side of the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM becomes Tss = 60/(Np·Vp) (seconds). For example, when the number of reflection surfaces Np is 8 and the rotation speed Vp is 30,000, one rotation of the polygon mirror PM is 2 milliseconds and the time Tss is 0.25 milliseconds. Converting this into a frequency is 4 kHz, which means that compared with the acousto-optic modulator used to modulate the light beam LB with a wavelength in the ultraviolet region at a high speed of several tens of MHz in response to the drawing data, it can be an acousto-optic modulator with a relatively low response frequency. Therefore, it is possible to use an acousto-optic modulation element with a large diffraction angle for the light beams LB1 to LB6 (first-order diffracted light) deflected relative to the incident light beam LB (zero-order light), and it becomes easy to configure the mirrors IM1 to IM6 (Figures 26, 27A, and 27B) that separate the light beams LB1 to LB6 deflected relative to the travel path of the light beam LB passing straight through the selected optical elements AOM1 to AOM6.
此外,多个扫描单元U1~U6反复进行按规定顺序各自进行一次点光SP的扫描的动作,因此与其对应地,各扫描单元Un的图案数据的串行数据DLn按规定顺序输出到光源装置14’的驱动电路206a。将该依次输出到驱动电路206a的串行数据DLn称为描绘位串数据Sdw。例如,在规定顺序为U1→U2→···→U6的情况下,首先,一列的量的串行数据DL1输出到驱动电路206a,接着,一列的量的串行数据DL2输出到驱动电路206a,以该方式,构成描绘位串数据 Sdw的一列的量的串行数据DL1~DL6依次输出到驱动电路206a。然后,下一列的串行数据DL1~DL6作为描绘位串数据Sdw依次输出到驱动电路206a。关于将描绘位串数据Sdw输出到该驱动电路206a 的具体的结构将在后详细说明。Furthermore, the multiple scanning units U1-U6 repeatedly scan the spot light SP once in a predetermined sequence. Accordingly, the serial data DLn of the pattern data of each scanning unit Un is output to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14' in a predetermined sequence. The serial data DLn sequentially output to the driver circuit 206a is referred to as the drawing bit string data Sdw. For example, if the predetermined sequence is U1 → U2 → ... → U6, first, one column of serial data DL1 is output to the driver circuit 206a, followed by one column of serial data DL2. In this manner, one column of serial data DL1-DL6, constituting the drawing bit string data Sdw, is sequentially output to the driver circuit 206a. Then, the next column of serial data DL1-DL6 is sequentially output to the driver circuit 206a as the drawing bit string data Sdw. The specific structure for outputting the drawing bit string data Sdw to the driver circuit 206a will be described in detail later.
扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的结构可以是在上述第1~第3实施方式中使用的结构,但在本第4实施方式中,使用图28所示那样的结构的扫描单元Un。另外,也可以将以下说明的扫描单元Un用作上述第1~第3实施方式的扫描单元。The structure of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) can be the structure used in the first to third embodiments described above, but in this fourth embodiment, a scanning unit Un having the structure shown in Figure 28 is used. In addition, the scanning unit Un described below can also be used as the scanning unit of the first to third embodiments described above.
以下,参照图28对在第4实施方式中使用的扫描单元Un (U1~U6)的光学结构进行说明。此外,由于各扫描单元Un(U1~U6) 具有相同结构,所以仅对扫描单元U1进行说明,对于其他扫描单元 Un省略其说明。另外,在图28中,将与照射中心轴Len(Le1)平行的方向设为Zt方向,将在与Zt方向正交的平面上、且基板FS从处理装置PR1经由曝光装置EX朝向处理装置PR2的方向设为Xt 方向,将在与Zt方向正交的平面上、且与Xt方向正交的方向设为 Yt方向。也就是说,图28的Xt、Yt、Zt的三维坐标是将图23的X、 Y、Z的三维坐标以Y轴为中心以使Z轴方向与照射中心轴Len(Le1) 平行的方式旋转而成的三维坐标。Hereinafter, the optical structure of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) used in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG28. In addition, since each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) has the same structure, only the scanning unit U1 will be described, and the description of the other scanning units Un will be omitted. In addition, in FIG28, the direction parallel to the irradiation center axis Len (Le1) is set as the Zt direction, the direction on the plane perpendicular to the Zt direction and from the processing device PR1 to the exposure device EX toward the processing device PR2 of the substrate FS is set as the Xt direction, and the direction on the plane perpendicular to the Zt direction and perpendicular to the Xt direction is set as the Yt direction. That is, the three-dimensional coordinates of Xt, Yt, and Zt in FIG28 are three-dimensional coordinates obtained by rotating the three-dimensional coordinates of X, Y, and Z in FIG23 with the Y axis as the center so that the Z axis direction is parallel to the irradiation center axis Len (Le1).
如图28所示,在扫描单元U1内,沿着从光束LB1的入射位置至基板FS的被照射面为止的光束LB1的行进方向,设有反射镜 M20、光束扩展器(beam expander)BE、反射镜M21、偏振光分束器BS、反射镜M22、移像光学部件SR、视场光阑FA、反射镜M23、λ/4波片QW、柱面透镜CYa、反射镜M24、多面镜PM、fθ透镜FT、反射镜M25、柱面透镜CYb。而且,在扫描单元U1内还设有用于经由偏振光分束器BS检测来自基板FS的被照射面的反射光的光学透镜系统G10及光检测器DTS。As shown in FIG28 , within the scanning unit U1, along the direction of travel of the light beam LB1 from its incident position to the irradiated surface of the substrate FS, are provided a reflector M20, a beam expander BE, a reflector M21, a polarizing beam splitter BS, a reflector M22, an image-shifting optical component SR, a field stop FA, a reflector M23, a λ/4 wave plate QW, a cylindrical lens CYa, a reflector M24, a polygonal mirror PM, an fθ lens FT, a reflector M25, and a cylindrical lens CYb. Furthermore, within the scanning unit U1, there are provided an optical lens system G10 and a photodetector DTS for detecting light reflected from the irradiated surface of the substrate FS via the polarizing beam splitter BS.
入射到扫描单元U1的光束LB1朝向-Zt方向行进,向相对于XtYt 平面倾斜了45°的反射镜M20入射。以入射到该扫描单元U1的光束 LB1的轴线与照射中心轴Le1同轴的方式向反射镜M20入射。反射镜M20作为使光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射的入射光学部件而发挥功能,将入射的光束LB1沿着与Xt轴平行地设定的光轴朝向反射镜M21沿-Xt方向反射。因此,与Xt轴平行地行进的光束LB1的光轴在与XtZt平面平行的面内与照射中心轴Le1正交。由反射镜M20 反射的光束LB1从沿着与Xt轴平行地行进的光束LB1的光轴配置的光束扩展器BE透射而向反射镜M21入射。光束扩展器BE使透射的光束LB1的直径扩大。光束扩展器BE具有聚光透镜Be1、和使由聚光透镜Be1收敛后发散的光束LB1成为平行光的准直透镜Be2。The light beam LB1 incident on the scanning unit U1 travels in the -Zt direction and enters the reflector M20, which is tilted 45° relative to the XtYt plane. The axis of the light beam LB1 incident on the scanning unit U1 is coaxial with the irradiation center axis Le1. The reflector M20 functions as an incident optical component for causing the light beam LB1 to enter the scanning unit U1, reflecting the incident light beam LB1 in the -Xt direction toward the reflector M21 along an optical axis set parallel to the Xt axis. Therefore, the optical axis of the light beam LB1 traveling parallel to the Xt axis is orthogonal to the irradiation center axis Le1 within a plane parallel to the XtZt plane. The light beam LB1 reflected by the reflector M20 passes through the beam expander BE, which is arranged along the optical axis of the light beam LB1 traveling parallel to the Xt axis, and enters the reflector M21. The beam expander BE expands the diameter of the transmitted light beam LB1. The beam expander BE includes a condenser lens Be1 and a collimator lens Be2 for converting the light beam LB1 , which is converged and then diverged by the condenser lens Be1 , into parallel light.
反射镜M21相对于YtZt平面倾斜45°地配置,将入射的光束LB1 朝向偏振光分束器BS沿-Yt方向反射。偏振光分束器BS的偏振光分离面相对于YtZt平面倾斜45°地配置,将P偏振的光束反射,使在与P偏振正交的方向上偏振的直线偏振(S偏振)的光束透射。入射到向扫描单元U1的光束LB1为P偏振的光束,因此,偏振光分束器BS将来自反射镜M21的光束LB1向-Xt方向反射而向反射镜M22侧引导。The reflector M21 is tilted 45° relative to the YtZt plane and reflects the incident light beam LB1 toward the polarizing beam splitter BS in the -Yt direction. The polarization separation plane of the polarizing beam splitter BS is tilted 45° relative to the YtZt plane, reflecting the P-polarized light beam while transmitting a linearly polarized (S-polarized) light beam polarized in a direction orthogonal to the P-polarized light beam. The light beam LB1 incident on the scanning unit U1 is P-polarized. Therefore, the polarizing beam splitter BS reflects the light beam LB1 from the reflector M21 in the -Xt direction and directs it toward the reflector M22.
反射镜M22相对于XtYt平面倾斜45°地配置,将入射的光束LB1 朝向与反射镜M22在-Zt方向上分开的反射镜M23沿-Zt方向反射。由反射镜M22反射的光束LB1沿着与Zt轴平行的光轴从移像光学部件SR及视场光阑(视野光阑)FA通过,而向反射镜M23入射。移像光学部件SR在与光束LB1的行进方向正交的平面(XtYt平面) 内,二维地调整光束LB1的截面内的中心位置。移像光学部件SR 由沿着与Zt轴平行地行进的光束LB1的光轴配置的两片石英制的平行平板Sr1、Sr2构成,平行平板Sr1能够绕Xt轴倾斜,平行平板 Sr2能够绕Yt轴倾斜。通过使该平行平板Sr1、Sr2分别绕Xt轴、 Yt轴倾斜,而在与光束LB1的行进方向正交的XtYt平面中,使光束LB1的中心位置二维地微量位移。该平行平板Sr1、Sr2在控制装置18的控制下,由未图示的致动器(驱动部)驱动。Mirror M22 is arranged at a 45° angle relative to the XtYt plane and reflects the incident light beam LB1 in the -Zt direction toward mirror M23, which is spaced apart from mirror M22 in the -Zt direction. Light beam LB1 reflected by mirror M22 passes through the image-shifting optical component SR and the field stop (field diaphragm) FA along an optical axis parallel to the Zt axis and is incident on mirror M23. The image-shifting optical component SR two-dimensionally adjusts the center position of the cross section of light beam LB1 within a plane (XtYt plane) perpendicular to the direction of travel of light beam LB1. The image-shifting optical component SR consists of two quartz parallel plates Sr1 and Sr2, arranged along the optical axis of light beam LB1 traveling parallel to the Zt axis. Parallel plate Sr1 can tilt about the Xt axis, and parallel plate Sr2 can tilt about the Yt axis. By tilting the parallel plates Sr1 and Sr2 about the Xt and Yt axes, respectively, the center position of the light beam LB1 is slightly displaced two-dimensionally in the XtYt plane perpendicular to the direction of travel of the light beam LB1. The parallel plates Sr1 and Sr2 are driven by an actuator (drive unit) (not shown) under the control of the control device 18.
通过了移像光学部件SR的光束LB1从视场光阑FA的圆形开口透过而到达反射镜M23。视场光阑FA的圆形开口是对由光束扩展器BE放大后的光束LB1的截面内的强度分布的周边部分进行遮蔽的光阑。若使视场光阑FA的圆形开口的孔径为能够调整的可变虹彩光阑,则能够调整点光SP的强度(亮度)。Light beam LB1, having passed through the image-shifting optical component SR, passes through the circular opening of the field stop FA and reaches the reflector M23. The circular opening of the field stop FA blocks the peripheral portion of the intensity distribution within the cross section of light beam LB1, expanded by the beam expander BE. If the aperture of the circular opening of the field stop FA is configured as an adjustable variable iris diaphragm, the intensity (brightness) of the spot light SP can be adjusted.
反射镜M23相对于XtYt平面倾斜45°地配置,将入射的光束LB1 朝向与反射镜M23在+Xt方向分开的反射镜M24沿+Xt方向反射。由反射镜M23反射的光束LB1从λ/4波片QW及柱面透镜CYa透射而向反射镜M24入射。反射镜M24将入射的光束LB1朝向多面镜 (旋转多面镜、扫描用偏转部件)PM反射。多面镜PM将入射的光束LB1朝向具有与Xt轴平行的光轴AXf的fθ透镜FT沿+Xt方向反射。多面镜PM为了使光束LB1的点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上进行扫描,而将入射的光束LB1在与XtYt平面平行的面内偏转(反射)。具体地说,多面镜PM具有沿Zt轴方向延伸的旋转轴AXp、和绕旋转轴AXp形成的多个反射面RP(在本第4实施方式中为八个反射面RP)。通过以旋转轴AXp为中心使该多面镜PM向规定的旋转方向旋转,而能够使照射到反射面RP上的脉冲状的光束LB1 的反射角连续地变化。由此,通过一个反射面RP使光束LB1的反射方向偏转,能够使照射到基板FS的被照射面上的光束LB1的点光SP沿着扫描方向(基板FS的宽度方向、Yt方向)进行扫描。The reflector M23 is arranged at an angle of 45° relative to the XtYt plane, and reflects the incident light beam LB1 in the +Xt direction toward the reflector M24 separated from the reflector M23 in the +Xt direction. The light beam LB1 reflected by the reflector M23 is transmitted through the λ/4 wave plate QW and the cylindrical lens CYa and is incident on the reflector M24. The reflector M24 reflects the incident light beam LB1 toward the polygon mirror (rotating polygon mirror, scanning deflection component) PM. The polygon mirror PM reflects the incident light beam LB1 in the +Xt direction toward the fθ lens FT having an optical axis AXf parallel to the Xt axis. The polygon mirror PM deflects (reflects) the incident light beam LB1 in a plane parallel to the XtYt plane in order to scan the point light SP of the light beam LB1 on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS. Specifically, the polygon mirror PM has a rotation axis AXp extending in the Zt axis direction, and a plurality of reflection surfaces RP (eight reflection surfaces RP in this fourth embodiment) formed around the rotation axis AXp. By rotating the polygonal mirror PM in a predetermined direction about the rotation axis AXp, the reflection angle of the pulsed light beam LB1 irradiated on the reflection surface RP can be continuously changed. Thus, by deflecting the reflection direction of the light beam LB1 by the reflection surface RP, the point light SP of the light beam LB1 irradiated on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS can be scanned along the scanning direction (the width direction of the substrate FS, the Yt direction).
能够通过一个反射面RP使光束LB1的点光SP沿着描绘线SL1 进行扫描。因此,在多面镜PM的一周旋转下,在基板FS的被照射面上由点光SP扫描的描绘线SL1的数量最大与反射面RP的数量相同为八条。多面镜PM通过包含马达等的多面镜驱动部RM而以一定速度旋转。基于多面镜驱动部RM进行的多面镜PM的旋转由控制装置18控制。如上所述,描绘线SL1的实效长度(例如30mm) 被设定成能够通过该多面镜PM使点光SP进行扫描的最大扫描长度(例如31mm)以下的长度,在初始设定中(设计上),在最大扫描长度的中央设定有描绘线SL1的中心点(照射中心轴Le1通过的点)。The point light SP of the light beam LB1 can be scanned along the drawing line SL1 through a reflecting surface RP. Therefore, with one rotation of the polygonal mirror PM, the maximum number of drawing lines SL1 scanned by the point light SP on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS is eight, which is the same as the number of reflecting surfaces RP. The polygonal mirror PM rotates at a certain speed by the polygonal mirror driving unit RM including a motor, etc. The rotation of the polygonal mirror PM based on the polygonal mirror driving unit RM is controlled by the control device 18. As described above, the effective length of the drawing line SL1 (for example, 30 mm) is set to a length less than the maximum scanning length (for example, 31 mm) that can be used to scan the point light SP through the polygonal mirror PM. In the initial setting (design), the center point of the drawing line SL1 (the point through which the irradiation center axis Le1 passes) is set in the center of the maximum scanning length.
此外,作为一例,在将描绘线SL1的实效长度设为30mm、一边使实效尺寸为3μm的点光SP每次重叠1.5μm一边使点光SP沿着描绘线SL1照射到基板FS的被照射面上的情况下,在一次扫描中照射的点光SP的数量(来自光源装置14’的光束LB的脉冲数)为20000 (30mm/1.5μm)。另外,若将沿着描绘线SL1的点光SP的扫描时间设为200μsec,则必须在该期间照射20000次的脉冲状的点光SP,因此光源装置14’的发光频率Fs成为Fs≥20000次 /200μsec=100MHz。Furthermore, as an example, if the effective length of the drawing line SL1 is set to 30 mm, and the spot light SP with an effective size of 3 μm is irradiated onto the irradiated surface of the substrate FS along the drawing line SL1 while overlapping each other by 1.5 μm, the number of spot light SP irradiated in one scan (the number of pulses of the light beam LB from the light source device 14') is 20,000 (30 mm/1.5 μm). Furthermore, if the scanning time of the spot light SP along the drawing line SL1 is set to 200 μsec, the pulsed spot light SP must be irradiated 20,000 times during this period. Therefore, the light emission frequency Fs of the light source device 14' becomes Fs ≥ 20,000 times/200 μsec = 100 MHz.
柱面透镜CYa在与基于多面镜PM实现的扫描方向(旋转方向) 正交的非扫描方向(Zt方向)上,将入射的光束LB1在多面镜PM 的反射面RP上收敛成狭缝状。通过其母线与Yt方向平行的柱面透镜CYa,即使存在反射面RP相对于Zt方向倾斜(反射面RP相对于 XtYt平面的法线倾斜)的情况,也能够抑制其影响,能够抑制照射到基板FS的被照射面上的光束LB1的照射位置在Xt方向上错开。In the non-scanning direction (Zt direction) orthogonal to the scanning direction (rotational direction) achieved by the polygon mirror PM, the cylindrical lens CYa converges the incident light beam LB1 into a slit shape on the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. The cylindrical lens CYa, whose generatrix is parallel to the Yt direction, suppresses the influence of the reflection surface RP being tilted relative to the Zt direction (the reflection surface RP being tilted relative to the normal of the XtYt plane), thereby preventing the irradiation position of the light beam LB1 on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS from being shifted in the Xt direction.
具有沿Xt轴方向延伸的光轴AXf的fθ透镜FT是将由多面镜 PM反射的光束LB1在XtYt平面中以与光轴AXf平行的方式向反射镜M25投射的远心类的扫描透镜。光束LB1向fθ透镜FT的入射角θ根据多面镜PM的旋转角(θ/2)而变化。fθ透镜FT经由反射镜 M25及柱面透镜CYb将光束LB1投射到与其入射角θ成正比例的基板FS的被照射面上的像高位置。若将焦点距离设为fo,将像高位置设为y,则fθ透镜FT设计成满足y=fo·θ的关系。因此,能够通过该fθ透镜FT使光束LB1(点光SP)在Yt方向(Y方向)上准确且等速地进行扫描。在向fθ透镜FT的入射角θ为0度时,入射到fθ透镜FT的光束LB1沿着光轴AXf上行进。The fθ lens FT, having an optical axis AXf extending along the Xt axis, is a telecentric scanning lens that projects the light beam LB1 reflected by the polygon mirror PM toward the reflector M25 in the XtYt plane, parallel to the optical axis AXf. The incident angle θ of the light beam LB1 on the fθ lens FT varies depending on the rotation angle (θ/2) of the polygon mirror PM. The fθ lens FT projects the light beam LB1, via the reflector M25 and cylindrical lens CYb, to an image height position on the illuminated surface of the substrate FS that is proportional to the incident angle θ. If the focal length is fo and the image height position is y, the fθ lens FT is designed to satisfy the relationship y = fo·θ. Therefore, the fθ lens FT can accurately and uniformly scan the light beam LB1 (point light SP) in the Yt direction (Y direction). When the incident angle θ on the fθ lens FT is 0 degrees, the light beam LB1 incident on the fθ lens FT travels along the optical axis AXf.
反射镜M25将入射的光束LB1经由柱面透镜CYb朝向基板FS 沿-Zt方向反射。通过fθ透镜FT及母线与Yt方向平行的柱面透镜 CYb,投射到基板FS上的光束LB1在基板FS的被照射面上收敛成直径为几μm程度(例如3μm)的微小的点光SP。另外,投射到基板FS的被照射面上的点光SP通过多面镜PM而沿在Yt方向延伸的描绘线SL1进行一维扫描。此外,fθ透镜FT的光轴AXf和照射中心轴Le1位于同一平面上,该平面与XtZt平面平行。因此,在光轴 AXf上行进的光束LB1通过反射镜M25向-Zt方向反射,与照射中心轴Le1成为同轴地向基板FS投射。在本第4实施方式中,至少fθ透镜FT作为将由多面镜PM偏转的光束LB1向基板FS的被照射面投射的投射光学系统而发挥功能。另外,至少反射部件(反射镜 M21~M25)及偏振光分束器BS作为使从反射镜M20至基板FS为止的光束LB1的光路弯折的光路偏转部件而发挥功能。通过该光路偏转部件,能够使向反射镜M20入射的光束LB1的入射轴与照射中心轴Le1大致成为同轴。在XtZt平面上,通过扫描单元U1内的光束LB1在从大致U字状或コ字状的光路通过之后,向-Zt方向行进而投射到基板FS。The reflector M25 reflects the incident light beam LB1 toward the substrate FS along the -Zt direction via the cylindrical lens CYb. The light beam LB1 projected onto the substrate FS is converged into a tiny point light SP with a diameter of several μm (for example, 3 μm) on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS by the fθ lens FT and the cylindrical lens CYb whose main line is parallel to the Yt direction. In addition, the point light SP projected onto the irradiated surface of the substrate FS is scanned in one dimension along the drawing line SL1 extending in the Yt direction by the polygon mirror PM. In addition, the optical axis AXf of the fθ lens FT and the irradiation center axis Le1 are located on the same plane, which is parallel to the XtZt plane. Therefore, the light beam LB1 traveling on the optical axis AXf is reflected in the -Zt direction by the reflector M25 and is projected onto the substrate FS coaxially with the irradiation center axis Le1. In this fourth embodiment, at least the fθ lens FT functions as a projection optical system that projects the light beam LB1 deflected by the polygon mirror PM onto the irradiated surface of the substrate FS. Furthermore, at least the reflective components (mirrors M21-M25) and polarizing beam splitter BS function as optical path deflection components that bend the optical path of light beam LB1 from reflector M20 to substrate FS. This optical path deflection component enables the incident axis of light beam LB1 incident on reflector M20 to be approximately coaxial with the irradiation center axis Le1. On the XtZt plane, light beam LB1 passing through scanning unit U1 follows a roughly U-shaped or C-shaped optical path before traveling in the -Zt direction and projecting onto substrate FS.
像这样,在基板FS被沿X方向搬送的状态下,通过各扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)使光束LBn的点光SP在扫描方向(Y方向)上进行一维扫描,由此,能够使点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上相对地进行二维扫描。因此,能够在基板FS的曝光区域W中描绘曝光出规定的图案。In this manner, while the substrate FS is being transported in the X direction, each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) causes the point light SP of the light beam LBn to perform one-dimensional scanning in the scanning direction (Y direction). This allows the point light SP to perform two-dimensional scanning relative to the irradiated surface of the substrate FS. Consequently, a predetermined pattern can be drawn and exposed in the exposure area W of the substrate FS.
光检测器DTS具有对入射的光进行光电转换的光电转换元件。在旋转筒DR的表面形成有预先确定的基准图案。旋转筒DR上的形成有该基准图案的部分由相对于光束LB1的波段具有低反射率 (10~50%)的材料构成,旋转筒DR上的没有形成基准图案的其他部分由反射率为10%以下的材料或吸收光的材料构成。因此,若在没有卷绕基板FS的状态(或从基板FS的透明部通过的状态)下,从扫描单元U1向旋转筒DR的形成有基准图案的区域照射光束LB1 的点光SP,则其反射光从柱面透镜CYb、反射镜M25、fθ透镜FT、多面镜PM、反射镜M24、柱面透镜CYa、λ/4波片QW、反射镜M23、视场光阑FA、移像光学部件SR及反射镜M22通过而向偏振光分束器BS入射。在此,在偏振光分束器BS与基板FS之间,具体地说,在反射镜M23与柱面透镜CYa之间,设有λ/4波片QW。由此,向基板FS照射的光束LB1通过该λ/4波片QW而从P偏振光转换成圆偏振光,从基板FS向偏振光分束器BS入射的反射光通过该λ/4波片QW,而从圆偏振光转换成S偏振光。因此,来自基板FS的反射光从偏振光分束器BS透射,并经由光学透镜系统G10向光检测器 DTS入射。The light detector DTS has a photoelectric conversion element that performs photoelectric conversion on the incident light. A predetermined reference pattern is formed on the surface of the rotating cylinder DR. The portion of the rotating cylinder DR on which the reference pattern is formed is made of a material having a low reflectivity (10 to 50%) with respect to the wavelength band of the light beam LB1, and the other portions of the rotating cylinder DR on which the reference pattern is not formed are made of a material having a reflectivity of less than 10% or a material that absorbs light. Therefore, if the point light SP of the light beam LB1 is irradiated from the scanning unit U1 to the area of the rotating cylinder DR on which the reference pattern is formed in a state where the substrate FS is not wound (or in a state where it passes through the transparent portion of the substrate FS), the reflected light passes through the cylindrical lens CYb, the reflector M25, the fθ lens FT, the polygonal mirror PM, the reflector M24, the cylindrical lens CYa, the λ/4 wave plate QW, the reflector M23, the field aperture FA, the image-shifting optical component SR and the reflector M22 and is incident on the polarization beam splitter BS. Here, a λ/4 wave plate QW is provided between the polarization beam splitter BS and the substrate FS, specifically, between the reflector M23 and the cylindrical lens CYa. Thus, the light beam LB1 incident on the substrate FS is converted from P-polarized light to circularly polarized light by the λ/4 wave plate QW. Meanwhile, the light reflected from the substrate FS incident on the polarization beam splitter BS is converted from circularly polarized light by the λ/4 wave plate QW. Consequently, the light reflected from the substrate FS passes through the polarization beam splitter BS and, via the optical lens system G10, is incident on the photodetector DTS.
此时,在脉冲状的光束LB1(优选的是来自种光S1的光束LB1) 连续地向扫描单元U1入射的状态下,旋转筒DR旋转而扫描单元 U1使点光SP进行扫描,由此,点光SP二维地照射在旋转筒DR的外周面上。因此,能够通过光检测器DTS获取形成在旋转筒DR上的基准图案的图像。具体地说,使从光检测器DTS输出的光电信号的强度变化响应于点光SP的脉冲发光用的时钟脉冲信号(在光源装置14’内生成),按各扫描时间进行数字采样,由此取为Yt方向的一维的图像数据,而且,响应于对旋转筒DR的旋转角度位置进行计测的编码器ENn的计测值,按副扫描方向的一定距离(例如点光 SP的尺寸的1/2)将Yt方向的一维的图像数据在Xt方向上排列,由此,获得旋转筒DR的表面的二维图像信息。控制装置18基于该获取的旋转筒DR的基准图案的二维图像信息,来计测扫描单元U1 的描绘线SL1的斜度。该描绘线SL1的斜度可以是在各扫描单元Un (U1~U6)间的相对斜度,也可以是相对于旋转筒DR的中心轴Axo 的斜度(绝对斜度)。此外,同样地,当然也能够计测各描绘线 SL2~SL6的斜度。At this time, in a state where the pulsed light beam LB1 (preferably the light beam LB1 from the seed light S1) is continuously incident on the scanning unit U1, the rotating cylinder DR rotates and the scanning unit U1 causes the point light SP to scan, thereby irradiating the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder DR in two dimensions. Therefore, the image of the reference pattern formed on the rotating cylinder DR can be obtained by the light detector DTS. Specifically, the intensity change of the photoelectric signal output from the light detector DTS is made in response to the clock pulse signal for the pulsed emission of the point light SP (generated in the light source device 14'), and digital sampling is performed at each scanning time, thereby obtaining one-dimensional image data in the Yt direction. Moreover, in response to the measurement value of the encoder ENn that measures the rotation angle position of the rotating cylinder DR, the one-dimensional image data in the Yt direction is arranged in the Xt direction at a certain distance in the sub-scanning direction (for example, 1/2 of the size of the point light SP), thereby obtaining two-dimensional image information of the surface of the rotating cylinder DR. Based on the acquired two-dimensional image information of the reference pattern on the rotating drum DR, the control device 18 measures the inclination of the drawing line SL1 of the scanning unit U1. The inclination of the drawing line SL1 can be the relative inclination between the scanning units Un (U1-U6) or the inclination relative to the central axis Axo of the rotating drum DR (absolute inclination). Similarly, the inclinations of the drawing lines SL2-SL6 can also be measured.
在扫描单元U1的多面镜PM的周边,如图29所示设有原点传感器(原点检测器)OP1。原点传感器OP1输出表示基于各反射面 RP的点光SP的扫描开始的脉冲状的原点信号SZ。原点传感器OP1 在多面镜PM的旋转位置来到基于反射面RP进行的点光SP的扫描即将开始之前的规定位置时,输出原点信号SZ。由于多面镜PM能够在扫描角度范围θs使向基板FS投射的光束LB1偏转,所以若由多面镜PM反射的光束LB1的反射方向(偏转方向)在扫描角度范围θs内,则反射的光束LB1向fθ透镜FT入射。因此,原点传感器 OP1在多面镜PM的旋转位置来到被反射面RP反射的光束LB1的反射方向即将进入扫描角度范围θs内之前的规定位置时输出原点信号SZ。此外,扫描角度范围θs与图7所示的最大扫描旋转角度范围α具有θs=2×α的关系。As shown in FIG29 , an origin sensor (origin detector) OP1 is provided around the polygon mirror PM of the scanning unit U1. The origin sensor OP1 outputs a pulsed origin signal SZ indicating the start of scanning of the point light SP based on each reflecting surface RP. The origin sensor OP1 outputs the origin signal SZ when the rotation position of the polygon mirror PM reaches a predetermined position immediately before the start of scanning of the point light SP based on the reflecting surface RP. Since the polygon mirror PM can deflect the light beam LB1 projected onto the substrate FS within the scanning angle range θs, if the reflection direction (deflection direction) of the light beam LB1 reflected by the polygon mirror PM is within the scanning angle range θs, the reflected light beam LB1 is incident on the fθ lens FT. Therefore, the origin sensor OP1 outputs the origin signal SZ when the rotation position of the polygon mirror PM reaches a predetermined position immediately before the reflection direction of the light beam LB1 reflected by the reflecting surface RP enters the scanning angle range θs. In addition, the scanning angle range θs and the maximum scanning rotation angle range α shown in FIG7 have a relationship of θs=2×α.
由于多面镜PM具有八个反射面RP,所以原点传感器OP1在多面镜PM旋转一周的期间输出八次原点信号SZ。该原点传感器OP1 检测出的原点信号SZ被发送到控制装置18。在原点传感器OP1输出原点信号SZ之后,开始点光SP的沿着描绘线SL1的扫描。Since the polygon mirror PM has eight reflecting surfaces RP, the origin sensor OP1 outputs an origin signal SZ eight times during one rotation of the polygon mirror PM. The origin signal SZ detected by the origin sensor OP1 is transmitted to the control device 18. After the origin sensor OP1 outputs the origin signal SZ, the spot light SP begins scanning along the drawing line SL1.
原点传感器OP1使用此后接着进行点光SP的扫描(光束LB1 的偏转)的反射面RP的相邻的反射面RP(在本第4实施方式中,为多面镜PM的旋转方向上的前一个反射面RP)来输出原点信号SZ。为了便于区分各反射面RP,为了方便而在图29中将当前进行光束 LB1的偏转的反射面RP以RPa表示,将其他反射面RP绕逆时针方向(绕与多面镜PM的旋转方向相反的方向)以RPb~RPh表示。The origin sensor OP1 outputs an origin signal SZ using a reflection surface RP adjacent to the reflection surface RP on which the spot light SP is subsequently scanned (deflected by the light beam LB1) (in the fourth embodiment, the reflection surface RP immediately preceding the polygon mirror PM in the rotational direction). To facilitate differentiation between the reflection surfaces RP, the reflection surface RP currently deflecting the light beam LB1 is designated RPa in FIG. 29 , while the other reflection surfaces RP located counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the polygon mirror PM) are designated RPb to RPh.
原点传感器OP1具有光束送光系统Opa,该光束送光系统Opa 具备射出半导体激光等非感光性的波段的激光束Bga的光源部312、和使来自光源部312的激光束Bga反射而向多面镜PM的反射面RPb 投射的镜314、316。另外,原点传感器OP1具有光束受光系统Opb,该光束受光系统Opb具备受光部318、将由反射面RPb反射的激光束Bga的反射光(反射光束Bgb)向受光部318引导的镜320、322、和由被镜322反射的反射光束Bgb会聚成微小的点光的透镜系统 324。受光部318具有将由透镜系统324会聚的反射光束Bgb的点光转换成电信号的光电转换元件。在此,激光束Bga投射到多面镜PM 的各反射面RP上的位置被设定成透镜系统324的光瞳面(焦点的位置)。The origin sensor OP1 includes a beam transmitting system Opa comprising a light source 312 that emits a laser beam Bga in a non-photosensitive wavelength range, such as a semiconductor laser, and mirrors 314 and 316 that reflect the laser beam Bga from the light source 312 and project it onto the reflecting surface RPb of the polygon mirror PM. Furthermore, the origin sensor OP1 includes a beam receiving system Opb comprising a light receiving unit 318, mirrors 320 and 322 that guide the reflected light (reflected beam Bgb) of the laser beam Bga reflected by the reflecting surface RPb toward the light receiving unit 318, and a lens system 324 that focuses the reflected beam Bgb reflected by the mirror 322 into a tiny spot of light. The light receiving unit 318 includes a photoelectric conversion element that converts the spot of reflected beam Bgb focused by the lens system 324 into an electrical signal. Here, the position where the laser beam Bga is projected onto each reflecting surface RP of the polygon mirror PM is set to the pupil plane (the position of the focal point) of the lens system 324 .
光束送光系统Opa和光束受光系统Opb设于在多面镜PM的旋转位置成为基于反射面RP进行的点光SP的扫描将要开始之前的规定位置时,能够由光束受光系统Opb接受光束送光系统Opa所射出的激光束Bga的反射光束Bgb的位置。也就是说,光束送光系统Opa 和光束受光系统Opb设于在反射面RP的角度成为规定的角度位置时,能够接受光束送光系统Opa所射出的激光束Bga的反射光束Bgb 的位置。此外,图29的附图标记Msf是与旋转轴AXp同轴地配置的多面镜驱动部RM(参照图28)的旋转马达的轴。The beam sending system Opa and the beam receiving system Opb are located at positions where the beam receiving system Opb can receive the reflected beam Bgb of the laser beam Bga emitted by the beam sending system Opa when the rotational position of the polygon mirror PM reaches a predetermined position immediately before scanning of the point light SP by the reflection surface RP begins. In other words, the beam sending system Opa and the beam receiving system Opb are located at positions where they can receive the reflected beam Bgb of the laser beam Bga emitted by the beam sending system Opa when the angle of the reflection surface RP reaches a predetermined angular position. Furthermore, reference numeral Msf in FIG29 denotes the shaft of the rotary motor of the polygon mirror driving unit RM (see FIG28 ), which is arranged coaxially with the rotation axis AXp.
在紧邻受光部318内的上述光电转换元件的受光面之前,设有具备微小宽度的狭缝开口的遮光体(图示略)。在反射面RPb的角度位置为规定的角度范围内的期间,反射光束Bgb向透镜系统324 入射,反射光束Bgb的点光在受光部318内的上述遮光体上沿一定方向扫描。在该扫描中,从遮光体的狭缝开口透过的反射光束Bgb 的点光由受光部318的上述光电转换元件接受,其受光信号被放大器放大后作为脉冲状的原点信号SZ而输出。A light shield (not shown) with a narrow slit opening is located immediately before the light-receiving surface of the photoelectric conversion element within the light-receiving section 318. While the angular position of the reflecting surface RPb is within a predetermined angular range, the reflected light beam Bgb is incident on the lens system 324. The point light of the reflected light beam Bgb scans along a predetermined direction on the light shield within the light-receiving section 318. During this scanning process, the point light of the reflected light beam Bgb that passes through the slit opening of the light shield is received by the photoelectric conversion element within the light-receiving section 318. The resulting light signal is amplified by an amplifier and output as a pulsed origin signal SZ.
原点传感器OP1如上所述,通过使光束LB1偏转的(使点光SP 进行扫描的)反射面RPa,并使用旋转方向上的前一个反射面RPb 来检测原点信号SZ。因此,若相邻的反射面RP(例如,反射面RPa 与反射面RPb)彼此所成的角ηj相对于设计值(在反射面RP为八个的情况下为135度)具有误差,则因该误差的偏差,而如图30所示,存在原点信号SZ的产生定时会因每个反射面RP而不同的情况。As described above, the origin sensor OP1 detects the origin signal SZ using the preceding reflection surface RPb in the rotational direction, using the reflection surface RPa that deflects the light beam LB1 (scans the spot light SP). Therefore, if the angle ηj between adjacent reflection surfaces RP (for example, reflection surface RPa and reflection surface RPb) differs from the designed value (135 degrees when there are eight reflection surfaces RP), the timing of generating the origin signal SZ may differ for each reflection surface RP due to this deviation, as shown in FIG30 .
在图30中,将使用反射面RPb产生的原点信号SZ设为SZb。同样地,将使用反射面RPc、RPd、RPe、···产生的原点信号SZ 设为SZc、SZd、SZe、···。在多面镜PM的相邻的反射面RP彼此所成的角ηj为设计值的情况下,各原点信号SZ(SZb、SZc、 SZd、···)的产生定时的间隔成为时间Tpx。该规定的时间Tpx 是多面镜PM旋转反射面RP的一面的量所需的时间。但是,在图30中,由于多面镜PM的反射面RP所成的角ηj的误差,而使用反射面RPc、RPd产生的原点信号SZc、SZd的定时相对于正规的产生定时出现偏移。另外,原点信号SZb、SZc、SZd、SZe、···产生的时间间隔Tp1、Tp2、Tp3、···因多面镜PM的制造误差而在微秒级别上并不固定。在图30所示的时间图中,为Tp1<Tpx,Tp2 >Tpx,Tp3<Tpx。此外,若将反射面RP的数量设为Np,将多面镜PM的旋转速度设为Vp,则Tpx以Tpx=60/(Np×Vp)(秒)表示。例如,若Vp为3万rpm,Np为8,则Tpx成为250μ秒。In FIG30 , the origin signal SZ generated using the reflection surface RPb is set to SZb. Similarly, the origin signals SZ generated using the reflection surfaces RPc, RPd, RPe, ... are set to SZc, SZd, SZe, .... When the angle ηj formed by the adjacent reflection surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM is the design value, the interval between the generation timings of the origin signals SZ (SZb, SZc, SZd, ...) is the time Tpx. The prescribed time Tpx is the time required for the polygon mirror PM to rotate one side of the reflection surface RP. However, in FIG30 , due to the error in the angle ηj formed by the reflection surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM, the timing of the origin signals SZc and SZd generated using the reflection surfaces RPc and RPd is offset from the regular generation timing. In addition, the time intervals Tp1, Tp2, Tp3, ... generated by the origin signals SZb, SZc, SZd, SZe, ... are not constant at the microsecond level due to manufacturing errors in the polygon mirror PM. In the time diagram shown in Figure 30, Tp1 < Tpx, Tp2 > Tpx, and Tp3 < Tpx. Furthermore, if the number of reflecting surfaces RP is Np and the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM is Vp, Tpx is expressed as Tpx = 60/(Np × Vp) (seconds). For example, if Vp is 30,000 rpm and Np is 8, Tpx becomes 250 μ seconds.
因此,会由于多面镜PM的相邻的反射面RP彼此的各自所成的角ηj的误差而导致由各反射面RP(RPa~RPh)描绘的点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上的描绘线SL1的描绘开始点(扫描开始点)的位置沿主扫描方向产生偏移。由此,描绘线SL1的描绘结束点的位置也会沿主扫描方向产生偏移。也就是说,由各反射面RP描绘的点光 SP的描绘线SL1的位置沿着扫描方向(Y方向)位移,因此各描绘线SLn的描绘开始点及描绘结束点的位置不会沿着X方向成为直线。该点光SP的描绘线SL1的描绘开始点及描绘结束点的位置沿着主扫描方向产生偏移的主要原因为不成立Tp1、Tp2、Tp3、···=Tpx。Therefore, due to the error in the angle ηj formed by the adjacent reflecting surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the position of the drawing starting point (scanning starting point) of the drawing line SL1 drawn by each reflecting surface RP (RPa to RPh) on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS will be offset along the main scanning direction. As a result, the position of the drawing end point of the drawing line SL1 will also be offset along the main scanning direction. In other words, the position of the drawing line SL1 of the point light SP drawn by each reflecting surface RP is displaced along the scanning direction (Y direction), so the positions of the drawing starting point and the drawing end point of each drawing line SLn will not form a straight line along the X direction. The main reason for the deviation of the positions of the drawing starting point and the drawing end point of the drawing line SL1 of the point light SP along the main scanning direction is that Tp1, Tp2, Tp3,...=Tpx does not hold.
因此,在本第4实施方式中,如图30所示的时间图那样,将从一个脉冲状的原点信号SZ产生之后经过时间Tpx后作为描绘开始点,而开始点光SP的描绘。也就是说,控制装置18在原点信号SZ 产生之后经过时间Tpx后,以使光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射的方式控制光束切换部件20,并且,向图26所示的光源装置14’的驱动电路206a输出接下来进行扫描的扫描单元U1的描绘位串数据Sdw、即串行数据DL1。由此,能够使用于检测原点信号SZ的反射面RPb 和实际使点光SP进行扫描的反射面RP成为相同的反射面。Therefore, in this fourth embodiment, as shown in the timing chart of Figure 30 , the drawing start point of the spot light SP is determined to be the time Tpx elapsed after the generation of a pulsed origin signal SZ. Specifically, after the time Tpx elapses after the generation of the origin signal SZ, the control device 18 controls the beam switching component 20 so that the light beam LB1 is incident on the scanning unit U1. Furthermore, the control device 18 outputs the drawing bit string data Sdw, or serial data DL1, for the scanning unit U1 to be scanned next, to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14' shown in Figure 26 . This allows the reflection surface RPb used to detect the origin signal SZ and the reflection surface RP used to actually scan the spot light SP to be the same reflection surface.
具体地进行说明,控制装置18在扫描单元U1的原点传感器OP1 输出原点信号SZb之后经过时间Tpx后,在一定时间(On时间Ton) 向光束切换部件20的选择用光学元件AOM1输出On的驱动信号。该选择用光学元件AOM1为On的一定时间(On时间Ton)是预先确定的时间,被设定成覆盖通过多面镜PM的一个反射面RP使点光 SP沿着描绘线SL1进行一次扫描的期间(扫描期间)。接着,控制装置18将某特定的列、例如第1列的串行数据DL1向光源装置14’的驱动电路206a输出。由此,在扫描单元U1进行点光SP的扫描的扫描时间中,光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射,因此,扫描单元U1能够描绘出与某特定的列(例如第1列)的串行数据DL1相应的图案。像这样,由于在扫描单元U1的原点传感器OP1输出原点信号SZb 之后经过时间Tpx后,扫描单元U1进行点光SP的扫描,所以能够以用于检测原点信号SZb的反射面RPb进行因该原点信号SZb引发的点光SP的扫描。Specifically, after the origin sensor OP1 of the scanning unit U1 outputs the origin signal SZb, the control device 18 outputs an On drive signal to the selection optical element AOM1 of the beam switching component 20 for a certain period of time (On time Ton) after a time Tpx has passed. The certain period of time (On time Ton) during which the selection optical element AOM1 is On is a predetermined period of time, and is set to cover the period (scanning period) during which the point light SP is scanned once along the drawing line SL1 by one of the reflection surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM. Next, the control device 18 outputs the serial data DL1 of a specific column, for example, the first column, to the drive circuit 206a of the light source device 14'. As a result, during the scanning period during which the scanning unit U1 scans the point light SP, the light beam LB1 is incident on the scanning unit U1, so that the scanning unit U1 can draw a pattern corresponding to the serial data DL1 of the specific column (for example, the first column). As described above, since the scanning unit U1 scans the spot light SP after a time Tpx has passed since the origin sensor OP1 of the scanning unit U1 outputs the origin signal SZb, the reflecting surface RPb for detecting the origin signal SZb can scan the spot light SP caused by the origin signal SZb.
接着,控制装置18在扫描单元U1的原点传感器OP1输出原点信号SZd之后经过时间Tpx后,在一定时间(On时间Ton)向光束切换部件20的选择用光学元件AOM1输出On的驱动信号。然后,控制装置18将下一列、例如第2列的串行数据DL1向光源装置14’的驱动电路206a输出。由此,由于在包含扫描单元U1进行点光SP 的扫描所需要的时间在内的时间中,光束LB1向扫描单元U1入射,所以扫描单元U1能够描绘出与下一列(例如第2列)的串行数据 DL1相应的图案。像这样,由于在扫描单元U1的原点传感器OP1 输出原点信号SZd之后经过时间Tpx后,扫描单元U1进行点光SP 的扫描,所以能够以用于检测原点信号SZd的反射面RPb进行因该原点信号SZd引发的点光SP的扫描。此外,在不是按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP而是跳过一面地进行点光SP的扫描的情况下,以跳过一个(隔一个)的方式使用原点信号SZ进行描绘处理。关于这样的跳过一个进行描绘处理的理由将在后详细说明。Next, after a time Tpx has passed since the origin sensor OP1 of the scanning unit U1 outputted the origin signal SZd, the control device 18 outputs an On drive signal to the selection optical element AOM1 of the light beam switching component 20 for a predetermined time (On time Ton). The control device 18 then outputs the next column of serial data DL1, for example, the second column, to the drive circuit 206a of the light source device 14'. Thus, since the light beam LB1 is incident on the scanning unit U1 during a period that includes the time required for the scanning unit U1 to scan the spot light SP, the scanning unit U1 can draw a pattern corresponding to the next column of serial data DL1 (for example, the second column). Thus, since the scanning unit U1 scans the spot light SP after a time Tpx has passed since the origin sensor OP1 of the scanning unit U1 outputted the origin signal SZd, the spot light SP caused by the origin signal SZd can be scanned by the reflection surface RPb used to detect the origin signal SZd. In addition, when scanning the spot light SP is performed not on each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM but on a skipped surface, the origin signal SZ is used to perform drawing processing in a skipped manner. The reason for skipping one will be described in detail later.
像这样,在扫描单元U1的原点传感器OP1输出原点信号SZ之后经过时间Tpx后,控制装置18以扫描单元U1使点光SP进行扫描的方式,控制光束切换部件20,并且,向光源装置14’的驱动电路 206a输出串行数据DL1。另外,控制装置18每当开始基于扫描单元 U1进行的扫描时,使输出的串行数据DL1的列以第1列、第2列、第3列、第4列、···的方式在列方向上错开。此外,在基于扫描单元U1进行的点光SP的一次扫描到下一次扫描的期间,按顺序进行基于其他扫描单元Un(扫描单元U2~U6)进行的点光SP的扫描。基于其他扫描单元Un(U2~U6)进行的点光SP的扫描与扫描单元U1的扫描相同。另外,原点传感器OPn(OP1~OP6)按各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)而设置。As described above, after time Tpx has passed since the origin sensor OP1 of the scanning unit U1 outputs the origin signal SZ, the control device 18 controls the light beam switching component 20 so that the scanning unit U1 causes the spot light SP to scan, and also outputs serial data DL1 to the drive circuit 206a of the light source device 14'. Furthermore, each time scanning by the scanning unit U1 begins, the control device 18 shifts the columns of the output serial data DL1 in the column direction, such as the first column, the second column, the third column, the fourth column, and so on. Furthermore, between one scan of the spot light SP by the scanning unit U1 and the next scan, the other scanning units Un (scanning units U2 to U6) sequentially scan the spot light SP. The scanning of the spot light SP by the other scanning units Un (U2 to U6) is the same as that by the scanning unit U1. Furthermore, an origin sensor OPn (OP1 to OP6) is provided for each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6).
如以上那样,通过使用用于检测扫描单元U1的原点信号SZb 的反射面RP来进行点光SP的扫描,即使在多面镜PM的相邻的反射面RP彼此的各自所成的角ηj具有误差的情况下,也能够抑制由各反射面RP(RPa~RPh)描绘的点光SP在基板FS的被照射面上的描绘开始点及描绘结束点的位置沿主扫描方向产生偏移。As described above, by using the reflecting surface RP for detecting the origin signal SZb of the scanning unit U1 to perform scanning of the point light SP, even if there is an error in the angle ηj between the adjacent reflecting surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the positions of the starting point and the ending point of the drawing of the point light SP drawn by each reflecting surface RP (RPa~RPh) on the irradiated surface of the substrate FS can be prevented from being offset along the main scanning direction.
因此,多面镜PM旋转45度的时间Tpx需要在μ秒级别上是准确的,也就是说,需要使多面镜PM的速度均匀地、精密地以等速旋转。在像这样精密地以等速使多面镜PM旋转的情况下,用于产生原点信号SZ的反射面RP成为始终在时间Tpx后准确地仅旋转45 度地将光束LB1朝向fθ透镜FT反射的角度。因此,通过提高多面镜PM的旋转等速性、也极力降低一周旋转中的速度不均,能够使用于产生原点信号SZ的反射面RP的位置与用于使光束LB1偏转而使点光SP进行扫描的反射面RP的位置不同。也就是说,由于使原点信号SZ的产生定时延迟时间Tpx,所以其结果为具有与使用进行点光SP的扫描的反射面RP来检测原点信号SZ的情况同等的作用。由此,原点传感器OP1(OPn)的配置自由度提高,能够设置刚性高且结构稳定的原点传感器。另外,作为原点传感器OP1(OPn)的检测对象的反射面RP虽是使光束LB1(LBn)偏转的反射面RP的旋转方向上的前一个,但只要在多面镜PM的旋转方向之前即可,不限于前一个。该情况下,在将作为原点传感器OP的检测对象的反射面RP设为使光束LB1(LBn)偏转的反射面RP的旋转方向上的前 n(1以上的整数)个的情况下,只要在原点信号SZ产生之后经过n×时间Tpx后设定描绘开始点即可。Therefore, the time Tpx for the polygon mirror PM to rotate 45 degrees needs to be accurate at the μ-second level, that is, the speed of the polygon mirror PM needs to be uniform and precisely rotated at a constant speed. When the polygon mirror PM is rotated at a constant speed in this way, the reflection surface RP used to generate the origin signal SZ becomes an angle that accurately rotates only 45 degrees after the time Tpx to reflect the light beam LB1 toward the fθ lens FT. Therefore, by improving the rotational uniformity of the polygon mirror PM and minimizing the speed unevenness in one rotation, the position of the reflection surface RP used to generate the origin signal SZ can be made different from the position of the reflection surface RP used to deflect the light beam LB1 and scan the point light SP. In other words, since the generation timing of the origin signal SZ is delayed by the time Tpx, the result is the same effect as when the origin signal SZ is detected using the reflection surface RP that scans the point light SP. As a result, the configuration freedom of the origin sensor OP1 (OPn) is improved, and an origin sensor with high rigidity and stable structure can be set. Furthermore, although the reflective surface RP that origin sensor OP1 (OPn) detects is the one preceding in the rotational direction of the reflective surface RP that deflects light beam LB1 (LBn), it is not limited to the preceding one as long as it is located before the polygon mirror PM in the rotational direction. In this case, if the reflective surface RP that origin sensor OP detects is the first n (an integer greater than or equal to 1) reflective surfaces RP in the rotational direction of the reflective surface RP that deflects light beam LB1 (LBn), the drawing start point can be set after n × time Tpx has passed since the origin signal SZ was generated.
而且,对从原点传感器OP1(OPn)每隔一个地产生的原点信号 SZb、SZd、···,分别在n×时间Tpx后设定描绘开始点,由此,在与每个描绘线SL1对应的像素数据列的读取动作、数据传输(通信)动作或修正计算等的处理时间中产生余裕。因此,能够可靠地避免像素数据列的传输错误、像素数据列的错误和/或部分丢失。Furthermore, for every other origin signal SZb, SZd, etc. generated by origin sensor OP1 (OPn), the drawing start point is set n times Tpx later. This provides a margin in the processing time for reading the pixel data sequence corresponding to each drawing line SL1, transmitting (communicating) data, performing correction calculations, and so on. Consequently, pixel data sequence transmission errors, errors in pixel data sequences, and/or partial loss can be reliably avoided.
此外,也可以不像以上的图29那样设置检测接下来进行点光SP 的扫描(光束LB1的偏转)的反射面RP的相邻的反射面RP(在本第4实施方式中,多面镜PM的旋转方向上的前一个反射面RP)的原点传感器OPn,而设置检测与接下来进行点光SP的扫描(光束 LB1的偏转)的反射面RP相同的反射面RP的原点传感器。该情况下,如图30中说明那样,由于按多面镜PM的各反射面RPa~RPh 产生的原点信号(脉冲状)SZ的时间间隔产生偏差,所以需要按各反射面RPa~RPh追加与其偏差量相应的时间偏置量。Furthermore, instead of providing an origin sensor OPn for detecting a reflection surface RP adjacent to the reflection surface RP on which the next point light SP is scanned (deflection of the light beam LB1) (in the fourth embodiment, the previous reflection surface RP in the rotational direction of the polygon mirror PM) as shown in FIG29 above, an origin sensor for detecting the same reflection surface RP as the reflection surface RP on which the next point light SP is scanned (deflection of the light beam LB1) may be provided. In this case, as illustrated in FIG30 , since the time intervals of the origin signals (pulse-like) SZ generated by the respective reflection surfaces RPa to RPh of the polygon mirror PM deviate, it is necessary to add a time offset corresponding to the amount of the deviation for each reflection surface RPa to RPh.
在此,如在图7也说明过那样,在多面镜PM的反射面RP的数量Np为八个、最大扫描旋转角度范围α为15度的情况下,扫描效率(α/β)成为1/3。例如,在扫描单元U1使点光SP进行扫描起到进行下一次扫描的期间,能够将光束LBn分配给扫描单元U1以外的两个扫描单元Un来进行点光SP的扫描。也就是说,在扫描单元 U1的多面镜PM旋转一面的量的期间,能够向包含扫描单元U1在内的三个扫描单元Un各自分配对应的光束LBn,来进行点光SP的扫描。As also illustrated in FIG7 , when the number Np of the reflective surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM is eight and the maximum scanning rotation angle range α is 15 degrees, the scanning efficiency (α/β) becomes 1/3. For example, between the time when scanning unit U1 scans the spot light SP and the time it performs the next scan, the light beam LBn can be distributed to two scanning units Un other than scanning unit U1 to scan the spot light SP. In other words, during the time when the polygon mirror PM of scanning unit U1 rotates one plane, a corresponding light beam LBn can be distributed to each of the three scanning units Un, including scanning unit U1, to scan the spot light SP.
但是,由于多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/3,所以在各扫描单元Un 以最大扫描旋转角度范围α(15度)使点光SP进行扫描的情况下,在扫描单元U1的多面镜PM旋转反射面RP的一面的量(β=45度) 的期间,无法将光束LBn分配给扫描单元U1以外的三个以上的扫描单元Un(U2~U6)。也就是说,在扫描单元U1的点光SP的扫描开始起到下一次的点光SP的扫描开始的期间,无法将光束LBn分配给扫描单元U1以外的三个以上的扫描单元Un(U2~U6)。因此,在扫描单元U1的点光SP的扫描开始起到下一次的扫描开始的期间,为了将光束LBn分配给其他五个扫描单元Un(U2~U6)的每一个来进行基于点光SP的扫描,可考虑以下方法。However, since the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM is 1/3, when each scanning unit Un scans the point light SP with a maximum scanning rotation angle range α (15 degrees), the light beam LBn cannot be distributed to more than three scanning units Un (U2 to U6) other than the scanning unit U1 during the period when the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit U1 rotates one side of the reflection surface RP (β = 45 degrees). In other words, from the start of scanning of the point light SP of the scanning unit U1 to the start of the next scanning of the point light SP, the light beam LBn cannot be distributed to more than three scanning units Un (U2 to U6) other than the scanning unit U1. Therefore, in order to distribute the light beam LBn to each of the other five scanning units Un (U2 to U6) to perform scanning based on the point light SP during the period from the start of scanning of the point light SP of the scanning unit U1 to the start of the next scanning, the following method can be considered.
即使在最大扫描旋转角度范围α为15度的情况下,也将实际上点光SP能够扫描的多面镜PM的扫描旋转角度范围α’设定为小于最大扫描旋转角度范围α(α=15度)。具体地说,在扫描单元Un(U1~U6) 各自的多面镜PM旋转反射面RP的一面的量(β=45度)的期间,要分配光束LBn的扫描单元Un的数量为六个,因此将扫描旋转角度范围α’设为α’=45/6=7.5度。即,将以图28中的向fθ透镜FT入射的光束LBn的光轴AXf为中心的振荡角限制为±7.5度。由此,在各扫描单元Un的多面镜PM旋转45度的期间(反射面RP旋转一面的量的期间),能够使光束LBn按顺序分配并入射到六个扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)中的某一个,扫描单元Un(U1~U6)能够按顺序进行基于点光SP的扫描。但是,若为该情况,则存在实际上点光SP能够扫描的扫描旋转角度范围α’变得过小、点光SP扫描的最大扫描范围长度即描绘线SLn的最大扫描长度变得过短的问题。为了避免这样的问题,以不改变点光SP扫描的最大扫描长度的方式,准备焦点距离长的fθ透镜FT,将从多面镜PM的反射面RP到fθ透镜FT的距离(工作距离)设定得长。该情况下,担心会导致fθ透镜FT的大型化、扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的Xt方向上的尺寸的大型化,并且由于工作距离长而导致光束扫描的稳定性降低。Even when the maximum scanning rotation angle range α is 15 degrees, the scanning rotation angle range α' of the polygonal mirror PM that can actually scan the point light SP is set to be smaller than the maximum scanning rotation angle range α (α = 15 degrees). Specifically, during the period when the polygonal mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) rotates by the amount of one side of the reflecting surface RP (β = 45 degrees), the number of scanning units Un to which the light beam LBn is to be distributed is six, so the scanning rotation angle range α' is set to α' = 45/6 = 7.5 degrees. That is, the oscillation angle centered on the optical axis AXf of the light beam LBn incident on the fθ lens FT in Figure 28 is limited to ±7.5 degrees. Thus, during the period when the polygonal mirror PM of each scanning unit Un rotates 45 degrees (the period when the reflecting surface RP rotates by the amount of one side), the light beam LBn can be sequentially distributed and incident on one of the six scanning units Un (U1 to U6), and the scanning units Un (U1 to U6) can sequentially perform scanning based on the point light SP. However, if this is the case, the actual scanning rotation angle range α' that the spot light SP can scan becomes too small, and the maximum scanning range length of the spot light SP scan, that is, the maximum scanning length of the traced line SLn, becomes too short. To avoid this problem, a long focal length fθ lens FT is prepared without changing the maximum scanning length of the spot light SP scan, and the distance (working distance) from the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM to the fθ lens FT is set long. In this case, there is a concern that the fθ lens FT will be larger, the Xt-direction dimensions of the scanning units Un (U1-U6) will be larger, and the stability of the beam scanning will be reduced due to the long working distance.
另一方面,考虑到减少多面镜PM的反射面RP的数量,增大多面镜PM旋转反射面RP的一面的量的旋转角度β。该情况下,抑制了描绘线SLn变短、扫描单元Un(U1~U6)大型化,同时能够在扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM旋转反射面RP的一面的量(旋转角度β)的期间,将光束LBn分配且由六个扫描单元Un(U1~U6) 按顺序使点光SP进行扫描。例如,在将多面镜PM的反射面RP的数量设为四个的情况下,也就是说,在将多面镜PM的形状设为正方形的情况下,多面镜PM的反射面RP旋转一面的量的旋转角度β成为90度。因此,在扫描单元U1的多面镜PM旋转反射面RP的一面的量的期间将光束LBn分配并由六个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)进行点光SP的扫描的情况下,实际上点光SP能够扫描的多面镜PM的扫描旋转角度范围α’成为α’=90/6=15度,与上述的最大扫描旋转角度范围α相等。On the other hand, considering reducing the number of reflection surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the rotation angle β of the amount of one side of the reflection surface RP rotated by the polygonal mirror PM is increased. In this case, the shortening of the drawing line SLn and the enlargement of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) are suppressed, and at the same time, during the period when the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) rotates the reflection surface RP by the amount of one side (rotation angle β), the light beam LBn can be distributed and the six scanning units Un (U1 to U6) can sequentially scan the point light SP. For example, when the number of reflection surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM is set to four, that is, when the shape of the polygonal mirror PM is set to a square, the rotation angle β of the amount of one side of the reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM becomes 90 degrees. Therefore, when the light beam LBn is distributed and the point light SP is scanned by six scanning units Un (U1~U6) during the period when the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit U1 rotates one side of the reflecting surface RP, the scanning rotation angle range α' of the polygonal mirror PM that can actually scan the point light SP becomes α'=90/6=15 degrees, which is equal to the above-mentioned maximum scanning rotation angle range α.
但是,若使三角形、正方形这样的反射面数Np少的多边形的多面镜PM高速旋转,则空气阻力(风阻)变得过大,旋转速度、旋转数降低(规律)。例如,即使在想要使多面镜PM以数万rpm(rotation per minute)高速旋转的情况下,也会由于空气阻力而使旋转速度降低2~3成左右,无法得到所期望的高速旋转速度、高旋转数。另外,也考虑到将多面镜PM的外形大小变大的方法,但多面镜PM的重量变得过大,而无法得到所期望的高速旋转速度、高旋转数。此外,作为即使减少多面镜PM的反射面数Np也会降低旋转时的风阻的手法,也考虑将多面镜PM整体设置在真空环境内,或设置在分子量比空气小的气体(氦气等)的环境内。该情况下,在多面镜PM的周围设置用于产生这样的环境的气密构造体,与之相应地会导致扫描单元Un(U1~U6)大型化。However, if a polygonal mirror PM with a small number of reflecting surfaces Np, such as a triangle or square, is rotated at high speed, the air resistance (wind resistance) becomes too large, and the rotation speed and the number of revolutions decrease (regularity). For example, even if the polygonal mirror PM is intended to rotate at a high speed of tens of thousands of rpm (rotations per minute), the rotation speed will be reduced by about 20% to 30% due to air resistance, and the desired high rotation speed and high number of revolutions cannot be obtained. In addition, a method of increasing the size of the polygonal mirror PM is also considered, but the weight of the polygonal mirror PM becomes too large, and the desired high rotation speed and high number of revolutions cannot be obtained. In addition, as a method of reducing the wind resistance during rotation even if the number of reflecting surfaces Np of the polygonal mirror PM is reduced, it is also considered to place the entire polygonal mirror PM in a vacuum environment, or in an environment of a gas with a smaller molecular weight than air (helium, etc.). In this case, an airtight structure for creating such an environment is provided around the polygonal mirror PM, which will correspondingly lead to an increase in the size of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6).
因此,在本第4实施方式中,使用反射面数Np比较多的多边形、即更近似圆形的八边形的多面镜PM,并将实际上点光SP能够扫描的多面镜PM的扫描旋转角度范围α’设为最大扫描旋转角度范围α (α=15度),将进行点光SP的扫描(光束LBn的偏转)的多面镜 PM的反射面RP设定成每隔一个。也就是说,基于各扫描单元Un (U1~U6)进行的点光SP的扫描,每隔多面镜PM的反射面RP的一面(跳过一面)地反复进行。因此,在扫描单元U1使点光SP进行扫描起到进行下一次扫描的期间,能够将光束LB2~LB6按顺序分配给扫描单元U1以外的五个扫描单元U2~U6的每一个,来进行点光SP的扫描。也就是说,在六个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)中的所关注的一个扫描单元Un的多面镜PM旋转两面的量的期间,将光束 LB1~LB6分配到六个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的每一个,由此六个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)全部能够进行点光SP的扫描。该情况下,在各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)开始点光SP的扫描起到开始下一次的点光SP的扫描为止,多面镜PM旋转两面的量(90度)。为了进行这样的描绘动作,六个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)各自的多面镜PM被同步控制成旋转速度相同,并且各多面镜PM的反射面RP的角度位置被同步控制成彼此为规定的相位关系。Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, a polygonal mirror PM having a relatively large number of reflecting surfaces Np, that is, an octagonal shape that is closer to a circle, is used, and the scanning rotation angle range α' of the polygonal mirror PM that can actually scan the point light SP is set to the maximum scanning rotation angle range α (α = 15 degrees), and the reflecting surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM that performs the scanning of the point light SP (deflection of the light beam LBn) is set to every other one. In other words, the scanning of the point light SP by each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) is repeated every other side (skipping one side) of the reflecting surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM. Therefore, during the period from when the scanning unit U1 scans the point light SP to when it performs the next scan, the light beams LB2 to LB6 can be sequentially allocated to each of the five scanning units U2 to U6 other than the scanning unit U1 to perform the scanning of the point light SP. That is, while the polygon mirror PM of a particular scanning unit Un (U1-U6) rotates two sides, light beams LB1-LB6 are distributed to each of the six scanning units Un (U1-U6), enabling all six scanning units Un (U1-U6) to scan the point light SP. In this case, the polygon mirror PM rotates two sides (90 degrees) between the time each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) starts scanning the point light SP and the time the next scanning unit Un (U1-U6) starts scanning the point light SP. To perform this drawing operation, the polygon mirrors PM of each of the six scanning units Un (U1-U6) are synchronously controlled to have the same rotation speed, and the angular positions of the reflection surfaces RP of each polygon mirror PM are synchronously controlled to have a predetermined phase relationship with each other.
此外,由于将进行点光SP的扫描(光束LBn的偏转)的多面镜 PM的反射面RP设为每隔一面,所以在各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM旋转一次的期间,沿着描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)各自的点光SP的扫描次数成为四次。因此,与点光SP的扫描(光束LBn的偏转)按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP反复进行的情况相比,即与点光SP的扫描(光束LBn的偏转)以多面镜PM的各反射面 RP进行的情况相比,描绘线SLn的数量成为一半,因此优选将基板 FS的搬送速度也减速为一半。在不想将基板FS的搬送速度减为一半的情况下,将各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转速度及振荡频率Fs提高到两倍。例如,在按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP反复进行点光SP的扫描(光束LBn的偏转)时的多面镜 PM的旋转速度为2万rpm、来自光源装置14’的光束LB的振荡频率 Fs为200MHz的情况下,在按多面镜PM的每隔一面的反射面RP 反复进行点光SP的扫描(光束LBn的偏转)时,多面镜PM的旋转速度被设定成4万rpm,来自光源装置14’的光束LB的振荡频率Fs 被设定成400MHz。Furthermore, since the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM that performs the scanning of the point light SP (deflection of the light beam LBn) is set to every other surface, the number of scans of the point light SP along the drawing line SLn (SL1-SL6) becomes four during one rotation of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6). Therefore, compared to the case where the scanning of the point light SP (deflection of the light beam LBn) is repeated at each successive reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, that is, compared to the case where the scanning of the point light SP (deflection of the light beam LBn) is performed at each reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, the number of drawing lines SLn is halved. Therefore, it is preferable to also reduce the transport speed of the substrate FS by half. If it is not desired to reduce the transport speed of the substrate FS by half, the rotation speed and oscillation frequency Fs of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) can be doubled. For example, when the point light SP is repeatedly scanned (the light beam LBn is deflected) on each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror PM is 20,000 rpm and the oscillation frequency Fs of the light beam LB from the light source device 14' is 200 MHz. When the point light SP is repeatedly scanned (the light beam LBn is deflected) on every other reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror PM is set to 40,000 rpm and the oscillation frequency Fs of the light beam LB from the light source device 14' is set to 400 MHz.
在此,控制装置18基于原点信号SZ来管理多个扫描单元Un (U1~U6)中的哪个扫描单元Un进行点光SP的扫描。但是,由于各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的原点传感器OPn在各反射面RP成为规定的角度位置时产生原点信号SZ,所以若直接使用该原点信号SZ,则控制装置18会判断成各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)按连续的每个反射面RP使点光SP进行扫描。因此,在一个扫描单元Un进行点光 SP的扫描起到进行下一次扫描之前,无法将光束LBn分配给除此以外的五个扫描单元Un。因此,为了将进行点光SP的扫描的多面镜 PM的反射面RP设定成每隔一个,需要生成将原点信号SZ间除了的副原点信号(副原点脉冲信号)ZP。另外,如上所述,由于使用进行点光SP的扫描(偏转)的反射面RP的旋转方向上的前一个反射面RP来进行原点信号SZ的检测,所以需要生成使原点信号SZ 的产生定时延迟时间Tpx的副原点信号ZP。以下,对生成该副原点信号ZP的副原点生成电路CA的结构进行说明。Here, the control device 18 manages which of the multiple scanning units Un (U1-U6) performs the scanning of the point light SP based on the origin signal SZ. However, since the origin sensor OPn of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) generates the origin signal SZ when each reflection surface RP reaches a specified angular position, if this origin signal SZ is used directly, the control device 18 will determine that each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) scans the point light SP on each consecutive reflection surface RP. Therefore, between the time when one scanning unit Un performs the scanning of the point light SP and the time when the next scanning is performed, the light beam LBn cannot be distributed to the other five scanning units Un. Therefore, in order to set the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM that performs the scanning of the point light SP to every other one, it is necessary to generate a sub-origin signal (sub-origin pulse signal) ZP that divides the origin signal SZ. Furthermore, as described above, since the origin signal SZ is detected using the preceding reflection surface RP in the rotational direction of the reflection surface RP that scans (deflects) the spot light SP, it is necessary to generate a sub-origin signal ZP that delays the generation timing of the origin signal SZ by a time Tpx. The following describes the structure of the sub-origin generation circuit CA that generates this sub-origin signal ZP.
图31是用于生成将原点信号SZ间除而使其产生定时延迟时间 Tpx的副原点信号ZP的副原点生成电路CA的结构图,图32是表示由图31的副原点生成电路CA生成的副原点信号ZP的时间图。该副原点生成电路CA具有分频器330和延迟电路332。分频器330 将原点信号SZ的产生定时的频率分频成1/2而作为原点信号SZ’向延迟电路332输出。延迟电路332使发送来的原点信号SZ’延迟时间 Tpx,并作为副原点信号ZP而输出。该副原点生成电路CA与各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的原点传感器OPn对应地设有多个。Figure 31 is a block diagram of a sub-origin generation circuit CA for generating a sub-origin signal ZP with a generation timing delay of time Tpx by thinning out the origin signal SZ. Figure 32 is a timing chart showing the sub-origin signal ZP generated by the sub-origin generation circuit CA of Figure 31. The sub-origin generation circuit CA includes a frequency divider 330 and a delay circuit 332. The frequency divider 330 divides the frequency of the generation timing of the origin signal SZ into 1/2 and outputs the frequency as the origin signal SZ' to the delay circuit 332. The delay circuit 332 delays the received origin signal SZ' by time Tpx and outputs the result as the sub-origin signal ZP. Multiple sub-origin generation circuits CA are provided, corresponding to the origin sensors OPn of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6).
此外,存在将与扫描单元Un的原点传感器OPn对应的副原点生成电路CA用CAn表示的情况。也就是说,存在将与扫描单元U1 的原点传感器OP1对应的副原点生成电路CA用CA1表示、将与扫描单元U2~U6的原点传感器OP2~OP6对应的副原点生成电路CA 用CA2~CA6表示的情况。另外,存在将从扫描单元Un的原点传感器OPn输出的原点信号SZ用SZn表示的情况。也就是说,存在将从扫描单元U1的原点传感器OP1输出的原点信号SZ用SZ1表示、将从扫描单元U2~U6的原点传感器OP2~OP6输出的原点信号SZ用 SZ2~SZ6表示的情况。而且,存在将基于原点信号SZn生成的原点信号SZ’、副原点信号ZP用SZn’、ZPn表示的情况。也就是说,存在将基于原点信号SZ1生成的原点信号SZ’、副原点信号ZP用SZ1’、 ZP1表示、同样地将基于原点信号SZ2~SZ6生成的原点信号SZ’、副原点信号ZP用SZ2’~SZ6’、ZP2~ZP6表示的情况。In addition, the sub-origin generation circuit CA corresponding to the origin sensor OPn of the scanner unit Un may be represented by CAn. That is, the sub-origin generation circuit CA corresponding to the origin sensor OP1 of the scanner unit U1 may be represented by CA1, and the sub-origin generation circuits CA corresponding to the origin sensors OP2 to OP6 of the scanner units U2 to U6 may be represented by CA2 to CA6. Furthermore, the origin signal SZ output from the origin sensor OPn of the scanner unit Un may be represented by SZn. That is, the origin signal SZ output from the origin sensor OP1 of the scanner unit U1 may be represented by SZ1, and the origin signal SZ output from the origin sensors OP2 to OP6 of the scanner units U2 to U6 may be represented by SZ2 to SZ6. Furthermore, the origin signal SZ' and the sub-origin signal ZP generated based on the origin signal SZn may be represented by SZn' and ZPn, respectively. That is, there is a case where the origin signal SZ’ and sub-origin signal ZP generated based on the origin signal SZ1 are represented by SZ1’ and ZP1, and similarly, the origin signal SZ’ and sub-origin signal ZP generated based on the origin signals SZ2 to SZ6 are represented by SZ2’ to SZ6’ and ZP2 to ZP6.
图33是表示曝光装置EX的电气结构的框图,图34是表示输出原点信号SZ1~SZ6、副原点信号ZP1~ZP6、及串行数据DL1~DL6 的定时的时间图。曝光装置EX的控制装置18具备旋转控制部350、光束切换控制部352、描绘数据输出控制部354及曝光控制部356。另外,曝光装置EX具备驱动包含各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的马达等在内的多面镜驱动部RM的马达驱动电路Drm1~Drm6。FIG33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the exposure apparatus EX, and FIG34 is a timing chart showing the timing for outputting origin signals SZ1 to SZ6, sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6, and serial data DL1 to DL6. The control device 18 of the exposure apparatus EX includes a rotation control unit 350, a beam switching control unit 352, a drawing data output control unit 354, and an exposure control unit 356. Furthermore, the exposure apparatus EX includes motor drive circuits Drm1 to Drm6 that drive the polygon mirror drive unit RM, including the motors of the scanning units Un (U1 to U6).
旋转控制部350通过控制马达驱动电路Drm1~Drm6来控制各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转。旋转控制部350通过控制马达驱动电路Drm1~Drm6,以使多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转角度位置彼此成为规定的相位关系的方式,使多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM同步地旋转。详细地说,旋转控制部350以使多个扫描单元U1~U6的多面镜PM的旋转速度(旋转数)彼此相同、且使旋转角度位置的相位每次错开一定角度量的方式,控制多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转。此外,图33中的附图标记PD1~PD6表示从旋转控制部350向马达驱动电路Drm1~Drm6输出的控制信号。The rotation control unit 350 controls the rotation of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) by controlling the motor drive circuits Drm1 to Drm6. The rotation control unit 350 controls the motor drive circuits Drm1 to Drm6 so that the rotation angle positions of the polygon mirrors PM of the multiple scanning units Un (U1 to U6) are in a predetermined phase relationship with each other, thereby causing the polygon mirrors PM of the multiple scanning units Un (U1 to U6) to rotate synchronously. In detail, the rotation control unit 350 controls the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the multiple scanning units Un (U1 to U6) so that the rotation speeds (number of rotations) of the polygon mirrors PM of the multiple scanning units U1 to U6 are the same and the phases of the rotation angle positions are shifted by a certain angle each time. In addition, the reference numerals PD1 to PD6 in Figure 33 represent control signals output from the rotation control unit 350 to the motor drive circuits Drm1 to Drm6.
在本第4实施方式中,将多面镜PM的旋转速度Vp设为3.9万rpm(650rps)。另外,由于将反射面数Np设为8、将扫描效率(α/β) 设为1/3、将进行点光SP的扫描的反射面RP设定为每隔一面,所以能够使六个多面镜PM间的旋转角度位置的相位差为最大扫描旋转角度范围α即15度。点光SP的扫描按U1→U2→···→U6的顺序进行。因此,以在使六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的多面镜PM的旋转角度位置的相位按该顺序每次错开15度的状态下等速旋转的方式,通过旋转控制部350进行同步控制。由此,扫描单元U1与扫描单元U4的旋转角度位置的相位的偏差正好为与一面的量的旋转角度对应的45度。因此,扫描单元U1与扫描单元U4的旋转角度位置的相位、即原点信号SZ1、SZ4的产生定时也可以一致。同样地,扫描单元U2与扫描单元U5的旋转角度位置、及扫描单元U3与扫描单元U6的旋转角度位置的相位的偏差均为45度,因此,来自扫描单元U2和扫描单元U5各自的原点信号SZ2、SZ5的产生定时、及来自扫描单元U3和扫描单元U6各自的原点信号SZ3、SZ6的产生定时也可以在时间轴上一致。In this fourth embodiment, the rotation speed Vp of the polygon mirror PM is set to 39,000 rpm (650 rps). In addition, since the number of reflection surfaces Np is set to 8, the scanning efficiency (α/β) is set to 1/3, and the reflection surface RP for scanning the point light SP is set to every other surface, the phase difference of the rotation angle position between the six polygon mirrors PM can be set to the maximum scanning rotation angle range α, that is, 15 degrees. The scanning of the point light SP is performed in the order of U1→U2→···→U6. Therefore, the rotation control unit 350 performs synchronization control in a manner such that the phase of the rotation angle position of each polygon mirror PM of the six scanning units U1 to U6 is rotated at a constant speed in this order while being shifted by 15 degrees each time. As a result, the phase deviation of the rotation angle position of the scanning unit U1 and the scanning unit U4 is exactly 45 degrees, which corresponds to the rotation angle of one surface. Therefore, the phase of the rotation angle position of the scanning unit U1 and the scanning unit U4, that is, the generation timing of the origin signals SZ1 and SZ4 can also be consistent. Similarly, the phase deviations of the rotation angle positions of scanning unit U2 and scanning unit U5, and the rotation angle positions of scanning unit U3 and scanning unit U6 are both 45 degrees. Therefore, the generation timings of the origin signals SZ2 and SZ5 from scanning unit U2 and scanning unit U5, respectively, and the generation timings of the origin signals SZ3 and SZ6 from scanning unit U3 and scanning unit U6, respectively, can also be consistent on the time axis.
具体地说,旋转控制部350以扫描单元U1和扫描单元U4的多面镜PM的旋转、扫描单元U2和扫描单元U5的多面镜PM的旋转、及扫描单元U3和扫描单元U6的多面镜PM的旋转各自成为第1控制状态的方式,经由各马达驱动电路Drm1~Drm6来控制各扫描单元 U1~U6的多面镜PM的旋转。该第1控制状态是每当多面镜PM旋转一次时输出的旋绕脉冲信号的相位差为0(零)的状态。也就是说,以每当扫描单元U1和扫描单元U4的多面镜PM旋转一次时输出的旋绕脉冲信号的相位差成为0(零)的方式,来控制扫描单元U1和扫描单元U4的多面镜PM的旋转。同样地,以每当扫描单元U2和扫描单元U5、及扫描单元U3和扫描单元U6的多面镜PM旋转一次时输出的旋绕脉冲信号的相位差成为0(零)的方式,来控制扫描单元U2和扫描单元U5、及扫描单元U3和扫描单元U6的多面镜PM 的旋转。Specifically, the rotation control unit 350 controls the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of each scanning unit U1 to U6 via the motor drive circuits Drm1 to Drm6 so that the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U1 and U4, the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U2 and U5, and the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U3 and U6 are each in a first control state. This first control state is a state in which the phase difference of the rotation pulse signal outputted each time the polygon mirror PM rotates once is 0 (zero). In other words, the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U1 and U4 is controlled so that the phase difference of the rotation pulse signal outputted each time the polygon mirror PM rotates once is 0 (zero). Similarly, the rotation of the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit U2 and the scanning unit U5, and the scanning unit U3 and the scanning unit U6 is controlled in such a way that the phase difference of the rotation pulse signal outputted becomes 0 (zero) each time the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit U2 and the scanning unit U5, and the scanning unit U3 and the scanning unit U6 rotates once.
该旋绕脉冲信号也可以是通过未图示的分频器而每当扫描单元 Un的原点信号SZn输出八次时输出一次的信号。另外,旋绕脉冲信号也可以是从设在各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜驱动部RM上的编码器(图示略)输出的信号。也可以将检测旋绕脉冲信号的传感器设在多面镜PM的附近。在图34所示的例子中,每当扫描单元 Un的原点信号SZn输出八次时,产生一次旋绕脉冲信号,将与该旋绕脉冲信号的产生对应的原点信号SZn的一部分用虚线表示。此外,各原点信号SZ1和各原点信号SZ4若不考虑相邻的反射面RP(例如,反射面RPa和反射面RPb)彼此的各自所成的角ηj的误差(参照图 29),则在时间轴上全部相位一致。同样地,各原点信号SZ2和各原点信号SZ5、及各原点信号SZ3和各原点信号SZ6若不考虑相邻的反射面RP彼此的各自所成的角ηj的误差(参照图29),则在时间轴上全部相位一致。此外,在图34中,为了易于理解地进行说明,假设不存在相邻的反射面RP彼此的各自所成的角ηj的误差来进行说明。This rotation pulse signal can also be a signal that is output once every eight times the origin signal SZn of the scanning unit Un is output, via a frequency divider (not shown). Alternatively, the rotation pulse signal can be a signal output from an encoder (not shown) provided on the polygonal mirror drive unit RM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6). A sensor for detecting the rotation pulse signal can also be provided near the polygonal mirror PM. In the example shown in FIG34 , a rotation pulse signal is generated every eight times the origin signal SZn of the scanning unit Un is output. The portion of the origin signal SZn corresponding to the generation of this rotation pulse signal is indicated by a dotted line. Furthermore, each origin signal SZ1 and each origin signal SZ4 are completely aligned in phase on the time axis, ignoring any error in the angle ηj formed between adjacent reflection surfaces RP (e.g., reflection surface RPa and reflection surface RPb) (see FIG29 ). Similarly, if the error in the angle ηj between adjacent reflection surfaces RP is not considered, the phases of the origin signals SZ2 and SZ5, and the origin signals SZ3 and SZ6 are all aligned on the time axis (see FIG29). Furthermore, FIG34 assumes that there is no error in the angle ηj between adjacent reflection surfaces RP for easier understanding.
然后,旋转控制部350保持着第1控制状态,以扫描单元U2、 U5的多面镜PM的旋转角度位置的相位相对于扫描单元U1、U4的多面镜PM的旋转角度位置错开15度的方式,来控制扫描单元U2、 U5的多面镜PM的旋转。同样地,旋转控制部350保持着第1控制状态,以扫描单元U3、U6的多面镜PM的旋转角度位置的相位相对于扫描单元U1、U4的多面镜PM的旋转角度位置错开30度的方式,来控制扫描单元U3、U6的旋转。将该多面镜PM旋转15度的时间 (光束LBn的最大扫描时间)设为Ts。Then, the rotation control unit 350 maintains the first control state and controls the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U2 and U5 so that the phases of the rotation angle positions of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U2 and U5 are offset by 15 degrees relative to the rotation angle positions of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U1 and U4. Similarly, the rotation control unit 350 maintains the first control state and controls the rotation of the scanning units U3 and U6 so that the phases of the rotation angle positions of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U3 and U6 are offset by 30 degrees relative to the rotation angle positions of the polygon mirrors PM of the scanning units U1 and U4. The time required for the polygon mirror PM to rotate by 15 degrees (the maximum scanning time of the light beam LBn) is set to Ts.
具体地说,旋转控制部350以由扫描单元U2、U5得到的旋绕脉冲信号相对于由扫描单元U1、U4得到的旋绕脉冲信号延迟时间Ts 而产生的方式,来控制扫描单元U2、U5的多面镜PM的旋转(参照图34)。同样地,旋转控制部350以由扫描单元U3、U6得到的旋绕脉冲信号相对于由扫描单元U1、U4得到的旋绕脉冲信号延迟时间2×Ts而产生的方式,来控制扫描单元U3、U6的多面镜PM的旋转(参照图34)。若将多面镜PM的旋转速度Vp设为3.9万rpm(650rps),则时间Ts为Ts=〔1/(Vp×Np)〕×(α/β)=1/(650×8×3) 秒(约64.1μ秒)。像这样,通过控制各扫描单元U1~U6的多面镜 PM的旋转,而能够按U1→U2→···→U6的顺序,由各扫描单元 U1~U6分时地进行点光SP的扫描。Specifically, the rotation control unit 350 controls the rotation of the polygon mirror PM of scanning units U2 and U5 so that the rotation pulse signals received by scanning units U2 and U5 are delayed by a time Ts relative to the rotation pulse signals received by scanning units U1 and U4 (see FIG34 ). Similarly, the rotation control unit 350 controls the rotation of the polygon mirror PM of scanning units U3 and U6 so that the rotation pulse signals received by scanning units U3 and U6 are delayed by a time 2×Ts relative to the rotation pulse signals received by scanning units U1 and U4 (see FIG34 ). If the rotation speed Vp of the polygon mirror PM is set to 39,000 rpm (650 rps), the time Ts is Ts = [1/(Vp×Np)]×(α/β)=1/(650×8×3) seconds (approximately 64.1 μ seconds). By controlling the rotation of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit U1 to U6 in this manner, the scanning units U1 to U6 can perform scanning of the spot light SP in a time-sharing manner in the order of U1 → U2 → ... → U6.
光束切换控制部352控制光束切换部件20的选择用光学元件 AOMn(AOM1~AOM6),在一个扫描单元Un开始扫描起到开始下一次扫描之前,将来自光源装置14’的光束LB分配给六个扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)。因此,光束切换控制部352以各扫描单元Un(U1~U6) 的多面镜PM的光束LBn的扫描(偏转)按多面镜PM的每隔一个面的反射面RP反复进行的方式,通过选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6 分时地使从光束LB生成的光束LB1~LB6中的某一束向各扫描单元 Un(U1~U6)入射。The beam switching control unit 352 controls the selective optical elements AOMn (AOM1-AOM6) of the beam switching component 20 to distribute the light beam LB from the light source device 14' to the six scanning units Un (U1-U6) from the time one scanning unit Un starts scanning until the time the next scanning unit Un starts scanning. Therefore, the beam switching control unit 352 repeatedly scans (deflects) the light beam LBn by the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) along every other reflective surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. This causes one of the light beams LB1-LB6 generated from the light beam LB to be incident on each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) in a time-sharing manner through the selective optical elements AOM1-AOM6.
具体地进行说明,光束切换控制部352具备基于原点信号SZn (SZ1~SZ6)生成副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)的图31所示那样的副原点生成电路CAn(CA1~CA6)。当由该副原点生成电路CAn (CA1~CA6)产生副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)时,使缘自副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)的产生的与扫描单元Un(U1~U6)对应的选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)在一定时间(On时间Ton) 为On。例如,当产生副原点信号ZP1时,使缘自副原点信号ZP1 的产生的与扫描单元U1对应的选择用光学元件AOM1在一定时间 (On时间Ton)为On。该副原点信号ZPn基于从原点传感器OPn 输出的原点信号SZn而生成,将原点信号SZn的频率分频成1/2,也就是说,将原点信号SZn间除为一半并且使时间延迟Tpx。该一定时间(On时间Ton)与从副原点信号ZPn产生的时间点到来自下一次进行扫描的扫描单元Un的副原点信号ZPn产生的时间点为止的期间对应,即,与多面镜PM旋转15度所需的时间Ts对应。若将选择用光学元件AOMn的On时间Ton设定得比时间Ts长,则产生选择用光学元件AOMn中的两个同时成为On状态的期间,无法将光束LB1~LB6正确地导入到要使点光SP进行描绘动作的扫描单元 Un。因此,将On时间Ton设定成Ton≤Ts。Specifically, the beam switching control unit 352 includes a sub-origin generation circuit CAn (CA1-CA6) as shown in FIG. 31 , which generates a sub-origin signal ZPn (ZP1-ZP6) based on an origin signal SZn (SZ1-SZ6). When the sub-origin generation circuit CAn (CA1-CA6) generates the sub-origin signal ZPn (ZP1-ZP6), the selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1-AOM6) corresponding to the scanning units Un (U1-U6) are turned on for a predetermined time (on time Ton) in response to the generation of the sub-origin signal ZPn (ZP1-ZP6). For example, when the sub-origin signal ZP1 is generated, the selection optical element AOM1 corresponding to the scanning unit U1 is turned on for a predetermined time (on time Ton) in response to the generation of the sub-origin signal ZP1. This sub-origin signal ZPn is generated based on the origin signal SZn output from the origin sensor OPn. The frequency of the origin signal SZn is divided into 1/2, that is, the origin signal SZn is divided in half and delayed by a time delay of Tpx. This predetermined time (on time Ton) corresponds to the period from the time the sub-origin signal ZPn is generated to the time the sub-origin signal ZPn is generated by the scanning unit Un performing the next scan. In other words, it corresponds to the time Ts required for the polygon mirror PM to rotate 15 degrees. If the on time Ton of the selection optical element AOMn is set longer than time Ts, two of the selection optical elements AOMn will be in the on state simultaneously, making it impossible to correctly guide the light beams LB1 to LB6 to the scanning unit Un where the spot light SP is to be drawn. Therefore, the on time Ton is set to Ton ≤ Ts.
此时,各原点信号SZ1与各原点信号SZ4若不考虑相邻的反射面RP(例如,反射面RPa与反射面RPb)彼此的各自所成的角ηj 的误差,则在时间轴上全部同步,设定成副原点信号ZP1与副原点信号ZP4之间的相位错开大约半个周期(参照图34)。该副原点信号ZP1与副原点信号ZP4的相位的大约半个周期的偏差是由副原点生成电路CAn(CA1~CA6)的分频器330进行的。也就是说,分频器330使将原点信号SZ1间除的定时与将原点信号SZ4间除的定时错开大致半个周期。At this time, ignoring any errors in the angle ηj between adjacent reflection surfaces RP (e.g., reflection surface RPa and reflection surface RPb), each origin signal SZ1 and each origin signal SZ4 are synchronized on the time axis, with the phase difference between sub-origin signal ZP1 and sub-origin signal ZP4 being approximately half a cycle (see FIG34 ). This approximately half-cycle phase difference between sub-origin signal ZP1 and sub-origin signal ZP4 is caused by the frequency divider 330 of the sub-origin generation circuit CAn (CA1-CA6). Specifically, the frequency divider 330 causes the timing of thinning out the origin signal SZ1 to be offset from the timing of thinning out the origin signal SZ4 by approximately half a cycle.
副原点信号ZP2与副原点信号ZP5的关系也同样地,通过分频器330设定成副原点信号ZP2与副原点信号ZP5的相位错开大约半个周期(参照图34)。另外,副原点信号ZP3与副原点信号ZP6的关系也同样地,通过分频器330设定成副原点信号ZP3与副原点信号ZP6的相位错开大约半个周期(参照图34)。Similarly, the relationship between the sub-origin signals ZP2 and ZP5 is set by the frequency divider 330 so that the phases of the sub-origin signals ZP2 and ZP5 are shifted by approximately half a cycle (see FIG34 ). Similarly, the relationship between the sub-origin signals ZP3 and ZP6 is set by the frequency divider 330 so that the phases of the sub-origin signals ZP3 and ZP6 are shifted by approximately half a cycle (see FIG34 ).
因此,如图34所示,按扫描单元U1~U6生成的副原点信号 ZP1~ZP6的产生定时每次错开时间Ts。在本第4实施方式中,进行点光SP的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序为U1→U2→···→U6,因此,在副原点信号ZP1产生之后经过时间Ts后产生副原点信号ZP2 的情况下,副原点信号ZPn也按照ZP1→ZP2→···→ZP6的顺序以时间Ts间隔产生。因此,光束切换控制部352与产生的副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)相应地,控制光束切换部件20的选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6),由此能够按照U1→U2→···→U6 的顺序使对应的光束LB1~LB6向扫描单元Un各自入射。也就是说,能够以基于各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM进行的光束LBn 的扫描(偏转)按多面镜PM的每隔一个面的反射面RP反复进行的方式,分时地切换向各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)入射的光束LBn。Therefore, as shown in Figure 34 , the generation timing of the sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6 generated by the scanning units U1 to U6 is staggered by a time interval of Ts. In the fourth embodiment, the order of the scanning units Un that scan the spot light SP is U1 → U2 → ... → U6. Therefore, when the sub-origin signal ZP2 is generated after a time interval of Ts following the generation of the sub-origin signal ZP1, the sub-origin signal ZPn is also generated at intervals of time Ts in the order of ZP1 → ZP2 → ... → ZP6. Therefore, the beam switching control unit 352 controls the selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) of the beam switching unit 20 in accordance with the generated sub-origin signals ZPn (ZP1 to ZP6), thereby allowing the corresponding light beams LB1 to LB6 to be incident on each of the scanning units Un in the order of U1 → U2 → ... → U6. That is, the scanning (deflection) of the light beam LBn performed by the polygonal mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1~U6) is repeated on every other reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM, thereby switching the light beam LBn incident on each scanning unit Un (U1~U6) in a time-sharing manner.
描绘数据输出控制部354将通过扫描单元Un使点光SP进行扫描的一条描绘线SLn的图案所对应的一列的量的串行数据DLn作为描绘位串数据Sdw向光源装置14’的驱动电路206a输出。由于进行点光SP的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序为U1→U2→···→U6,所以描绘数据输出控制部354输出一列的量的串行数据DLn按照 DL1→DL2→···→DL6的顺序反复的描绘位串数据Sdw。The drawing data output control unit 354 outputs one column of serial data DLn corresponding to the pattern of one drawing line SLn scanned by the spot light SP using the scanning unit Un as drawing bit string data Sdw to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14'. Since the order of the scanning units Un that scan the spot light SP is U1 → U2 → ... → U6, the drawing data output control unit 354 outputs one column of serial data DLn as the drawing bit string data Sdw repeatedly in the order of DL1 → DL2 → ... → DL6.
使用图35对描绘数据输出控制部354的结构进行详细说明。描绘数据输出控制部354具有与扫描单元U1~U6各自对应的六个生成电路360、362、364、366、368、370、和OR电路GT8。生成电路 360~370具有相同的结构,具体地说,生成电路360具备存储器部 BM1、计数器部CN1及闸部GT1,生成电路362具备存储器部BM2、计数器部CN2及闸部GT2。生成电路364具备存储器部BM3、计数器部CN3及闸部GT3,生成电路366具备存储器部BM4、计数器部 CN4及闸部GT4。生成电路368具备存储器部BM5、计数器部CN5 及闸部GT5,生成电路370具备存储器部BM6、计数器部CN6及闸部GT6。该生成电路360~370的结构也可以为与图16所示的生成电路301、303、305相同的结构。The structure of the drawing data output control unit 354 will be described in detail using FIG35 . The drawing data output control unit 354 includes six generation circuits 360, 362, 364, 366, 368, and 370, corresponding to scanning units U1 to U6, respectively, and an OR circuit GT8. Generation circuits 360 and 370 have the same structure. Specifically, generation circuit 360 includes a memory unit BM1, a counter unit CN1, and a gate unit GT1; generation circuit 362 includes a memory unit BM2, a counter unit CN2, and a gate unit GT2; generation circuit 364 includes a memory unit BM3, a counter unit CN3, and a gate unit GT3; generation circuit 366 includes a memory unit BM4, a counter unit CN4, and a gate unit GT4; generation circuit 368 includes a memory unit BM5, a counter unit CN5, and a gate unit GT5; and generation circuit 370 includes a memory unit BM6, a counter unit CN6, and a gate unit GT6. The configurations of the generating circuits 360 to 370 may be the same as those of the generating circuits 301 , 303 , and 305 shown in FIG. 16 .
存储器部BM1~BM6是存储与各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)要描绘曝光的图案相应的图案数据(位图)的存储器。计数器部CN1~CN6 是用于将存储于各存储器部BM1~BM6的图案数据中的、接着要描绘的一条描绘线SLn的量的串行数据DL1~DL6按每个像素地与时钟信号CLK同步而输出的计数器。该计数器部CN1~CN6如图34所示,在从光束切换控制部352的副原点生成电路CA1~CA6输出副原点信号ZP1~ZP6之后,输出一个串行数据DL1~DL6。The memory units BM1-BM6 store pattern data (bitmaps) corresponding to the patterns to be drawn and exposed by each scanning unit Un (U1-U6). The counter units CN1-CN6 are counters that output, for each pixel, serial data DL1-DL6 corresponding to the next drawing line SLn to be drawn, from the pattern data stored in the memory units BM1-BM6, in synchronization with the clock signal CLK. As shown in FIG34 , the counter units CN1-CN6 output a single serial data set DL1-DL6 after the sub-origin generation circuits CA1-CA6 of the beam switching control unit 352 output the sub-origin signals ZP1-ZP6.
存储于各存储器部BM1~BM6的图案数据通过未图示的地址计数器等,使输出的串行数据DL1~DL6沿列方向位移(shift)。也就是说,通过未图示的地址计数器读取的列以第1列、第2列、第3 列、···的方式位移。关于该位移,例如,若是与扫描单元U1对应的存储器部BM1,则在串行数据DL1输出结束后,接着进行扫描的扫描单元U2所对应的副原点信号ZP2产生的定时进行。同样地,存储于存储器部BM2的图案数据的串行数据DL2的位移在串行数据 DL2输出结束后,接着进行扫描的扫描单元U3所对应的副原点信号 ZP3产生的定时进行。同样地,存储于存储器部BM3~BM6的图案数据的串行数据DL3~DL6的位移在串行数据DL3~DL6输出结束后,接着进行扫描的扫描单元U4~U6、U1所对应的副原点信号 ZP4~ZP6、ZP1产生的定时进行。此外,点光SP的扫描按照 U1→U2→U3→···→U6的顺序进行。The pattern data stored in each memory unit BM1-BM6 is shifted in the column direction by an address counter (not shown), etc., causing the output serial data DL1-DL6 to be shifted. Specifically, the columns read by the address counter (not shown) are shifted in the order of column 1, column 2, column 3, and so on. For example, in the case of the memory unit BM1 corresponding to the scanning unit U1, this shift is performed at the timing of the generation of the sub-origin signal ZP2 corresponding to the scanning unit U2, which is then performing the next scan, after the output of the serial data DL1 is completed. Similarly, the pattern data serial data DL2 stored in the memory unit BM2 is shifted at the timing of the generation of the sub-origin signal ZP3 corresponding to the scanning unit U3, which is then performing the next scan, after the output of the serial data DL2 is completed. Similarly, the pattern data serial data DL3-DL6 stored in the memory units BM3-BM6 is shifted at the timing of the generation of the sub-origin signals ZP4-ZP6 and ZP1 corresponding to the scanning units U4-U6 and U1, which are then performing the next scan, after the output of the serial data DL3-DL6 is completed. In addition, the scanning of the spot light SP is performed in the order of U1→U2→U3→···→U6.
像这样,依次输出的串行数据DL1~DL6通过施加副原点信号 ZP1~ZP6之后在一定时间(On时间Ton)中打开的闸部GT1~GT6 而施加到六输入的OR电路GT8。OR电路GT8将按照串行数据 DL1→DL2→DL3→DL4→DL5→DL6→DL1···的顺序反复合成的串行数据DLn作为描绘位串数据Sdw向光源装置14’的驱动电路 206a输出。像这样,各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)能够与进行点光SP 的扫描同时地,描绘曝光出与图案数据相应的图案。In this manner, the serial data DL1-DL6 output sequentially are applied to a six-input OR circuit GT8 via gates GT1-GT6, which are opened for a predetermined time (On time Ton) after the sub-origin signals ZP1-ZP6 are applied. OR circuit GT8 repeatedly synthesizes serial data DLn in the order of serial data DL1 → DL2 → DL3 → DL4 → DL5 → DL6 → DL1, etc., and outputs this serial data DLn as drawing bit string data Sdw to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14'. In this manner, each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) can simultaneously draw and expose a pattern corresponding to the pattern data while scanning with the spot light SP.
在本第4实施方式中,按每个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)准备图案数据,从各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的图案数据中遵照进行点光SP 的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序输出串行数据DL1~DL6。但是,由于进行点光SP的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序是预先确定的,所以也可以准备将各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的图案数据的各串行数据 DL1~DL6组合而成的一个图案数据。也就是说,能够构筑使各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的图案数据的各列的串行数据DLn(DL1~DL6)与进行点光SP的扫描的扫描单元Un的顺序相应地排列而成的一个图案数据。该情况下,只要根据基于各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的原点传感器OPn的副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6),从第一列起按顺序输出一个图案数据的串行数据DLn即可。In this fourth embodiment, pattern data is prepared for each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6), and serial data DL1 to DL6 are output from the pattern data of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) in the order in which the scanning units Un scan the spot light SP. However, since the order in which the scanning units Un scan the spot light SP is predetermined, a single pattern data set can be prepared by combining the serial data DL1 to DL6 of the pattern data of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6). In other words, a single pattern data set can be constructed in which the serial data DLn (DL1 to DL6) of each column of pattern data of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) is arranged in accordance with the order in which the scanning units Un scan the spot light SP. In this case, it is sufficient to output the serial data DLn of the pattern data in order, starting from the first column, based on the sub-origin signal ZPn (ZP1 to ZP6) from the origin sensor OPn of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6).
另外,图33所示的曝光控制部356用于控制旋转控制部350、光束切换控制部352及描绘数据输出控制部354等。曝光控制部356 对对准显微镜AMm(AM1~AM4)拍摄得到的摄像信号ig(ig1~ig4) 进行解析,来检测对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4)在基板FS上的位置。然后,曝光控制部356基于检测到的对准标记MKm(MK1~MK4) 的位置,检测(确定)基板FS上的曝光区域W的描绘曝光的开始位置。曝光控制部356具备计数器电路356a,计数器电路356a对由图24所示的编码器EN1a~EN3a、EN1b~EN3b检测到的检测信号进行计数。曝光控制部356根据检测到描绘曝光的开始位置时的基于编码器EN1a、EN1b的计数值(标记检测位置)、和基于编码器EN2a、 EN2b的计数值(奇数号的描绘线SLn的位置),来判断基板FS的描绘曝光的开始位置是否位于描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5上。曝光控制部356若判断成描绘曝光的开始位置位于描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5上,则控制描绘数据输出控制部354,使扫描单元U1、U3、U5开始点光SP的扫描。此外,旋转控制部350及光束切换控制部352在曝光控制部356的控制下,基于旋绕脉冲信号及副原点信号ZPn (ZP1~ZP6),控制各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转及基于光束切换部件20进行的光束LBn的分配。In addition, the exposure control unit 356 shown in Figure 33 is used to control the rotation control unit 350, the beam switching control unit 352, the drawing data output control unit 354, etc. The exposure control unit 356 analyzes the imaging signal ig (ig1 to ig4) obtained by the alignment microscope AMm (AM1 to AM4) to detect the position of the alignment mark MKm (MK1 to MK4) on the substrate FS. Then, based on the position of the detected alignment mark MKm (MK1 to MK4), the exposure control unit 356 detects (determines) the starting position of the drawing exposure of the exposure area W on the substrate FS. The exposure control unit 356 has a counter circuit 356a, which counts the detection signals detected by the encoders EN1a to EN3a and EN1b to EN3b shown in Figure 24. The exposure control unit 356 determines whether the start position of the drawing exposure on the substrate FS is located on the drawing lines SL1, SL3, or SL5 based on the count values (mark detection position) of encoders EN1a and EN1b when the start position of the drawing exposure is detected, and the count values (position of odd-numbered drawing lines SLn) of encoders EN2a and EN2b. If the exposure control unit 356 determines that the start position of the drawing exposure is located on the drawing lines SL1, SL3, or SL5, it controls the drawing data output control unit 354 to cause the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 to begin scanning with the spot light SP. Furthermore, under the control of the exposure control unit 356, the rotation control unit 350 and the beam switching control unit 352 control the rotation of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) and the distribution of the light beam LBn by the beam switching unit 20 based on the rotation pulse signal and the sub-origin signal ZPn (ZP1-ZP6).
曝光控制部356根据检测到描绘曝光的开始位置时的基于编码器EN1a、EN1b的计数值(标记检测位置)、和基于编码器EN3a、 EN3b的计数值(偶数号的描绘线的位置),判断基板FS的描绘曝光的开始位置是否位于描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6上。曝光控制部356 若判断成描绘曝光的开始位置位于描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6上,则控制描绘数据输出控制部354,使扫描单元U2、U4、U6开始点光SP 的扫描。The exposure control unit 356 determines whether the start position of the drawing exposure of the substrate FS is located on the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 based on the count values (mark detection positions) of the encoders EN1a and EN1b when the start position of the drawing exposure is detected, and the count values (positions of even-numbered drawing lines) of the encoders EN3a and EN3b. If the exposure control unit 356 determines that the start position of the drawing exposure is located on the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6, it controls the drawing data output control unit 354 to cause the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 to start scanning with the spot light SP.
如先前的图25所示,根据基板FS的搬送方向(+X方向),先进行描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5各自的描绘曝光,在基板FS被搬送规定距离之后,进行描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6各自的描绘曝光。另一方面,由于六个扫描单元U1~U6的各多面镜PM相互保持一定角度相位地被进行旋转控制,所以副原点信号ZP1~ZP6如图34那样依次具有相位差时间Ts地持续产生。因此,从描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5的描绘曝光的开始时间点到描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6的描绘曝光的即将开始之前的期间,也通过副原点信号ZP2、ZP4、ZP6打开图35中的闸部GT2、GT4、GT6,反复进行选择用光学元件AOM2、AOM4、 AOM6在一定时间Ton为On状态这一动作。因此,在图33的结构中,也可以在光束切换控制部352内设置选择闸电路,该选择闸电路基于在曝光控制部356中判断的编码器EN1a、EN1b的计数值、或编码器EN2a、EN2b的计数值,选择是将生成的副原点信号 ZP1~ZP6各自向描绘数据输出控制部354发送还是禁止发送。一并地,也可以向扫描单元U1~U6各自所对应的选择用光学元件 AOM1~AOM6的各驱动器电路DRVn(DRV1~DRV6)(参照图38) 经由该选择闸电路赋予副原点信号ZP1~ZP6。As shown in FIG. 25 , the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are first exposed according to the conveying direction (+X direction) of the substrate FS. After the substrate FS is conveyed a predetermined distance, the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 are then exposed. On the other hand, since the polygonal mirrors PM of the six scanning units U1 to U6 are rotationally controlled to maintain a certain angular phase with each other, the sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6 are continuously generated in sequence with a phase difference of time Ts as shown in FIG. 34 . Therefore, from the start time of the drawing exposure of the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 to the time immediately before the start of the drawing exposure of the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6, the gates GT2, GT4, and GT6 in FIG. 35 are also opened by the sub-origin signals ZP2, ZP4, and ZP6, and the action of selecting the optical elements AOM2, AOM4, and AOM6 to be in the On state for a certain time Ton is repeatedly performed. Therefore, in the configuration of FIG. 33 , a selection gate circuit may be provided within the beam switching control unit 352. This selection gate circuit selects whether to transmit or prohibit transmission of each of the generated sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6 to the drawing data output control unit 354 based on the count values of encoders EN1a and EN1b or the count values of encoders EN2a and EN2b determined by the exposure control unit 356. Furthermore, the sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6 may be supplied to the driver circuits DRVn (DRV1 to DRV6) (see FIG. 38 ) of the selection optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 corresponding to the scanning units U1 to U6, respectively, via this selection gate circuit.
在此,如上所述,由于描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5与描绘线SL2、 SL4、SL6相比位于基板FS的搬送方向的上游侧,所以基板FS的曝光区域W的描绘曝光的开始位置先到达描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5上,然后在一定时间后,到达描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6上。因此,在描绘曝光的开始位置到达描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6之前,仅通过扫描单元 U1、U3、U5进行图案的描绘曝光。因此,在没有将先前说明那样的副原点信号ZP1~ZP6的选择闸电路设于光束切换控制部352内的情况下,曝光控制部356使向光源装置14’的驱动电路206a输出的描绘位串数据Sdw中的与串行数据DL2、DL4、DL6对应部分的像素数据全部成为低“(0)”,由此实质上取消基于扫描单元U2、U4、 U6进行的描绘曝光。取消期间中,从存储器部BM2、BM4、BM6 输出的串行数据DL2、DL4、DL6的列没有位移而保持第1列。然后,在曝光区域W的描绘曝光的开始位置到达描绘线SL2、SL4、 SL6上之后,开始输出串行数据DL2、DL4、DL6,进行串行数据 DL2、DL4、DL6向列方向的位移。As described above, since the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 are located upstream of the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 in the conveyance direction of the substrate FS, the start position of the drawing exposure of the exposure area W of the substrate FS first reaches the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5, and then reaches the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 after a certain period of time. Therefore, before the start position of the drawing exposure reaches the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6, the pattern drawing exposure is performed only by the scanning units U1, U3, and U5. Therefore, without the selection gate circuits for the sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6 described above being provided in the beam switching control unit 352, the exposure control unit 356 sets all pixel data corresponding to the serial data DL2, DL4, and DL6 in the drawing bit string data Sdw output to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14' to low "(0)", thereby effectively canceling the drawing exposure performed by the scanning units U2, U4, and U6. During the cancel period, the columns of serial data DL2, DL4, and DL6 output from the memory units BM2, BM4, and BM6 remain unchanged and remain at column 1. Then, after the start position of the drawing exposure in the exposure area W reaches the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6, the output of the serial data DL2, DL4, and DL6 begins, and the serial data DL2, DL4, and DL6 are shifted in the column direction.
另外,同样地,曝光区域W的描绘曝光的结束位置先到达描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5上,然后在一定时间后,到达描绘线SL2、SL4、 SL6上。因此,在描绘曝光的结束位置到达描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5 后、到达描绘线SL2、SL4、SL6之前,仅通过扫描单元U2、U4、 U6进行图案的描绘曝光。因此,在没有将先前说明那样的副原点信号ZP1~ZP6的选择闸电路设于光束切换控制部352内的情况下,曝光控制部356使向光源装置14’的驱动电路206a输出的描绘位串数据Sdw中的与串行数据DL1、DL3、DL5对应部分的像素数据全部成为低“(0)”,由此,实质上取消基于扫描单元U1、U3、U5进行的描绘曝光。此外,在没有设置选择闸电路的情况下,即使在描绘曝光的取消中,也以向取消了描绘曝光的扫描单元U1、U3、U5导入光束LB1、LB3、LB5的方式,选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM3、 AOM5反复进行响应于副原点信号ZP1、ZP3、ZP5而选择性地成为一定时间Ton的On状态这一动作。Similarly, the end position of the drawing exposure in the exposure area W first reaches the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5, and then reaches the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6 after a certain period of time. Therefore, after the end position of the drawing exposure reaches the drawing lines SL1, SL3, and SL5 and before reaching the drawing lines SL2, SL4, and SL6, the drawing exposure of the pattern is performed only by the scanning units U2, U4, and U6. Therefore, when the selection gate circuits for the sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP6 described above are not provided in the beam switching control unit 352, the exposure control unit 356 sets all the pixel data corresponding to the serial data DL1, DL3, and DL5 in the drawing bit string data Sdw output to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14' to low "(0)", thereby substantially canceling the drawing exposure by the scanning units U1, U3, and U5. In addition, when a selection gate circuit is not provided, even when the drawing exposure is canceled, the optical elements AOM1, AOM3, AOM5 are selected to repeatedly perform the action of selectively becoming the On state for a certain period of time Ton in response to the sub-origin signals ZP1, ZP3, ZP5 in such a manner that the light beams LB1, LB3, LB5 are introduced into the scanning units U1, U3, U5 in which the drawing exposure is canceled.
如以上那样在本第4实施方式中,按扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的每隔一个面的反射面RP,以反复进行多面镜PM的偏转(扫描)的方式由光束切换控制部352控制光束切换部件20,使多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)各自按顺序进行点光SP的一维扫描。由此,能够不缩短点光SP扫描的描绘线SLn(SL1~SL6)的长度地将一个光束LB分配给多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6),能够有效利用光束LB。另外,由于能够使多面镜PM的形状(多边形形状)近似圆形,所以能够防止多面镜PM的旋转速度降低,能够使多面镜PM 高速旋转。As described above, in this fourth embodiment, the beam switching control unit 352 controls the beam switching component 20 to repeatedly deflect (scan) the polygonal mirror PM at every other reflective surface RP of the scanning unit Un (U1-U6), causing each of the multiple scanning units Un (U1-U6) to sequentially perform one-dimensional scanning of the point light SP. This allows a single light beam LB to be distributed to multiple scanning units Un (U1-U6) without shortening the length of the traced line SLn (SL1-SL6) scanned by the point light SP, effectively utilizing the light beam LB. Furthermore, since the polygonal shape (polygonal shape) of the polygonal mirror PM can be made approximately circular, the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror PM can be prevented from decreasing, allowing the polygonal mirror PM to rotate at high speed.
光束切换部件20具有选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6),其沿着来自光源装置14’的光束LB的行进方向直列地配置有n个,选择使光束LB衍射而偏转的n个光束LBn中的某一个,并向对应的扫描单元Un导入。因此,能够简单地选择光束LBn要入射的扫描单元Un(U1~U6)中的某一个,能够使来自光源装置14’的光束 LB相对于要进行描绘曝光的一个扫描单元Un高效地集中,得到高的曝光量。例如,在使用多个分束器将来自光源装置14’的射出的光束LB进行振幅分割而成为六个光束,并将分割得到的六个光束LBn (LB1~LB6)各自经由根据描绘数据的串行数据DL1~DL6进行调制的描绘用的声光调制元件向六个扫描单元U1~U6导入了的情况下,若将描绘用的声光调制元件中的光束强度的衰减设为20%,将扫描单元Un内的光束强度的衰减设为30%,则一个扫描单元Un中点光 SP的强度在原来的光束LB的强度为100%时,成为大约9.3%。另一方面,如本第4实施方式那样,在使来自光源装置14’的光束LB 通过选择用光学元件AOMn偏转而向六个扫描单元Un中的某一个入射的情况下,在将选择用光学元件AOMn中的光束强度的衰减设为20%时,一个扫描单元Un中的点光SP的强度成为原来的光束 LB的强度的大约56%。The beam switching unit 20 includes n selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) arranged in series along the direction of travel of the light beam LB from the light source device 14'. These select one of the n light beams LBn diffracted and deflected, and direct it to the corresponding scanning unit Un. This allows for easy selection of the scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) on which the light beam LBn is to be incident, enabling efficient concentration of the light beam LB from the light source device 14' on the scanning unit Un to perform drawing exposure, resulting in a high exposure value. For example, when the light beam LB emitted from the light source device 14' is amplitude-split into six light beams using multiple beam splitters, and each of the six split light beams LBn (LB1 to LB6) is introduced into the six scanning units U1 to U6 via a drawing acousto-optic modulator element modulated according to the drawing data serial data DL1 to DL6, if the attenuation of the beam intensity in the drawing acousto-optic modulator element is set to 20% and the attenuation of the beam intensity in the scanning unit Un is set to 30%, the intensity of the spot light SP in one scanning unit Un is approximately 9.3% of the original intensity of the light beam LB, when the intensity of the original light beam LB is 100%. On the other hand, when the light beam LB from the light source device 14' is deflected by the selection optical element AOMn and incident on one of the six scanning units Un, when the attenuation of the beam intensity in the selection optical element AOMn is set to 20%, the intensity of the spot light SP in one scanning unit Un is approximately 56% of the original intensity of the light beam LB.
旋转控制部350以使旋转速度彼此相同且旋转角度位置的相位每次错开一定角度量的方式,控制多个扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转。由此,在基于一个扫描单元Un进行的点光SP的一维扫描起到进行下一次的一维扫描的期间,能够按顺序进行基于其他多个扫描单元Un进行的点光SP的一维扫描。The rotation control unit 350 controls the rotation of the polygon mirrors PM of the plurality of scanning units Un (U1-U6) so that the rotation speeds are the same and the phases of the rotational angle positions are shifted by a certain angle each time. Thus, between one-dimensional scanning of the spot light SP by one scanning unit Un and the next one-dimensional scanning, one-dimensional scanning of the spot light SP by the other plurality of scanning units Un can be performed sequentially.
此外,在上述第4实施方式中,说明了将一个光束LB分配给六个扫描单元Un的方式,但也可以将来自光源装置14’的一个光束LB 分配给九个扫描单元Un(U1~U9)。该情况下,若将多面镜PM的扫描效率(α/β)设为1/3,则在多面镜PM旋转三个反射面RP的量的期间,能够将光束LBn分配给九个扫描单元U1~U9,因此点光 SP的扫描按每隔两个面的反射面RP进行。由此,在基于一个扫描单元Un进行的点光SP的扫描起到进行下一次的点光SP的扫描之前,能够使其他八个扫描单元Un按顺序进行点光SP的扫描。另外,若将多面镜PM的扫描效率设为1/3,则多面镜PM能够旋转三个反射面RP的量来将一个光束LB分配给九个扫描单元Un,因此,副原点生成电路CAn的分频器330将原点信号SZn的产生定时的频率分频成1/3。该情况下,扫描单元U1、U4、U7的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的(在时间轴上为同相位)。同样地,扫描单元U2、U5、U8的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的,扫描单元U3、U6、U9的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的。而且,扫描单元U2、U5、U8的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U4、U7的旋绕脉冲信号延迟时间Ts而产生,扫描单元 U3、U6、U9的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U4、U7的旋绕脉冲信号延迟2×时间Ts而产生。另外,扫描单元U1、U4、U7的副原点信号ZP1、ZP4、ZP7的产生定时的相位每次错开一周期的1/3,同样地,扫描单元U2、U5、U8的副原点信号ZP2、ZP5、ZP8的产生定时的相位、及扫描单元U3、U6、U9的副原点信号ZP3、ZP6、 ZP9的产生定时的相位也每次错开一周期的1/3。此外,时间Ts是多面镜PM以能够实现点光SP的扫描的多面镜PM的扫描旋转角度范围α’旋转的时间,对多面镜PM旋转一个反射面RP的量的角度β乘以扫描效率而得到的值成为扫描旋转角度范围α’。In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, a method of distributing one light beam LB to six scanning units Un was described, but one light beam LB from the light source device 14' may also be distributed to nine scanning units Un (U1 to U9). In this case, if the scanning efficiency (α/β) of the polygonal mirror PM is set to 1/3, the light beam LBn can be distributed to the nine scanning units U1 to U9 while the polygonal mirror PM rotates by the amount of three reflecting surfaces RP, so that the point light SP is scanned on every two reflecting surfaces RP. Thus, from the time when the point light SP is scanned by one scanning unit Un to the time when the next point light SP is scanned, the other eight scanning units Un can scan the point light SP in sequence. In addition, if the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM is set to 1/3, the polygonal mirror PM can rotate by the amount of three reflecting surfaces RP to distribute one light beam LB to the nine scanning units Un. Therefore, the frequency divider 330 of the sub-origin generating circuit CAn divides the frequency of the generation timing of the origin signal SZn into 1/3. In this case, the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U1, U4, and U7 are synchronized (in phase on the time axis). Similarly, the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U2, U5, and U8 are synchronized, and the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U3, U6, and U9 are synchronized. Furthermore, the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U2, U5, and U8 are generated with a delay of time Ts relative to the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U1, U4, and U7, while the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U3, U6, and U9 are generated with a delay of 2×Ts relative to the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U1, U4, and U7. Furthermore, the phases of the secondary origin signals ZP1, ZP4, and ZP7 generated by the scanning units U1, U4, and U7 are shifted by one-third of a cycle. Similarly, the phases of the secondary origin signals ZP2, ZP5, and ZP8 generated by the scanning units U2, U5, and U8, and the phases of the secondary origin signals ZP3, ZP6, and ZP9 generated by the scanning units U3, U6, and U9 are also shifted by one-third of a cycle. Furthermore, the time Ts is the time for the polygon mirror PM to rotate within the scanning rotation angle range α' that enables scanning of the spot light SP. The value obtained by multiplying the angle β, which is the rotation of the polygon mirror PM by one reflecting surface RP, by the scanning efficiency is the scanning rotation angle range α'.
在将多面镜PM的扫描效率设为1/3、将一个光束LB分配给12 个扫描单元Un(U1~U12)的情况下,能够在多面镜PM旋转四个反射面RP的量的期间将光束LBn分配给12个扫描单元U1~U12,因此,点光SP的扫描按每隔三个面的反射面RP进行。另外,若将多面镜PM的扫描效率设为1/3,则多面镜PM能够旋转四个反射面RP 的量来使光束LBn(LB1~LB12,来自光源装置14’的光束LB通过直列地配置的12个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM12)择一地偏转而得到的光束)向对应的一个扫描单元Un(U1~U12)入射,因此,副原点生成电路CAn的分频器330将原点信号SZn的产生定时的频率分频成1/4。该情况下,扫描单元U1、U4、U7、U10的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的(在时间轴上为同相位)。同样地,扫描单元 U2、U5、U8、U11的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的,扫描单元U3、U6、 U9、U12的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的。而且,扫描单元U2、U5、U8、 U11的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U4、U7、U10的旋绕脉冲信号延迟时间Ts而产生,扫描单元U3、U6、U9、U12的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U4、U7、U10的旋绕脉冲信号延迟2×时间Ts而产生。另外,扫描单元U1、U4、U7、U10的副原点信号ZP1、 ZP4、ZP7、ZP10的产生定时的相位逐一错开1/4周期,同样地,扫描单元U2、U5、U8、U11的副原点信号ZP2、ZP5、ZP7、ZP11的产生定时的相位及扫描单元U3、U6、U9、U12的副原点信号ZP3、 ZP6、ZP9、ZP12的产生定时的相位也逐一错开1/4周期。When the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is set to 1/3 and one light beam LB is distributed to the 12 scanning units Un (U1 to U12), the light beam LBn can be distributed to the 12 scanning units U1 to U12 while the polygon mirror PM rotates by the amount of four reflection surfaces RP. Therefore, the scanning of the point light SP is performed on every third reflection surface RP. In addition, if the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is set to 1/3, the polygon mirror PM can rotate by the amount of four reflection surfaces RP to cause the light beam LBn (LB1 to LB12, which is a light beam obtained by selectively deflecting the light beam LB from the light source device 14' through 12 selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM12) arranged in series) to be incident on a corresponding scanning unit Un (U1 to U12). Therefore, the frequency divider 330 of the sub-origin generating circuit CAn divides the frequency of the generation timing of the origin signal SZn into 1/4. In this case, the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U1, U4, U7, and U10 are synchronized (in phase on the time axis). Similarly, the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U2, U5, U8, and U11 are synchronized, and the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U3, U6, U9, and U12 are synchronized. Furthermore, the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U2, U5, U8, and U11 are generated with a delay of time Ts relative to the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U1, U4, U7, and U10, while the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U3, U6, U9, and U12 are generated with a delay of 2×Ts relative to the convolution pulse signals of scanning units U1, U4, U7, and U10. In addition, the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP1, ZP4, ZP7, and ZP10 of the scanning units U1, U4, U7, and U10 are shifted by 1/4 cycle one by one. Similarly, the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP2, ZP5, ZP7, and ZP11 of the scanning units U2, U5, U8, and U11 and the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP3, ZP6, ZP9, and ZP12 of the scanning units U3, U6, U9, and U12 are also shifted by 1/4 cycle one by one.
另外,在上述第4实施方式中,以扫描单元Un的多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/3进行了说明,但扫描效率也可以是1/2,还可以是1/4。在扫描效率为1/2的情况下,在多面镜PM旋转一个反射面RP的量的期间,能够将光束LBn分配给两个扫描单元Un,因此,在要将一个光束LBn分配给六个扫描单元Un的情况下,点光SP的扫描按多面镜PM的每隔两个面的反射面RP进行。也就是说,在多面镜PM 的扫描效率为1/2的情况下,在多面镜PM旋转三个反射面RP的量的期间,能够将光束LBn分配给六个扫描单元Un。由此,在基于一个扫描单元Un进行的点光SP的扫描起到进行下一次的点光SP的扫描之前,能够使其他五个扫描单元Un按顺序进行点光SP的扫描。另外,若将多面镜PM的扫描效率设为1/2,则多面镜PM能够旋转三个反射面RP的量来将一个光束LB分配给六个扫描单元Un,因此,副原点生成电路CAn的分频器330将原点信号SZn的产生定时的频率分频成1/3。该情况下,扫描单元U1、U3、U5的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的。同样地,扫描单元U2、U4、U6的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的。而且,扫描单元U2、U4、U6的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U3、U5的旋绕脉冲信号延迟时间Ts而产生。另外,扫描单元U1、U3、U5的副原点信号ZP1、ZP3、ZP5的产生定时的相位逐一错开1/3周期,扫描单元U2、U4、U6的副原点信号ZP2、ZP4、 ZP6的产生定时的相位也逐一错开1/3周期。In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM of the scanning unit Un is described as 1/3, but the scanning efficiency may be 1/2 or 1/4. When the scanning efficiency is 1/2, the light beam LBn can be distributed to two scanning units Un while the polygonal mirror PM rotates by the amount of one reflecting surface RP. Therefore, when one light beam LBn is to be distributed to six scanning units Un, the scanning of the point light SP is performed on every two reflecting surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM. That is, when the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM is 1/2, the light beam LBn can be distributed to six scanning units Un while the polygonal mirror PM rotates by the amount of three reflecting surfaces RP. Thus, from the time when the point light SP is scanned by one scanning unit Un to the time when the next scanning of the point light SP is performed, the other five scanning units Un can scan the point light SP in sequence. Furthermore, if the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is set to 1/2, the polygon mirror PM can rotate by the amount of three reflecting surfaces RP to distribute one light beam LB to the six scanning units Un. Therefore, the frequency divider 330 of the sub-origin generating circuit CAn divides the frequency of the generation timing of the origin signal SZn into 1/3. In this case, the rotation pulse signals of the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are synchronized. Similarly, the rotation pulse signals of the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are synchronized. Moreover, the rotation pulse signals of the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are generated with a delay time Ts relative to the rotation pulse signals of the scanning units U1, U3, and U5. In addition, the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP1, ZP3, and ZP5 of the scanning units U1, U3, and U5 are shifted by 1/3 of a cycle, and the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP2, ZP4, and ZP6 of the scanning units U2, U4, and U6 are also shifted by 1/3 of a cycle.
在多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/4的情况下,在多面镜PM旋转一个反射面RP的量的期间,能够将光束LBn分配给四个扫描单元Un,因此,在要将一个光束LB分配给八个扫描单元Un的情况下,点光 SP的扫描按多面镜PM的每隔一个面的反射面RP进行。也就是说,在多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/4的情况下,在多面镜PM旋转两个反射面RP的量的期间,能够将光束LBn分配给八个扫描单元Un。由此,在基于一个扫描单元Un进行的点光SP的扫描起到进行下一次点光SP的扫描之前,能够使其他七个扫描单元Un按顺序进行点光 SP的扫描。另外,若将多面镜PM的扫描效率设为1/4,则多面镜 PM旋转两个反射面RP的量,能够将一个光束LB分配给八个扫描单元Un,因此,副原点生成电路CAn的分频器330将原点信号SZn 的产生定时的频率分频成1/2。该情况下,扫描单元U1、U5的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的,扫描单元U2、U6的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的。同样地,扫描单元U3、U7的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的,扫描单元U4、U8的旋绕脉冲信号是同步的。而且,扫描单元U2、U6的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U5的旋绕脉冲信号仅延迟时间Ts而产生。扫描单元U3、U7的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U5的旋绕脉冲信号延迟2×时间Ts而产生,扫描单元U4、U8的旋绕脉冲信号相对于扫描单元U1、U5的旋绕脉冲信号延迟3×时间Ts而产生。另外,扫描单元U1、U5的副原点信号ZP1、ZP5的产生定时的相位逐一错开1/2周期,扫描单元U2、U6的副原点信号ZP2、ZP6的产生定时的相位也逐一错开1/2周期。同样地,扫描单元U3、U7的副原点信号ZP3、ZP7的产生定时的相位及扫描单元U4、U8的副原点信号 ZP4、ZP8的产生定时的相位也分别逐一错开1/2周期。When the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is 1/4, the light beam LBn can be distributed to four scanning units Un while the polygon mirror PM rotates by the amount of one reflecting surface RP. Therefore, when one light beam LB is to be distributed to eight scanning units Un, the scanning of the point light SP is performed on every other reflecting surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. That is, when the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is 1/4, the light beam LBn can be distributed to eight scanning units Un while the polygon mirror PM rotates by the amount of two reflecting surfaces RP. Thus, from the time when the point light SP is scanned by one scanning unit Un to the time when the next point light SP is scanned, the other seven scanning units Un can scan the point light SP in sequence. In addition, if the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is set to 1/4, the light beam LB can be distributed to eight scanning units Un while the polygon mirror PM rotates by the amount of two reflecting surfaces RP. Therefore, the frequency divider 330 of the sub-origin generating circuit CAn divides the frequency of the generation timing of the origin signal SZn into 1/2. In this case, the rotation pulse signals of scanning units U1 and U5 are synchronized, as are the rotation pulse signals of scanning units U2 and U6. Similarly, the rotation pulse signals of scanning units U3 and U7 are synchronized, and the rotation pulse signals of scanning units U4 and U8 are synchronized. Furthermore, the rotation pulse signals of scanning units U2 and U6 are generated with a delay of only time Ts relative to those of scanning units U1 and U5. The rotation pulse signals of scanning units U3 and U7 are generated with a delay of 2 times time Ts relative to those of scanning units U1 and U5, and the rotation pulse signals of scanning units U4 and U8 are generated with a delay of 3 times time Ts relative to those of scanning units U1 and U5. Furthermore, the phases of the generation timings of the auxiliary origin signals ZP1 and ZP5 of scanning units U1 and U5 are shifted by 1/2 cycle, and the phases of the generation timings of the auxiliary origin signals ZP2 and ZP6 of scanning units U2 and U6 are also shifted by 1/2 cycle. Similarly, the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP3 and ZP7 of the scanning units U3 and U7 and the phases of the generation timings of the sub-origin signals ZP4 and ZP8 of the scanning units U4 and U8 are also shifted by 1/2 cycle.
另外,在上述第4实施方式中,将多面镜PM的形状设为八边形 (反射面RP为八个),但也可以是六边形、七边形,还可以是九边形以上。由此,多面镜PM的扫描效率也会变化。通常,多边形形状的多面镜PM的反射面数Np越多,则多面镜PM的一个反射面 RP中的扫描效率越大,反射面数Np越小,则多面镜PM的扫描效率越小。Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the polygonal mirror PM is octagonal (having eight reflecting surfaces RP). However, it may also be a hexagon, a heptagon, or even a pentagon or larger. This will affect the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM. Generally, the greater the number of reflecting surfaces Np of the polygonal mirror PM, the greater the scanning efficiency of each reflecting surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM. The smaller the number of reflecting surfaces Np, the lower the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM.
能够将点光SP投射到基板FS上而进行扫描的多面镜PM的最大扫描旋转角度范围α由fθ透镜FT的入射角(与图29中的扫描角度范围θs相当)确定,因此,能够与该入射角对应地来选择最佳的反射面数Np的多面镜PM。在如先前的例子那样为入射角(θs)不足30度的fθ透镜FT的情况下,也可以为反射面RP以其一半即15 度的旋转而改变的24面的多面镜PM,或反射面RP以30度的旋转而改变的12面的多面镜PM。该情况下,在24面的多面镜PM中扫描效率(α/β)为大于1/2且小于1.0的状态,因此控制成六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的24面的多面镜PM跳过五面地进行点光SP的扫描。另外,在12面的多面镜PM中,扫描效率为大于1/3且不足1/2 的状态,因此控制成六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的12面的多面镜PM 跳过两面地进行点光SP的扫描。The maximum scanning rotation angle range α of the polygonal mirror PM that can project the point light SP onto the substrate FS for scanning is determined by the incident angle of the fθ lens FT (equivalent to the scanning angle range θs in FIG29 ). Therefore, the polygonal mirror PM with the optimal number of reflection surfaces Np can be selected corresponding to the incident angle. In the case of the fθ lens FT with an incident angle (θs) less than 30 degrees as in the previous example, it is also possible to use a 24-faceted polygonal mirror PM in which the reflection surface RP is changed by rotating half of it, that is, 15 degrees, or a 12-faceted polygonal mirror PM in which the reflection surface RP is changed by rotating 30 degrees. In this case, the scanning efficiency (α/β) in the 24-faceted polygonal mirror PM is greater than 1/2 and less than 1.0, so the 24-faceted polygonal mirror PM of each of the six scanning units U1 to U6 is controlled to skip five surfaces to scan the point light SP. In addition, since the scanning efficiency of the 12-face polygon mirror PM is greater than 1/3 and less than 1/2, the 12-face polygon mirror PM of each of the six scanning units U1 to U6 is controlled so as to scan the spot light SP while skipping two surfaces.
[第5实施方式][Fifth embodiment]
在上述第4实施方式中,点光SP的扫描(偏转)始终每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP而反复进行。但是,在第5实施方式中,点光SP的扫描(偏转)能够任意切换成按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP而反复进行的第1状态或者每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面 RP而反复进行的第2状态。也就是说,在扫描单元U1开始点光SP 的扫描起到开始下一次扫描之前,能够进行切换以将光束LB分时地分配给三个扫描单元Un,或者分时地分配给六个扫描单元Un。In the fourth embodiment described above, the scanning (deflection) of the point light SP is always repeated for each reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. However, in the fifth embodiment, the scanning (deflection) of the point light SP can be arbitrarily switched to a first state in which the scanning is repeated for each successive reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, or a second state in which the scanning is repeated for each reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. In other words, between the time when the scanning unit U1 starts scanning the point light SP and the time before the next scan begins, the light beam LB can be switched to be distributed to the three scanning units Un in a time-sharing manner, or to the six scanning units Un in a time-sharing manner.
由于多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/3,所以在使点光SP的扫描按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP反复进行的情况下,例如在扫描单元U1使点光SP进行扫描起到进行下一次扫描的期间,仅能够将光束LB分配给扫描单元U1以外的两个扫描单元Un。因此,准备两个光束LB,将第一个光束LB分时地分配给三个扫描单元Un,将第二个光束LB分时地分配给其余三个扫描单元Un。因此,通过两个扫描单元Un并行地进行点光SP的扫描。可以通过设置两个光源装置14’来生成两个光束LB,也可以通过将来自一个光源装置14’的光束LB由分束器等分割来生成两个光束LB。在图36~图40所示的本第5实施方式的曝光装置EX中,具备两个光源装置14’(14A’、 14B’)(参照图38)。此外,在第5实施方式中,对与上述第4实施方式相同的结构标注相同的附图标记,仅对不同部分进行说明。Since the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is 1/3, when the scanning of the point light SP is repeated on each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, for example, during the period from when the scanning unit U1 scans the point light SP to when the next scan is performed, the light beam LB can only be distributed to two scanning units Un other than the scanning unit U1. Therefore, two light beams LB are prepared, and the first light beam LB is distributed to the three scanning units Un in a time-sharing manner, and the second light beam LB is distributed to the remaining three scanning units Un in a time-sharing manner. Therefore, the scanning of the point light SP is performed in parallel by the two scanning units Un. The two light beams LB can be generated by providing two light source devices 14', or by dividing the light beam LB from one light source device 14' by a beam splitter or the like. In the exposure device EX of the fifth embodiment shown in Figures 36 to 40, two light source devices 14' (14A', 14B') are provided (refer to Figure 38). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the same figure marks are given to the same structures as the fourth embodiment, and only the different parts are described.
图36是本第5实施方式的光束切换部件(光束配送单元)20A 的结构图。光束切换部件20A与图26的光束切换部件20同样地具有多个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)、多个聚光透镜 CD1~CD6、多个反射镜M1~M12、多个镜IM1~IM6及多个准直透镜 CL1~CL6,除此以外,还具有反射镜M13、M14和吸收体TR1、TR2。此外,吸收体TR1相当于在上述第4实施方式中示出的图26的吸收体TR,吸收由反射镜M12反射的光束LB。FIG36 is a structural diagram of a beam switching component (beam delivery unit) 20A according to the fifth embodiment. Similar to the beam switching component 20 in FIG26 , the beam switching component 20A includes multiple selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6), multiple focusing lenses CD1 to CD6, multiple reflectors M1 to M12, multiple mirrors IM1 to IM6, and multiple collimating lenses CL1 to CL6. Furthermore, it includes reflectors M13 and M14 and absorbers TR1 and TR2. The absorber TR1 corresponds to the absorber TR in FIG26 shown in the fourth embodiment, and absorbs the light beam LB reflected by the reflector M12.
选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3构成光学元件模块(第1光学元件模块)OM1,选择用光学元件AOM4~AOM6构成光学元件模块(第 2光学元件模块)OM2。该第1光学元件模块OM1的选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3如在上述第4实施方式中说明那样,处于沿着光束 LB的行进方向直列地排列的状态。同样地,第2光学元件模块OM2 的选择用光学元件AOM4~AOM6也处于沿着光束LB的行进方向直列地配置的状态。此外,将与第1光学元件模块OM1的选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3对应的扫描单元U1~U3设为第1扫描模块。另外,将与第2光学元件模块OM2的选择用光学元件AOM4~AOM6 对应的扫描单元U4~U6设为第2扫描模块。该第1扫描模块的扫描单元U1~U3及第2扫描模块的扫描单元U4~U6如上述第4实施方式中说明那样以规定的配置关系配置。The selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM3 constitute an optical element module (first optical element module) OM1, and the selective optical elements AOM4 to AOM6 constitute an optical element module (second optical element module) OM2. As described in the fourth embodiment above, the selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM3 of the first optical element module OM1 are arranged in a row along the direction of travel of the light beam LB. Similarly, the selective optical elements AOM4 to AOM6 of the second optical element module OM2 are also arranged in a row along the direction of travel of the light beam LB. In addition, the scanning units U1 to U3 corresponding to the selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM3 of the first optical element module OM1 are set as the first scanning module. In addition, the scanning units U4 to U6 corresponding to the selective optical elements AOM4 to AOM6 of the second optical element module OM2 are set as the second scanning module. The scanning units U1 to U3 of the first scanning module and the scanning units U4 to U6 of the second scanning module are arranged in a predetermined arrangement relationship as described in the fourth embodiment above.
在第5实施方式中,反射镜M6、M13、M14构成能够在第1配置状态与第2配置状态之间切换的配置切换部件(可动部件)SWE,在第1配置状态中,在光束LB的行进方向上将第1光学元件模块 OM1与第2光学元件模块OM2并列地配置,在第2配置状态中,在光束LB的行进方向上将第1光学元件模块OM1与第2光学元件模块OM2直列地配置。该配置切换部件SWE具有支承反射镜M6、 M13、M14的滑动部件SE,滑动部件SE能够相对于支承部件IUB 向X方向移动。该滑动部件SE(配置切换部件SWE)向X方向的移动由致动器AC(参照图38)进行。该致动器AC通过光束切换控制部352的驱动控制部352a(参照图38)的控制而驱动。In the fifth embodiment, the reflectors M6, M13, and M14 constitute a configuration switching member (movable member) SWE that can be switched between a first configuration state and a second configuration state. In the first configuration state, the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 are arranged in parallel in the direction of travel of the light beam LB. In the second configuration state, the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 are arranged in series in the direction of travel of the light beam LB. The configuration switching member SWE includes a sliding member SE that supports the reflectors M6, M13, and M14. The sliding member SE is movable in the X direction relative to the supporting member IUB. The movement of the sliding member SE (configuration switching member SWE) in the X direction is performed by an actuator AC (see FIG. 38 ). The actuator AC is driven by the drive control unit 352a (see FIG. 38 ) of the beam switching control unit 352.
在第1配置状态时,成为来自两个光源装置14’(14A’、14B’) 的光束LB并行地向第1光学元件模块OM1和第2光学元件模块 OM2各自入射的状态,在第2配置状态时,成为来自一个光源装置 14’(14A’)的光束LB向第1光学元件模块OM1和第2光学元件模块OM2入射的状态。也就是说,在第2配置状态时,从第1光学元件模块OM1透射过的光束LB向第2光学元件模块OM2入射。图 36示出通过配置切换部件SWE而成为第1光学元件模块OM1与第 2光学元件模块OM2直列地配置的第2配置状态时的状态。也就是说,在该第2配置状态时,成为第1光学元件模块OM1及第2光学元件模块OM2的全部选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6沿着光束LB 的行进方向直列地配置的状态,与在上述第4实施方式中示出的图 26相同。因此,与上述第4实施方式同样地,能够通过直列地配置的第1光学元件模块OM1及第2光学元件模块OM2的各选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)从第1扫描模块及第2扫描模块 (U1~U6)中选择一个供某一个偏转的光束LBn入射的扫描单元Un。此外,将图36时的配置切换部件SWE的位置称为第2位置。另外,在第1配置状态时,将向第1光学元件模块OM1(AOM1~AOM3) 入射的光束LB称为来自第1光源装置14A’的光束LBa,在第1配置状态时,将向第2光学元件模块OM2(AOM4~AOM6)入射的光束称为来自第2光源装置14B’的光束LBb。In the first configuration state, the light beams LB from the two light source devices 14' (14A', 14B') are incident on the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 in parallel. In the second configuration state, the light beam LB from the single light source device 14' (14A') is incident on both the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2. In other words, in the second configuration state, the light beam LB transmitted through the first optical element module OM1 is incident on the second optical element module OM2. Figure 36 shows the second configuration state, in which the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 are arranged in series by configuring the switching element SWE. In other words, in this second configuration state, all the selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 of the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 are arranged in series along the direction of travel of the light beam LB, similar to Figure 26 shown in the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above, a scanning unit Un on which a deflected light beam LBn is incident can be selected from the first scanning module and the second scanning module (U1 to U6) by each selection optical element AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) of the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 arranged in series. In addition, the position of the configuration switching component SWE in Figure 36 is referred to as the second position. In addition, in the first configuration state, the light beam LB incident on the first optical element module OM1 (AOM1 to AOM3) is referred to as the light beam LBa from the first light source device 14A', and in the first configuration state, the light beam incident on the second optical element module OM2 (AOM4 to AOM6) is referred to as the light beam LBb from the second light source device 14B'.
当配置切换部件SWE向-X方向侧移动而来到第1位置时,第1 光学元件模块OM1与第2光学元件模块OM2成为并列地配置的第 1配置状态。图37是表示配置切换部件SWE的位置为第1位置时的光束LBa、LBb的光路的图。在第1配置状态时,光束LBa向第1 光学元件模块OM1入射,光束LBb向第2光学元件模块OM2入射。为了区分向第1光学元件模块OM1及第2光学元件模块OM2各自入射的光束LB,将向第1光学元件模块OM1入射的光束LB用LBa 表示,将向第2光学元件模块OM2直接入射的光束LB用LBb表示。When the configuration switching member SWE moves toward the -X direction and reaches the first position, the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 enter a first configuration state in which they are arranged side by side. Figure 37 shows the optical paths of the light beams LBa and LBb when the configuration switching member SWE is in the first position. In the first configuration state, the light beam LBa is incident on the first optical element module OM1, and the light beam LBb is incident on the second optical element module OM2. To distinguish between the light beams LB incident on the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2, the light beam LB incident on the first optical element module OM1 is represented by LBa, and the light beam LB directly incident on the second optical element module OM2 is represented by LBb.
如图37所示,当配置切换部件SWE移动到第1位置时,反射镜M6的位置向-X方向位移,因此由反射镜M6反射的光束LBa不向反射镜M7入射而向吸收体TR2入射。因此,向第1光学元件模块OM1入射的来自第1光源装置14A’的光束LBa仅向第1光学元件模块OM1(选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3)入射,而不会向第2 光学元件模块OM2入射。也就是说,光束LBa能够仅从选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3透射。另外,当配置切换部件SWE的位置成为第1位置时,从第2光源装置14B’射出并朝向反射镜M13沿+Y方向行进的光束LBb由反射镜M13、M14向反射镜M7引导。因此,光束LBb能够仅从第2光学元件模块OM2(选择用光学元件 AOM4~AOM6)透射。As shown in Figure 37, when the configuration switching member SWE is moved to the first position, the position of the reflector M6 shifts in the -X direction. Therefore, the light beam LBa reflected by the reflector M6 does not enter the reflector M7 but enters the absorber TR2. Therefore, the light beam LBa from the first light source unit 14A' entering the first optical element module OM1 enters only the first optical element module OM1 (selective optical elements AOM1-AOM3) and does not enter the second optical element module OM2. In other words, the light beam LBa can only pass through the selective optical elements AOM1-AOM3. Furthermore, when the configuration switching member SWE is in the first position, the light beam LBb emitted from the second light source unit 14B' and traveling in the +Y direction toward the reflector M13 is guided by the reflectors M13 and M14 toward the reflector M7. Therefore, the light beam LBb can only pass through the second optical element module OM2 (selective optical elements AOM4-AOM6).
因此,第1光学元件模块OM1能够通过直列地配置的三个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3使从光束LBa偏转的光束LB1~LB3中的某一个向构成第1扫描模块的三个扫描单元U1~U3中的一个扫描单元入射。另外,第2光学元件模块OM2能够通过直列地配置的三个选择用光学元件AOM4~AOM6使从光束LBb偏转的光束LB4~LB6 中的某一个向构成第2扫描模块的三个扫描单元U4~U6中的一个扫描单元入射。因此,能够通过并列地配置的第1光学元件模块OM1 (AOM1~AOM3)和第2光学元件模块OM2(AOM4~AOM6)从第 1扫描模块(U1~U3)和第2扫描模块(U4~U6)中分别选择一个供光束LB入射的扫描单元Un。该情况下,通过第1扫描模块中的某一个扫描单元Un和第2扫描模块中的某一个扫描单元Un并行地进行点光SP沿着描绘线SLn的扫描下的曝光动作。Therefore, the first optical element module OM1 can cause one of the light beams LB1 to LB3 deflected from the light beam LBa to enter one of the three scanning units U1 to U3 constituting the first scanning module via the three selection optical elements AOM1 to AOM3 arranged in series. Furthermore, the second optical element module OM2 can cause one of the light beams LB4 to LB6 deflected from the light beam LBb to enter one of the three scanning units U4 to U6 constituting the second scanning module via the three selection optical elements AOM4 to AOM6 arranged in series. Therefore, the first optical element module OM1 (AOM1 to AOM3) and the second optical element module OM2 (AOM4 to AOM6) arranged in parallel can each select a scanning unit Un from the first scanning module (U1 to U3) and the second scanning module (U4 to U6) on which the light beam LB is to enter. In this case, an exposure operation is performed in parallel by one of the scanning units Un in the first scanning module and one of the scanning units Un in the second scanning module, in which the spot light SP is scanned along the drawing line SLn.
光束切换控制部352在点光SP的扫描(偏转)按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP而反复进行的第1状态(第1描绘模式)的情况下,控制致动器AC,使配置切换部件SWE配置在第1位置。另外,在光束切换控制部352每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP而反复进行的第2状态(第2描绘模式)的情况下,控制致动器AC,使配置切换部件SWE配置在第2位置。In the first state (first drawing mode) in which the scanning (deflection) of the spot light SP is repeated for each successive reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, the beam switching control unit 352 controls the actuator AC to place the configuration switching element SWE in the first position. Furthermore, in the second state (second drawing mode) in which the beam switching control unit 352 is repeated for each reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, the actuator AC is controlled to place the configuration switching element SWE in the second position.
图38是表示第5实施方式中的光束切换控制部352的结构的图。在图38中,也图示出成为光束切换控制部352的控制对象的选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6、及光源装置14’(14A’、14B’)。将使光束LBa从第1光学元件模块OM1入射的光源装置14’用14A’表示,将使光束LBb仅向第2光学元件模块OM2直接入射的光源装置14’用14B’表示。FIG38 shows the configuration of the light beam switching control unit 352 in the fifth embodiment. FIG38 also illustrates the selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 and the light source device 14' (14A', 14B') that are controlled by the light beam switching control unit 352. The light source device 14' that directs the light beam LBa from the first optical element module OM1 is indicated by 14A', while the light source device 14' that directs the light beam LBb only to the second optical element module OM2 is indicated by 14B'.
在配置切换部件SWE处于第2位置的情况下,如图38所示,来自光源装置14A’的光束LBa(LB)能够按照 AOM1→AOM2→AOM3→····→AOM6的顺序从选择用光学元件AOMn通过(透射),从选择用光学元件AOM6通过了的光束 LBa向吸收体TR1入射。另外,当配置切换部件SWE移动到第1 位置时,光束LBa能够从光源装置14A’按照AOM1→AOM2→AOM3 的顺序从选择用光学元件AOMn通过,从选择用光学元件AOM3通过了的光束LBa向吸收体TR2入射。而且,在配置切换部件SWE 移动到了第1位置的状态下,来自光源装置14B’的光束LBb能够按照AOM4→AOM5→AOM6的顺序从选择用光学元件AOMn通过,从选择用光学元件AOM6通过了的光束LB向吸收体TR1入射。此外,图38的配置切换部件SWE是概念图,与图36、图37所示的配置切换部件SWE的实际结构不同。在图38所示的例子中,示出配置切换部件SWE处于第2位置、即处于第1光学元件模块OM1与第2光学元件模块OM2直列地配置的第2配置状态,选择用光学元件AOM5为On状态的情况。由此,由来自光源装置14A’的光束LBa 通过衍射而偏转的光束LB5向扫描单元U5入射。When the configuration switching member SWE is in the second position, as shown in FIG38 , the light beam LBa (LB) from the light source device 14A′ can pass through (be transmitted by) the selection optical element AOMn in the order of AOM1 → AOM2 → AOM3 → ... → AOM6, and the light beam LBa that has passed through the selection optical element AOM6 is incident on the absorber TR1. Furthermore, when the configuration switching member SWE is moved to the first position, the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A′ can pass through the selection optical element AOMn in the order of AOM1 → AOM2 → AOM3, and the light beam LBa that has passed through the selection optical element AOM3 is incident on the absorber TR2. Furthermore, when the configuration switching member SWE is moved to the first position, the light beam LBb from the light source device 14B′ can pass through the selection optical element AOMn in the order of AOM4 → AOM5 → AOM6, and the light beam LB that has passed through the selection optical element AOM6 is incident on the absorber TR1. The configuration switching member SWE in FIG38 is a conceptual diagram and differs from the actual structure of the configuration switching member SWE shown in FIG36 and FIG37 . In the example shown in FIG38 , the configuration switching member SWE is in its second position, i.e., in the second configuration state in which the first optical element module OM1 and the second optical element module OM2 are arranged in series, and the selective optical element AOM5 is in the "on" state. Consequently, the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A' is diffracted and deflected, resulting in a light beam LB5 incident on the scanning unit U5.
光束切换控制部352具有以超声波(高频)信号驱动选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6各自的驱动器电路DRVn(DRV1~DRV6)、和根据来自各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的原点传感器OPn的原点信号 SZn(SZ1~SZ6)来生成副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)的副原点生成电路CAan(CAa1~CAa6)。从曝光控制部356向驱动器电路DRVn (DRV1~DRV6)发送在接受副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)后以一定时间使选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6为On状态的On时间Ton的信息。驱动器电路DRV1在从副原点生成电路CAa1发送来副原点信号ZP1时,使选择用光学元件AOM1以On时间Ton成为On状态。同样地,驱动器电路DRV2~DRV6在从副原点生成电路 CAa2~CAa6发送来副原点信号ZP2~ZP6时,使选择用光学元件 AOM2~AOM6以On时间Ton成为On状态。曝光控制部356在改变多面镜PM的旋转速度的情况下,与之相应地变更On时间Ton的长度。此外,驱动器电路DRVn(DRV1~DRV6)也同样地设在先前的第4实施方式中的图33的光束切换控制部352中。The beam switching control unit 352 includes driver circuits DRVn (DRV1-DRV6) that drive each of the selection optical elements AOM1-AOM6 with ultrasonic (high-frequency) signals, and sub-origin generation circuits CAan (CAa1-CAa6) that generate sub-origin signals ZPn (ZP1-ZP6) based on origin signals SZn (SZ1-SZ6) from origin sensors OPn of the respective scanning units Un (U1-U6). The exposure control unit 356 transmits information about the on-time Ton, which turns the selection optical elements AOM1-AOM6 on for a predetermined period of time after receiving the sub-origin signals ZPn (ZP1-ZP6). Upon receiving the sub-origin signal ZP1 from the sub-origin generation circuit CAa1, the driver circuit DRV1 turns the selection optical element AOM1 on for the on-time Ton. Similarly, driver circuits DRV2-DRV6, upon receiving sub-origin signals ZP2-ZP6 from sub-origin generation circuits CAa2-CAa6, turn on the selection optical elements AOM2-AOM6 for an on-time Ton. When the exposure control unit 356 changes the rotational speed of the polygon mirror PM, it adjusts the length of the on-time Ton accordingly. Driver circuits DRVn (DRV1-DRV6) are also provided in the beam switching control unit 352 shown in FIG. 33 in the fourth embodiment.
副原点生成电路CAan(CAa1~CAa6)具有逻辑电路LCC和延迟电路332。在副原点生成电路CAan(CAa1~CAa6)的逻辑电路LCC 中输入有来自各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的原点传感器OPn的原点信号SZn(SZ1~SZ6)。也就是说,在副原点生成电路CAa1的逻辑电路LCC中输入有原点信号SZ1,同样地,在副原点生成电路 CAa2~CAa6的逻辑电路LCC中输入有原点信号SZ2~SZ6。另外,在各副原点生成电路CAan(CAa1~CAa6)的逻辑电路LCC中输入有状态信号STS。该状态信号(逻辑值)STS在按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP而反复进行的第1状态的情况下被设定成“1”,在每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP而反复进行的第2状态的情况下被设定成“0”。从曝光控制部356发送该状态信号STS。The sub-origin generating circuit CAan (CAa1 to CAa6) includes a logic circuit LCC and a delay circuit 332. The logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generating circuit CAan (CAa1 to CAa6) receives an input of the origin signal SZn (SZ1 to SZ6) from the origin sensor OPn of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6). That is, the logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generating circuit CAa1 receives an input of the origin signal SZ1, and similarly, the logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generating circuits CAa2 to CAa6 receives an input of the origin signal SZ2 to SZ6. Furthermore, the logic circuit LCC of each sub-origin generating circuit CAan (CAa1 to CAa6) receives an input of the state signal STS. This state signal (logical value) STS is set to "1" in the case of the first state, which is repeated for each successive reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, and is set to "0" in the case of the second state, which is repeated for each reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. This state signal STS is transmitted from the exposure control unit 356 .
各逻辑电路LCC基于所输入的原点信号SZn(SZ1~SZ6),生成原点信号SZn’(SZ1’~SZ6’),并向各延迟电路332输出。各延迟电路332使所输入的原点信号SZn’(SZ1’~SZ6’)延迟时间Tpx,并输出副原点信号ZPn(ZP1~ZP6)。Each logic circuit LCC generates an origin signal SZn' (SZ1' to SZ6') based on the input origin signal SZn (SZ1 to SZ6), and outputs it to each delay circuit 332. Each delay circuit 332 delays the input origin signal SZn' (SZ1' to SZ6') by a time Tpx and outputs a sub-origin signal ZPn (ZP1 to ZP6).
图39是表示输入原点信号SZn(SZ1~SZ6)和状态信号STS的逻辑电路LCC的结构的图。逻辑电路LCC由两输入的OR门LC1、两输入的AND门LC2及单次照射脉冲产生器LC3构成。状态信号 STS作为OR门LC1的一方的输入信号而施加。OR门LC1的输出信号(逻辑值)作为AND门LC2的一方的输入信号而施加,原点信号SZn作为AND门LC2的另一方的输入信号而施加。AND门LC2 的输出信号(逻辑值)作为原点信号SZn’而输入延迟电路332。单次照射脉冲产生器LC3通常输出逻辑值为“1”的信号SDo,但当产生原点信号SZn’(SZ1’~SZ6’)时,仅在一定时间Tdp输出逻辑值为“0”的信号SDo。也就是说,单次照射脉冲产生器LC3在产生原点信号 SZn’(SZ1’~SZ6’)时,仅以一定时间Tdp使信号SDo的逻辑值反转。时间Tdp设定成2×Tpx>Tdp>Tpx的关系,优选设定成Tdp≈ 1.5×Tpx。Figure 39 shows the structure of a logic circuit LCC that receives inputs of origin signal SZn (SZ1-SZ6) and state signal STS. Logic circuit LCC consists of a two-input OR gate LC1, a two-input AND gate LC2, and a single-shot pulse generator LC3. State signal STS is applied as one input to OR gate LC1. The output signal (logical value) of OR gate LC1 is applied as one input to AND gate LC2, and origin signal SZn is applied as the other input to AND gate LC2. The output signal (logical value) of AND gate LC2 is input to delay circuit 332 as origin signal SZn'. Single-shot pulse generator LC3 normally outputs signal SDo with a logical value of "1." However, when origin signal SZn' (SZ1'-SZ6') is generated, it outputs signal SDo with a logical value of "0" only for a certain period of time, Tdp. That is, when generating origin signals SZn' (SZ1' to SZ6'), the single-shot pulse generator LC3 inverts the logic value of the signal SDo for a certain time Tdp. The time Tdp is set to satisfy the relationship 2×Tpx>Tdp>Tpx, preferably Tdp≈1.5×Tpx.
图40是表示说明图39的逻辑电路LCC的动作的时序的图。图40的左半部分示出基于各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)进行的点光SP的扫描不跳过地按连续的每个反射面RP进行的第1状态的情况,右半部分示出基于各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)进行的点光SP的扫描跳过一个反射面RP地进行的第2状态的情况。此外,在图40中,为了易于理解说明,设为多面镜PM的相邻的反射面RP(例如,反射面 RPa与反射面RPb)彼此的各自所成的角ηj没有误差,原点信号SZn以时间Tpx间隔准确地产生。FIG40 is a diagram illustrating the timing of the operation of the logic circuit LCC of FIG39 . The left half of FIG40 illustrates a first state in which the scanning units Un (U1-U6) scan the spot light SP without skipping over each successive reflection surface RP. The right half illustrates a second state in which the scanning units Un (U1-U6) scan the spot light SP without skipping over a single reflection surface RP. Furthermore, FIG40 assumes, for ease of understanding, that the angle ηj formed between adjacent reflection surfaces RP (e.g., reflection surface RPa and reflection surface RPb) of the polygon mirror PM is consistent, and that the origin signal SZn is accurately generated at intervals of time Tpx.
在点光SP的扫描不跳过地按每个反射面RP进行的第1状态时,状态信号STS为“1”,因此,OR门LC1的输出信号无论信号SDo的状态怎样始终为“1”。因此,从AND门LC2输出的输出信号(原点信号SZn’)以与原点信号SZn相同的定时输出。也就是说,在第1 状态时,能够将原点信号SZn和原点信号SZn’视为相同。在第1状态时,向单次照射脉冲产生器LC3施加的原点信号SZn’的时间间隔 Tpx小于时间Tpd。因此,来自单次照射脉冲产生器LC3的信号SDo维持为“0”。此外,即使在多面镜PM的反射面RP彼此的各自所成的角ηj存在误差的情况下,也不会改变原点信号SZn’的时间间隔小于时间Tpd这一情况。In the first state in which the scanning of the point light SP is performed on each reflecting surface RP without skipping, the state signal STS is "1", and therefore, the output signal of the OR gate LC1 is always "1" regardless of the state of the signal SDo. Therefore, the output signal (origin signal SZn') output from the AND gate LC2 is output at the same timing as the origin signal SZn. That is, in the first state, the origin signal SZn and the origin signal SZn' can be regarded as the same. In the first state, the time interval Tpx of the origin signal SZn' applied to the single irradiation pulse generator LC3 is less than the time Tpd. Therefore, the signal SDo from the single irradiation pulse generator LC3 is maintained at "0". In addition, even if there is an error in the angle ηj between the respective reflecting surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the fact that the time interval of the origin signal SZn' is less than the time Tpd will not change.
当成为点光SP的扫描跳过一个反射面RP地进行的第2状态时,状态信号STS切换为“0”。因此,OR门LC1的输出信号仅在信号SDo 为“1”时成为“1”。在信号SDo为“1”的状态(该情况下,OR门LC1 的输出信号也为“1”的状态)下,若施加原点信号SZn(为便于说明,将该原点信号SZn称为第一个原点信号SZn),则对之响应而AND 门LC2也输出原点信号SZn’。但是,若产生原点信号SZn’,则来自单次照射脉冲产生器LC3的信号SDo在时间Tpd内变化成“0”。因此,在时间Tpd的期间,由于OR门LC1的两输入均为“0”的信号,所以OR门LC1的输出信号维持为“0”。由此,在时间Tpd的期间, AND门LC2的输出信号也维持为“0”。因此,在经过时间Tpd之前即使向AND门LC2施加第二个原点信号SZn,AND门LC2也不会输出原点信号SZn’。When the second state is reached, in which the scanning of the spot light SP skips over one reflection surface RP, the state signal STS switches to "0." Therefore, the output signal of the OR gate LC1 becomes "1" only when the signal SDo is "1." When the origin signal SZn (for ease of explanation, this origin signal SZn will be referred to as the first origin signal SZn) is applied while the signal SDo is "1" (in this case, the output signal of the OR gate LC1 is also "1"), the AND gate LC2 also outputs the origin signal SZn' in response thereto. However, when the origin signal SZn' is generated, the signal SDo from the single-shot pulse generator LC3 changes to "0" within the time Tpd. Therefore, during the time Tpd, since both inputs of the OR gate LC1 are "0" signals, the output signal of the OR gate LC1 remains "0." Therefore, during the time Tpd, the output signal of the AND gate LC2 also remains "0." Therefore, even if the second origin signal SZn is applied to the AND gate LC2 before the time Tpd elapses, the AND gate LC2 does not output the origin signal SZn'.
然后,当经过时间Tpd后,来自单次照射脉冲产生器LC3的信号SDo反转成“1”,因此与先前的第一个原点信号SZn的情况同样地,从AND门LC2输出与在经过时间Tpd后施加的第三个原点信号SZn 相应的原点信号SZn’。通过反复进行这样的动作,逻辑电路LCC将按时间Tpx反复产生的原点信号SZn转换成按2×时间Tpx反复产生的原点信号SZn’。从其他观点来看,逻辑电路LCC生成将按时间 Tpx反复产生的原点信号SZn的脉冲每隔一个间除的原点信号SZn’,也就是说,将原点信号SZn的产生定时的频率分频成1/2。此外,也可以将副原点生成电路CAan的逻辑电路LCC置换成在上述第4实施方式中说明的副原点生成电路CAn的分频器330(图31)。在置换成分频器330的情况下,只要分频器330在第2状态时将原点信号SZn分频成1/2,另外,在第1状态时不对原点信号SZn进行分频即可。另外,也可以将上述第4实施方式的副原点生成电路CAn置换成本第5实施方式的副原点生成电路CAan。此外,在第2状态的情况下,从副原点生成电路CAa1的逻辑电路LCC输出的原点信号 SZ1’与从副原点生成电路CAa4的逻辑电路LCC输出的原点信号 SZ4’错开半周期相位。同样地,从副原点生成电路CAa2、CAa3的逻辑电路LCC输出的原点信号SZ2’、SZ3’与从副原点生成电路 CAa5、CAa6的逻辑电路LCC输出的原点信号SZ5’、SZ6’错开半周期相位。Then, after time Tpd has passed, signal SDo from single-shot pulse generator LC3 inverts to "1." Similar to the case of the first origin signal SZn, AND gate LC2 outputs origin signal SZn', corresponding to the third origin signal SZn applied after time Tpd. By repeating this operation, logic circuit LCC converts origin signal SZn, which is generated repeatedly with time Tpx, into origin signal SZn', which is generated repeatedly with time 2 × Tpx. From another perspective, logic circuit LCC generates origin signal SZn' by thinning out every other pulse of origin signal SZn, which is generated repeatedly with time Tpx. In other words, it divides the frequency of the generation timing of origin signal SZn by 1/2. Alternatively, logic circuit LCC of sub-origin generation circuit CAan can be replaced with frequency divider 330 ( FIG. 31 ) of sub-origin generation circuit CAn, as described in the fourth embodiment. When the frequency divider 330 is replaced, the frequency divider 330 only needs to divide the origin signal SZn into 1/2 in the second state and not divide the origin signal SZn in the first state. Alternatively, the sub-origin generation circuit CAn of the fourth embodiment can be replaced with the sub-origin generation circuit CAan of the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, in the second state, the origin signal SZ1' output from the logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generation circuit CAa1 is offset in phase by half a cycle from the origin signal SZ4' output from the logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generation circuit CAa4. Similarly, the origin signals SZ2' and SZ3' output from the logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generation circuits CAa2 and CAa3 are offset in phase by half a cycle from the origin signals SZ5' and SZ6' output from the logic circuit LCC of the sub-origin generation circuits CAa5 and CAa6.
像这样,仅通过使向光束切换控制部352的各副原点生成电路 CAa1~CAa6的逻辑电路LCC输入的状态信号STS的值反转,就能够任意切换是按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP而反复进行基于点光SP的扫描进行的描绘曝光的第1状态、还是每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP而反复进行基于点光SP的扫描进行的描绘曝光的第 2状态。In this way, simply by inverting the value of the state signal STS input to the logic circuit LCC of each sub-origin generating circuit CAa1 to CAa6 of the light beam switching control unit 352, it is possible to arbitrarily switch between the first state in which the drawing exposure is repeatedly performed based on the scanning of the point light SP for each continuous reflecting surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM, and the second state in which the drawing exposure is repeatedly performed based on the scanning of the point light SP for each reflecting surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM.
此外,在本第5实施方式中,各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转控制也与上述第4实施方式相同。也就是说,以从各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的原点传感器OPn输出的原点信号SZn (SZ1~SZ6)具有图34所示的关系的方式,控制各扫描单元Un (U1~U6)的多面镜PM的旋转。因此,在点光SP的扫描不跳过面地按每个反射面RP进行的第1状态时,扫描单元U1~U3能够按照 U1→U2→U3的顺序反复进行点光SP的扫描,扫描单元U4~U6能够按照U4→U5→U6的顺序反复进行点光SP的扫描。Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, the rotation control of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) is also similar to that of the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, the rotation of the polygon mirror PM of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) is controlled so that the origin signals SZn (SZ1-SZ6) output from the origin sensors OPn of each scanning unit Un (U1-U6) have the relationship shown in FIG34 . Therefore, in the first state, in which the spot light SP is scanned on each reflection surface RP without skipping any surfaces, the scanning units U1-U3 can repeatedly scan the spot light SP in the order U1 → U2 → U3, and the scanning units U4-U6 can repeatedly scan the spot light SP in the order U4 → U5 → U6.
优选的是,对该单次照射脉冲产生器LC3设定的时间Tpd能够根据来自曝光控制部356的多面镜PM的旋转速度的信息而变更。另外,不限于跳过一面,即使在跳过两面地使点光SP进行扫描的情况下,只要为图39那样的结构,也能够仅通过将时间Tpd设定成 (n+1)×Tpx>Tdp>n×Tpx的关系来进行应对。此外,n表示跳过的反射面RP的数量。例如,在n为2的情况下,表示点光SP的扫描每隔两个反射面RP地进行,在n为3的情况下,表示点光SP的扫描每隔三个反射面RP地进行。Preferably, the time Tpd set for the single-shot irradiation pulse generator LC3 can be changed based on information on the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM from the exposure control unit 356. Furthermore, the situation is not limited to skipping one surface. Even when the spot light SP is scanned while skipping two surfaces, as long as the structure shown in FIG39 is used, this can be addressed simply by setting the time Tpd to the relationship of (n+1)×Tpx>Tdp>n×Tpx. Furthermore, n represents the number of skipped reflection surfaces RP. For example, when n is 2, the spot light SP is scanned every two reflection surfaces RP, and when n is 3, the spot light SP is scanned every three reflection surfaces RP.
接下来,简单地说明在点光SP的扫描不跳过面地按每个反射面 RP进行的第1状态时,基于描绘数据输出控制部354对光源装置 14A’、14B’的驱动电路206a进行的描绘位串数据Sdw的输出控制。在第1状态时,通过第1扫描模块(扫描单元U1~U3)和第2扫描模块(扫描单元U4~U6)并行地进行点光SP的扫描。因此,描绘数据输出控制部354对射出向第1扫描模块入射的光束LBa的光源装置14A’的驱动电路206a,输出将扫描单元U1~U3各自所对应的串行数据DL1~DL3按时序合成得到的描绘位串数据Sdw,对射出向第 2扫描模块入射的光束LBb的光源装置14B’的驱动电路206a,输出将扫描单元U4~U6各自所对应的串行数据DL4~DL6按时序合成得到的描绘位串数据Sdw。Next, we will briefly describe the output control of the drawing bit string data Sdw by the drawing data output control unit 354 for the driver circuits 206a of the light source devices 14A' and 14B' during the first state, in which the spot light SP scans each reflective surface RP without skipping any surfaces. In the first state, the first scanning module (scanning units U1-U3) and the second scanning module (scanning units U4-U6) scan the spot light SP in parallel. Therefore, the drawing data output control unit 354 outputs the drawing bit string data Sdw, which is a time-sequential synthesis of the serial data DL1-DL3 corresponding to the scanning units U1-U3, to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14A' that emits the light beam LBa incident on the first scanning module. It also outputs the drawing bit string data Sdw, which is a time-sequential synthesis of the serial data DL4-DL6 corresponding to the scanning units U4-U6, to the driver circuit 206a of the light source device 14B' that emits the light beam LBb incident on the second scanning module.
另外,图35所示的描绘数据输出控制部354无论在状态信号STS 为“1”还是为“0”的情况下,几乎都能直接使用。在点光SP的扫描不跳过面地按每个反射面RP进行的第1状态时,在副原点信号ZP1 产生后,在时间Ts后产生副原点信号ZP2,接着在时间Ts后产生副原点信号ZP3。因此,通过计数器部CN1~CN3按照 DL1→DL2→DL3的顺序反复输出串行数据DL1~DL3。通过从施加副原点信号ZP1~ZP3之后在一定时间(On时间Ton)中打开的闸部GT1~GT3而依次输出的该串行数据DL1~DL3,作为描绘位串数据 Sdw向第1光源装置14A’的驱动电路206a输入。同样地,在点光 SP的扫描不跳过面地按每个反射面RP进行的第1状态时,在副原点信号ZP4产生后,在时间Ts后产生副原点信号ZP5,接着在时间 Ts后产生副原点信号ZP6。因此,通过计数器部CN4~CN6按照 DL4→DL5→DL6的顺序反复输出串行数据DL4~DL6。通过从施加副原点信号ZP4~ZP6后在一定时间(On时间Ton)中打开的闸部 GT4~GT6而依次输出的该串行数据DL4~DL6,作为描绘位串数据 Sdw向第2光源装置14B’的驱动电路206a输入。Furthermore, the drawing data output control unit 354 shown in FIG35 can be used almost directly regardless of whether the state signal STS is "1" or "0." In the first state, in which the spot light SP scans each reflection surface RP without skipping surfaces, the sub-origin signal ZP2 is generated time Ts after the sub-origin signal ZP1 is generated, and the sub-origin signal ZP3 is generated time Ts after the sub-origin signal ZP1 is generated. Therefore, the serial data DL1 to DL3 are repeatedly output by the counter units CN1 to CN3 in the order of DL1 → DL2 → DL3. The serial data DL1 to DL3, which are sequentially output by the gate units GT1 to GT3, which are opened for a predetermined time (on time Ton) after the sub-origin signals ZP1 to ZP3 are applied, are input to the driver circuit 206a of the first light source device 14A' as the drawing bit string data Sdw. Similarly, in the first state, where spot light SP scans each reflection surface RP without skipping any surfaces, sub-origin signal ZP5 is generated time Ts after sub-origin signal ZP4 is generated, followed by sub-origin signal ZP6 time Ts after that. Consequently, serial data DL4 to DL6 are repeatedly output by counter sections CN4 to CN6 in the order DL4 → DL5 → DL6. This serial data DL4 to DL6, sequentially output by gate sections GT4 to GT6, which are opened for a predetermined time (on time Ton) after application of sub-origin signals ZP4 to ZP6, is input as drawing bit string data Sdw to the driver circuit 206a of the second light source device 14B'.
接下来,简单地说明第1状态时的串行数据DL1~DL6的偏移。串行数据DL1的在列方向的偏移,在串行数据DL1输出结束后接着进行扫描的扫描单元U2所对应的副原点信号ZP2产生的定时进行。串行数据DL2的在列方向的偏移,在串行数据DL2输出结束后接着进行扫描的扫描单元U3所对应的副原点信号ZP3产生的定时进行。串行数据DL3的在列方向的偏移,在串行数据DL3输出结束后接着进行扫描的扫描单元U1所对应的副原点信号ZP1产生的定时进行。另外,串行数据DL4的在列方向的偏移,在串行数据DL4输出结束后接着进行扫描的扫描单元U5所对应的副原点信号ZP5产生的定时进行。串行数据DL5的在列方向的偏移,在串行数据DL5输出结束后接着进行扫描的扫描单元U6所对应的副原点信号ZP6产生的定时进行。串行数据DL6的在列方向的偏移,在串行数据DL6输出结束后接着进行扫描的扫描单元U4所对应的副原点信号ZP4产生的定时。此外,第2状态时的描绘位串数据Sdw的输出控制与第4 实施方式相同,因此省略说明。另外,第1状态时的描绘位串数据 Sdw的输出控制与上述第1~第3实施方式的控制原理相同,仅输出的串行数据DLn的顺序不同。也就是说,不同处在于是按照 DL1→DL3→DL5、DL2→DL4→DL6的顺序分别输出串行数据DLn,还是按照DL1→DL2→DL3、DL4→DL5→DL6的顺序分别输出串行数据DLn。Next, we briefly explain the offsets of serial data DL1 to DL6 in the first state. Serial data DL1 is offset in the column direction at the timing when the sub-origin signal ZP2 corresponding to the scanning unit U2, which is scanning after the output of serial data DL1, is generated. Serial data DL2 is offset in the column direction at the timing when the sub-origin signal ZP3 corresponding to the scanning unit U3, which is scanning after the output of serial data DL2, is generated. Serial data DL3 is offset in the column direction at the timing when the sub-origin signal ZP1 corresponding to the scanning unit U1, which is scanning after the output of serial data DL3, is generated. Furthermore, serial data DL4 is offset in the column direction at the timing when the sub-origin signal ZP5 corresponding to the scanning unit U5, which is scanning after the output of serial data DL4, is generated. Serial data DL5 is offset in the column direction at the timing when the sub-origin signal ZP6 corresponding to the scanning unit U6, which is scanning after the output of serial data DL5, is generated. The offset in the column direction of the serial data DL6 is determined by the timing of the generation of the corresponding sub-origin signal ZP4 by the scanning unit U4, which then performs scanning after the output of the serial data DL6 is completed. Furthermore, the output control of the drawing bit string data Sdw in the second state is the same as in the fourth embodiment, so its description is omitted. Furthermore, the output control of the drawing bit string data Sdw in the first state follows the same control principle as in the first to third embodiments described above, with only the order of the output serial data DLn differing. Specifically, the difference lies in whether the serial data DLn is output in the order DL1 → DL3 → DL5, DL2 → DL4 → DL6, or in the order DL1 → DL2 → DL3, DL4 → DL5 → DL6.
另外,在点光SP的扫描跳过一个反射面RP地进行的第2状态的情况下,与不跳过面地按每个反射面RP进行的第1状态相比,各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的点光SP的扫描开始间隔较长。例如,在跳过一个反射面RP地进行点光SP的扫描的情况下,与不跳过面的情况相比,各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的点光SP的扫描开始间隔成为2倍。另外,在跳过两个反射面RP地进行的情况下,与不跳过面的情况相比,点光SP的扫描开始间隔成为3倍。因此,若在第1状态和第2状态下使多面镜PM的旋转速度及基板FS的搬送速度相同,则在第1状态和第2状态下,曝光结果变得不同。In addition, in the second state where the scanning of the point light SP is performed by skipping one reflection surface RP, the scanning start interval of the point light SP of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) is longer than that in the first state where the scanning is performed for each reflection surface RP without skipping the surface. For example, in the case where the scanning of the point light SP is performed by skipping one reflection surface RP, the scanning start interval of the point light SP of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) is doubled compared to the case where the surface is not skipped. In addition, in the case where the scanning is performed by skipping two reflection surfaces RP, the scanning start interval of the point light SP is tripled compared to the case where the surface is not skipped. Therefore, if the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM and the transport speed of the substrate FS are made the same in the first state and the second state, the exposure results become different in the first state and the second state.
因此,曝光控制部356也可以具有在第1状态和第2状态下变更(修正)多面镜PM的旋转速度及基板FS的搬送速度中的至少一方、使得第1状态和第2状态下的曝光结果成为相同状态的控制模式。例如,在第1状态时的点光SP的扫描开始间隔与第2状态时的点光SP的扫描开始间隔为1:2的情况下,曝光控制部356以使第 1状态时的多面镜PM的旋转速度与第2状态时的多面镜PM的旋转速度的比成为1:2的方式,来控制旋转控制部350。具体地说,使第1状态时的多面镜PM的旋转速度为2万rpm,使第2状态时的多面镜PM的旋转速度为4万rpm。相应地,对于光源装置14’(14A’、 14B’)的光束LB(LBa、LBb)的发光频率Fs,例如若第1状态时为200MHz,则第2状态时设定成400MHz。由此,能够使第1状态时的副原点信号ZPn的产生定时的间隔与第2状态时的副原点信号 ZPn的产生定时的间隔大致相同。Therefore, the exposure control unit 356 may also have a control mode for changing (correcting) at least one of the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM and the conveying speed of the substrate FS in the first state and the second state so that the exposure results in the first state and the second state are the same. For example, when the scanning start interval of the point light SP in the first state and the scanning start interval of the point light SP in the second state are 1:2, the exposure control unit 356 controls the rotation control unit 350 so that the ratio of the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM in the first state to the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM in the second state becomes 1:2. Specifically, the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM in the first state is 20,000 rpm, and the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM in the second state is 40,000 rpm. Accordingly, for example, if the light emission frequency Fs of the light beam LB (LBa, LBb) of the light source device 14' (14A', 14B') is 200 MHz in the first state, it is set to 400 MHz in the second state. Thus, the interval of the generation timing of the sub-origin signal ZPn in the first state and the interval of the generation timing of the sub-origin signal ZPn in the second state can be made substantially the same.
另外,例如,曝光控制部356也可以具有在第1状态时的点光 SP的扫描开始间隔与第2状态时的点光SP的扫描开始间隔为1:2 的情况下,以使第1状态时的基板FS的搬送速度与第2状态时的基板FS的搬送速度之比成为2:1的方式来控制驱动辊R1~R3、旋转筒DR的旋转速度的控制模式。通过以上那样的、修正多面镜PM的旋转速度和/或发光频率Fs(时钟信号LTC的频率)的控制模式(扫描修正模式)以及修正基板FS的搬送速度的控制模式(搬送修正模式)中的某一方,能够使第1状态时的基板FS上的描绘线SLn (SL1~SL6)的X方向的间隔与第2状态时的基板FS上的描绘线 SLn(SL1~SL6)的X方向的间隔成为相同间隔(例如,1.5μm)。而且,在第1状态和第2状态下,描绘数据输出控制部354内的存储器部BM1~BM6各自所存储的图案数据(位图)无需做任何修正,能够直接使用。In addition, for example, the exposure control unit 356 may also have a control mode for controlling the rotation speed of the drive rollers R1 to R3 and the rotating drum DR in a manner such that the ratio of the conveying speed of the substrate FS in the first state to the conveying speed of the substrate FS in the second state becomes 2:1 when the scanning start interval of the point light SP in the first state and the scanning start interval of the point light SP in the second state are 1:2. By using either the control mode (scanning correction mode) for correcting the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM and/or the light emission frequency Fs (frequency of the clock signal LTC) and the control mode (conveying correction mode) for correcting the conveying speed of the substrate FS, the interval in the X direction of the drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6) on the substrate FS in the first state and the interval in the X direction of the drawing lines SLn (SL1 to SL6) on the substrate FS in the second state can be made the same interval (for example, 1.5 μm). Furthermore, in the first state and the second state, the pattern data (bitmaps) stored in the memory units BM1 to BM6 in the drawing data output control unit 354 can be used as they are without any modification.
另外,也可以使用上述的扫描修正模式和搬送修正模式这两者,以在第1状态下在基板FS上描绘的图案与在第2状态下在基板FS 上描绘的图案同等的方式进行修正。例如,在第1状态(按多面镜 PM的各反射面RP进行的光束扫描的情况)下,在多面镜PM的旋转速度为2万rpm、光源装置14’(14A’、14B’)的光束LB的发光频率Fs为200MHz、基板FS的搬送速度为5mm/秒的情况下,在第 2状态(跳过多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的情况)下,也可以将基板FS的搬送速度设定成并非减速一半而是减速-25%而为3.75mm/秒,将多面镜PM的旋转速度设定成1.5倍而为3万rpm,将光束LB的发光频率Fs也设定成1.5倍而为300MHz。像这样,若将扫描修正模式和搬送修正模式这两者组合,则在第2状态的情况下,不需要使基板FS的搬送速度降低至一半,因此抑制了生产率极端降低。In addition, both the scanning correction mode and the transport correction mode described above can be used to perform corrections in a manner that the pattern drawn on the substrate FS in the first state is the same as the pattern drawn on the substrate FS in the second state. For example, in the first state (the case of light beam scanning according to each reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM), when the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM is 20,000 rpm, the luminous frequency Fs of the light beam LB of the light source device 14' (14A', 14B') is 200 MHz, and the transport speed of the substrate FS is 5 mm/second, in the second state (the case of light beam scanning that skips one reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM), the transport speed of the substrate FS can be set to 3.75 mm/second instead of being slowed down by half, and the rotation speed of the polygon mirror PM can be set to 1.5 times that of 30,000 rpm, and the luminous frequency Fs of the light beam LB can also be set to 1.5 times that of 300 MHz. In this way, if the scanning correction mode and the transport correction mode are combined, in the case of the second state, there is no need to reduce the transport speed of the substrate FS to half, thereby suppressing an extreme decrease in productivity.
此外,在第5实施方式中,也如上述第4实施方式中说明那样,分配光束LBa、LBb的扫描单元Un的数量可以任意变更。另外,多面镜PM的扫描效率也可以任意变更。另外,在第5实施方式中,由于将多面镜PM的扫描效率设为1/3、将扫描单元Un的数量设为六个,所以将六个选择用光学元件AOMn(AOM1~AOM6)分成两个光学元件模块OM1、OM2,并与其对应地将六个扫描单元Un (U1~U6)分成两个扫描模块。但是,在多面镜PM的扫描效率为 1/M、扫描单元Un及选择用光学元件AOMn的数量为Q的情况下,只要将Q个选择用光学元件AOMn分成Q/M个光学元件模块OM1、 OM2、···,将Q个扫描单元Un分成Q/M个扫描模块即可。该情况下,优选各光学元件模块OM1、OM2、···各自所包含的选择用光学元件AOMn的数量相等,另外,Q/M个扫描模块各自所包含的扫描单元Un的数量也相等。此外,该Q/M优选为整数。也就是说,优选Q为M的倍数。Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described in the fourth embodiment, the number of scanning units Un that distribute the light beams LBa and LBb can be arbitrarily changed. Furthermore, the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM can also be arbitrarily changed. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, since the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM is set to 1/3 and the number of scanning units Un is set to six, the six selection optical elements AOMn (AOM1 to AOM6) are divided into two optical element modules OM1 and OM2, and the six scanning units Un (U1 to U6) are correspondingly divided into two scanning modules. However, in the case where the scanning efficiency of the polygonal mirror PM is 1/M and the number of scanning units Un and selection optical elements AOMn is Q, it is sufficient to divide the Q selection optical elements AOMn into Q/M optical element modules OM1, OM2, ..., and divide the Q scanning units Un into Q/M scanning modules. In this case, it is preferred that each optical element module OM1, OM2, ..., include an equal number of selection optical elements AOMn. Furthermore, the number of scanning units Un included in each of the Q/M scanning modules is also equal. Furthermore, Q/M is preferably an integer. In other words, Q is preferably a multiple of M.
例如,在多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/2、扫描单元Un及选择用光学元件AOMn的数量为六个情况下,只要将六个选择用光学元件 AOMn等分成三个光学元件模块OM1、OM2、OM3,且将六个扫描单元Un等分成三个扫描模块即可。而且,在第1状态的情况下,只要将三个光学元件模块OM1、OM2、OM3并列地配置,并使来自三个光源装置14’的光束LB(该情况下,为LBa、LBb、LBc)并行地向三个光学元件模块OM1、OM2、OM3各自入射即可,在第2状态的情况下,只要将三个光学元件模块OM1、OM2、OM3直列地配置,并使来自一个光源装置14’的光束LB按序地从三个光学元件模块 OM1、OM2、OM3通过地入射即可。For example, when the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is 1/2 and the number of scanning units Un and selection optical elements AOMn is six, the six selection optical elements AOMn can be equally divided into three optical element modules OM1, OM2, and OM3, and the six scanning units Un can be equally divided into three scanning modules. Furthermore, in the first state, the three optical element modules OM1, OM2, and OM3 can be arranged in parallel, and the light beams LB (in this case, LBa, LBb, and LBc) from the three light source devices 14' can be incident on each of the three optical element modules OM1, OM2, and OM3 in parallel. In the second state, the three optical element modules OM1, OM2, and OM3 can be arranged in series, and the light beam LB from the one light source device 14' can be incident on the three optical element modules OM1, OM2, and OM3 in sequence.
如以上那样,在本第5实施方式,以基于扫描单元Un的多面镜 PM进行的光束LBn(点光SP)的偏转(扫描)被切换成按多面镜 PM的连续的每个反射面RP反复进行的第1状态(第1描绘模式) 和按多面镜PM的每隔至少一个面的反射面RP反复进行的第2状态 (第2描绘模式)中某一方的方式,光束切换控制部352控制光束切换部件20A,按顺序进行基于多个扫描单元Un各自进行的点光 SP的一维扫描。由此,能够得到与上述第4实施方式相同的效果,并且能够切换是跳过面地进行点光SP的扫描还是不跳过面地进行点光SP的扫描。As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the beam switching control unit 352 controls the beam switching component 20A to sequentially perform one-dimensional scanning of the spot light SP by each of the plurality of scanning units Un, such that the deflection (scanning) of the light beam LBn (spot light SP) by the polygon mirror PM of the scanning unit Un is switched between a first state (first drawing mode) in which the deflection is repeated for each successive reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, and a second state (second drawing mode) in which the deflection is repeated for every at least one reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. This achieves the same effects as those of the fourth embodiment, and allows switching between scanning the spot light SP with or without skipping a surface.
在第1状态的情况下,在多面镜PM的扫描效率(α/β)不足1/2 时,将与扫描效率的倒数相应的数量的扫描单元Un分组成一个扫描模块,使用该分组成的扫描模块中的多个,按各扫描模块,使其中的一个扫描单元Un进行点光SP的一维扫描。由此,能够以点光SP 同时扫描多条描绘线SLn中的与扫描模块的数量相同的数量的描绘线SLn。另外,在第2状态的情况下,由于控制成按多面镜PM的每隔至少一个面的反射面RP进行光束扫描,所以即使具有比与多面镜 PM的扫描效率(α/β)的倒数相应的数量多的多个扫描单元Un,也能够有效利用光束LB,且该多个扫描单元Un全部使点光SP沿着描绘线SLn进行扫描。In the first state, when the scanning efficiency (α/β) of the polygon mirror PM is less than 1/2, a number of scanning units Un corresponding to the inverse of the scanning efficiency are grouped into a scanning module. Using multiple scanning modules in this group, one scanning unit Un is configured for each scanning module to perform one-dimensional scanning of the point light SP. This allows the point light SP to simultaneously scan a number of the same drawing lines SLn as the number of scanning modules. Furthermore, in the second state, since the light beam is controlled to scan at least every other reflective surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, even with a greater number of scanning units Un than the inverse of the scanning efficiency (α/β) of the polygon mirror PM, the light beam LB can be effectively utilized, and all of these scanning units Un scan the point light SP along the drawing lines SLn.
在上述的第1状态的情况下,由于来自光源装置14A’、14B’各自的光束LBa、LBb并行地向分组而成的两个扫描模块入射,所以光束切换部件20A内的选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6各自通过光束切换控制部352,以分组而成的扫描模块单位,以分时地向光束 LB1~LB6所对应的扫描单元U1~U6入射的方式,切换On/Off状态。In the case of the first state mentioned above, since the light beams LBa and LBb from the light source devices 14A’ and 14B’ are incident on the two grouped scanning modules in parallel, the selection optical elements AOM1~AOM6 in the light beam switching component 20A are respectively switched on/off through the light beam switching control unit 352, in units of the grouped scanning modules, in a time-sharing manner so as to be incident on the scanning units U1~U6 corresponding to the light beams LB1~LB6.
设在光束切换部件20A中的配置切换部件SWE切换第1配置状态和第2配置状态,在第1配置状态中,以将来自第1光源装置14A’的光束LBa作为光束LB1~LB3分配给六个扫描单元U1~U6中的三个扫描单元U1~U3各自、且将来自第2光源装置14B’的光束LBb 作为光束LB4~LB6分配给其余三个扫描单元U4~U6各自的方式,三个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM3沿着光束LBa的光路直列地相连,并且选择用光学元件AOM4~AOM6沿着光束LBb的光路直列地相连,在第2配置状态中,以将来自一个光源装置14A’的光束LBa 作为光束LB1~LB6分配给六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的方式,六个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6沿着光束LBa的光路直列地相连。The configuration switching component SWE provided in the beam switching component 20A switches between a first configuration state and a second configuration state. In the first configuration state, the three selection optical elements AOM1 to AOM3 are connected in series along the optical path of the beam LBa, and the selection optical elements AOM4 to AOM6 are connected in series along the optical path of the beam LBb in such a manner that the beam LBa from the first light source device 14A' is distributed as beams LB1 to LB3 to three scanning units U1 to U3 among the six scanning units U1 to U6, and the beam LBb from the second light source device 14B' is distributed as beams LB4 to LB6 to the remaining three scanning units U4 to U6. In the second configuration state, the six selection optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 are connected in series along the optical path of the beam LBa in such a manner that the beam LBa from one light source device 14A' is distributed as beams LB1 to LB6 to the six scanning units U1 to U6.
由此,在第1状态的情况下,通过配置切换部件SWE而设定成第1配置状态,由此,各扫描单元U1~U6各自能够按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP反复进行基于点光SP的扫描,并且,六个扫描单元U1~U6中的两个扫描单元能够几乎同时地进行基于点光SP 的扫描。另外,在第2状态的情况下,通过配置切换部件SWE而设定成第2配置状态,由此,虽然是按多面镜PM的每隔至少一个面的反射面RP进行的光束扫描,但能够通过全部六个扫描单元U1~U6反复进行基于点光SP的扫描。Thus, in the first state, the switching element SWE is configured to set the first configuration state. As a result, each scanning unit U1-U6 can repeatedly scan with the point light SP along each successive reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, and two of the six scanning units U1-U6 can scan with the point light SP almost simultaneously. Furthermore, in the second state, the switching element SWE is configured to set the second configuration state. Thus, although light beam scanning is performed along at least every other reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, scanning with the point light SP can be repeatedly performed by all six scanning units U1-U6.
因此,根据本第5实施方式,在描绘装置的初始设置时的安装中,在使用一个光源装置14A’以成为第2配置状态的方式设定配置切换部件SWE,然后想要提升基板FS的搬送速度的情况下,只要增设第2光源装置14B’并以成为第1配置状态的方式设定配置切换部件SWE即可,在硬件上,能够通过光源装置的增设、配置切换部件SWE的切换这样的简单操作来升级描绘装置。Therefore, according to this fifth embodiment, during the initial installation of the drawing device, when a light source device 14A' is used to set the configuration switching component SWE in a manner that is in the second configuration state, and then when it is desired to increase the conveying speed of the substrate FS, it is sufficient to add a second light source device 14B' and set the configuration switching component SWE in a manner that is in the first configuration state. In terms of hardware, the drawing device can be upgraded through simple operations such as adding a light source device and switching the configuration switching component SWE.
此外,在上述各实施方式中,使用相对于多面镜PM的进行光束 LBn的偏转的反射面RP而位于多面镜PM的旋转方向上的前一个的反射面RP来进行原点信号SZn的检测,但也可以使用进行光束LBn 的偏转的反射面RP自身来进行原点信号SZn的检测。该情况下,不需要使原点信号SZn或从原点信号SZn求出的原点信号SZn’延迟时间Tpx,因此只要使原点信号SZn或原点信号SZn’为副原点信号 ZPn即可。Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the origin signal SZn is detected using the reflection surface RP located immediately before the reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM in the rotational direction relative to the reflection surface RP that deflects the light beam LBn. However, the origin signal SZn may also be detected using the reflection surface RP itself that deflects the light beam LBn. In this case, the origin signal SZn or the origin signal SZn′ derived from the origin signal SZn does not need to be delayed by the time Tpx. Therefore, the origin signal SZn or the origin signal SZn′ can be simply used as the sub-origin signal ZPn.
另外,在上述第4及第5实施方式中,使用描绘位串数据Sdw 来切换作为光源装置14’(14A’、14B’)的描绘用光调制器的电光学元件206,但也可以如第2实施方式那样,将描绘用光学元件AOM 用作描绘用光调制器。该描绘用光学元件AOM为声光调制元件 (AOM:Acousto-Optic Modulator)。也就是说,在上述第4实施方式中,也可以在光源装置14’与初级的选择用光学元件AOM1之间配置描绘用光学元件AOM,使从描绘用光学元件AOM透射过的来自光源装置14’的光束LB向选择用光学元件AOM1入射。该情况下,描绘用光学元件AOM根据描绘位串数据Sdw进行切换。即使在该情况下,也能够得到与上述第4实施方式相同的效果。In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the electro-optical element 206 serving as the drawing light modulator of the light source device 14' (14A', 14B') is switched using the drawing bit string data Sdw. However, as in the second embodiment, a drawing optical element AOM may be used as the drawing light modulator. This drawing optical element AOM is an acousto-optic modulator (AOM). That is, in the fourth embodiment, the drawing optical element AOM may be positioned between the light source device 14' and the primary selection optical element AOM1, so that the light beam LB from the light source device 14' that has passed through the drawing optical element AOM is incident on the selection optical element AOM1. In this case, the drawing optical element AOM is switched based on the drawing bit string data Sdw. Even in this case, the same effects as those of the fourth embodiment can be achieved.
另外,在上述第5实施方式中,在第1光源装置14A’与第1光学元件模块OM1的初级的选择用光学元件AOM1之间,以及在第2 光源装置14B’与第2光学元件模块OM2的初级的选择用光学元件 AOM4之间,分别配置有描绘用光学元件AOM(AOMa、AOMb)。也就是说,从描绘用光学元件AOMa透射过的来自光源装置14A’的光束LBa向选择用光学元件AOM1入射,从描绘用光学元件AOMb 透射过的来自光源装置14B’的光束LBb向选择用光学元件AOM4 入射。该情况下,在第1状态时,描绘用光学元件AOMa根据由串行数据DL1~DL3构成的描绘位串数据Sdw进行切换,描绘用光学元件AOMb根据由串行数据DL4~DL6构成的描绘位串数据Sdw进行切换。另外,在第2状态时,仅描绘用光学元件AOMa根据由串行数据DL1~DL6构成的描绘位串数据Sdw进行切换。Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment described above, image drawing optical elements AOM (AOMa, AOMb) are disposed between the first light source device 14A' and the primary selection optical element AOM1 of the first optical element module OM1, and between the second light source device 14B' and the primary selection optical element AOM4 of the second optical element module OM2. Specifically, the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A' that has passed through the image drawing optical element AOMa enters the selection optical element AOM1, and the light beam LBb from the light source device 14B' that has passed through the image drawing optical element AOMb enters the selection optical element AOM4. In this case, in the first state, the image drawing optical element AOMa switches according to the image drawing bit string data Sdw consisting of the serial data DL1 to DL3, and the image drawing optical element AOMb switches according to the image drawing bit string data Sdw consisting of the serial data DL4 to DL6. In the second state, only the image drawing optical element AOMa is switched based on the image drawing bit string data Sdw composed of the serial data DL1 to DL6.
另外,也可以如第1实施方式那样,按每个扫描单元Un设置作为描绘用光调制器的描绘用光学元件AOM。该情况下,描绘用光学元件AOM可以设在各扫描单元Un的反射镜M20(参照图28)的近前。该各扫描单元Un(U1~U6)的描绘用光学元件AOM根据各串行数据DLn(DL1~DL6)进行切换。例如,扫描单元U3的描绘用光学元件AOM根据串行数据DL3进行切换。Alternatively, as in the first embodiment, an image drawing optical element AOM serving as an image drawing light modulator may be provided for each scanning unit Un. In this case, the image drawing optical element AOM may be provided just before the reflector M20 (see FIG. 28 ) of each scanning unit Un. The image drawing optical element AOM of each scanning unit Un (U1 to U6) is switched based on the serial data DLn (DL1 to DL6). For example, the image drawing optical element AOM of scanning unit U3 is switched based on the serial data DL3.
[第6实施方式][Sixth embodiment]
图41示出第6实施方式的光束切换部件(光束配送单元)20B 的结构,在此,设为从一个光源装置14’射出并向光束切换部件20B 入射的光束LBw(LB)为圆偏振的平行光束。在光束切换部件20B 中,设有六个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6、两个吸收体TR1、TR2、六个透镜系统CG1~CG6、镜M30、M31、M32、聚光透镜CG0、以及偏振光分束器BS1和两个描绘用光学元件(声光调制元件)AOMa、 AOMb。此外,对于与上述第4实施方式或上述第5实施方式相同的结构,标注相同的附图标记。FIG41 illustrates the structure of a beam switching component (beam delivery unit) 20B according to a sixth embodiment. Here, the light beam LBw (LB) emitted from a light source device 14' and incident on the beam switching component 20B is assumed to be a circularly polarized parallel beam. The beam switching component 20B includes six selection optical elements AOM1 to AOM6, two absorbers TR1 and TR2, six lens systems CG1 to CG6, mirrors M30, M31, and M32, a focusing lens CG0, a polarization beam splitter BS1, and two image forming optical elements (acousto-optic modulators) AOMa and AOMb. Components identical to those in the fourth or fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.
向光束切换部件20B入射的光束LBw从聚光透镜CG0通过并借由偏振光分束器BS1而分离成直线P偏振的光束LBp和直线S偏振的光束LBs。由偏振光分束器BS1反射的S偏振的光束LBs向描绘用光学元件AOMa入射。入射到描绘用光学元件AOMa的光束LBs 通过聚光透镜CG0的聚光作用以在描绘用光学元件AOMa内成为光束腰的方式收敛。在描绘用光学元件AOMa中,经由驱动器电路 DRVn而施加有图19所示那样的描绘位串数据Sdw(DLn)。该描绘位串数据Sdw在此是将奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5各自所对应的串行数据DL1、DL3、DL5合成得到的。因此,描绘用光学元件AOMa在描绘位串数据Sdw(DLn)为“1”时,为On状态,将入射的光束LBs的一次衍射光作为偏转的描绘光束(经强度调制的光束)而朝向镜M31射出。由镜M31反射的描绘光束从透镜系统CG1 通过而向选择用光学元件AOM1入射。另外,在描绘位串数据Sdw (DLn)为“0”时从描绘用光学元件AOMa射出的零次光(LBs)被镜M31反射,但以不向后续的透镜系统CG1入射的角度行进。此外,透镜系统CG1将从描绘用光学元件AOMa发散地射出的描绘光束在选择用光学元件AOM1的衍射部分会聚而成为光束腰。The light beam LBw incident on the beam switching component 20B passes through the focusing lens CG0 and is separated by the polarization beam splitter BS1 into a linear P-polarized light beam LBp and a linear S-polarized light beam LBs. The S-polarized light beam LBs, reflected by the polarization beam splitter BS1, is incident on the image drawing optical element AOMa. The light beam LBs incident on the image drawing optical element AOMa is converged by the focusing action of the focusing lens CG0 to form a beam waist within the image drawing optical element AOMa. The image drawing bit string data Sdw (DLn) shown in Figure 19 is applied to the image drawing optical element AOMa via the driver circuit DRVn. This image drawing bit string data Sdw is synthesized by combining the serial data DL1, DL3, and DL5 corresponding to the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, and U5, respectively. Therefore, when the depiction bit string data Sdw (DLn) is "1", the depiction optical element AOMa is in the On state, and the first-order diffracted light of the incident light beam LBs is emitted toward the mirror M31 as a deflected depiction light beam (an intensity-modulated light beam). The depiction light beam reflected by the mirror M31 passes through the lens system CG1 and is incident on the selection optical element AOM1. In addition, when the depiction bit string data Sdw (DLn) is "0", the zero-order light (LBs) emitted from the depiction optical element AOMa is reflected by the mirror M31, but travels at an angle that does not enter the subsequent lens system CG1. In addition, the lens system CG1 converges the depiction light beam divergently emitted from the depiction optical element AOMa at the diffraction part of the selection optical element AOM1 to form a beam waist.
从选择用光学元件AOM1透射过的描绘光束经由与透镜系统 CG1相同的透镜系统CG3而向选择用光学元件AOM3入射,从选择用光学元件AOM3透射过的描绘光束经由与透镜系统CG1相同的透镜系统CG5而向选择用光学元件AOM5入射。在图41中示出如下状态:三个选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM3、AOM5沿着光束光路直列地配置,仅其中的选择用光学元件AOM3为On状态,由描绘用光学元件AOMa强度调制后的描绘光束作为光束LB3向对应的扫描单元U3入射。此外,透镜系统CG1、CG3、CG5相当于将图26或图36中的一片准直透镜CL和一片聚光透镜CD组合。The drawing light beam transmitted through the selection optical element AOM1 enters the selection optical element AOM3 via lens system CG3, which is identical to lens system CG1. The drawing light beam transmitted through the selection optical element AOM3 enters the selection optical element AOM5 via lens system CG5, which is identical to lens system CG1. FIG41 illustrates a state in which the three selection optical elements AOM1, AOM3, and AOM5 are arranged in series along the beam path, with only the selection optical element AOM3 in the ON state. The drawing light beam, intensity-modulated by the drawing optical element AOMa, enters the corresponding scanning unit U3 as light beam LB3. Furthermore, the lens systems CG1, CG3, and CG5 are equivalent to a combination of a collimating lens CL and a focusing lens CD as shown in FIG26 or FIG36.
另一方面,从偏振光分束器BS1透射过的P偏振的光束LBp被镜M30反射而向描绘用光学元件AOMb入射。入射到描绘用光学元件AOMb的光束LBp通过聚光透镜CG0的聚光作用,以在描绘用光学元件AOMb内成为光束腰的方式收敛。在描绘用光学元件 AOMb中,经由驱动器电路DRVn而施加有图19所示那样的描绘位串数据Sdw(DLn)。描绘位串数据Sdw是将偶数号的扫描单元U2、 U4、U6各自所对应的串行数据DL2、DL4、DL6合成得到的。因此,描绘用光学元件AOMb在描绘位串数据Sdw(DLn)为“1”时,为 On状态,将入射的光束LBp的一次衍射光作为偏转的描绘光束(经强度调制的光束)而朝向镜M32射出。由镜M32反射的描绘光束从与透镜系统CG1相同的透镜系统CG2通过而向选择用光学元件 AOM2入射。另外,在描绘位串数据Sdw(DLn)为“0”时从描绘用光学元件AOMb射出的零次光(LBp)被镜M32反射,但以不向后续的透镜系统CG2入射的角度行进。此外,透镜系统CG2将从描绘用光学元件AOMb发散地射出的描绘光束在选择用光学元件AOM2 的衍射部分会聚而成为光束腰。On the other hand, the P-polarized light beam LBp transmitted through the polarization beam splitter BS1 is reflected by the mirror M30 and incident on the drawing optical element AOMb. The light beam LBp incident on the drawing optical element AOMb is converged by the focusing effect of the focusing lens CG0 to form a beam waist in the drawing optical element AOMb. In the drawing optical element AOMb, the drawing bit string data Sdw (DLn) shown in Figure 19 is applied via the driver circuit DRVn. The drawing bit string data Sdw is obtained by synthesizing the serial data DL2, DL4, and DL6 corresponding to the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, and U6. Therefore, when the drawing bit string data Sdw (DLn) is "1", the drawing optical element AOMb is in the On state, and the first diffracted light of the incident light beam LBp is emitted toward the mirror M32 as a deflected drawing light beam (an intensity-modulated light beam). The drawing light beam reflected by mirror M32 passes through lens system CG2, the same lens system as lens system CG1, and enters the selection optical element AOM2. Furthermore, when the drawing bit string data Sdw (DLn) is "0," the zero-order light (LBp) emitted from the drawing optical element AOMb is reflected by mirror M32, but travels at an angle that prevents it from entering the subsequent lens system CG2. Furthermore, lens system CG2 converges the drawing light beam, which diverges from the drawing optical element AOMb, at the diffracted portion of the selection optical element AOM2, forming a beam waist.
从选择用光学元件AOM2透射过的描绘光束经由与透镜系统 CG1相同的透镜系统CG4而向选择用光学元件AOM4入射,从选择用光学元件AOM4透射过的描绘光束经由与透镜系统CG1相同的透镜系统CG6而向选择用光学元件AOM6入射。在图41中,示出如下状态:三个选择用光学元件AOM2、AOM4、AOM6沿着光束光路直列地配置,仅其中的选择用光学元件AOM2为On状态,由描绘用光学元件AOMb强度调制后的描绘光束作为光束LB2向对应的扫描单元U2入射。此外,透镜系统CG2、CG4、CG6相当于将图26 或图36中的一片准直透镜CL和一片聚光透镜CD组合。The drawing light beam transmitted through the selection optical element AOM2 enters the selection optical element AOM4 via lens system CG4, which is identical to lens system CG1. The drawing light beam transmitted through the selection optical element AOM4 enters the selection optical element AOM6 via lens system CG6, which is identical to lens system CG1. Figure 41 shows the following state: the three selection optical elements AOM2, AOM4, and AOM6 are arranged in series along the beam optical path, with only the selection optical element AOM2 in the on state. The drawing light beam, intensity-modulated by the drawing optical element AOMb, enters the corresponding scanning unit U2 as light beam LB2. Furthermore, the lens systems CG2, CG4, and CG6 are equivalent to a combination of a collimating lens CL and a focusing lens CD as shown in Figures 26 or 36.
若使用以上的图41那样的光束切换部件(光束配送单元)20B,则能够通过偏振光分束器BS1将来自一个光源装置14’的光束LBw 分割成两束,并使从其一方的光束LBs通过描绘用光学元件AOMa 而生成的描绘光束(LB1、LB3、LB5)按顺序向奇数号的扫描单元 U1、U3、U5中的某一个入射,使从由偏振光分束器BS1分割的另一方的光束LBp通过描绘用光学元件AOMb而生成的描绘光束 (LB2、LB4、LB6)按顺序向偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6中的某一个入射。If a beam switching component (beam distribution unit) 20B as shown in Figure 41 above is used, the light beam LBw from a light source device 14' can be split into two beams by the polarization beam splitter BS1, and the light beam LBs from one side is passed through the drawing optical element AOMa to generate a drawing light beam (LB1, LB3, LB5) that is incident on one of the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5 in sequence, and the light beam LBp from the other side split by the polarization beam splitter BS1 is passed through the drawing optical element AOMb to generate a drawing light beam (LB2, LB4, LB6) that is incident on one of the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6 in sequence.
在该第6实施方式中,在通过偏振光分束器BS1将来自光源装置14’的光束LBw分割成两束后,以描绘用光学元件AOMa、AOMb 进行基于图案数据的光束LB的强度调制,因此,若将六个扫描单元 U1~U6各自的点光SP的强度在偏振光分束器BS1中的衰减设为 -50%,将在描绘用光学元件AOMa、AOMb和各选择用光学元件 AOMn中的衰减设为-20%,将在各扫描单元U1~U6内的衰减设为 -30%,则成为原来的光束LBw的强度(100%)的大约22.4%。但是,在六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/3以下、且使用来自一个光源装置14’的光束LBw的情况下,不会跳过多面镜PM的一个反射面RP地进行光束扫描,能够以六条描绘线 SLn分别进行基于点光SP的扫描实现的图案描绘。In this sixth embodiment, after the light beam LBw from the light source device 14' is split into two beams by the polarization beam splitter BS1, the intensity of the light beam LB is modulated based on the pattern data by the drawing optical elements AOMa and AOMb. Therefore, if the intensity of the spot light SP of each of the six scanning units U1 to U6 is attenuated to -50% in the polarization beam splitter BS1, -20% in the drawing optical elements AOMa and AOMb, and -30% within each scanning unit U1 to U6, the intensity is approximately 22.4% of the original intensity of the light beam LBw (100%). However, if the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM of each of the six scanning units U1 to U6 is less than 1/3 and the light beam LBw from a single light source device 14' is used, the beam scanning is performed without skipping over a single reflective surface RP of the polygon mirror PM, and pattern drawing can be performed using the scanning of the spot light SP on each of the six drawing lines SLn.
〔变形例1〕[Variant 1]
如第6实施方式那样,在向奇数号的选择用光学元件AOM1、 AOM3、AOM5入射的光束LBs与向偶数号的选择用光学元件 AOM2、AOM4、AOM6入射的光束LBp的偏振方向正交的情况下,需要将奇数号的选择用光学元件AOMn与偶数号的选择用光学元件 AOMn绕光束入射轴相对旋转90度地配置。图42示出例如将奇数号的选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM3、AOM5中的选择用光学元件 AOM3相对于偶数号的选择用光学元件AOMn旋转90度地配置的情况下的结构。选择用光学元件AOM3使通过了透镜系统CG3的S偏振的描绘光束入射,因此,衍射效率高的方向成为与XY平面平行的Y方向。即,以在选择用光学元件AOM3内生成的衍射光栅的周期方向成为Y方向的方式,将选择用光学元件AOM3旋转90度地配置。As in the sixth embodiment, when the polarization directions of the light beams LBs incident on the odd-numbered selective optical elements AOM1, AOM3, and AOM5 are orthogonal to the polarization directions of the light beams LBp incident on the even-numbered selective optical elements AOM2, AOM4, and AOM6, the odd-numbered selective optical elements AOMn and the even-numbered selective optical elements AOMn need to be arranged so as to be rotated 90 degrees relative to each other about the beam incidence axis. Figure 42 shows, for example, a configuration in which, among the odd-numbered selective optical elements AOM1, AOM3, and AOM5, selective optical element AOM3 is arranged so as to be rotated 90 degrees relative to the even-numbered selective optical element AOMn. Selective optical element AOM3 receives the S-polarized drawing beam that has passed through lens system CG3, so the direction of high diffraction efficiency is the Y direction, which is parallel to the XY plane. In other words, selective optical element AOM3 is arranged so as to rotate 90 degrees so that the periodic direction of the diffraction grating generated within selective optical element AOM3 is in the Y direction.
通过这样的选择用光学元件AOM3的配置,在选择用光学元件 AOM3为On状态时偏转地射出的光束LB3,相对于零次光的行进方向而向Y方向倾斜地行进。因此,设置以将光束LB3从零次光的光路分离且使光束LB3沿Z方向从支承部件IUB的开口部TH3通过的方式使来自选择用光学元件AOM3的光束LB3在XY平面内反射的镜IM3a、和使由被镜IM3a反射的光束LB3以通过开口部TH3的方式向-Z方向反射的镜IM3b。对于其他奇数号的选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM5各自,也同样地设置镜IM1a与IM1b的组、镜IM5a 与IM5b的组。而且,在图41的结构中,由于向描绘用光学元件 AOMa、AOMb入射的光束LBs、LBp的偏振方向正交,所以描绘用光学元件AOMa、AOMb以绕光束入射轴相对旋转90度的关系配置。With this configuration of the selection optical element AOM3, the deflected light beam LB3 emitted when the selection optical element AOM3 is in the "on" state travels obliquely in the Y direction relative to the direction of travel of the zero-order light. Therefore, a mirror IM3a is provided to separate the light beam LB3 from the optical path of the zero-order light and reflect the light beam LB3 from the selection optical element AOM3 within the XY plane, allowing the light beam LB3 to pass through the opening TH3 of the support member IUB in the Z direction. A mirror IM3b is also provided to reflect the light beam LB3 reflected by the mirror IM3a in the -Z direction, allowing the light beam LB3 to pass through the opening TH3. Similarly, a pair of mirrors IM1a and IM1b and a pair of mirrors IM5a and IM5b are provided for the other odd-numbered selection optical elements AOM1 and AOM5. Moreover, in the structure of Figure 41, since the polarization directions of the light beams LBs and LBp incident on the drawing optical elements AOMa and AOMb are orthogonal, the drawing optical elements AOMa and AOMb are arranged in a relationship of being relatively rotated 90 degrees around the beam incident axis.
但是,在使图41中的偏振光分束器BS1为振幅分割的分束器或半反射镜的情况下,若使光束LBw的偏振方向仅为一个方向(例如 P偏振),则不需要使描绘用光学元件AOMa、AOMb中的一方、奇数号的选择用光学元件AOMn和偶数号的选择用光学元件AOMn中的一方如图42那样相对旋转90度地配置。However, when the polarization beam splitter BS1 in FIG41 is an amplitude-splitting beam splitter or a half-mirror, if the polarization direction of the light beam LBw is set to only one direction (for example, P polarization), there is no need to rotate one of the depicting optical elements AOMa, AOMb, the odd-numbered selection optical element AOMn, and one of the even-numbered selection optical elements AOMn relative to each other by 90 degrees as shown in FIG42.
〔变形例2〕[Variant 2]
在第6实施方式中,构成为六个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6 各自所对应的扫描单元U1~U6全部能够按多面镜PM的全部反射面 RP而进行点光SP的沿着各条描绘线SL1~SL6的扫描。因此,以入射按顺序通过奇数号的选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM3、AOM5而来的光束(由描绘用光学元件AOMa调制后的光束)的方式,在图41 的选择用光学元件AOM5与吸收体TR2之间,进一步直列地设置三个选择用光学元件AOM7、AOM9、AOM11,以入射按顺序通过偶数号的选择用光学元件AOM2、AOM4、AOM6而来的光束(由描绘用光学元件AOMb调制后的光束)的方式,在选择用光学元件AOM6 与吸收体TR1之间,进一步直列地设置三个选择用光学元件AOM8、 AOM10、AOM12。而且,增设供选择用光学元件AOM7~AOM12各自所偏转(切换)后的光束LB7~LB12导入的六个扫描单元U7~U12,从而在基板FS的宽度方向(Y方向)上配置共计12个扫描单元 U1~U12。由此,能够进行12条描绘线SL1~SL12的接合描绘曝光,能够将Y方向的最大曝光宽度扩大成2倍。In the sixth embodiment, the scanning units U1 to U6 corresponding to the six selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 are all capable of scanning the point light SP along the respective drawing lines SL1 to SL6 according to all the reflection surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM. Therefore, in order to receive the light beams (light beams modulated by the drawing optical element AOMa) that pass through the odd-numbered selective optical elements AOM1, AOM3, and AOM5 in sequence, three selective optical elements AOM7, AOM9, and AOM11 are further arranged in series between the selective optical element AOM5 and the absorber TR2 in FIG. 41 , and in order to receive the light beams (light beams modulated by the drawing optical element AOMb) that pass through the even-numbered selective optical elements AOM2, AOM4, and AOM6 in sequence, three selective optical elements AOM8, AOM10, and AOM12 are further arranged in series between the selective optical element AOM6 and the absorber TR1. Furthermore, six scanning units U7 to U12 are added to guide the light beams LB7 to LB12 deflected (switched) by the selective optical elements AOM7 to AOM12, respectively. This results in a total of 12 scanning units U1 to U12 arranged across the width (Y) direction of the substrate FS. This enables combined drawing exposure for 12 drawing lines SL1 to SL12, doubling the maximum exposure width in the Y direction.
该情况下,在扫描单元U1~U12各自的多面镜PM的扫描效率为 1/3以下时,被分组为第1描绘模块的奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、 U5、U7、U9、U11及被分组为第2描绘模块的偶数号的扫描单元 U2、U4、U6、U8、U10、U12均每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP 地使光束LBn进行扫描。像这样,即使在基板FS的Y方向的宽度变大的情况下,仅通过追加扫描单元U7~U12、选择用光学元件 AOM7~AOM12等,就能够对较大的曝光区域W(图5、图25)进行图案描绘。像这样,增设六个扫描单元U7~U12和选择用光学元件AOM7~AOM12而成为12个扫描单元U1~U12的结构,能够同样地适用于先前的第5实施方式(图36~图38)中说明的使用两个光源装置14A’,14B’的情况。In this case, when the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM of each of the scanning units U1-U12 is less than 1/3, the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5, U7, U9, and U11 grouped as the first drawing module and the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6, U8, U10, and U12 grouped as the second drawing module all scan the light beam LBn across every reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. In this way, even if the Y-direction width of the substrate FS increases, pattern drawing can be performed on a larger exposure area W (Figures 5 and 25) simply by adding scanning units U7-U12 and selecting optical elements AOM7-AOM12. In this way, the structure of adding six scanning units U7~U12 and selecting optical elements AOM7~AOM12 to become 12 scanning units U1~U12 can be similarly applied to the situation of using two light source devices 14A', 14B' described in the previous fifth embodiment (Figures 36 to 38).
〔变形例3〕[Variant 3]
图43示出变形例3的基板FS的搬送形态与扫描单元Un(描绘线SLn)的配置关系,在此,如变形例2那样设置12个扫描单元 U1~U12,并以各扫描单元Un的描绘线SL1~SL12能够在Y方向上接合描绘曝光的方式配置在旋转筒DR上。另外,将图23所示的基板搬送机构12中的旋转筒DR和各种辊R1~R3、RT1、RT2等的旋转轴方向(Y方向)上的长度设为Hd,将通过12个扫描单元Un的接合描绘而能够曝光的Y方向上的最大扫描宽度设为Sh(Sh<Hd),将能够曝光的基板FS0的最大支承宽度设为Tf。变形例3中的12 条描绘线SL1~SL12各自所对应的12个扫描单元U1~U12分别构成为从如图41(第6实施方式)那样用分束器、半反射镜将来自一个光源装置14’的光束LBw分割为二的方式的光束切换部件(光束配送单元)20B、或者从如图38(第5实施方式)那样使用来自两个光源装置14A’、14B’各自的光束LBa、LBb的方式的光束切换部件 (光束配送单元)20A,分时地入射对应的12个光束LB1~LB12。因此,在例如各描绘线SL1~SL12的Y方向的长度为50mm的情况下,最大扫描宽度Sh成为600mm,作为一例,能够使成为最大支承宽度Tf的基板FS0的宽度为650mm,使旋转筒DR的长度Hd为 700mm左右。FIG43 shows the relationship between the transport configuration of the substrate FS and the arrangement of the scanning units Un (drawing lines SLn) in Modification 3. Here, as in Modification 2, 12 scanning units U1 to U12 are provided and arranged on the rotating drum DR so that the drawing lines SL1 to SL12 of each scanning unit Un can be joined and drawn and exposed in the Y direction. Furthermore, the length of the rotating drum DR and the various rollers R1 to R3, RT1, RT2, etc. in the substrate transport mechanism 12 shown in FIG23 in the direction of the rotation axis (Y direction) is denoted as Hd, the maximum scanning width in the Y direction that can be exposed by the joined drawing of the 12 scanning units Un is denoted as Sh (Sh < Hd), and the maximum support width of the substrate FS0 that can be exposed is denoted as Tf. In Modification 3, the twelve scanning units U1-U12 corresponding to the twelve drawing lines SL1-SL12 are each configured to receive the twelve corresponding light beams LB1-LB12 in a time-division manner from a beam switching component (beam distribution unit) 20B that splits the light beam LBw from a single light source device 14' into two using a beam splitter and a half-mirror, as shown in FIG41 (Sixth Embodiment), or from a beam switching component (beam distribution unit) 20A that uses the light beams LBa and LBb from two light source devices 14A' and 14B', as shown in FIG38 (Fifth Embodiment). Therefore, for example, if the length of each drawing line SL1-SL12 in the Y direction is 50 mm, the maximum scanning width Sh is 600 mm. As an example, the width of the substrate FS0, which constitutes the maximum support width Tf, can be 650 mm, and the length Hd of the rotating drum DR can be approximately 700 mm.
在通过图43那样的描绘装置进行与最大支承宽度Tf相同的宽度的基板FS0的曝光的情况下,除了先前的图24、图25所示的四个对准显微镜AM1~AM4(观察区域Vw1~Vw4)以外,在Y方向上增设三个对准显微镜AM5~AM7(观察区域Vw5~Vw7)。该情况下,位于基板FS0的宽度方向两侧的对准显微镜AM1(观察区域Vw1) 和对准显微镜AM7(观察区域Vw7)检测在基板FS0的两侧沿X方向以一定间距形成的对准标记。另外,对准显微镜AM4(观察区域 Vw4)以位于最大支承宽度Tf的大致中央的方式配置。When exposing a substrate FS0 having the same width as the maximum support width Tf using a drawing apparatus such as that shown in FIG43 , in addition to the four alignment microscopes AM1 to AM4 (observation areas Vw1 to Vw4) shown in FIG24 and FIG25 , three additional alignment microscopes AM5 to AM7 (observation areas Vw5 to Vw7) are provided in the Y direction. In this case, alignment microscope AM1 (observation area Vw1) and alignment microscope AM7 (observation area Vw7), located on either side of the width of the substrate FS0, detect alignment marks formed at regular intervals along the X direction on both sides of the substrate FS0. Furthermore, alignment microscope AM4 (observation area Vw4) is positioned approximately in the center of the maximum support width Tf.
另外,在能够通过先前的各实施方式中说明那样的六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的描绘线SL1~SL6在曝光区域W上进行图案描绘的基板FS1的情况下,其宽度Tf1为旋转筒DR的最大支承宽度Tf的一半左右,因此,基板FS1例如靠旋转筒DR的外周面的-Y方向侧被搬送。此时,基板FS1上的对准标记MK1~MK4(图25)各自能够由四个对准显微镜AM1~AM4的各观察区域Vw1~Vw4检测。而且,在基板FS1的曝光的情况下,由于仅使用六个扫描单元U1~U6即可,所以扫描单元U1~U6各自无论是在按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的模式下,还是在每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的模式下,均能够进行沿着各描绘线 SL1~SL6的点扫描。In addition, in the case of a substrate FS1 on which a pattern can be drawn on the exposure area W by the respective drawing lines SL1 to SL6 of the six scanning units U1 to U6 as described in the previous embodiments, its width Tf1 is approximately half of the maximum support width Tf of the rotating drum DR. Therefore, the substrate FS1 is transported, for example, on the -Y direction side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum DR. At this time, the alignment marks MK1 to MK4 (Figure 25) on the substrate FS1 can be detected by the observation areas Vw1 to Vw4 of the four alignment microscopes AM1 to AM4. Moreover, in the case of exposing the substrate FS1, since only six scanning units U1 to U6 are used, the scanning units U1 to U6 can each perform point scanning along each drawing line SL1 to SL6, whether in a mode of beam scanning at each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM or in a mode of beam scanning at every reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM.
例如,在如第5实施方式那样设定成同时使用来自两个光源装置14A’、14B’各自的光束LBa、LBb的情况下,以来自光源装置14A’的光束LBa直列地从奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5、U7、U9、U11 各自所对应的选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM3、AOM5、AOM7、AOM9、AOM11透射的方式,在光束切换部件20A内分组,以来自光源装置14A’的光束LBa直列地从偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6、 U8、U10、U12各自所对应的选择用光学元件AOM2、AOM4、AOM6、 AOM8、AOM10、AOM12透射的方式,在光束切换部件20A内分组。而且,在基板FS1的曝光时,以仅基于按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP输出的三个原点信号SZ1、SZ3、SZ5,按照奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5的顺序反复进行按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的方式进行控制,以仅基于按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP输出的三个原点信号SZ2、SZ4、SZ6,按照偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6的顺序反复进行按多面镜PM的连续的每个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的方式进行控制。For example, when it is set to use the light beams LBa and LBb from the two light source devices 14A’ and 14B’ at the same time as in the fifth embodiment, the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A’ is grouped in the light beam switching component 20A in a manner that the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A’ is transmitted in series from the selection optical elements AOM1, AOM3, AOM5, AOM7, AOM9, AOM11 corresponding to the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5, U7, U9, U11, and the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A’ is grouped in the light beam switching component 20A in a manner that the light beam LBa from the light source device 14A’ is transmitted in series from the selection optical elements AOM2, AOM4, AOM6, AOM8, AOM10, AOM12 corresponding to the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6, U8, U10, U12. Moreover, during the exposure of the substrate FS1, the exposure is controlled in a manner that light beam scanning is repeatedly performed on each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM in the order of odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5, based only on the three origin signals SZ1, SZ3, SZ5 output from each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM; and the exposure is controlled in a manner that light beam scanning is repeatedly performed on each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM in the order of even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6, based only on the three origin signals SZ2, SZ4, SZ6 output from each continuous reflection surface RP of the polygonal mirror PM.
而且,在对具有小于最大支承宽度Tf且大于基板FS1的宽度Tf1 的宽度Tf2的基板FS2进行曝光的情况下,使基板FS2与旋转筒DR 的最大支承宽度Tf的中央部分对合而进行搬送。此时,基板FS2上的曝光区域W能够由在Y方向上连接的八个扫描单元U3~U10各自的描绘线SL3~SL10描绘。该情况下,以入射来自光源装置14A’的光束LBa(经强度调制的光束)的奇数号的四个选择用光学元件 AOM3、AOM5、AOM7、AOM9分时地按顺序生成光束LB3、LB5、 LB7、LB9中的某一个、入射来自光源装置14B’的光束LBb(经强度调制的光束)的偶数号的四个选择用光学元件AOM4、AOM6、 AOM8、AOM10分时地按顺序生成光束LB4、LB6、LB8、LB10中的某一个的方式进行控制。因此,至少八个扫描单元U3~U10各自被设定成每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行光束扫描的模式。Furthermore, when exposing a substrate FS2 having a width Tf2 smaller than the maximum support width Tf and larger than the width Tf1 of the substrate FS1, the substrate FS2 is conveyed so as to align with the center portion of the maximum support width Tf of the rotating drum DR. At this time, the exposure area W on the substrate FS2 can be drawn by the drawing lines SL3 to SL10 of the eight scanning units U3 to U10 connected in the Y direction. In this case, control is performed so that the four odd-numbered selection optical elements AOM3, AOM5, AOM7, and AOM9, which receive the light beam LBa (intensity-modulated light beam) from the light source device 14A', sequentially generate one of the light beams LB3, LB5, LB7, and LB9 in time-sharing order, and the four even-numbered selection optical elements AOM4, AOM6, AOM8, and AOM10, which receive the light beam LBb (intensity-modulated light beam) from the light source device 14B', sequentially generate one of the light beams LB4, LB6, LB8, and LB10 in time-sharing order. Therefore, each of the at least eight scanning units U3 to U10 is set in a mode of performing light beam scanning on every reflecting surface RP of the polygon mirror PM.
而且,在基板FS2的曝光时,以仅基于奇数号的扫描单元U3、 U5、U7、U9各自的每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP输出的四个副原点信号ZP3、ZP5、ZP7、ZP9,按照奇数号的扫描单元U3、U5、 U7、U9的顺序反复进行每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的方式进行控制,以仅基于偶数号的扫描单元U4、U6、U8、 U10各自的每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP输出的四个副原点信号 ZP4、ZP6、ZP8、ZP10,按照偶数号的扫描单元U4、U6、U8、U10 的顺序反复进行每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行的光束扫描的方式进行控制。此外,在图43中,形成在基板FS2上的宽度方向两侧的对准标记(相当于图25中的对准标记MK1、MK4)以能够在对准显微镜AM2、AM6的各观察区域Vw2、Vw6中检测到的关系配置,但根据曝光区域W的Y方向的尺寸,也存在不必以这种关系配置的情况。该情况下,只要将七个对准显微镜AM1~AM7中的若干个设为能够沿Y方向移动的结构,并能够调整观察区域Vw1~Vw7 的Y方向上的位置间隔即可。Moreover, during the exposure of the substrate FS2, the exposure is controlled in a manner that the light beam scanning is repeatedly performed on every reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM in the order of the odd-numbered scanning units U3, U5, U7, U9 based on the four sub-origin signals ZP3, ZP5, ZP7, and ZP9 outputted from every reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM only by the odd-numbered scanning units U3, U5, U7, and U9; and the exposure is controlled in a manner that the light beam scanning is repeatedly performed on every reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM in the order of the even-numbered scanning units U4, U6, U8, and U10 based on the four sub-origin signals ZP4, ZP6, ZP8, and ZP10 outputted from every reflection surface RP of the polygon mirror PM only by the even-numbered scanning units U4, U6, U8, and U10. In addition, in FIG43 , the alignment marks formed on both sides of the substrate FS2 in the width direction (equivalent to the alignment marks MK1 and MK4 in FIG25 ) are arranged so as to be detectable in the observation areas Vw2 and Vw6 of the alignment microscopes AM2 and AM6, respectively. However, depending on the size of the exposure area W in the Y direction, there is a case where it is not necessary to arrange them in such a relationship. In this case, it is sufficient to configure some of the seven alignment microscopes AM1 to AM7 to be movable in the Y direction so that the positional spacing of the observation areas Vw1 to Vw7 in the Y direction can be adjusted.
根据以上的变形例3,能够根据要进行曝光的基板FS的宽度和/ 或曝光区域W的Y方向的尺寸来进行仅使用必要的扫描单元Un的高效率的曝光。另外,在图43那样12个扫描单元U1~U12各自的多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/3以下的情况下,例如,只要每隔各多面镜PM的三个反射面RP进行光束扫描,则即使是来自一个光源装置 14’的光束,也能够在最大扫描宽度Sh的范围内良好地进行图案描绘。According to the above modification example 3, it is possible to perform highly efficient exposure using only the necessary scanning units Un according to the width of the substrate FS to be exposed and/or the Y-direction size of the exposure area W. In addition, when the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM of each of the 12 scanning units U1 to U12 is 1/3 or less as shown in FIG43 , for example, as long as the light beam is scanned every three reflecting surfaces RP of each polygon mirror PM, even a light beam from a single light source device 14' can well depict a pattern within the range of the maximum scanning width Sh.
另外,在由九个扫描单元U1~U9构成描绘装置的情况下,使用奇数号的五个扫描单元U1、U3、U5、U7、U9和偶数号的四个扫描单元U2、U4、U6、U8。因此,在通过九个扫描单元U1~U9全部的描绘线SL1~SL9在曝光区域W上进行图案描绘时,在多面镜PM的扫描效率为1/3以下的情况下,例如,只要每隔各多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行光束扫描即可。但是,该情况下,只要反复按顺序仅参照从奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5、U7、U9各自的原点信号SZn 生成的副原点信号ZP1、ZP3、ZP5、ZP7、ZP9,来进行奇数号的描绘线SL1、SL3、SL5、SL7、SL9各自上的点扫描,反复按顺序仅参照从偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6、U8各自的原点信号SZn生成的副原点信号ZP2、ZP4、ZP6、ZP8,来进行偶数号的描绘线SL2、 SL4、SL6、SL8各自上的点扫描即可。Furthermore, when the drawing device is composed of nine scanning units U1 to U9, the five odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5, U7, and U9 and the four even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6, and U8 are used. Therefore, when the pattern is drawn on the exposure area W along all the drawing lines SL1 to SL9 by the nine scanning units U1 to U9, if the scanning efficiency of the polygon mirror PM is 1/3 or less, for example, it is sufficient to perform light beam scanning on each reflecting surface RP of each polygon mirror PM. However, in this case, it is sufficient to repeatedly scan the points on the odd-numbered drawing lines SL1, SL3, SL5, SL7, SL9 by referring only to the sub-origin signals ZP1, ZP3, ZP5, ZP7, ZP9 generated from the respective origin signals SZn of the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5, U7, U9, and repeatedly scan the points on the even-numbered drawing lines SL2, SL4, SL6, SL8 by referring only to the sub-origin signals ZP2, ZP4, ZP6, ZP8 generated from the respective origin signals SZn of the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6, U8.
以上,在变形例3中,提供一种图案描绘方法,使用描绘装置,在该描绘装置中,将使来自光源装置14’的光束的点光SP沿着描绘线SLn进行扫描的多个扫描单元Un配置成由各描绘线SLn描绘的图案在基板FS上沿描绘线SLn的方向(主扫描方向)接合,使多个扫描单元和基板FS在与主扫描方向交叉的副扫描方向上相对移动,该图案描绘方法包含:在多个扫描单元Un中,选定与基板FS的在主扫描方向上的宽度、或与基板FS上的要进行图案描绘的曝光区域的在主扫描方向上的宽度、或与该曝光区域的位置对应的特定的扫描单元;以及经由对来自光源装置14’的光束进行配送的光束配送单元,将基于特定的扫描单元各自所要描绘的图案数据而进行了强度调制的光束择一地依次供给到特定的扫描单元的每一个。由此,在变形例3中,即使基板FS的宽度改变、基板FS上的曝光区域W的宽度或位置改变,通过适当地确定基板FS的Y方向的搬送位置,也能够进行维持了高接合精度的精密的图案描绘。此外,此时,也可以并非在多个扫描单元全部的多面镜PM之间使旋转速度和旋转角度相位同步,而是仅在有助于图案描绘的特定的扫描单元的多面镜 PM之间使旋转速度和旋转角度相位同步。As described above, in variant example 3, a pattern drawing method is provided, using a drawing device, in which a plurality of scanning units Un that scan the point light SP of the light beam from the light source device 14' along the drawing line SLn are configured so that the pattern drawn by each drawing line SLn is joined along the direction of the drawing line SLn (main scanning direction) on the substrate FS, and the plurality of scanning units and the substrate FS are moved relative to each other in a sub-scanning direction intersecting the main scanning direction. The pattern drawing method includes: selecting a specific scanning unit among the plurality of scanning units Un that corresponds to the width of the substrate FS in the main scanning direction, or the width of the exposure area on the substrate FS to be patterned in the main scanning direction, or the position of the exposure area; and selectively supplying a light beam that has been intensity-modulated based on the pattern data to be drawn by each specific scanning unit to each of the specific scanning units in sequence via a light beam distribution unit that distributes the light beam from the light source device 14'. Thus, in Modification 3, even if the width of the substrate FS changes or the width or position of the exposure area W on the substrate FS changes, precise pattern drawing with high bonding accuracy can be performed by appropriately determining the transport position of the substrate FS in the Y direction. In addition, in this case, the rotation speed and rotation angle phase can be synchronized not between all the polygon mirrors PM of the multiple scanning units, but only between the polygon mirrors PM of the specific scanning units that contribute to pattern drawing.
〔变形例4〕[Variant 4]
而且,作为使用九个扫描单元U1~U9的描绘装置的其他结构,也能够不按奇数号和偶数号分组,而单纯地按照扫描单元Un排列的顺序分成两组。即,也可以分成基于六个扫描单元U1~U6所成的第 1扫描模块、和基于三个扫描单元U7~U9所成的第2扫描模块,对第1扫描模块供给来自第1光源装置14A’的光束LBa,对第2扫描模块供给来自第2光源装置14B’的光束LBb。该情况下,若多面镜 PM的扫描效率(α/β)为1/4<(α/β)≤1/3,则第1扫描模块内的六个扫描单元U1~U6各自与先前的第4实施方式(图33)同样地,通过每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP进行的光束扫描,进行点光 SP的沿着各描绘线SL1~SL6的扫描。Furthermore, as another configuration of a drawing device using nine scanning units U1-U9, the drawing device can be divided into two groups, not by odd-numbered and even-numbered groups, but simply by the order in which the scanning units Un are arranged. Specifically, the drawing device can be divided into a first scanning module composed of six scanning units U1-U6 and a second scanning module composed of three scanning units U7-U9, with the first scanning module supplied with light beam LBa from the first light source device 14A' and the second scanning module supplied with light beam LBb from the second light source device 14B'. In this case, if the scanning efficiency (α/β) of the polygon mirror PM satisfies 1/4 < (α/β) ≤ 1/3, each of the six scanning units U1-U6 within the first scanning module scans the spot light SP along each drawing line SL1-SL6 by scanning the beam every time one of the reflecting surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM, similar to the fourth embodiment ( FIG. 33 ).
与之相对,第2扫描模块内的三个扫描单元U7~U9各自能够按多面镜PM的全部反射面RP的每一个进行光束扫描。因此,若三个扫描单元U7~U9各自直接按多面镜PM的全部反射面RP的每一个进行光束扫描,则点光SP在六个扫描单元U1~U6各自的各描绘线 SL1~SL6中的扫描的反复时间间隔ΔTc1与点光SP在三个扫描单元 U7~U9各自的各描绘线SL7~SL9中的扫描的反复时间间隔ΔTc2成为ΔTc1=2ΔTc2的关系,通过描绘线SL1~SL6在基板FS上描绘的图案与通过描绘线SL7~SL9在基板FS上描绘的图案变得不同,无法进行良好的接合曝光。In contrast, the three scanning units U7 to U9 in the second scanning module can each perform light beam scanning on each of the reflection surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM. Therefore, if the three scanning units U7 to U9 each directly perform light beam scanning on each of the reflection surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM, the repetitive time interval ΔTc1 of the scanning of the point light SP on each of the drawing lines SL1 to SL6 of the six scanning units U1 to U6 and the repetitive time interval ΔTc2 of the scanning of the point light SP on each of the drawing lines SL7 to SL9 of the three scanning units U7 to U9 will be in the relationship of ΔTc1 = 2ΔTc2. The pattern drawn on the substrate FS by the drawing lines SL1 to SL6 and the pattern drawn on the substrate FS by the drawing lines SL7 to SL9 will become different, and good joint exposure cannot be performed.
因此,在能够按多面镜PM的全部反射面RP的每一个进行光束扫描的三个扫描单元U7~U9各自中,也以进行每隔多面镜PM的一个反射面RP的光束扫描的方式进行控制。这样的控制能够通过以下动作实现:将从扫描单元U7~U9各自产生的原点信号SZ7~SZ9向图31的电路或图38中的副原点生成电路CAan等输入而生成副原点信号ZP7~ZP9;响应于该副原点信号ZP7~ZP9而使对应的选择用光学元件AOM7~AOM9分别依次成为一定时间Ton的On状态,并且将要用描绘线SL7~SL9各自描绘的图案所对应的描绘用的串行数据 DL7~DL9分别依次向第2光源装置14B’内的电光学元件206的驱动电路206a送出。Therefore, each of the three scanning units U7-U9, which can perform light beam scanning on each of the reflective surfaces RP of the polygon mirror PM, is controlled so as to perform light beam scanning on each reflective surface RP of the polygon mirror PM. This control can be achieved by inputting the origin signals SZ7-SZ9 generated by the scanning units U7-U9 into the circuit of FIG31 or the sub-origin generating circuit CAan of FIG38 to generate sub-origin signals ZP7-ZP9. In response to the sub-origin signals ZP7-ZP9, the corresponding selection optical elements AOM7-AOM9 are sequentially turned on for a predetermined time Ton, and the drawing serial data DL7-DL9 corresponding to the patterns to be drawn by the drawing lines SL7-SL9 are sequentially transmitted to the driving circuit 206a of the electro-optical element 206 in the second light source device 14B'.
〔变形例5〕[Variant 5]
图44示出变形例5的选择用光学元件AOMn的驱动器电路 DRVn的结构。如在先前的各实施方式和变形例中说明那样,在多个扫描单元Un各自每隔多面镜PM的一个以上的反射面RP进行光束扫描的情况下,从光源装置14’(14A’、14B’)射出的光束LB(LBa、 LBb)、从描绘用光学元件AOMa、AOMb射出的光束LBs、LBp,从沿着其光路配置的多个选择用光学元件AOMn透射。在图44中,光束LB在从选择用光学元件AOM1、AOM2透射后,被选择用光学元件AOM3切换,而产生了朝向扫描单元U3的光束LB3。通常,选择用光学元件AOMn内的光学材料相对于紫外波段的光束LB(例如波长355nm)具有比较高的透射率,但具有几%程度的衰减率。FIG44 illustrates the structure of a driver circuit DRVn for the selective optical element AOMn of Modification 5. As described in the previous embodiments and modifications, when the plurality of scanning units Un each perform light beam scanning on one or more reflective surfaces RP of the polygonal mirror PM, the light beams LB (LBa, LBb) emitted from the light source device 14' (14A', 14B') and the light beams LBs and LBp emitted from the drawing optical elements AOMa and AOMb pass through the plurality of selective optical elements AOMn arranged along their optical paths. In FIG44 , after passing through the selective optical elements AOM1 and AOM2, the light beam LB is switched by the selective optical element AOM3, generating a light beam LB3 directed toward the scanning unit U3. Generally, the optical material within the selective optical element AOMn has a relatively high transmittance for the light beam LB in the ultraviolet band (e.g., a wavelength of 355 nm), but has an attenuation rate of several percent.
在将各个选择用光学元件AOMn的透射率设为95%的情况下,在如图44那样选择用光学元件AOM3成为On状态时,向选择用光学元件AOM3入射的光束LB的强度承受基于两个选择用光学元件 AOM1、AOM2导致的衰减,因此相对于向选择用光学元件AOM1 入射的原来的光束强度(100%)而成为大约90%(0.952)。而且,在六个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6相连的情况下,向最后的选择用光学元件AOM6入射的光束LB的强度受到基于五个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM5导致的衰减,因此相对于原来的光束强度(100%) 而成为约77%(0.955)。When the transmittance of each selective optical element AOMn is set to 95%, when the selective optical element AOM3 is in the On state as shown in Figure 44, the intensity of the light beam LB incident on the selective optical element AOM3 is attenuated by the two selective optical elements AOM1 and AOM2, and thus becomes approximately 90% ( 0.952 ) of the original light beam intensity (100%) incident on the selective optical element AOM1. Furthermore, when the six selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 are connected, the intensity of the light beam LB incident on the last selective optical element AOM6 is attenuated by the five selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM5, and thus becomes approximately 77% ( 0.955 ) of the original light beam intensity (100%).
由此,向六个选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6各自入射的光束LB 的强度按顺序为100%、95%、90%、85%、81%、77%。这意味着由选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6各自偏转而射出的光束LB1~LB6 的强度也以该比率逐步改变。因此,在本变形例5中,在图38所示的多个选择用光学元件AOMn各自的驱动器电路DRVn中,调整选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6的驱动条件,控制成使光束LB1~LB6 的强度的变动减少。As a result, the intensities of the light beams LB incident on each of the six selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 are, in order, 100%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 81%, and 77%. This means that the intensities of the light beams LB1 to LB6 deflected and emitted by the selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 also change gradually at these ratios. Therefore, in this fifth variation, the driver circuits DRVn for each of the multiple selective optical elements AOMn shown in FIG38 adjust the drive conditions for the selective optical elements AOM1 to AOM6 to minimize fluctuations in the intensities of the light beams LB1 to LB6.
在图44中,由于驱动器电路DRV1~DRV6(DRV5、DRV6省略图示)均为相同结构,所以仅对驱动器电路DRV1进行详细说明。如先前的图38所示,在驱动器电路DRV1~DRV6各自中输入有对选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6(在图44中,省略AOM5、AOM6的图示)各自的On状态的On时间Ton进行设定的信息和副原点信号ZP1~ZP6。另外,在图44的结构中,共通地设有用于向选择用光学元件AOM1~AOM6各自施加超声波的高频发送源400。驱动器电路 DRV1具备:接受来自高频发送源400的高频信号并高速地切换是否传递至将其放大成高电压振幅的放大器402的切换元件401;基于设定On时间Ton的信息和副原点信号ZP1来控制切换元件401的开闭的逻辑电路403;和调整放大器402的放大率(增益)来调整向选择用光学元件AOM1施加的高压的高频信号的振幅的增益调整器 404。In FIG44 , since driver circuits DRV1 through DRV6 (DRV5 and DRV6 are omitted from illustration) all have the same structure, only driver circuit DRV1 will be described in detail. As previously shown in FIG38 , each driver circuit DRV1 through DRV6 receives inputs for setting the on-time Ton of each of the selective optical elements AOM1 through AOM6 (AOM5 and AOM6 are omitted from illustration in FIG44 ) and sub-origin signals ZP1 through ZP6. Furthermore, the structure of FIG44 also shares a high-frequency transmission source 400 for applying ultrasonic waves to each of the selective optical elements AOM1 through AOM6. The driver circuit DRV1 comprises: a switching element 401 that receives a high-frequency signal from a high-frequency transmission source 400 and switches at high speed whether to transmit the signal to an amplifier 402 that amplifies the signal to a high-voltage amplitude; a logic circuit 403 that controls the opening and closing of the switching element 401 based on information of a set On time Ton and a sub-origin signal ZP1; and a gain adjuster 404 that adjusts the amplification factor (gain) of the amplifier 402 to adjust the amplitude of the high-voltage high-frequency signal applied to the selection optical element AOM1.
若向选择用光学元件AOM1施加的高压的高频信号的振幅在容许范围内改变,则能够微调选择用光学元件AOM1的衍射效率,改变偏转而射出的光束LB1(一次衍射光)的强度。因此,在本变形例5中,以按照从接近光源装置14’那一侧的选择用光学元件AOM1 的驱动器电路DRV1向远离光源装置14’那一侧的选择用光学元件 AOM6的驱动器电路DRV6的顺序使向各选择用光学元件AOMn施加的高压的高频信号的振幅变高的方式,调整增益调整器404。例如,将向光束LB的光路的终端的选择用光学元件AOM6施加的高压的高频信号的振幅设定成衍射效率最高的值Va6,将向光束LB的光路的最初的选择用光学元件AOM1施加的高压的高频信号的振幅设定成在容许范围内衍射效率成为降低状态的值Va1。向其间的选择用光学元件AOM2~AOM5施加的高压的高频信号的振幅Va2~Va5被设定成Va1<Va2<Va3<Va4<Va5<Va6。If the amplitude of the high-voltage, high-frequency signal applied to the selective optical element AOM1 changes within an allowable range, the diffraction efficiency of the selective optical element AOM1 can be fine-tuned, thereby changing the intensity of the deflected and emitted light beam LB1 (primary diffracted light). Therefore, in this fifth modification, the gain adjuster 404 is adjusted so that the amplitude of the high-voltage, high-frequency signal applied to each selective optical element AOMn increases in order from the driver circuit DRV1 of the selective optical element AOM1 on the side closest to the light source device 14' to the driver circuit DRV6 of the selective optical element AOM6 on the side farther from the light source device 14'. For example, the amplitude of the high-voltage, high-frequency signal applied to the selective optical element AOM6 at the end of the optical path of the light beam LB is set to a value Va6 at which the diffraction efficiency is maximized, while the amplitude of the high-voltage, high-frequency signal applied to the selective optical element AOM1 at the beginning of the optical path of the light beam LB is set to a value Va1 at which the diffraction efficiency is reduced within the allowable range. Amplitudes Va2 to Va5 of the high-voltage, high-frequency signals applied to the selective optical elements AOM2 to AOM5 therebetween are set to satisfy Va1 < Va2 < Va3 < Va4 < Va5 < Va6 .
通过以上设定,能够缓和或抑制从六个选择用光学元件 AOM1~AOM6各自射出的光束LB1~LB6的强度偏差。由此,能够抑制由各描绘线SL1~SL6各自描绘的图案的曝光量的偏差,能够进行高精度的图案描绘。此外,不需要使由各驱动器电路DRV1~DRV6 设定的高压的高频信号的振幅Va1~Va6按顺序依次变大,也可以是例如Va1=Va2<Va3=Va4<Va5=Va6的关系。另外,按各扫描单元 U1~U6来调整成为点光SP的描绘用的光束LB1~LB6的强度的方式除了变形例5的方法以外,也可以是在各扫描单元U1~U6内的光路中设置具有规定的透射率的减光过滤片(ND过滤片)的方法。The above settings can mitigate or suppress variations in the intensity of the light beams LB1 to LB6 emitted from the six selection optical elements AOM1 to AOM6. This can suppress variations in the exposure of the patterns drawn by the drawing lines SL1 to SL6, enabling high-precision pattern drawing. Furthermore, the amplitudes Va1 to Va6 of the high-voltage, high-frequency signals set by the driver circuits DRV1 to DRV6 do not need to be increased sequentially; for example, the relationship Va1 = Va2 < Va3 = Va4 < Va5 = Va6 can be achieved. Furthermore, in addition to the method of Modification 5, the intensity of the light beams LB1 to LB6 used to draw the point light SP can be adjusted for each scanning unit U1 to U6 by providing a neutral density filter (ND filter) having a predetermined transmittance in the optical path within each scanning unit U1 to U6.
此外,在图44的驱动器电路DRVn中,通过切换元件401对是否将来自高频发送源400的高频信号向放大器402传递进行切换。但是,为了提高选择用光学元件AOMn的On/Off的切换时的响应性 (上升特性),也可以在衍射效率实质上被视为0的状态下,例如,将一次衍射光的强度相对于On时的强度为1/1000以下这样的低电平的高频信号始终持续向选择用光学元件AOMn施加,仅在On状态时将适当的高电平的高频信号向选择用光学元件AOMn施加。图 45示出这样的驱动器电路DRVn的结构,在此代表性地示出驱动器电路DRV1的结构,对与图44中的部件相同的部件标注相同的附图标记。Furthermore, in the driver circuit DRVn of FIG44 , a switching element 401 switches whether the high-frequency signal from the high-frequency transmission source 400 is transmitted to the amplifier 402. However, to improve the responsiveness (rise characteristics) when switching the selection optical element AOMn on and off, a low-level high-frequency signal, such as one with an intensity of primary diffracted light of 1/1000 or less relative to the intensity when the optical element is on, may be continuously applied to the selection optical element AOMn when the diffraction efficiency is essentially considered to be zero, and an appropriately high-level high-frequency signal may be applied to the selection optical element AOMn only when the optical element is on. FIG45 illustrates the structure of such a driver circuit DRVn, with the structure of the driver circuit DRV1 being representatively shown here, and components identical to those in FIG44 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
在图45的结构中,追加串联连接的两个电阻RE1、RE2。电阻 RE1、RE2的串联电路在切换元件401的近前与切换元件401并联地插入高频发送源400,以电阻比RE2/(RE1+RE2)分压的来自高频发送源400的高频信号始终向放大器402施加。在将电阻RE2设为可变电阻器且切换元件401为Off(非导通)状态时,以从选择用光学元件AOM1射出的一次衍射光、即光束LB1的强度成为充分小的值(例如本来的强度的1/1000以下)的方式,调整向选择用光学元件AOM1施加的高频信号的电平。像这样,通过电阻RE1、RE2向选择用光学元件AOM1施加高频信号的偏压(上升),由此提高响应性。此外,该情况下,在切换元件401为Off(非导通)状态的期间也为极弱的强度,但由于光束LB1向对应的扫描单元U1入射,所以在因某些故障而在描绘动作中基板FS的搬送速度降低或停止的情况下,将设在光源装置14’(14A’、14B’)的出口的光闸关闭,或插入减光过滤片。The configuration of FIG45 adds two resistors, RE1 and RE2, connected in series. The series circuit of resistors RE1 and RE2 is inserted into the high-frequency transmission source 400, in parallel with the switching element 401, just before the switching element 401. A high-frequency signal from the high-frequency transmission source 400, divided by the resistance ratio RE2/(RE1+RE2), is constantly applied to the amplifier 402. When resistor RE2 is configured as a variable resistor and the switching element 401 is in the off (non-conducting) state, the level of the high-frequency signal applied to the selection optical element AOM1 is adjusted so that the intensity of the primary diffracted light emitted from the selection optical element AOM1, i.e., the light beam LB1, is sufficiently low (e.g., less than 1/1000 of its original intensity). In this way, the high-frequency signal is biased (increased) to the selection optical element AOM1 via resistors RE1 and RE2, thereby improving responsiveness. In addition, in this case, the intensity is also extremely weak during the period when the switching element 401 is in the Off (non-conducting) state, but since the light beam LB1 is incident on the corresponding scanning unit U1, when the conveying speed of the substrate FS is reduced or stopped during the drawing action due to some fault, the light gate located at the exit of the light source device 14' (14A', 14B') is closed, or a dimming filter is inserted.
〔变形例6〕[Variant 6]
在以上的各实施方式、各变形例中,在使片状的基板FS与旋转筒 DR的外周面密接的状态下,在弯曲成圆筒面状的基板FS的表面上基于多个扫描单元Un各自沿着描绘线SLn进行图案描绘。但是,也可以是例如国际公开第2013/150677号小册子公开那样,将基板 FS平面状地支承且一边沿长边方向输送一边进行曝光处理的结构。该情况下,若将基板FS的表面设定成与XY平面平行,则例如只要以图23、图24所示的奇数号的扫描单元U1、U3、U5的各照射中心轴Le1、Le3、Le5与偶数号的扫描单元U2、U4、U6的各照射中心轴Le2、Le4、Le6在与XZ平面平行的面内观察时彼此与Z轴平行且以一定间隔位于X方向上的方式配置多个扫描单元U1~U6即可。In each of the above embodiments and modifications, a pattern is drawn along a drawing line SLn on the surface of the substrate FS curved into a cylindrical surface by a plurality of scanning units Un, with the sheet-like substrate FS in close contact with the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum DR. However, a structure may also be adopted in which the substrate FS is supported in a planar shape and the exposure process is performed while being transported in the longitudinal direction, as disclosed in, for example, International Publication No. 2013/150677. In this case, if the surface of the substrate FS is set to be parallel to the XY plane, for example, the plurality of scanning units U1 to U6 can be arranged in such a manner that the irradiation center axes Le1, Le3, Le5 of the odd-numbered scanning units U1, U3, U5 and the irradiation center axes Le2, Le4, Le6 of the even-numbered scanning units U2, U4, U6 shown in Figures 23 and 24 are parallel to the Z axis when viewed in a plane parallel to the XZ plane and are located in the X direction at a certain interval.
Claims (23)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2014-092862 | 2014-04-28 | ||
| JP2015-083669 | 2015-04-15 |
Related Parent Applications (4)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| HK19101294.0A Division HK1258827A1 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, and device manufacturing method |
| HK19131249.5A Division HK40007812A (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Pattern exposure device |
| HK19122693.5A Division HK1262718A1 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Pattern drawing device |
| HK19121212.5A Division HK1261466A1 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Beam scanning device and beam scanning method |
Related Child Applications (4)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| HK19101294.0A Addition HK1258827A1 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, and device manufacturing method |
| HK19131249.5A Addition HK40007812A (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Pattern exposure device |
| HK19122693.5A Addition HK1262718A1 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Pattern drawing device |
| HK19121212.5A Addition HK1261466A1 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-07-03 | Beam scanning device and beam scanning method |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| HK1232961A1 HK1232961A1 (en) | 2018-01-19 |
| HK1232961B true HK1232961B (en) | 2020-04-29 |
Family
ID=
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN106489093B (en) | Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, device manufacturing method, laser light source device, beam scanning device and method | |
| CN116974156A (en) | Pattern drawing device | |
| JP6919660B2 (en) | Pattern drawing device and pattern drawing method | |
| JP6520590B2 (en) | Pattern drawing apparatus and pattern drawing method | |
| JP6870755B2 (en) | Pattern drawing method | |
| JP2019200433A (en) | Pattern drawing method | |
| JP6569281B2 (en) | Beam scanning apparatus and beam scanning method | |
| JP6690214B2 (en) | Pattern drawing device | |
| HK1232961B (en) | Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, device manufacturing method, laser light source device, beam scanning device, and beam scanning method | |
| JP6835163B2 (en) | Pattern exposure device | |
| JP6504293B2 (en) | Pattern drawing device | |
| HK1258827A1 (en) | Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, and device manufacturing method | |
| HK40007812A (en) | Pattern exposure device | |
| HK1262718A1 (en) | Pattern drawing device | |
| HK1261466A1 (en) | Beam scanning device and beam scanning method | |
| HK1232961A1 (en) | Pattern drawing device, pattern drawing method, device manufacturing method, laser light source device, beam scanning device, and beam scanning method |